mcron-1.0.6/0000755000175000017500000000000011407220540007630 500000000000000mcron-1.0.6/BUGS0000644000175000017500000000057711407206151010246 00000000000000GNU mcron --- BUGS -*-text-*- Copyright (C) 2003, 2005, 2006 Dale Mellor Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification, are permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright notice and this notice are preserved. Please send bug reports to bug-mcron@gnu.org. The currently-known bugs are:- -NONE- mcron-1.0.6/NEWS0000644000175000017500000000641311407216313010256 00000000000000Historic moments in the life of mcron. -*-text-*- Copyright (C) 2003, 2005, 2006 Dale Mellor Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification, are permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright notice and this notice are preserved. Please send bug reports to bug-mcron@gnu.org. Sunday, 20th June 2010 Standardized the copyright notices on all auxiliary files (including this one!) according to the example set by the GNU hello program. Removed immutable end texts from the texinfo document. These changes are required for Debianization. Released as version 1.0.6. Sunday, 13th June 2010 Made some technical changes to the build system to aid Debianization. Released without announcement as version 1.0.5. The GIT repository has been completely re-hashed, and now represents a complete and faithful history of the package's development since its inception. Thursday, 21st February 2008 The source code is now held in a GIT repository, at git://git.savannah.gnu.org/mcron.git. Released version 1.0.4, under the new GPLv3 license, after some prodding by Karl Berry. Sunday, 16th April 2006 Released version 1.0.3. Incorporated many coding suggestions by Sergey Poznyakoff, which makes the program work with daylight savings time shifts, fixes a bug in parsing Vixie-style input files, allows a user the opportunity to correct a crontab entry instead of just wiping out the file. Made it work with Guile 1.8. Updated the manual with GFDL and some minor suggestions from Karl Berry. Monday, 2nd January 2006 Released version 1.0.2. Saturday, 15th May 2004 Set up Savannah and the mailing lists so that we are now homed properly at gnu.org. Released version 1.0.1 to reflect this, with CVS tag release_1-0-1 (no branch). Hopefully we will now get some feedback! Friday, 12th December 2003 Released version 1.0.0 through rdmp.org. No CVS tag has been created. Tuesday, 2nd December 2003 Mcron is now officially a GNU program. Unfortunately Savannah, the development environment, has been mauled so an immediate GNU release is not likely. No CVS tag has been created. Tuesday, 5th August 2003 Released version 0.99.3. The CVS tag will be release_0-99-3 (no branch). Sunday, 3rd August 2003 Broken the code into modules (which is not the same as saying the code is broken ;-) ). Sunday, 20th July 2003 Released version 0.99.2. (Now fully functional). The CVS tag is release_0-99-2 (no branch). Sunday, 20th July 2003 It has been a long and painful journey, but we have at last worked out how to work around all the faults in Guile (an implementation with no threads and no UNIX signals!). The code is now really 100% Vixie compatible. Saturday, 5th July 2003 Released version 0.99.1, with installation of cron and crontab disabled by default (suspect problems with Guile internals are preventing these from working properly). The CVS tag is release_0-99-1 (no branch has been created for it). Friday, 4th July 2003 We have been accepted as a Savannah project. A CVS repository and web home page have been created. We're still waiting for acceptance as a GNU project. mcron-1.0.6/TODO0000644000175000017500000000274311407206151010250 00000000000000GNU mcron --- TODO -*-text-*- Copyright (C) 2003, 2005, 2006 Dale Mellor Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification, are permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright notice and this notice are preserved. Maybe in the near future... * Logging. * Check POSIX compliance (should be okay if Vixie cron was okay). * Work out how to give each user his own closure (or environment or module or continuation) for his configuration files so that he can't mess the core or other users' files up. Then allow scheme code in the system crontabs. There are no plans to actually do the following any time soon... * Develop at and batch modes of operation. * Make compatibilities with other crons (BSD, SYSV, Solaris, Dillon's, ...) * Port to BSD, other operating systems. * Full security audit for Vixie mode. May happen if version 2.0 ever materializes... * UNIX or TCP socket will allow interrogation and control of a running daemon (unrelated to, or maybe a major enhancement of, socket used for communication from crontab process). * Add anacron functionality (run missed jobs if the daemon is stopped, for example if a personal computer does not run 24 hours a day). * TCP socket to allow control via HTTP (web browser interface). Or maybe crontab-like CGI personality. * GTK+/Bononbo/Gnome2 interface. mcron-1.0.6/depcomp0000755000175000017500000004426711405144110011136 00000000000000#! /bin/sh # depcomp - compile a program generating dependencies as side-effects scriptversion=2009-04-28.21; # UTC # Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free # Software Foundation, Inc. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program. If not, see . # As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you # distribute this file as part of a program that contains a # configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under # the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program. # Originally written by Alexandre Oliva . case $1 in '') echo "$0: No command. Try \`$0 --help' for more information." 1>&2 exit 1; ;; -h | --h*) cat <<\EOF Usage: depcomp [--help] [--version] PROGRAM [ARGS] Run PROGRAMS ARGS to compile a file, generating dependencies as side-effects. Environment variables: depmode Dependency tracking mode. source Source file read by `PROGRAMS ARGS'. object Object file output by `PROGRAMS ARGS'. DEPDIR directory where to store dependencies. depfile Dependency file to output. tmpdepfile Temporary file to use when outputing dependencies. libtool Whether libtool is used (yes/no). Report bugs to . EOF exit $? ;; -v | --v*) echo "depcomp $scriptversion" exit $? ;; esac if test -z "$depmode" || test -z "$source" || test -z "$object"; then echo "depcomp: Variables source, object and depmode must be set" 1>&2 exit 1 fi # Dependencies for sub/bar.o or sub/bar.obj go into sub/.deps/bar.Po. depfile=${depfile-`echo "$object" | sed 's|[^\\/]*$|'${DEPDIR-.deps}'/&|;s|\.\([^.]*\)$|.P\1|;s|Pobj$|Po|'`} tmpdepfile=${tmpdepfile-`echo "$depfile" | sed 's/\.\([^.]*\)$/.T\1/'`} rm -f "$tmpdepfile" # Some modes work just like other modes, but use different flags. We # parameterize here, but still list the modes in the big case below, # to make depend.m4 easier to write. Note that we *cannot* use a case # here, because this file can only contain one case statement. if test "$depmode" = hp; then # HP compiler uses -M and no extra arg. gccflag=-M depmode=gcc fi if test "$depmode" = dashXmstdout; then # This is just like dashmstdout with a different argument. dashmflag=-xM depmode=dashmstdout fi cygpath_u="cygpath -u -f -" if test "$depmode" = msvcmsys; then # This is just like msvisualcpp but w/o cygpath translation. # Just convert the backslash-escaped backslashes to single forward # slashes to satisfy depend.m4 cygpath_u="sed s,\\\\\\\\,/,g" depmode=msvisualcpp fi case "$depmode" in gcc3) ## gcc 3 implements dependency tracking that does exactly what ## we want. Yay! Note: for some reason libtool 1.4 doesn't like ## it if -MD -MP comes after the -MF stuff. Hmm. ## Unfortunately, FreeBSD c89 acceptance of flags depends upon ## the command line argument order; so add the flags where they ## appear in depend2.am. Note that the slowdown incurred here ## affects only configure: in makefiles, %FASTDEP% shortcuts this. for arg do case $arg in -c) set fnord "$@" -MT "$object" -MD -MP -MF "$tmpdepfile" "$arg" ;; *) set fnord "$@" "$arg" ;; esac shift # fnord shift # $arg done "$@" stat=$? if test $stat -eq 0; then : else rm -f "$tmpdepfile" exit $stat fi mv "$tmpdepfile" "$depfile" ;; gcc) ## There are various ways to get dependency output from gcc. Here's ## why we pick this rather obscure method: ## - Don't want to use -MD because we'd like the dependencies to end ## up in a subdir. Having to rename by hand is ugly. ## (We might end up doing this anyway to support other compilers.) ## - The DEPENDENCIES_OUTPUT environment variable makes gcc act like ## -MM, not -M (despite what the docs say). ## - Using -M directly means running the compiler twice (even worse ## than renaming). if test -z "$gccflag"; then gccflag=-MD, fi "$@" -Wp,"$gccflag$tmpdepfile" stat=$? if test $stat -eq 0; then : else rm -f "$tmpdepfile" exit $stat fi rm -f "$depfile" echo "$object : \\" > "$depfile" alpha=ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ## The second -e expression handles DOS-style file names with drive letters. sed -e 's/^[^:]*: / /' \ -e 's/^['$alpha']:\/[^:]*: / /' < "$tmpdepfile" >> "$depfile" ## This next piece of magic avoids the `deleted header file' problem. ## The problem is that when a header file which appears in a .P file ## is deleted, the dependency causes make to die (because there is ## typically no way to rebuild the header). We avoid this by adding ## dummy dependencies for each header file. Too bad gcc doesn't do ## this for us directly. tr ' ' ' ' < "$tmpdepfile" | ## Some versions of gcc put a space before the `:'. On the theory ## that the space means something, we add a space to the output as ## well. ## Some versions of the HPUX 10.20 sed can't process this invocation ## correctly. Breaking it into two sed invocations is a workaround. sed -e 's/^\\$//' -e '/^$/d' -e '/:$/d' | sed -e 's/$/ :/' >> "$depfile" rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; hp) # This case exists only to let depend.m4 do its work. It works by # looking at the text of this script. This case will never be run, # since it is checked for above. exit 1 ;; sgi) if test "$libtool" = yes; then "$@" "-Wp,-MDupdate,$tmpdepfile" else "$@" -MDupdate "$tmpdepfile" fi stat=$? if test $stat -eq 0; then : else rm -f "$tmpdepfile" exit $stat fi rm -f "$depfile" if test -f "$tmpdepfile"; then # yes, the sourcefile depend on other files echo "$object : \\" > "$depfile" # Clip off the initial element (the dependent). Don't try to be # clever and replace this with sed code, as IRIX sed won't handle # lines with more than a fixed number of characters (4096 in # IRIX 6.2 sed, 8192 in IRIX 6.5). We also remove comment lines; # the IRIX cc adds comments like `#:fec' to the end of the # dependency line. tr ' ' ' ' < "$tmpdepfile" \ | sed -e 's/^.*\.o://' -e 's/#.*$//' -e '/^$/ d' | \ tr ' ' ' ' >> "$depfile" echo >> "$depfile" # The second pass generates a dummy entry for each header file. tr ' ' ' ' < "$tmpdepfile" \ | sed -e 's/^.*\.o://' -e 's/#.*$//' -e '/^$/ d' -e 's/$/:/' \ >> "$depfile" else # The sourcefile does not contain any dependencies, so just # store a dummy comment line, to avoid errors with the Makefile # "include basename.Plo" scheme. echo "#dummy" > "$depfile" fi rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; aix) # The C for AIX Compiler uses -M and outputs the dependencies # in a .u file. In older versions, this file always lives in the # current directory. Also, the AIX compiler puts `$object:' at the # start of each line; $object doesn't have directory information. # Version 6 uses the directory in both cases. dir=`echo "$object" | sed -e 's|/[^/]*$|/|'` test "x$dir" = "x$object" && dir= base=`echo "$object" | sed -e 's|^.*/||' -e 's/\.o$//' -e 's/\.lo$//'` if test "$libtool" = yes; then tmpdepfile1=$dir$base.u tmpdepfile2=$base.u tmpdepfile3=$dir.libs/$base.u "$@" -Wc,-M else tmpdepfile1=$dir$base.u tmpdepfile2=$dir$base.u tmpdepfile3=$dir$base.u "$@" -M fi stat=$? if test $stat -eq 0; then : else rm -f "$tmpdepfile1" "$tmpdepfile2" "$tmpdepfile3" exit $stat fi for tmpdepfile in "$tmpdepfile1" "$tmpdepfile2" "$tmpdepfile3" do test -f "$tmpdepfile" && break done if test -f "$tmpdepfile"; then # Each line is of the form `foo.o: dependent.h'. # Do two passes, one to just change these to # `$object: dependent.h' and one to simply `dependent.h:'. sed -e "s,^.*\.[a-z]*:,$object:," < "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile" # That's a tab and a space in the []. sed -e 's,^.*\.[a-z]*:[ ]*,,' -e 's,$,:,' < "$tmpdepfile" >> "$depfile" else # The sourcefile does not contain any dependencies, so just # store a dummy comment line, to avoid errors with the Makefile # "include basename.Plo" scheme. echo "#dummy" > "$depfile" fi rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; icc) # Intel's C compiler understands `-MD -MF file'. However on # icc -MD -MF foo.d -c -o sub/foo.o sub/foo.c # ICC 7.0 will fill foo.d with something like # foo.o: sub/foo.c # foo.o: sub/foo.h # which is wrong. We want: # sub/foo.o: sub/foo.c # sub/foo.o: sub/foo.h # sub/foo.c: # sub/foo.h: # ICC 7.1 will output # foo.o: sub/foo.c sub/foo.h # and will wrap long lines using \ : # foo.o: sub/foo.c ... \ # sub/foo.h ... \ # ... "$@" -MD -MF "$tmpdepfile" stat=$? if test $stat -eq 0; then : else rm -f "$tmpdepfile" exit $stat fi rm -f "$depfile" # Each line is of the form `foo.o: dependent.h', # or `foo.o: dep1.h dep2.h \', or ` dep3.h dep4.h \'. # Do two passes, one to just change these to # `$object: dependent.h' and one to simply `dependent.h:'. sed "s,^[^:]*:,$object :," < "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile" # Some versions of the HPUX 10.20 sed can't process this invocation # correctly. Breaking it into two sed invocations is a workaround. sed 's,^[^:]*: \(.*\)$,\1,;s/^\\$//;/^$/d;/:$/d' < "$tmpdepfile" | sed -e 's/$/ :/' >> "$depfile" rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; hp2) # The "hp" stanza above does not work with aCC (C++) and HP's ia64 # compilers, which have integrated preprocessors. The correct option # to use with these is +Maked; it writes dependencies to a file named # 'foo.d', which lands next to the object file, wherever that # happens to be. # Much of this is similar to the tru64 case; see comments there. dir=`echo "$object" | sed -e 's|/[^/]*$|/|'` test "x$dir" = "x$object" && dir= base=`echo "$object" | sed -e 's|^.*/||' -e 's/\.o$//' -e 's/\.lo$//'` if test "$libtool" = yes; then tmpdepfile1=$dir$base.d tmpdepfile2=$dir.libs/$base.d "$@" -Wc,+Maked else tmpdepfile1=$dir$base.d tmpdepfile2=$dir$base.d "$@" +Maked fi stat=$? if test $stat -eq 0; then : else rm -f "$tmpdepfile1" "$tmpdepfile2" exit $stat fi for tmpdepfile in "$tmpdepfile1" "$tmpdepfile2" do test -f "$tmpdepfile" && break done if test -f "$tmpdepfile"; then sed -e "s,^.*\.[a-z]*:,$object:," "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile" # Add `dependent.h:' lines. sed -ne '2,${ s/^ *// s/ \\*$// s/$/:/ p }' "$tmpdepfile" >> "$depfile" else echo "#dummy" > "$depfile" fi rm -f "$tmpdepfile" "$tmpdepfile2" ;; tru64) # The Tru64 compiler uses -MD to generate dependencies as a side # effect. `cc -MD -o foo.o ...' puts the dependencies into `foo.o.d'. # At least on Alpha/Redhat 6.1, Compaq CCC V6.2-504 seems to put # dependencies in `foo.d' instead, so we check for that too. # Subdirectories are respected. dir=`echo "$object" | sed -e 's|/[^/]*$|/|'` test "x$dir" = "x$object" && dir= base=`echo "$object" | sed -e 's|^.*/||' -e 's/\.o$//' -e 's/\.lo$//'` if test "$libtool" = yes; then # With Tru64 cc, shared objects can also be used to make a # static library. This mechanism is used in libtool 1.4 series to # handle both shared and static libraries in a single compilation. # With libtool 1.4, dependencies were output in $dir.libs/$base.lo.d. # # With libtool 1.5 this exception was removed, and libtool now # generates 2 separate objects for the 2 libraries. These two # compilations output dependencies in $dir.libs/$base.o.d and # in $dir$base.o.d. We have to check for both files, because # one of the two compilations can be disabled. We should prefer # $dir$base.o.d over $dir.libs/$base.o.d because the latter is # automatically cleaned when .libs/ is deleted, while ignoring # the former would cause a distcleancheck panic. tmpdepfile1=$dir.libs/$base.lo.d # libtool 1.4 tmpdepfile2=$dir$base.o.d # libtool 1.5 tmpdepfile3=$dir.libs/$base.o.d # libtool 1.5 tmpdepfile4=$dir.libs/$base.d # Compaq CCC V6.2-504 "$@" -Wc,-MD else tmpdepfile1=$dir$base.o.d tmpdepfile2=$dir$base.d tmpdepfile3=$dir$base.d tmpdepfile4=$dir$base.d "$@" -MD fi stat=$? if test $stat -eq 0; then : else rm -f "$tmpdepfile1" "$tmpdepfile2" "$tmpdepfile3" "$tmpdepfile4" exit $stat fi for tmpdepfile in "$tmpdepfile1" "$tmpdepfile2" "$tmpdepfile3" "$tmpdepfile4" do test -f "$tmpdepfile" && break done if test -f "$tmpdepfile"; then sed -e "s,^.*\.[a-z]*:,$object:," < "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile" # That's a tab and a space in the []. sed -e 's,^.*\.[a-z]*:[ ]*,,' -e 's,$,:,' < "$tmpdepfile" >> "$depfile" else echo "#dummy" > "$depfile" fi rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; #nosideeffect) # This comment above is used by automake to tell side-effect # dependency tracking mechanisms from slower ones. dashmstdout) # Important note: in order to support this mode, a compiler *must* # always write the preprocessed file to stdout, regardless of -o. "$@" || exit $? # Remove the call to Libtool. if test "$libtool" = yes; then while test "X$1" != 'X--mode=compile'; do shift done shift fi # Remove `-o $object'. IFS=" " for arg do case $arg in -o) shift ;; $object) shift ;; *) set fnord "$@" "$arg" shift # fnord shift # $arg ;; esac done test -z "$dashmflag" && dashmflag=-M # Require at least two characters before searching for `:' # in the target name. This is to cope with DOS-style filenames: # a dependency such as `c:/foo/bar' could be seen as target `c' otherwise. "$@" $dashmflag | sed 's:^[ ]*[^: ][^:][^:]*\:[ ]*:'"$object"'\: :' > "$tmpdepfile" rm -f "$depfile" cat < "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile" tr ' ' ' ' < "$tmpdepfile" | \ ## Some versions of the HPUX 10.20 sed can't process this invocation ## correctly. Breaking it into two sed invocations is a workaround. sed -e 's/^\\$//' -e '/^$/d' -e '/:$/d' | sed -e 's/$/ :/' >> "$depfile" rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; dashXmstdout) # This case only exists to satisfy depend.m4. It is never actually # run, as this mode is specially recognized in the preamble. exit 1 ;; makedepend) "$@" || exit $? # Remove any Libtool call if test "$libtool" = yes; then while test "X$1" != 'X--mode=compile'; do shift done shift fi # X makedepend shift cleared=no eat=no for arg do case $cleared in no) set ""; shift cleared=yes ;; esac if test $eat = yes; then eat=no continue fi case "$arg" in -D*|-I*) set fnord "$@" "$arg"; shift ;; # Strip any option that makedepend may not understand. Remove # the object too, otherwise makedepend will parse it as a source file. -arch) eat=yes ;; -*|$object) ;; *) set fnord "$@" "$arg"; shift ;; esac done obj_suffix=`echo "$object" | sed 's/^.*\././'` touch "$tmpdepfile" ${MAKEDEPEND-makedepend} -o"$obj_suffix" -f"$tmpdepfile" "$@" rm -f "$depfile" cat < "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile" sed '1,2d' "$tmpdepfile" | tr ' ' ' ' | \ ## Some versions of the HPUX 10.20 sed can't process this invocation ## correctly. Breaking it into two sed invocations is a workaround. sed -e 's/^\\$//' -e '/^$/d' -e '/:$/d' | sed -e 's/$/ :/' >> "$depfile" rm -f "$tmpdepfile" "$tmpdepfile".bak ;; cpp) # Important note: in order to support this mode, a compiler *must* # always write the preprocessed file to stdout. "$@" || exit $? # Remove the call to Libtool. if test "$libtool" = yes; then while test "X$1" != 'X--mode=compile'; do shift done shift fi # Remove `-o $object'. IFS=" " for arg do case $arg in -o) shift ;; $object) shift ;; *) set fnord "$@" "$arg" shift # fnord shift # $arg ;; esac done "$@" -E | sed -n -e '/^# [0-9][0-9]* "\([^"]*\)".*/ s:: \1 \\:p' \ -e '/^#line [0-9][0-9]* "\([^"]*\)".*/ s:: \1 \\:p' | sed '$ s: \\$::' > "$tmpdepfile" rm -f "$depfile" echo "$object : \\" > "$depfile" cat < "$tmpdepfile" >> "$depfile" sed < "$tmpdepfile" '/^$/d;s/^ //;s/ \\$//;s/$/ :/' >> "$depfile" rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; msvisualcpp) # Important note: in order to support this mode, a compiler *must* # always write the preprocessed file to stdout. "$@" || exit $? # Remove the call to Libtool. if test "$libtool" = yes; then while test "X$1" != 'X--mode=compile'; do shift done shift fi IFS=" " for arg do case "$arg" in -o) shift ;; $object) shift ;; "-Gm"|"/Gm"|"-Gi"|"/Gi"|"-ZI"|"/ZI") set fnord "$@" shift shift ;; *) set fnord "$@" "$arg" shift shift ;; esac done "$@" -E 2>/dev/null | sed -n '/^#line [0-9][0-9]* "\([^"]*\)"/ s::\1:p' | $cygpath_u | sort -u > "$tmpdepfile" rm -f "$depfile" echo "$object : \\" > "$depfile" sed < "$tmpdepfile" -n -e 's% %\\ %g' -e '/^\(.*\)$/ s:: \1 \\:p' >> "$depfile" echo " " >> "$depfile" sed < "$tmpdepfile" -n -e 's% %\\ %g' -e '/^\(.*\)$/ s::\1\::p' >> "$depfile" rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; msvcmsys) # This case exists only to let depend.m4 do its work. It works by # looking at the text of this script. This case will never be run, # since it is checked for above. exit 1 ;; none) exec "$@" ;; *) echo "Unknown depmode $depmode" 1>&2 exit 1 ;; esac exit 0 # Local Variables: # mode: shell-script # sh-indentation: 2 # eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) # time-stamp-start: "scriptversion=" # time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" # time-stamp-time-zone: "UTC" # time-stamp-end: "; # UTC" # End: mcron-1.0.6/config.scm.in0000644000175000017500000000253711404766201012143 00000000000000;; -*-scheme-*- ;; Copyright (C) 2003 Dale Mellor ;; ;; This file is part of GNU mcron. ;; ;; GNU mcron is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under ;; the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free ;; Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) ;; any later version. ;; ;; GNU mcron is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ;; ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or ;; FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for ;; more details. ;; ;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along ;; with GNU mcron. If not, see . ;; Some constants set by the configuration process. (define-module (mcron config)) (define-public config-debug @CONFIG_DEBUG@) (define-public config-package-string "@PACKAGE_STRING@") (define-public config-package-bugreport "@PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@") (define-public config-sendmail "@SENDMAIL@") (define-public config-spool-dir "@CONFIG_SPOOL_DIR@") (define-public config-socket-file "@CONFIG_SOCKET_FILE@") (define-public config-allow-file "@CONFIG_ALLOW_FILE@") (define-public config-deny-file "@CONFIG_DENY_FILE@") (define-public config-pid-file "@CONFIG_PID_FILE@") (define-public config-tmp-dir "@CONFIG_TMP_DIR@") mcron-1.0.6/aclocal.m40000644000175000017500000011612611407207772011433 00000000000000# generated automatically by aclocal 1.11.1 -*- Autoconf -*- # Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, # 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without # even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A # PARTICULAR PURPOSE. m4_ifndef([AC_AUTOCONF_VERSION], [m4_copy([m4_PACKAGE_VERSION], [AC_AUTOCONF_VERSION])])dnl m4_if(m4_defn([AC_AUTOCONF_VERSION]), [2.65],, [m4_warning([this file was generated for autoconf 2.65. You have another version of autoconf. It may work, but is not guaranteed to. If you have problems, you may need to regenerate the build system entirely. To do so, use the procedure documented by the package, typically `autoreconf'.])]) # GUILE_PROGS -- set paths to Guile interpreter, config and tool programs # # Usage: GUILE_PROGS # # This macro looks for programs @code{guile}, @code{guile-config} and # @code{guile-tools}, and sets variables @var{GUILE}, @var{GUILE_CONFIG} and # @var{GUILE_TOOLS}, to their paths, respectively. If either of the first two # is not found, signal error. # # The variables are marked for substitution, as by @code{AC_SUBST}. # AC_DEFUN([GUILE_PROGS], [AC_PATH_PROG(GUILE,guile) if test "$GUILE" = "" ; then AC_MSG_ERROR([guile required but not found]) fi AC_SUBST(GUILE) AC_PATH_PROG(GUILE_CONFIG,guile-config) if test "$GUILE_CONFIG" = "" ; then AC_MSG_ERROR([guile-config required but not found]) fi AC_SUBST(GUILE_CONFIG) AC_PATH_PROG(GUILE_TOOLS,guile-tools) AC_SUBST(GUILE_TOOLS) ]) # GUILE_FLAGS -- set flags for compiling and linking with Guile # # Usage: GUILE_FLAGS # # This macro runs the @code{guile-config} script, installed with Guile, to # find out where Guile's header files and libraries are installed. It sets # two variables, @var{GUILE_CFLAGS} and @var{GUILE_LDFLAGS}. # # @var{GUILE_CFLAGS}: flags to pass to a C or C++ compiler to build code that # uses Guile header files. This is almost always just a @code{-I} flag. # # @var{GUILE_LDFLAGS}: flags to pass to the linker to link a program against # Guile. This includes @code{-lguile} for the Guile library itself, any # libraries that Guile itself requires (like -lqthreads), and so on. It may # also include a @code{-L} flag to tell the compiler where to find the # libraries. # # The variables are marked for substitution, as by @code{AC_SUBST}. # AC_DEFUN([GUILE_FLAGS], [AC_REQUIRE([GUILE_PROGS])dnl AC_MSG_CHECKING([libguile compile flags]) GUILE_CFLAGS="`$GUILE_CONFIG compile`" AC_MSG_RESULT([$GUILE_CFLAGS]) AC_MSG_CHECKING([libguile link flags]) GUILE_LDFLAGS="`$GUILE_CONFIG link`" AC_MSG_RESULT([$GUILE_LDFLAGS]) AC_SUBST(GUILE_CFLAGS) AC_SUBST(GUILE_LDFLAGS) ]) # GUILE_SITE_DIR -- find path to Guile "site" directory # # Usage: GUILE_SITE_DIR # # This looks for Guile's "site" directory, usually something like # PREFIX/share/guile/site, and sets var @var{GUILE_SITE} to the path. # Note that the var name is different from the macro name. # # The variable is marked for substitution, as by @code{AC_SUBST}. # AC_DEFUN([GUILE_SITE_DIR], [AC_REQUIRE([GUILE_PROGS])dnl AC_MSG_CHECKING(for Guile site directory) GUILE_SITE=`[$GUILE_CONFIG] info pkgdatadir`/site AC_MSG_RESULT($GUILE_SITE) AC_SUBST(GUILE_SITE) ]) # GUILE_CHECK -- evaluate Guile Scheme code and capture the return value # # Usage: GUILE_CHECK_RETVAL(var,check) # # @var{var} is a shell variable name to be set to the return value. # @var{check} is a Guile Scheme expression, evaluated with "$GUILE -c", and # returning either 0 or non-#f to indicate the check passed. # Non-0 number or #f indicates failure. # Avoid using the character "#" since that confuses autoconf. # AC_DEFUN([GUILE_CHECK], [AC_REQUIRE([GUILE_PROGS]) $GUILE -c "$2" > /dev/null 2>&1 $1=$? ]) # GUILE_MODULE_CHECK -- check feature of a Guile Scheme module # # Usage: GUILE_MODULE_CHECK(var,module,featuretest,description) # # @var{var} is a shell variable name to be set to "yes" or "no". # @var{module} is a list of symbols, like: (ice-9 common-list). # @var{featuretest} is an expression acceptable to GUILE_CHECK, q.v. # @var{description} is a present-tense verb phrase (passed to AC_MSG_CHECKING). # AC_DEFUN([GUILE_MODULE_CHECK], [AC_MSG_CHECKING([if $2 $4]) GUILE_CHECK($1,(use-modules $2) (exit ((lambda () $3)))) if test "$$1" = "0" ; then $1=yes ; else $1=no ; fi AC_MSG_RESULT($$1) ]) # GUILE_MODULE_AVAILABLE -- check availability of a Guile Scheme module # # Usage: GUILE_MODULE_AVAILABLE(var,module) # # @var{var} is a shell variable name to be set to "yes" or "no". # @var{module} is a list of symbols, like: (ice-9 common-list). # AC_DEFUN([GUILE_MODULE_AVAILABLE], [GUILE_MODULE_CHECK($1,$2,0,is available) ]) # GUILE_MODULE_REQUIRED -- fail if a Guile Scheme module is unavailable # # Usage: GUILE_MODULE_REQUIRED(symlist) # # @var{symlist} is a list of symbols, WITHOUT surrounding parens, # like: ice-9 common-list. # AC_DEFUN([GUILE_MODULE_REQUIRED], [GUILE_MODULE_AVAILABLE(ac_guile_module_required, ($1)) if test "$ac_guile_module_required" = "no" ; then AC_MSG_ERROR([required guile module not found: ($1)]) fi ]) # GUILE_MODULE_EXPORTS -- check if a module exports a variable # # Usage: GUILE_MODULE_EXPORTS(var,module,modvar) # # @var{var} is a shell variable to be set to "yes" or "no". # @var{module} is a list of symbols, like: (ice-9 common-list). # @var{modvar} is the Guile Scheme variable to check. # AC_DEFUN([GUILE_MODULE_EXPORTS], [GUILE_MODULE_CHECK($1,$2,$3,exports `$3') ]) # GUILE_MODULE_REQUIRED_EXPORT -- fail if a module doesn't export a variable # # Usage: GUILE_MODULE_REQUIRED_EXPORT(module,modvar) # # @var{module} is a list of symbols, like: (ice-9 common-list). # @var{modvar} is the Guile Scheme variable to check. # AC_DEFUN([GUILE_MODULE_REQUIRED_EXPORT], [GUILE_MODULE_EXPORTS(guile_module_required_export,$1,$2) if test "$guile_module_required_export" = "no" ; then AC_MSG_ERROR([module $1 does not export $2; required]) fi ]) # Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION(VERSION) # ---------------------------- # Automake X.Y traces this macro to ensure aclocal.m4 has been # generated from the m4 files accompanying Automake X.Y. # (This private macro should not be called outside this file.) AC_DEFUN([AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION], [am__api_version='1.11' dnl Some users find AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION and mistake it for a way to dnl require some minimum version. Point them to the right macro. m4_if([$1], [1.11.1], [], [AC_FATAL([Do not call $0, use AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE([$1]).])])dnl ]) # _AM_AUTOCONF_VERSION(VERSION) # ----------------------------- # aclocal traces this macro to find the Autoconf version. # This is a private macro too. Using m4_define simplifies # the logic in aclocal, which can simply ignore this definition. m4_define([_AM_AUTOCONF_VERSION], []) # AM_SET_CURRENT_AUTOMAKE_VERSION # ------------------------------- # Call AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION and AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION so they can be traced. # This function is AC_REQUIREd by AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE. AC_DEFUN([AM_SET_CURRENT_AUTOMAKE_VERSION], [AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION([1.11.1])dnl m4_ifndef([AC_AUTOCONF_VERSION], [m4_copy([m4_PACKAGE_VERSION], [AC_AUTOCONF_VERSION])])dnl _AM_AUTOCONF_VERSION(m4_defn([AC_AUTOCONF_VERSION]))]) # AM_AUX_DIR_EXPAND -*- Autoconf -*- # Copyright (C) 2001, 2003, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # For projects using AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR([foo]), Autoconf sets # $ac_aux_dir to `$srcdir/foo'. In other projects, it is set to # `$srcdir', `$srcdir/..', or `$srcdir/../..'. # # Of course, Automake must honor this variable whenever it calls a # tool from the auxiliary directory. The problem is that $srcdir (and # therefore $ac_aux_dir as well) can be either absolute or relative, # depending on how configure is run. This is pretty annoying, since # it makes $ac_aux_dir quite unusable in subdirectories: in the top # source directory, any form will work fine, but in subdirectories a # relative path needs to be adjusted first. # # $ac_aux_dir/missing # fails when called from a subdirectory if $ac_aux_dir is relative # $top_srcdir/$ac_aux_dir/missing # fails if $ac_aux_dir is absolute, # fails when called from a subdirectory in a VPATH build with # a relative $ac_aux_dir # # The reason of the latter failure is that $top_srcdir and $ac_aux_dir # are both prefixed by $srcdir. In an in-source build this is usually # harmless because $srcdir is `.', but things will broke when you # start a VPATH build or use an absolute $srcdir. # # So we could use something similar to $top_srcdir/$ac_aux_dir/missing, # iff we strip the leading $srcdir from $ac_aux_dir. That would be: # am_aux_dir='\$(top_srcdir)/'`expr "$ac_aux_dir" : "$srcdir//*\(.*\)"` # and then we would define $MISSING as # MISSING="\${SHELL} $am_aux_dir/missing" # This will work as long as MISSING is not called from configure, because # unfortunately $(top_srcdir) has no meaning in configure. # However there are other variables, like CC, which are often used in # configure, and could therefore not use this "fixed" $ac_aux_dir. # # Another solution, used here, is to always expand $ac_aux_dir to an # absolute PATH. The drawback is that using absolute paths prevent a # configured tree to be moved without reconfiguration. AC_DEFUN([AM_AUX_DIR_EXPAND], [dnl Rely on autoconf to set up CDPATH properly. AC_PREREQ([2.50])dnl # expand $ac_aux_dir to an absolute path am_aux_dir=`cd $ac_aux_dir && pwd` ]) # AM_CONDITIONAL -*- Autoconf -*- # Copyright (C) 1997, 2000, 2001, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2008 # Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # serial 9 # AM_CONDITIONAL(NAME, SHELL-CONDITION) # ------------------------------------- # Define a conditional. AC_DEFUN([AM_CONDITIONAL], [AC_PREREQ(2.52)dnl ifelse([$1], [TRUE], [AC_FATAL([$0: invalid condition: $1])], [$1], [FALSE], [AC_FATAL([$0: invalid condition: $1])])dnl AC_SUBST([$1_TRUE])dnl AC_SUBST([$1_FALSE])dnl _AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE([$1_TRUE])dnl _AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE([$1_FALSE])dnl m4_define([_AM_COND_VALUE_$1], [$2])dnl if $2; then $1_TRUE= $1_FALSE='#' else $1_TRUE='#' $1_FALSE= fi AC_CONFIG_COMMANDS_PRE( [if test -z "${$1_TRUE}" && test -z "${$1_FALSE}"; then AC_MSG_ERROR([[conditional "$1" was never defined. Usually this means the macro was only invoked conditionally.]]) fi])]) # Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 # Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # serial 10 # There are a few dirty hacks below to avoid letting `AC_PROG_CC' be # written in clear, in which case automake, when reading aclocal.m4, # will think it sees a *use*, and therefore will trigger all it's # C support machinery. Also note that it means that autoscan, seeing # CC etc. in the Makefile, will ask for an AC_PROG_CC use... # _AM_DEPENDENCIES(NAME) # ---------------------- # See how the compiler implements dependency checking. # NAME is "CC", "CXX", "GCJ", or "OBJC". # We try a few techniques and use that to set a single cache variable. # # We don't AC_REQUIRE the corresponding AC_PROG_CC since the latter was # modified to invoke _AM_DEPENDENCIES(CC); we would have a circular # dependency, and given that the user is not expected to run this macro, # just rely on AC_PROG_CC. AC_DEFUN([_AM_DEPENDENCIES], [AC_REQUIRE([AM_SET_DEPDIR])dnl AC_REQUIRE([AM_OUTPUT_DEPENDENCY_COMMANDS])dnl AC_REQUIRE([AM_MAKE_INCLUDE])dnl AC_REQUIRE([AM_DEP_TRACK])dnl ifelse([$1], CC, [depcc="$CC" am_compiler_list=], [$1], CXX, [depcc="$CXX" am_compiler_list=], [$1], OBJC, [depcc="$OBJC" am_compiler_list='gcc3 gcc'], [$1], UPC, [depcc="$UPC" am_compiler_list=], [$1], GCJ, [depcc="$GCJ" am_compiler_list='gcc3 gcc'], [depcc="$$1" am_compiler_list=]) AC_CACHE_CHECK([dependency style of $depcc], [am_cv_$1_dependencies_compiler_type], [if test -z "$AMDEP_TRUE" && test -f "$am_depcomp"; then # We make a subdir and do the tests there. Otherwise we can end up # making bogus files that we don't know about and never remove. For # instance it was reported that on HP-UX the gcc test will end up # making a dummy file named `D' -- because `-MD' means `put the output # in D'. mkdir conftest.dir # Copy depcomp to subdir because otherwise we won't find it if we're # using a relative directory. cp "$am_depcomp" conftest.dir cd conftest.dir # We will build objects and dependencies in a subdirectory because # it helps to detect inapplicable dependency modes. For instance # both Tru64's cc and ICC support -MD to output dependencies as a # side effect of compilation, but ICC will put the dependencies in # the current directory while Tru64 will put them in the object # directory. mkdir sub am_cv_$1_dependencies_compiler_type=none if test "$am_compiler_list" = ""; then am_compiler_list=`sed -n ['s/^#*\([a-zA-Z0-9]*\))$/\1/p'] < ./depcomp` fi am__universal=false m4_case([$1], [CC], [case " $depcc " in #( *\ -arch\ *\ -arch\ *) am__universal=true ;; esac], [CXX], [case " $depcc " in #( *\ -arch\ *\ -arch\ *) am__universal=true ;; esac]) for depmode in $am_compiler_list; do # Setup a source with many dependencies, because some compilers # like to wrap large dependency lists on column 80 (with \), and # we should not choose a depcomp mode which is confused by this. # # We need to recreate these files for each test, as the compiler may # overwrite some of them when testing with obscure command lines. # This happens at least with the AIX C compiler. : > sub/conftest.c for i in 1 2 3 4 5 6; do echo '#include "conftst'$i'.h"' >> sub/conftest.c # Using `: > sub/conftst$i.h' creates only sub/conftst1.h with # Solaris 8's {/usr,}/bin/sh. touch sub/conftst$i.h done echo "${am__include} ${am__quote}sub/conftest.Po${am__quote}" > confmf # We check with `-c' and `-o' for the sake of the "dashmstdout" # mode. It turns out that the SunPro C++ compiler does not properly # handle `-M -o', and we need to detect this. Also, some Intel # versions had trouble with output in subdirs am__obj=sub/conftest.${OBJEXT-o} am__minus_obj="-o $am__obj" case $depmode in gcc) # This depmode causes a compiler race in universal mode. test "$am__universal" = false || continue ;; nosideeffect) # after this tag, mechanisms are not by side-effect, so they'll # only be used when explicitly requested if test "x$enable_dependency_tracking" = xyes; then continue else break fi ;; msvisualcpp | msvcmsys) # This compiler won't grok `-c -o', but also, the minuso test has # not run yet. These depmodes are late enough in the game, and # so weak that their functioning should not be impacted. am__obj=conftest.${OBJEXT-o} am__minus_obj= ;; none) break ;; esac if depmode=$depmode \ source=sub/conftest.c object=$am__obj \ depfile=sub/conftest.Po tmpdepfile=sub/conftest.TPo \ $SHELL ./depcomp $depcc -c $am__minus_obj sub/conftest.c \ >/dev/null 2>conftest.err && grep sub/conftst1.h sub/conftest.Po > /dev/null 2>&1 && grep sub/conftst6.h sub/conftest.Po > /dev/null 2>&1 && grep $am__obj sub/conftest.Po > /dev/null 2>&1 && ${MAKE-make} -s -f confmf > /dev/null 2>&1; then # icc doesn't choke on unknown options, it will just issue warnings # or remarks (even with -Werror). So we grep stderr for any message # that says an option was ignored or not supported. # When given -MP, icc 7.0 and 7.1 complain thusly: # icc: Command line warning: ignoring option '-M'; no argument required # The diagnosis changed in icc 8.0: # icc: Command line remark: option '-MP' not supported if (grep 'ignoring option' conftest.err || grep 'not supported' conftest.err) >/dev/null 2>&1; then :; else am_cv_$1_dependencies_compiler_type=$depmode break fi fi done cd .. rm -rf conftest.dir else am_cv_$1_dependencies_compiler_type=none fi ]) AC_SUBST([$1DEPMODE], [depmode=$am_cv_$1_dependencies_compiler_type]) AM_CONDITIONAL([am__fastdep$1], [ test "x$enable_dependency_tracking" != xno \ && test "$am_cv_$1_dependencies_compiler_type" = gcc3]) ]) # AM_SET_DEPDIR # ------------- # Choose a directory name for dependency files. # This macro is AC_REQUIREd in _AM_DEPENDENCIES AC_DEFUN([AM_SET_DEPDIR], [AC_REQUIRE([AM_SET_LEADING_DOT])dnl AC_SUBST([DEPDIR], ["${am__leading_dot}deps"])dnl ]) # AM_DEP_TRACK # ------------ AC_DEFUN([AM_DEP_TRACK], [AC_ARG_ENABLE(dependency-tracking, [ --disable-dependency-tracking speeds up one-time build --enable-dependency-tracking do not reject slow dependency extractors]) if test "x$enable_dependency_tracking" != xno; then am_depcomp="$ac_aux_dir/depcomp" AMDEPBACKSLASH='\' fi AM_CONDITIONAL([AMDEP], [test "x$enable_dependency_tracking" != xno]) AC_SUBST([AMDEPBACKSLASH])dnl _AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE([AMDEPBACKSLASH])dnl ]) # Generate code to set up dependency tracking. -*- Autoconf -*- # Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2008 # Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. #serial 5 # _AM_OUTPUT_DEPENDENCY_COMMANDS # ------------------------------ AC_DEFUN([_AM_OUTPUT_DEPENDENCY_COMMANDS], [{ # Autoconf 2.62 quotes --file arguments for eval, but not when files # are listed without --file. Let's play safe and only enable the eval # if we detect the quoting. case $CONFIG_FILES in *\'*) eval set x "$CONFIG_FILES" ;; *) set x $CONFIG_FILES ;; esac shift for mf do # Strip MF so we end up with the name of the file. mf=`echo "$mf" | sed -e 's/:.*$//'` # Check whether this is an Automake generated Makefile or not. # We used to match only the files named `Makefile.in', but # some people rename them; so instead we look at the file content. # Grep'ing the first line is not enough: some people post-process # each Makefile.in and add a new line on top of each file to say so. # Grep'ing the whole file is not good either: AIX grep has a line # limit of 2048, but all sed's we know have understand at least 4000. if sed -n 's,^#.*generated by automake.*,X,p' "$mf" | grep X >/dev/null 2>&1; then dirpart=`AS_DIRNAME("$mf")` else continue fi # Extract the definition of DEPDIR, am__include, and am__quote # from the Makefile without running `make'. DEPDIR=`sed -n 's/^DEPDIR = //p' < "$mf"` test -z "$DEPDIR" && continue am__include=`sed -n 's/^am__include = //p' < "$mf"` test -z "am__include" && continue am__quote=`sed -n 's/^am__quote = //p' < "$mf"` # When using ansi2knr, U may be empty or an underscore; expand it U=`sed -n 's/^U = //p' < "$mf"` # Find all dependency output files, they are included files with # $(DEPDIR) in their names. We invoke sed twice because it is the # simplest approach to changing $(DEPDIR) to its actual value in the # expansion. for file in `sed -n " s/^$am__include $am__quote\(.*(DEPDIR).*\)$am__quote"'$/\1/p' <"$mf" | \ sed -e 's/\$(DEPDIR)/'"$DEPDIR"'/g' -e 's/\$U/'"$U"'/g'`; do # Make sure the directory exists. test -f "$dirpart/$file" && continue fdir=`AS_DIRNAME(["$file"])` AS_MKDIR_P([$dirpart/$fdir]) # echo "creating $dirpart/$file" echo '# dummy' > "$dirpart/$file" done done } ])# _AM_OUTPUT_DEPENDENCY_COMMANDS # AM_OUTPUT_DEPENDENCY_COMMANDS # ----------------------------- # This macro should only be invoked once -- use via AC_REQUIRE. # # This code is only required when automatic dependency tracking # is enabled. FIXME. This creates each `.P' file that we will # need in order to bootstrap the dependency handling code. AC_DEFUN([AM_OUTPUT_DEPENDENCY_COMMANDS], [AC_CONFIG_COMMANDS([depfiles], [test x"$AMDEP_TRUE" != x"" || _AM_OUTPUT_DEPENDENCY_COMMANDS], [AMDEP_TRUE="$AMDEP_TRUE" ac_aux_dir="$ac_aux_dir"]) ]) # Do all the work for Automake. -*- Autoconf -*- # Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, # 2005, 2006, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # serial 16 # This macro actually does too much. Some checks are only needed if # your package does certain things. But this isn't really a big deal. # AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(PACKAGE, VERSION, [NO-DEFINE]) # AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE([OPTIONS]) # ----------------------------------------------- # The call with PACKAGE and VERSION arguments is the old style # call (pre autoconf-2.50), which is being phased out. PACKAGE # and VERSION should now be passed to AC_INIT and removed from # the call to AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE. # We support both call styles for the transition. After # the next Automake release, Autoconf can make the AC_INIT # arguments mandatory, and then we can depend on a new Autoconf # release and drop the old call support. AC_DEFUN([AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE], [AC_PREREQ([2.62])dnl dnl Autoconf wants to disallow AM_ names. We explicitly allow dnl the ones we care about. m4_pattern_allow([^AM_[A-Z]+FLAGS$])dnl AC_REQUIRE([AM_SET_CURRENT_AUTOMAKE_VERSION])dnl AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_INSTALL])dnl if test "`cd $srcdir && pwd`" != "`pwd`"; then # Use -I$(srcdir) only when $(srcdir) != ., so that make's output # is not polluted with repeated "-I." AC_SUBST([am__isrc], [' -I$(srcdir)'])_AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE([am__isrc])dnl # test to see if srcdir already configured if test -f $srcdir/config.status; then AC_MSG_ERROR([source directory already configured; run "make distclean" there first]) fi fi # test whether we have cygpath if test -z "$CYGPATH_W"; then if (cygpath --version) >/dev/null 2>/dev/null; then CYGPATH_W='cygpath -w' else CYGPATH_W=echo fi fi AC_SUBST([CYGPATH_W]) # Define the identity of the package. dnl Distinguish between old-style and new-style calls. m4_ifval([$2], [m4_ifval([$3], [_AM_SET_OPTION([no-define])])dnl AC_SUBST([PACKAGE], [$1])dnl AC_SUBST([VERSION], [$2])], [_AM_SET_OPTIONS([$1])dnl dnl Diagnose old-style AC_INIT with new-style AM_AUTOMAKE_INIT. m4_if(m4_ifdef([AC_PACKAGE_NAME], 1)m4_ifdef([AC_PACKAGE_VERSION], 1), 11,, [m4_fatal([AC_INIT should be called with package and version arguments])])dnl AC_SUBST([PACKAGE], ['AC_PACKAGE_TARNAME'])dnl AC_SUBST([VERSION], ['AC_PACKAGE_VERSION'])])dnl _AM_IF_OPTION([no-define],, [AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(PACKAGE, "$PACKAGE", [Name of package]) AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(VERSION, "$VERSION", [Version number of package])])dnl # Some tools Automake needs. AC_REQUIRE([AM_SANITY_CHECK])dnl AC_REQUIRE([AC_ARG_PROGRAM])dnl AM_MISSING_PROG(ACLOCAL, aclocal-${am__api_version}) AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOCONF, autoconf) AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOMAKE, automake-${am__api_version}) AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOHEADER, autoheader) AM_MISSING_PROG(MAKEINFO, makeinfo) AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_INSTALL_SH])dnl AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_INSTALL_STRIP])dnl AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_MKDIR_P])dnl # We need awk for the "check" target. The system "awk" is bad on # some platforms. AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_AWK])dnl AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_MAKE_SET])dnl AC_REQUIRE([AM_SET_LEADING_DOT])dnl _AM_IF_OPTION([tar-ustar], [_AM_PROG_TAR([ustar])], [_AM_IF_OPTION([tar-pax], [_AM_PROG_TAR([pax])], [_AM_PROG_TAR([v7])])]) _AM_IF_OPTION([no-dependencies],, [AC_PROVIDE_IFELSE([AC_PROG_CC], [_AM_DEPENDENCIES(CC)], [define([AC_PROG_CC], defn([AC_PROG_CC])[_AM_DEPENDENCIES(CC)])])dnl AC_PROVIDE_IFELSE([AC_PROG_CXX], [_AM_DEPENDENCIES(CXX)], [define([AC_PROG_CXX], defn([AC_PROG_CXX])[_AM_DEPENDENCIES(CXX)])])dnl AC_PROVIDE_IFELSE([AC_PROG_OBJC], [_AM_DEPENDENCIES(OBJC)], [define([AC_PROG_OBJC], defn([AC_PROG_OBJC])[_AM_DEPENDENCIES(OBJC)])])dnl ]) _AM_IF_OPTION([silent-rules], [AC_REQUIRE([AM_SILENT_RULES])])dnl dnl The `parallel-tests' driver may need to know about EXEEXT, so add the dnl `am__EXEEXT' conditional if _AM_COMPILER_EXEEXT was seen. This macro dnl is hooked onto _AC_COMPILER_EXEEXT early, see below. AC_CONFIG_COMMANDS_PRE(dnl [m4_provide_if([_AM_COMPILER_EXEEXT], [AM_CONDITIONAL([am__EXEEXT], [test -n "$EXEEXT"])])])dnl ]) dnl Hook into `_AC_COMPILER_EXEEXT' early to learn its expansion. Do not dnl add the conditional right here, as _AC_COMPILER_EXEEXT may be further dnl mangled by Autoconf and run in a shell conditional statement. m4_define([_AC_COMPILER_EXEEXT], m4_defn([_AC_COMPILER_EXEEXT])[m4_provide([_AM_COMPILER_EXEEXT])]) # When config.status generates a header, we must update the stamp-h file. # This file resides in the same directory as the config header # that is generated. The stamp files are numbered to have different names. # Autoconf calls _AC_AM_CONFIG_HEADER_HOOK (when defined) in the # loop where config.status creates the headers, so we can generate # our stamp files there. AC_DEFUN([_AC_AM_CONFIG_HEADER_HOOK], [# Compute $1's index in $config_headers. _am_arg=$1 _am_stamp_count=1 for _am_header in $config_headers :; do case $_am_header in $_am_arg | $_am_arg:* ) break ;; * ) _am_stamp_count=`expr $_am_stamp_count + 1` ;; esac done echo "timestamp for $_am_arg" >`AS_DIRNAME(["$_am_arg"])`/stamp-h[]$_am_stamp_count]) # Copyright (C) 2001, 2003, 2005, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # AM_PROG_INSTALL_SH # ------------------ # Define $install_sh. AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_INSTALL_SH], [AC_REQUIRE([AM_AUX_DIR_EXPAND])dnl if test x"${install_sh}" != xset; then case $am_aux_dir in *\ * | *\ *) install_sh="\${SHELL} '$am_aux_dir/install-sh'" ;; *) install_sh="\${SHELL} $am_aux_dir/install-sh" esac fi AC_SUBST(install_sh)]) # Copyright (C) 2003, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # serial 2 # Check whether the underlying file-system supports filenames # with a leading dot. For instance MS-DOS doesn't. AC_DEFUN([AM_SET_LEADING_DOT], [rm -rf .tst 2>/dev/null mkdir .tst 2>/dev/null if test -d .tst; then am__leading_dot=. else am__leading_dot=_ fi rmdir .tst 2>/dev/null AC_SUBST([am__leading_dot])]) # Check to see how 'make' treats includes. -*- Autoconf -*- # Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # serial 4 # AM_MAKE_INCLUDE() # ----------------- # Check to see how make treats includes. AC_DEFUN([AM_MAKE_INCLUDE], [am_make=${MAKE-make} cat > confinc << 'END' am__doit: @echo this is the am__doit target .PHONY: am__doit END # If we don't find an include directive, just comment out the code. AC_MSG_CHECKING([for style of include used by $am_make]) am__include="#" am__quote= _am_result=none # First try GNU make style include. echo "include confinc" > confmf # Ignore all kinds of additional output from `make'. case `$am_make -s -f confmf 2> /dev/null` in #( *the\ am__doit\ target*) am__include=include am__quote= _am_result=GNU ;; esac # Now try BSD make style include. if test "$am__include" = "#"; then echo '.include "confinc"' > confmf case `$am_make -s -f confmf 2> /dev/null` in #( *the\ am__doit\ target*) am__include=.include am__quote="\"" _am_result=BSD ;; esac fi AC_SUBST([am__include]) AC_SUBST([am__quote]) AC_MSG_RESULT([$_am_result]) rm -f confinc confmf ]) # Fake the existence of programs that GNU maintainers use. -*- Autoconf -*- # Copyright (C) 1997, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2008 # Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # serial 6 # AM_MISSING_PROG(NAME, PROGRAM) # ------------------------------ AC_DEFUN([AM_MISSING_PROG], [AC_REQUIRE([AM_MISSING_HAS_RUN]) $1=${$1-"${am_missing_run}$2"} AC_SUBST($1)]) # AM_MISSING_HAS_RUN # ------------------ # Define MISSING if not defined so far and test if it supports --run. # If it does, set am_missing_run to use it, otherwise, to nothing. AC_DEFUN([AM_MISSING_HAS_RUN], [AC_REQUIRE([AM_AUX_DIR_EXPAND])dnl AC_REQUIRE_AUX_FILE([missing])dnl if test x"${MISSING+set}" != xset; then case $am_aux_dir in *\ * | *\ *) MISSING="\${SHELL} \"$am_aux_dir/missing\"" ;; *) MISSING="\${SHELL} $am_aux_dir/missing" ;; esac fi # Use eval to expand $SHELL if eval "$MISSING --run true"; then am_missing_run="$MISSING --run " else am_missing_run= AC_MSG_WARN([`missing' script is too old or missing]) fi ]) # Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # AM_PROG_MKDIR_P # --------------- # Check for `mkdir -p'. AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_MKDIR_P], [AC_PREREQ([2.60])dnl AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_MKDIR_P])dnl dnl Automake 1.8 to 1.9.6 used to define mkdir_p. We now use MKDIR_P, dnl while keeping a definition of mkdir_p for backward compatibility. dnl @MKDIR_P@ is magic: AC_OUTPUT adjusts its value for each Makefile. dnl However we cannot define mkdir_p as $(MKDIR_P) for the sake of dnl Makefile.ins that do not define MKDIR_P, so we do our own dnl adjustment using top_builddir (which is defined more often than dnl MKDIR_P). AC_SUBST([mkdir_p], ["$MKDIR_P"])dnl case $mkdir_p in [[\\/$]]* | ?:[[\\/]]*) ;; */*) mkdir_p="\$(top_builddir)/$mkdir_p" ;; esac ]) # Helper functions for option handling. -*- Autoconf -*- # Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # serial 4 # _AM_MANGLE_OPTION(NAME) # ----------------------- AC_DEFUN([_AM_MANGLE_OPTION], [[_AM_OPTION_]m4_bpatsubst($1, [[^a-zA-Z0-9_]], [_])]) # _AM_SET_OPTION(NAME) # ------------------------------ # Set option NAME. Presently that only means defining a flag for this option. AC_DEFUN([_AM_SET_OPTION], [m4_define(_AM_MANGLE_OPTION([$1]), 1)]) # _AM_SET_OPTIONS(OPTIONS) # ---------------------------------- # OPTIONS is a space-separated list of Automake options. AC_DEFUN([_AM_SET_OPTIONS], [m4_foreach_w([_AM_Option], [$1], [_AM_SET_OPTION(_AM_Option)])]) # _AM_IF_OPTION(OPTION, IF-SET, [IF-NOT-SET]) # ------------------------------------------- # Execute IF-SET if OPTION is set, IF-NOT-SET otherwise. AC_DEFUN([_AM_IF_OPTION], [m4_ifset(_AM_MANGLE_OPTION([$1]), [$2], [$3])]) # Check to make sure that the build environment is sane. -*- Autoconf -*- # Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 2000, 2001, 2003, 2005, 2008 # Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # serial 5 # AM_SANITY_CHECK # --------------- AC_DEFUN([AM_SANITY_CHECK], [AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether build environment is sane]) # Just in case sleep 1 echo timestamp > conftest.file # Reject unsafe characters in $srcdir or the absolute working directory # name. Accept space and tab only in the latter. am_lf=' ' case `pwd` in *[[\\\"\#\$\&\'\`$am_lf]]*) AC_MSG_ERROR([unsafe absolute working directory name]);; esac case $srcdir in *[[\\\"\#\$\&\'\`$am_lf\ \ ]]*) AC_MSG_ERROR([unsafe srcdir value: `$srcdir']);; esac # Do `set' in a subshell so we don't clobber the current shell's # arguments. Must try -L first in case configure is actually a # symlink; some systems play weird games with the mod time of symlinks # (eg FreeBSD returns the mod time of the symlink's containing # directory). if ( set X `ls -Lt "$srcdir/configure" conftest.file 2> /dev/null` if test "$[*]" = "X"; then # -L didn't work. set X `ls -t "$srcdir/configure" conftest.file` fi rm -f conftest.file if test "$[*]" != "X $srcdir/configure conftest.file" \ && test "$[*]" != "X conftest.file $srcdir/configure"; then # If neither matched, then we have a broken ls. This can happen # if, for instance, CONFIG_SHELL is bash and it inherits a # broken ls alias from the environment. This has actually # happened. Such a system could not be considered "sane". AC_MSG_ERROR([ls -t appears to fail. Make sure there is not a broken alias in your environment]) fi test "$[2]" = conftest.file ) then # Ok. : else AC_MSG_ERROR([newly created file is older than distributed files! Check your system clock]) fi AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)]) # Copyright (C) 2001, 2003, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # AM_PROG_INSTALL_STRIP # --------------------- # One issue with vendor `install' (even GNU) is that you can't # specify the program used to strip binaries. This is especially # annoying in cross-compiling environments, where the build's strip # is unlikely to handle the host's binaries. # Fortunately install-sh will honor a STRIPPROG variable, so we # always use install-sh in `make install-strip', and initialize # STRIPPROG with the value of the STRIP variable (set by the user). AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_INSTALL_STRIP], [AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_INSTALL_SH])dnl # Installed binaries are usually stripped using `strip' when the user # run `make install-strip'. However `strip' might not be the right # tool to use in cross-compilation environments, therefore Automake # will honor the `STRIP' environment variable to overrule this program. dnl Don't test for $cross_compiling = yes, because it might be `maybe'. if test "$cross_compiling" != no; then AC_CHECK_TOOL([STRIP], [strip], :) fi INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM="\$(install_sh) -c -s" AC_SUBST([INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM])]) # Copyright (C) 2006, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # serial 2 # _AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE(VARIABLE) # --------------------------- # Prevent Automake from outputting VARIABLE = @VARIABLE@ in Makefile.in. # This macro is traced by Automake. AC_DEFUN([_AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE]) # AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE(VARIABLE) # --------------------------- # Public sister of _AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE. AC_DEFUN([AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE], [_AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE($@)]) # Check how to create a tarball. -*- Autoconf -*- # Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # serial 2 # _AM_PROG_TAR(FORMAT) # -------------------- # Check how to create a tarball in format FORMAT. # FORMAT should be one of `v7', `ustar', or `pax'. # # Substitute a variable $(am__tar) that is a command # writing to stdout a FORMAT-tarball containing the directory # $tardir. # tardir=directory && $(am__tar) > result.tar # # Substitute a variable $(am__untar) that extract such # a tarball read from stdin. # $(am__untar) < result.tar AC_DEFUN([_AM_PROG_TAR], [# Always define AMTAR for backward compatibility. AM_MISSING_PROG([AMTAR], [tar]) m4_if([$1], [v7], [am__tar='${AMTAR} chof - "$$tardir"'; am__untar='${AMTAR} xf -'], [m4_case([$1], [ustar],, [pax],, [m4_fatal([Unknown tar format])]) AC_MSG_CHECKING([how to create a $1 tar archive]) # Loop over all known methods to create a tar archive until one works. _am_tools='gnutar m4_if([$1], [ustar], [plaintar]) pax cpio none' _am_tools=${am_cv_prog_tar_$1-$_am_tools} # Do not fold the above two line into one, because Tru64 sh and # Solaris sh will not grok spaces in the rhs of `-'. for _am_tool in $_am_tools do case $_am_tool in gnutar) for _am_tar in tar gnutar gtar; do AM_RUN_LOG([$_am_tar --version]) && break done am__tar="$_am_tar --format=m4_if([$1], [pax], [posix], [$1]) -chf - "'"$$tardir"' am__tar_="$_am_tar --format=m4_if([$1], [pax], [posix], [$1]) -chf - "'"$tardir"' am__untar="$_am_tar -xf -" ;; plaintar) # Must skip GNU tar: if it does not support --format= it doesn't create # ustar tarball either. (tar --version) >/dev/null 2>&1 && continue am__tar='tar chf - "$$tardir"' am__tar_='tar chf - "$tardir"' am__untar='tar xf -' ;; pax) am__tar='pax -L -x $1 -w "$$tardir"' am__tar_='pax -L -x $1 -w "$tardir"' am__untar='pax -r' ;; cpio) am__tar='find "$$tardir" -print | cpio -o -H $1 -L' am__tar_='find "$tardir" -print | cpio -o -H $1 -L' am__untar='cpio -i -H $1 -d' ;; none) am__tar=false am__tar_=false am__untar=false ;; esac # If the value was cached, stop now. We just wanted to have am__tar # and am__untar set. test -n "${am_cv_prog_tar_$1}" && break # tar/untar a dummy directory, and stop if the command works rm -rf conftest.dir mkdir conftest.dir echo GrepMe > conftest.dir/file AM_RUN_LOG([tardir=conftest.dir && eval $am__tar_ >conftest.tar]) rm -rf conftest.dir if test -s conftest.tar; then AM_RUN_LOG([$am__untar /dev/null 2>&1 && break fi done rm -rf conftest.dir AC_CACHE_VAL([am_cv_prog_tar_$1], [am_cv_prog_tar_$1=$_am_tool]) AC_MSG_RESULT([$am_cv_prog_tar_$1])]) AC_SUBST([am__tar]) AC_SUBST([am__untar]) ]) # _AM_PROG_TAR mcron-1.0.6/vixie-time.scm0000644000175000017500000004135511404766201012352 00000000000000;; Copyright (C) 2003 Dale Mellor ;; ;; This file is part of GNU mcron. ;; ;; GNU mcron is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under ;; the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free ;; Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) ;; any later version. ;; ;; GNU mcron is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ;; ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or ;; FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for ;; more details. ;; ;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along ;; with GNU mcron. If not, see . (define-module (mcron vixie-time) #:export (parse-vixie-time) #:use-module (mcron job-specifier)) (use-modules (srfi srfi-1) (srfi srfi-13) (srfi srfi-14) (ice-9 regex)) ;; In Vixie-style time specifications three-letter symbols are allowed to stand ;; for the numbers corresponding to months and days of the week. We deal with ;; this by making a textual substitution early on in the processing of the ;; strings. ;; ;; We start by defining, once and for all, a list of cons cells consisting of ;; regexps which will match the symbols - which allow an arbitrary number of ;; other letters to appear after them (so that the user can optionally complete ;; the month and day names; this is an extension of Vixie) - and the value which ;; is to replace the symbol. ;; ;; The procedure then takes a string, and then for each symbol in the ;; parse-symbols list attempts to locate an instance and replace it with an ;; ASCII representation of the value it stands for. The procedure returns the ;; modified string. (Note that each symbol can appear only once, which meets the ;; Vixie specifications technically but still allows silly users to mess things ;; up). (define parse-symbols (map (lambda (symbol-cell) (cons (make-regexp (string-append (car symbol-cell) "[[:alpha:]]*") regexp/icase) (cdr symbol-cell))) '(("jan" . "0") ("feb" . "1") ("mar" . "2") ("apr" . "3") ("may" . "4") ("jun" . "5") ("jul" . "6") ("aug" . "7") ("sep" . "8") ("oct" . "9") ("nov" . "10") ("dec" . "11") ("sun" . "0") ("mon" . "1") ("tue" . "2") ("wed" . "3") ("thu" . "4") ("fri" . "5") ("sat" . "6") ))) (define (vixie-substitute-parse-symbols string) (for-each (lambda (symbol-cell) (let ((match (regexp-exec (car symbol-cell) string))) (if match (set! string (string-append (match:prefix match) (cdr symbol-cell) (match:suffix match)))))) parse-symbols) string) ;; A Vixie time specification is made up of a space-separated list of elements, ;; and the elements consist of a comma-separated list of subelements. The ;; procedure below takes a string holding a subelement, which should have no ;; spaces or symbols (see above) in it, and returns a list of all values which ;; that subelement indicates. There are five distinct cases which must be dealt ;; with: [1] a single '*' which returns a list of all values; [2] a '*' followed ;; by a step specifier; [3] a range and step specifier; [4] a range; and [5] a ;; single number. ;; ;; To perform the computation required for the '*' cases, we need to pass the ;; limit of the allowable range for this subelement as the third argument. As ;; days of the month start at 1 while all the other time components start at 0, ;; we must pass the base of the range to deal with this case also. (define parse-vixie-subelement-regexp (make-regexp "^([[:digit:]]+)(-([[:digit:]]+)(/([[:digit:]]+))?)?$")) (define (parse-vixie-subelement string base limit) (if (char=? (string-ref string 0) #\*) (range base limit (if (> (string-length string) 1) (string->number (substring string 2)) ;; [2] 1)) ;; [1] (let ((match (regexp-exec parse-vixie-subelement-regexp string))) (cond ((not match) (throw 'mcron-error 9 "Bad Vixie-style time specification.")) ((match:substring match 5) (range (string->number (match:substring match 1)) (+ 1 (string->number (match:substring match 3))) (string->number (match:substring match 5)))) ;; [3] ((match:substring match 3) (range (string->number (match:substring match 1)) (+ 1 (string->number (match:substring match 3))))) ;; [4] (else (list (string->number (match:substring match 1)))))))) ;; [5] ;; A Vixie element contains the entire specification, without spaces or symbols, ;; of the acceptable values for one of the time components (minutes, hours, ;; days, months, week days). Here we break the comma-separated list into ;; subelements, and process each with the procedure above. The return value is a ;; list of all the valid values of all the subcomponents. ;; ;; The second and third arguments are the base and upper limit on the values ;; that can be accepted for this time element. ;; ;; The effect of the 'apply append' is to merge a list of lists into a single ;; list. (define (parse-vixie-element string base limit) (apply append (map (lambda (sub-element) (parse-vixie-subelement sub-element base limit)) (string-tokenize string (char-set-complement (char-set #\,)))))) ;; Consider there are two lists, one of days in the month, the other of days in ;; the week. This procedure returns an augmented list of days in the month with ;; weekdays accounted for. (define (interpolate-weekdays mday-list wday-list month year) (let ((t (localtime 0))) (set-tm:mday t 1) (set-tm:mon t month) (set-tm:year t year) (let ((first-day (tm:wday (cdr (mktime t))))) (apply append mday-list (map (lambda (wday) (let ((first (- wday first-day))) (if (< first 0) (set! first (+ first 7))) (range (+ 1 first) 32 7))) wday-list))))) ;; Return the number of days in a month. Fix up a tm object for the zero'th day ;; of the next month, rationalize the object and extract the day. (define (days-in-month month year) (let ((t (localtime 0))) (set-tm:mday t 0) (set-tm:mon t (+ month 1)) (set-tm:year t year) (tm:mday (cdr (mktime t))))) ;; We will be working with a list of time-spec's, one for each element of a time ;; specification (minute, hour, ...). Each time-spec holds three pieces of ;; information: a list of acceptable values for this time component, a procedure ;; to get the component from a tm object, and a procedure to set the component ;; in a tm object. (define (time-spec:list time-spec) (vector-ref time-spec 0)) (define (time-spec:getter time-spec) (vector-ref time-spec 1)) (define (time-spec:setter time-spec) (vector-ref time-spec 2)) ;; This procedure modifies the time tm object by setting the component referred ;; to by the time-spec object to its next acceptable value. If this value is not ;; greater than the original (because we have wrapped around the top of the ;; acceptable values list), then the function returns #t, otherwise it returns ;; #f. Thus, if the return value is true then it will be necessary for the ;; caller to increment the next coarser time component as well. ;; ;; The first part of the let block is a concession to humanity; the procedure is ;; simply unreadable without all of these aliases. (define (increment-time-component time time-spec) (let* ((time-list (time-spec:list time-spec)) (getter (time-spec:getter time-spec)) (setter (time-spec:setter time-spec)) (next-best (find-best-next (getter time) time-list)) (wrap-around (eqv? (cdr next-best) 9999))) (setter time ((if wrap-around car cdr) next-best)) wrap-around)) ;; There now follows a set of procedures for adjusting an element of time, ;; i.e. taking it to the next acceptable value. In each case, the head of the ;; time-spec-list is expected to correspond to the component of time in ;; question. If the adjusted value wraps around its allowed range, then the next ;; biggest element of time must be adjusted, and so on. ;; There is no specification allowed for the year component of ;; time. Therefore, if we have to make an adjustment (presumably because a ;; monthly adjustment has wrapped around the top of its range) we can simply ;; go to the next year. (define (nudge-year! time) (set-tm:year time (+ (tm:year time) 1))) ;; We nudge the month by finding the next allowable value, and if it wraps ;; around we also nudge the year. The time-spec-list will have time-spec ;; objects for month and weekday. (define (nudge-month! time time-spec-list) (and (increment-time-component time (car time-spec-list)) (nudge-year! time))) ;; Try to increment the day component of the time according to the combination ;; of the mday-list and the wday-list. If this wraps around the range, or if ;; this falls outside the current month (31st February, for example), then ;; bump the month, set the day to zero, and recurse on this procedure to find ;; the next day in the new month. ;; ;; The time-spec-list will have time-spec entries for mday, month, and ;; weekday. (define (nudge-day! time time-spec-list) (if (or (increment-time-component time (vector (interpolate-weekdays (time-spec:list (car time-spec-list)) (time-spec:list (caddr time-spec-list)) (tm:mon time) (tm:year time)) tm:mday set-tm:mday)) (> (tm:mday time) (days-in-month (tm:mon time) (tm:year time)))) (begin (nudge-month! time (cdr time-spec-list)) (set-tm:mday time 0) (nudge-day! time time-spec-list)))) ;; The hour is bumped to the next accceptable value, and the day is bumped if ;; the hour wraps around. ;; ;; The time-spec-list holds specifications for hour, mday, month and weekday. (define (nudge-hour! time time-spec-list) (and (increment-time-component time (car time-spec-list)) (nudge-day! time (cdr time-spec-list)))) ;; The minute is bumped to the next accceptable value, and the hour is bumped ;; if the minute wraps around. ;; ;; The time-spec-list holds specifications for minute, hour, day-date, month ;; and weekday. (define (nudge-min! time time-spec-list) (and (increment-time-component time (car time-spec-list)) (nudge-hour! time (cdr time-spec-list)))) ;; This is a procedure which returns a procedure which computes the next time a ;; command should run after the current time, based on the information in the ;; Vixie-style time specification. ;; ;; We start by computing a list of time-spec objects (described above) for the ;; minute, hour, date, month, year and weekday components of the overall time ;; specification [1]. Special care is taken to produce proper values for ;; fields 2 and 4: according to Vixie specification "If both fields are ;; restricted (ie, aren't *), the command will be run when _either_ field ;; matches the current time." This implies that if one of these fields is *, ;; while the other is not, its value should be '() [0], otherwise ;; interpolate-weekdays below will produce incorrect results. ;; When we create the return procedure, it is this list to ;; which references to a time-spec-list will be bound. It will be used by the ;; returned procedure [3] to compute the next time a function should run. Any ;; 7's in the weekday component of the list (the last one) are folded into 0's ;; (both values represent sunday) [2]. Any 0's in the month-day component of the ;; list are removed (this allows a solitary zero to be used to indicate that ;; jobs should only run on certain days of the _week_) [2.1]. ;; ;; The returned procedure itself:- ;; ;; Starts by obtaining the current broken-down time [4], and fixing it to ;; ensure that it is an acceptable value, as follows. Each component from the ;; biggest down is checked for acceptability, and if it is not acceptable it ;; is bumped to the next acceptable value (this may cause higher components to ;; also be bumped if there is range wrap-around) and all the lower components ;; are set to -1 so that it can successfully be bumped up to zero if this is ;; an allowed value. The -1 value will be bumped up subsequently to an allowed ;; value [5]. ;; ;; Once it has been asserted that the current time is acceptable, or has been ;; adjusted to one minute before the next acceptable time, the minute ;; component is then bumped to the next acceptable time, which may ripple ;; through the higher components if necessary [6]. We now have the next time ;; the command needs to run. ;; ;; The new time is then converted back into a UNIX time and returned [7]. (define (parse-vixie-time string) (let ((tokens (string-tokenize (vixie-substitute-parse-symbols string)))) (cond ((> (length tokens) 5) (throw 'mcron-error 9 "Too many fields in Vixie-style time specification")) ((< (length tokens) 5) (throw 'mcron-error 9 "Not enough fields in Vixie-style time specification"))) (let ((time-spec-list (map-in-order (lambda (x) (vector (let* ((n (vector-ref x 0)) (tok (list-ref tokens n))) (cond ((and (= n 4) (string=? tok "*") (not (string=? (list-ref tokens 2) "*"))) '()) ((and (= n 2) (string=? tok "*") (not (string=? (list-ref tokens 4) "*"))) '()) (else (parse-vixie-element tok (vector-ref x 1) (vector-ref x 2))))) ; [0] (vector-ref x 3) (vector-ref x 4))) ;; token range-top+1 getter setter `( #( 0 0 60 ,tm:min ,set-tm:min ) #( 1 0 24 ,tm:hour ,set-tm:hour ) #( 2 1 32 ,tm:mday ,set-tm:mday ) #( 3 0 12 ,tm:mon ,set-tm:mon ) #( 4 0 7 ,tm:wday ,set-tm:wday ))))) ;; [1] (vector-set! (car (last-pair time-spec-list)) 0 (map (lambda (time-spec) (if (eqv? time-spec 7) 0 time-spec)) (vector-ref (car (last-pair time-spec-list)) 0))) ;; [2] (vector-set! (caddr time-spec-list) 0 (remove (lambda (day) (eqv? day 0)) (vector-ref (caddr time-spec-list) 0))) ;; [2.1] (lambda (current-time) ;; [3] (let ((time (localtime current-time))) ;; [4] (if (not (member (tm:mon time) (time-spec:list (cadddr time-spec-list)))) (begin (nudge-month! time (cdddr time-spec-list)) (set-tm:mday time 0))) (if (or (eqv? (tm:mday time) 0) (not (member (tm:mday time) (interpolate-weekdays (time-spec:list (caddr time-spec-list)) (time-spec:list (caddr (cddr time-spec-list))) (tm:mon time) (tm:year time))))) (begin (nudge-day! time (cddr time-spec-list)) (set-tm:hour time -1))) (if (not (member (tm:hour time) (time-spec:list (cadr time-spec-list)))) (begin (nudge-hour! time (cdr time-spec-list)) (set-tm:min time -1))) ;; [5] (set-tm:sec time 0) (nudge-min! time time-spec-list) ;; [6] (car (mktime time))))))) ;; [7] mcron-1.0.6/README0000644000175000017500000000650511407206151010440 00000000000000GNU mcron --- README -*-text-*- Copyright (C) 2003, 2005, 2006 Dale Mellor Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification, are permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright notice and this notice are preserved. This is version 1.0.6 of the GNU mcron program. It is designed and written by Dale Mellor, and replaces and hugely enhances Vixie cron. It is functionally complete, production quality code (did you expect less?), but has not received much testing yet. It has only been built on a GNU/Linux system, and will most likely fail on others (but you never know...). ---------------------------------------------------------------------- IMPORTANT NOTICES Read the BUGS file. Do not (yet) install this software on a machine which relies for its functioning on its current set of crontabs. For use as a replacement cron daemon on a system, the package must be installed by root. Before installing this package for the first time, it is necessary to terminate any running cron daemons on your system. If your old cron is not Vixie or accurately Vixie compatible (files in /var/cron/tabs*, /var/cron/allow, /var/cron/deny, /etc/crontab, /var/run/cron.pid) then you will need to clear out all old crontabs and make new ones afresh - or else look very carefully at the options you pass to the package configure script, as follows. It is often the case that GNU/Linux distributions and other Unices hacked the cron daemon to use different directories to those above. You can use configure options --spool-dir, --socket-file, --allow-file, --deny-file, --pid-file and --tmp-dir to make mcron behave similarly. Note that, with the exception of tmp-dir, none of these files or directories should be accessible by ordinary (non-root) users. If your old cron is Vixie, or very similar, mcron should fall right into place where your old cron was (the binaries cron and crontab will be replaced, but if your existing system has a binary called crond, you should make this a link to mcron), and you should be able to continue to use your existing crontabs without noticing any changes. If you don't want to clobber your existing cron executables, you can specify the --program-prefix option to configure with a prefix ending in a non-alphabetic character, for example "m.", and then run the programs as m.mcron, m.cron (or m.crond) and m.crontab. ---------------------------------------------------------------------- See the file INSTALL for generic building and installation instructions. After installation, read the info file for full instructions for use (typing `info mcron' at the command line should suffice). Notes for end users, sysadmins, and developers who wish to incorporate mcron into their own programs are included here. Known bugs are noted in the BUGS file, and features which might be implemented sometime sooner or later are noted in the TODO file. Please send all other bug reports to bug-mcron@gnu.org. Other mailing lists you could subscribe to are help-mcron@gnu.org (for help and advice from the community, including the author) and info-mcron@gnu.org (for news as it happens). Mcron is free software. See the file COPYING for copying conditions. The mcron development home page is at http://www.gnu.org/software/mcron, and it can be obtained from ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/mcron. mcron-1.0.6/configure0000755000175000017500000046434411407207775011515 00000000000000#! /bin/sh # Guess values for system-dependent variables and create Makefiles. # Generated by GNU Autoconf 2.65 for mcron 1.0.6. # # Report bugs to . # # # Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, # 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, # Inc. # # # This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it. ## -------------------- ## ## M4sh Initialization. ## ## -------------------- ## # Be more Bourne compatible DUALCASE=1; export DUALCASE # for MKS sh if test -n "${ZSH_VERSION+set}" && (emulate sh) >/dev/null 2>&1; then : emulate sh NULLCMD=: # Pre-4.2 versions of Zsh do word splitting on ${1+"$@"}, which # is contrary to our usage. Disable this feature. alias -g '${1+"$@"}'='"$@"' setopt NO_GLOB_SUBST else case `(set -o) 2>/dev/null` in #( *posix*) : set -o posix ;; #( *) : ;; esac fi as_nl=' ' export as_nl # Printing a long string crashes Solaris 7 /usr/bin/printf. as_echo='\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\' as_echo=$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo as_echo=$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo # Prefer a ksh shell builtin over an external printf program on Solaris, # but without wasting forks for bash or zsh. if test -z "$BASH_VERSION$ZSH_VERSION" \ && (test "X`print -r -- $as_echo`" = "X$as_echo") 2>/dev/null; then as_echo='print -r --' as_echo_n='print -rn --' elif (test "X`printf %s $as_echo`" = "X$as_echo") 2>/dev/null; then as_echo='printf %s\n' as_echo_n='printf %s' else if test "X`(/usr/ucb/echo -n -n $as_echo) 2>/dev/null`" = "X-n $as_echo"; then as_echo_body='eval /usr/ucb/echo -n "$1$as_nl"' as_echo_n='/usr/ucb/echo -n' else as_echo_body='eval expr "X$1" : "X\\(.*\\)"' as_echo_n_body='eval arg=$1; case $arg in #( *"$as_nl"*) expr "X$arg" : "X\\(.*\\)$as_nl"; arg=`expr "X$arg" : ".*$as_nl\\(.*\\)"`;; esac; expr "X$arg" : "X\\(.*\\)" | tr -d "$as_nl" ' export as_echo_n_body as_echo_n='sh -c $as_echo_n_body as_echo' fi export as_echo_body as_echo='sh -c $as_echo_body as_echo' fi # The user is always right. if test "${PATH_SEPARATOR+set}" != set; then PATH_SEPARATOR=: (PATH='/bin;/bin'; FPATH=$PATH; sh -c :) >/dev/null 2>&1 && { (PATH='/bin:/bin'; FPATH=$PATH; sh -c :) >/dev/null 2>&1 || PATH_SEPARATOR=';' } fi # IFS # We need space, tab and new line, in precisely that order. Quoting is # there to prevent editors from complaining about space-tab. # (If _AS_PATH_WALK were called with IFS unset, it would disable word # splitting by setting IFS to empty value.) IFS=" "" $as_nl" # Find who we are. Look in the path if we contain no directory separator. case $0 in #(( *[\\/]* ) as_myself=$0 ;; *) as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. test -r "$as_dir/$0" && as_myself=$as_dir/$0 && break done IFS=$as_save_IFS ;; esac # We did not find ourselves, most probably we were run as `sh COMMAND' # in which case we are not to be found in the path. if test "x$as_myself" = x; then as_myself=$0 fi if test ! -f "$as_myself"; then $as_echo "$as_myself: error: cannot find myself; rerun with an absolute file name" >&2 exit 1 fi # Unset variables that we do not need and which cause bugs (e.g. in # pre-3.0 UWIN ksh). But do not cause bugs in bash 2.01; the "|| exit 1" # suppresses any "Segmentation fault" message there. '((' could # trigger a bug in pdksh 5.2.14. for as_var in BASH_ENV ENV MAIL MAILPATH do eval test x\${$as_var+set} = xset \ && ( (unset $as_var) || exit 1) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset $as_var || : done PS1='$ ' PS2='> ' PS4='+ ' # NLS nuisances. LC_ALL=C export LC_ALL LANGUAGE=C export LANGUAGE # CDPATH. (unset CDPATH) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset CDPATH if test "x$CONFIG_SHELL" = x; then as_bourne_compatible="if test -n \"\${ZSH_VERSION+set}\" && (emulate sh) >/dev/null 2>&1; then : emulate sh NULLCMD=: # Pre-4.2 versions of Zsh do word splitting on \${1+\"\$@\"}, which # is contrary to our usage. Disable this feature. alias -g '\${1+\"\$@\"}'='\"\$@\"' setopt NO_GLOB_SUBST else case \`(set -o) 2>/dev/null\` in #( *posix*) : set -o posix ;; #( *) : ;; esac fi " as_required="as_fn_return () { (exit \$1); } as_fn_success () { as_fn_return 0; } as_fn_failure () { as_fn_return 1; } as_fn_ret_success () { return 0; } as_fn_ret_failure () { return 1; } exitcode=0 as_fn_success || { exitcode=1; echo as_fn_success failed.; } as_fn_failure && { exitcode=1; echo as_fn_failure succeeded.; } as_fn_ret_success || { exitcode=1; echo as_fn_ret_success failed.; } as_fn_ret_failure && { exitcode=1; echo as_fn_ret_failure succeeded.; } if ( set x; as_fn_ret_success y && test x = \"\$1\" ); then : else exitcode=1; echo positional parameters were not saved. fi test x\$exitcode = x0 || exit 1" as_suggested=" as_lineno_1=";as_suggested=$as_suggested$LINENO;as_suggested=$as_suggested" as_lineno_1a=\$LINENO as_lineno_2=";as_suggested=$as_suggested$LINENO;as_suggested=$as_suggested" as_lineno_2a=\$LINENO eval 'test \"x\$as_lineno_1'\$as_run'\" != \"x\$as_lineno_2'\$as_run'\" && test \"x\`expr \$as_lineno_1'\$as_run' + 1\`\" = \"x\$as_lineno_2'\$as_run'\"' || exit 1 test \$(( 1 + 1 )) = 2 || exit 1" if (eval "$as_required") 2>/dev/null; then : as_have_required=yes else as_have_required=no fi if test x$as_have_required = xyes && (eval "$as_suggested") 2>/dev/null; then : else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR as_found=false for as_dir in /bin$PATH_SEPARATOR/usr/bin$PATH_SEPARATOR$PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. as_found=: case $as_dir in #( /*) for as_base in sh bash ksh sh5; do # Try only shells that exist, to save several forks. as_shell=$as_dir/$as_base if { test -f "$as_shell" || test -f "$as_shell.exe"; } && { $as_echo "$as_bourne_compatible""$as_required" | as_run=a "$as_shell"; } 2>/dev/null; then : CONFIG_SHELL=$as_shell as_have_required=yes if { $as_echo "$as_bourne_compatible""$as_suggested" | as_run=a "$as_shell"; } 2>/dev/null; then : break 2 fi fi done;; esac as_found=false done $as_found || { if { test -f "$SHELL" || test -f "$SHELL.exe"; } && { $as_echo "$as_bourne_compatible""$as_required" | as_run=a "$SHELL"; } 2>/dev/null; then : CONFIG_SHELL=$SHELL as_have_required=yes fi; } IFS=$as_save_IFS if test "x$CONFIG_SHELL" != x; then : # We cannot yet assume a decent shell, so we have to provide a # neutralization value for shells without unset; and this also # works around shells that cannot unset nonexistent variables. BASH_ENV=/dev/null ENV=/dev/null (unset BASH_ENV) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset BASH_ENV ENV export CONFIG_SHELL exec "$CONFIG_SHELL" "$as_myself" ${1+"$@"} fi if test x$as_have_required = xno; then : $as_echo "$0: This script requires a shell more modern than all" $as_echo "$0: the shells that I found on your system." if test x${ZSH_VERSION+set} = xset ; then $as_echo "$0: In particular, zsh $ZSH_VERSION has bugs and should" $as_echo "$0: be upgraded to zsh 4.3.4 or later." else $as_echo "$0: Please tell bug-autoconf@gnu.org and $0: dale_mellor@users.sourceforge.net about your system, $0: including any error possibly output before this $0: message. Then install a modern shell, or manually run $0: the script under such a shell if you do have one." fi exit 1 fi fi fi SHELL=${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} export SHELL # Unset more variables known to interfere with behavior of common tools. CLICOLOR_FORCE= GREP_OPTIONS= unset CLICOLOR_FORCE GREP_OPTIONS ## --------------------- ## ## M4sh Shell Functions. ## ## --------------------- ## # as_fn_unset VAR # --------------- # Portably unset VAR. as_fn_unset () { { eval $1=; unset $1;} } as_unset=as_fn_unset # as_fn_set_status STATUS # ----------------------- # Set $? to STATUS, without forking. as_fn_set_status () { return $1 } # as_fn_set_status # as_fn_exit STATUS # ----------------- # Exit the shell with STATUS, even in a "trap 0" or "set -e" context. as_fn_exit () { set +e as_fn_set_status $1 exit $1 } # as_fn_exit # as_fn_mkdir_p # ------------- # Create "$as_dir" as a directory, including parents if necessary. as_fn_mkdir_p () { case $as_dir in #( -*) as_dir=./$as_dir;; esac test -d "$as_dir" || eval $as_mkdir_p || { as_dirs= while :; do case $as_dir in #( *\'*) as_qdir=`$as_echo "$as_dir" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"`;; #'( *) as_qdir=$as_dir;; esac as_dirs="'$as_qdir' $as_dirs" as_dir=`$as_dirname -- "$as_dir" || $as_expr X"$as_dir" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \ X"$as_dir" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \ X"$as_dir" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \ X"$as_dir" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null || $as_echo X"$as_dir" | sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\/\)$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\).*/{ s//\1/ q } s/.*/./; q'` test -d "$as_dir" && break done test -z "$as_dirs" || eval "mkdir $as_dirs" } || test -d "$as_dir" || as_fn_error "cannot create directory $as_dir" } # as_fn_mkdir_p # as_fn_append VAR VALUE # ---------------------- # Append the text in VALUE to the end of the definition contained in VAR. Take # advantage of any shell optimizations that allow amortized linear growth over # repeated appends, instead of the typical quadratic growth present in naive # implementations. if (eval "as_var=1; as_var+=2; test x\$as_var = x12") 2>/dev/null; then : eval 'as_fn_append () { eval $1+=\$2 }' else as_fn_append () { eval $1=\$$1\$2 } fi # as_fn_append # as_fn_arith ARG... # ------------------ # Perform arithmetic evaluation on the ARGs, and store the result in the # global $as_val. Take advantage of shells that can avoid forks. The arguments # must be portable across $(()) and expr. if (eval "test \$(( 1 + 1 )) = 2") 2>/dev/null; then : eval 'as_fn_arith () { as_val=$(( $* )) }' else as_fn_arith () { as_val=`expr "$@" || test $? -eq 1` } fi # as_fn_arith # as_fn_error ERROR [LINENO LOG_FD] # --------------------------------- # Output "`basename $0`: error: ERROR" to stderr. If LINENO and LOG_FD are # provided, also output the error to LOG_FD, referencing LINENO. Then exit the # script with status $?, using 1 if that was 0. as_fn_error () { as_status=$?; test $as_status -eq 0 && as_status=1 if test "$3"; then as_lineno=${as_lineno-"$2"} as_lineno_stack=as_lineno_stack=$as_lineno_stack $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: $1" >&$3 fi $as_echo "$as_me: error: $1" >&2 as_fn_exit $as_status } # as_fn_error if expr a : '\(a\)' >/dev/null 2>&1 && test "X`expr 00001 : '.*\(...\)'`" = X001; then as_expr=expr else as_expr=false fi if (basename -- /) >/dev/null 2>&1 && test "X`basename -- / 2>&1`" = "X/"; then as_basename=basename else as_basename=false fi if (as_dir=`dirname -- /` && test "X$as_dir" = X/) >/dev/null 2>&1; then as_dirname=dirname else as_dirname=false fi as_me=`$as_basename -- "$0" || $as_expr X/"$0" : '.*/\([^/][^/]*\)/*$' \| \ X"$0" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \ X"$0" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null || $as_echo X/"$0" | sed '/^.*\/\([^/][^/]*\)\/*$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\/\(\/\/\)$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\/\(\/\).*/{ s//\1/ q } s/.*/./; q'` # Avoid depending upon Character Ranges. as_cr_letters='abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz' as_cr_LETTERS='ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ' as_cr_Letters=$as_cr_letters$as_cr_LETTERS as_cr_digits='0123456789' as_cr_alnum=$as_cr_Letters$as_cr_digits as_lineno_1=$LINENO as_lineno_1a=$LINENO as_lineno_2=$LINENO as_lineno_2a=$LINENO eval 'test "x$as_lineno_1'$as_run'" != "x$as_lineno_2'$as_run'" && test "x`expr $as_lineno_1'$as_run' + 1`" = "x$as_lineno_2'$as_run'"' || { # Blame Lee E. McMahon (1931-1989) for sed's syntax. :-) sed -n ' p /[$]LINENO/= ' <$as_myself | sed ' s/[$]LINENO.*/&-/ t lineno b :lineno N :loop s/[$]LINENO\([^'$as_cr_alnum'_].*\n\)\(.*\)/\2\1\2/ t loop s/-\n.*// ' >$as_me.lineno && chmod +x "$as_me.lineno" || { $as_echo "$as_me: error: cannot create $as_me.lineno; rerun with a POSIX shell" >&2; as_fn_exit 1; } # Don't try to exec as it changes $[0], causing all sort of problems # (the dirname of $[0] is not the place where we might find the # original and so on. Autoconf is especially sensitive to this). . "./$as_me.lineno" # Exit status is that of the last command. exit } ECHO_C= ECHO_N= ECHO_T= case `echo -n x` in #((((( -n*) case `echo 'xy\c'` in *c*) ECHO_T=' ';; # ECHO_T is single tab character. xy) ECHO_C='\c';; *) echo `echo ksh88 bug on AIX 6.1` > /dev/null ECHO_T=' ';; esac;; *) ECHO_N='-n';; esac rm -f conf$$ conf$$.exe conf$$.file if test -d conf$$.dir; then rm -f conf$$.dir/conf$$.file else rm -f conf$$.dir mkdir conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null fi if (echo >conf$$.file) 2>/dev/null; then if ln -s conf$$.file conf$$ 2>/dev/null; then as_ln_s='ln -s' # ... but there are two gotchas: # 1) On MSYS, both `ln -s file dir' and `ln file dir' fail. # 2) DJGPP < 2.04 has no symlinks; `ln -s' creates a wrapper executable. # In both cases, we have to default to `cp -p'. ln -s conf$$.file conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null && test ! -f conf$$.exe || as_ln_s='cp -p' elif ln conf$$.file conf$$ 2>/dev/null; then as_ln_s=ln else as_ln_s='cp -p' fi else as_ln_s='cp -p' fi rm -f conf$$ conf$$.exe conf$$.dir/conf$$.file conf$$.file rmdir conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null if mkdir -p . 2>/dev/null; then as_mkdir_p='mkdir -p "$as_dir"' else test -d ./-p && rmdir ./-p as_mkdir_p=false fi if test -x / >/dev/null 2>&1; then as_test_x='test -x' else if ls -dL / >/dev/null 2>&1; then as_ls_L_option=L else as_ls_L_option= fi as_test_x=' eval sh -c '\'' if test -d "$1"; then test -d "$1/."; else case $1 in #( -*)set "./$1";; esac; case `ls -ld'$as_ls_L_option' "$1" 2>/dev/null` in #(( ???[sx]*):;;*)false;;esac;fi '\'' sh ' fi as_executable_p=$as_test_x # Sed expression to map a string onto a valid CPP name. as_tr_cpp="eval sed 'y%*$as_cr_letters%P$as_cr_LETTERS%;s%[^_$as_cr_alnum]%_%g'" # Sed expression to map a string onto a valid variable name. as_tr_sh="eval sed 'y%*+%pp%;s%[^_$as_cr_alnum]%_%g'" test -n "$DJDIR" || exec 7<&0 &1 # Name of the host. # hostname on some systems (SVR3.2, Linux) returns a bogus exit status, # so uname gets run too. ac_hostname=`(hostname || uname -n) 2>/dev/null | sed 1q` # # Initializations. # ac_default_prefix=/usr/local ac_clean_files= ac_config_libobj_dir=. LIBOBJS= cross_compiling=no subdirs= MFLAGS= MAKEFLAGS= # Identity of this package. PACKAGE_NAME='mcron' PACKAGE_TARNAME='mcron' PACKAGE_VERSION='1.0.6' PACKAGE_STRING='mcron 1.0.6' PACKAGE_BUGREPORT='dale_mellor@users.sourceforge.net' PACKAGE_URL='' ac_subst_vars='am__EXEEXT_FALSE am__EXEEXT_TRUE LTLIBOBJS LIBOBJS real_program_prefix CONFIG_TMP_DIR CONFIG_PID_FILE CONFIG_DENY_FILE CONFIG_ALLOW_FILE CONFIG_SOCKET_FILE CONFIG_SPOOL_DIR NO_VIXIE_CLOBBER SENDMAIL CP WHICH ED HEAD SED GUILE_SITE GUILE_LDFLAGS GUILE_CFLAGS GUILE_TOOLS GUILE_CONFIG GUILE am__fastdepCC_FALSE am__fastdepCC_TRUE CCDEPMODE AMDEPBACKSLASH AMDEP_FALSE AMDEP_TRUE am__quote am__include DEPDIR OBJEXT EXEEXT ac_ct_CC CPPFLAGS LDFLAGS CFLAGS CC EGREP GREP CONFIG_DEBUG am__untar am__tar AMTAR am__leading_dot SET_MAKE AWK mkdir_p MKDIR_P INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM STRIP install_sh MAKEINFO AUTOHEADER AUTOMAKE AUTOCONF ACLOCAL VERSION PACKAGE CYGPATH_W am__isrc INSTALL_DATA INSTALL_SCRIPT INSTALL_PROGRAM target_alias host_alias build_alias LIBS ECHO_T ECHO_N ECHO_C DEFS mandir localedir libdir psdir pdfdir dvidir htmldir infodir docdir oldincludedir includedir localstatedir sharedstatedir sysconfdir datadir datarootdir libexecdir sbindir bindir program_transform_name prefix exec_prefix PACKAGE_URL PACKAGE_BUGREPORT PACKAGE_STRING PACKAGE_VERSION PACKAGE_TARNAME PACKAGE_NAME PATH_SEPARATOR SHELL' ac_subst_files='' ac_user_opts=' enable_option_checking enable_debug enable_dependency_tracking enable_no_vixie_clobber with_spool_dir with_socket_file with_allow_file with_deny_file with_pid_file with_tmp_dir ' ac_precious_vars='build_alias host_alias target_alias CC CFLAGS LDFLAGS LIBS CPPFLAGS' # Initialize some variables set by options. ac_init_help= ac_init_version=false ac_unrecognized_opts= ac_unrecognized_sep= # The variables have the same names as the options, with # dashes changed to underlines. cache_file=/dev/null exec_prefix=NONE no_create= no_recursion= prefix=NONE program_prefix=NONE program_suffix=NONE program_transform_name=s,x,x, silent= site= srcdir= verbose= x_includes=NONE x_libraries=NONE # Installation directory options. # These are left unexpanded so users can "make install exec_prefix=/foo" # and all the variables that are supposed to be based on exec_prefix # by default will actually change. # Use braces instead of parens because sh, perl, etc. also accept them. # (The list follows the same order as the GNU Coding Standards.) bindir='${exec_prefix}/bin' sbindir='${exec_prefix}/sbin' libexecdir='${exec_prefix}/libexec' datarootdir='${prefix}/share' datadir='${datarootdir}' sysconfdir='${prefix}/etc' sharedstatedir='${prefix}/com' localstatedir='${prefix}/var' includedir='${prefix}/include' oldincludedir='/usr/include' docdir='${datarootdir}/doc/${PACKAGE_TARNAME}' infodir='${datarootdir}/info' htmldir='${docdir}' dvidir='${docdir}' pdfdir='${docdir}' psdir='${docdir}' libdir='${exec_prefix}/lib' localedir='${datarootdir}/locale' mandir='${datarootdir}/man' ac_prev= ac_dashdash= for ac_option do # If the previous option needs an argument, assign it. if test -n "$ac_prev"; then eval $ac_prev=\$ac_option ac_prev= continue fi case $ac_option in *=*) ac_optarg=`expr "X$ac_option" : '[^=]*=\(.*\)'` ;; *) ac_optarg=yes ;; esac # Accept the important Cygnus configure options, so we can diagnose typos. case $ac_dashdash$ac_option in --) ac_dashdash=yes ;; -bindir | --bindir | --bindi | --bind | --bin | --bi) ac_prev=bindir ;; -bindir=* | --bindir=* | --bindi=* | --bind=* | --bin=* | --bi=*) bindir=$ac_optarg ;; -build | --build | --buil | --bui | --bu) ac_prev=build_alias ;; -build=* | --build=* | --buil=* | --bui=* | --bu=*) build_alias=$ac_optarg ;; -cache-file | --cache-file | --cache-fil | --cache-fi \ | --cache-f | --cache- | --cache | --cach | --cac | --ca | --c) ac_prev=cache_file ;; -cache-file=* | --cache-file=* | --cache-fil=* | --cache-fi=* \ | --cache-f=* | --cache-=* | --cache=* | --cach=* | --cac=* | --ca=* | --c=*) cache_file=$ac_optarg ;; --config-cache | -C) cache_file=config.cache ;; -datadir | --datadir | --datadi | --datad) ac_prev=datadir ;; -datadir=* | --datadir=* | --datadi=* | --datad=*) datadir=$ac_optarg ;; -datarootdir | --datarootdir | --datarootdi | --datarootd | --dataroot \ | --dataroo | --dataro | --datar) ac_prev=datarootdir ;; -datarootdir=* | --datarootdir=* | --datarootdi=* | --datarootd=* \ | --dataroot=* | --dataroo=* | --dataro=* | --datar=*) datarootdir=$ac_optarg ;; -disable-* | --disable-*) ac_useropt=`expr "x$ac_option" : 'x-*disable-\(.*\)'` # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names. expr "x$ac_useropt" : ".*[^-+._$as_cr_alnum]" >/dev/null && as_fn_error "invalid feature name: $ac_useropt" ac_useropt_orig=$ac_useropt ac_useropt=`$as_echo "$ac_useropt" | sed 's/[-+.]/_/g'` case $ac_user_opts in *" "enable_$ac_useropt" "*) ;; *) ac_unrecognized_opts="$ac_unrecognized_opts$ac_unrecognized_sep--disable-$ac_useropt_orig" ac_unrecognized_sep=', ';; esac eval enable_$ac_useropt=no ;; -docdir | --docdir | --docdi | --doc | --do) ac_prev=docdir ;; -docdir=* | --docdir=* | --docdi=* | --doc=* | --do=*) docdir=$ac_optarg ;; -dvidir | --dvidir | --dvidi | --dvid | --dvi | --dv) ac_prev=dvidir ;; -dvidir=* | --dvidir=* | --dvidi=* | --dvid=* | --dvi=* | --dv=*) dvidir=$ac_optarg ;; -enable-* | --enable-*) ac_useropt=`expr "x$ac_option" : 'x-*enable-\([^=]*\)'` # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names. expr "x$ac_useropt" : ".*[^-+._$as_cr_alnum]" >/dev/null && as_fn_error "invalid feature name: $ac_useropt" ac_useropt_orig=$ac_useropt ac_useropt=`$as_echo "$ac_useropt" | sed 's/[-+.]/_/g'` case $ac_user_opts in *" "enable_$ac_useropt" "*) ;; *) ac_unrecognized_opts="$ac_unrecognized_opts$ac_unrecognized_sep--enable-$ac_useropt_orig" ac_unrecognized_sep=', ';; esac eval enable_$ac_useropt=\$ac_optarg ;; -exec-prefix | --exec_prefix | --exec-prefix | --exec-prefi \ | --exec-pref | --exec-pre | --exec-pr | --exec-p | --exec- \ | --exec | --exe | --ex) ac_prev=exec_prefix ;; -exec-prefix=* | --exec_prefix=* | --exec-prefix=* | --exec-prefi=* \ | --exec-pref=* | --exec-pre=* | --exec-pr=* | --exec-p=* | --exec-=* \ | --exec=* | --exe=* | --ex=*) exec_prefix=$ac_optarg ;; -gas | --gas | --ga | --g) # Obsolete; use --with-gas. with_gas=yes ;; -help | --help | --hel | --he | -h) ac_init_help=long ;; -help=r* | --help=r* | --hel=r* | --he=r* | -hr*) ac_init_help=recursive ;; -help=s* | --help=s* | --hel=s* | --he=s* | -hs*) ac_init_help=short ;; -host | --host | --hos | --ho) ac_prev=host_alias ;; -host=* | --host=* | --hos=* | --ho=*) host_alias=$ac_optarg ;; -htmldir | --htmldir | --htmldi | --htmld | --html | --htm | --ht) ac_prev=htmldir ;; -htmldir=* | --htmldir=* | --htmldi=* | --htmld=* | --html=* | --htm=* \ | --ht=*) htmldir=$ac_optarg ;; -includedir | --includedir | --includedi | --included | --include \ | --includ | --inclu | --incl | --inc) ac_prev=includedir ;; -includedir=* | --includedir=* | --includedi=* | --included=* | --include=* \ | --includ=* | --inclu=* | --incl=* | --inc=*) includedir=$ac_optarg ;; -infodir | --infodir | --infodi | --infod | --info | --inf) ac_prev=infodir ;; -infodir=* | --infodir=* | --infodi=* | --infod=* | --info=* | --inf=*) infodir=$ac_optarg ;; -libdir | --libdir | --libdi | --libd) ac_prev=libdir ;; -libdir=* | --libdir=* | --libdi=* | --libd=*) libdir=$ac_optarg ;; -libexecdir | --libexecdir | --libexecdi | --libexecd | --libexec \ | --libexe | --libex | --libe) ac_prev=libexecdir ;; -libexecdir=* | --libexecdir=* | --libexecdi=* | --libexecd=* | --libexec=* \ | --libexe=* | --libex=* | --libe=*) libexecdir=$ac_optarg ;; -localedir | --localedir | --localedi | --localed | --locale) ac_prev=localedir ;; -localedir=* | --localedir=* | --localedi=* | --localed=* | --locale=*) localedir=$ac_optarg ;; -localstatedir | --localstatedir | --localstatedi | --localstated \ | --localstate | --localstat | --localsta | --localst | --locals) ac_prev=localstatedir ;; -localstatedir=* | --localstatedir=* | --localstatedi=* | --localstated=* \ | --localstate=* | --localstat=* | --localsta=* | --localst=* | --locals=*) localstatedir=$ac_optarg ;; -mandir | --mandir | --mandi | --mand | --man | --ma | --m) ac_prev=mandir ;; -mandir=* | --mandir=* | --mandi=* | --mand=* | --man=* | --ma=* | --m=*) mandir=$ac_optarg ;; -nfp | --nfp | --nf) # Obsolete; use --without-fp. with_fp=no ;; -no-create | --no-create | --no-creat | --no-crea | --no-cre \ | --no-cr | --no-c | -n) no_create=yes ;; -no-recursion | --no-recursion | --no-recursio | --no-recursi \ | --no-recurs | --no-recur | --no-recu | --no-rec | --no-re | --no-r) no_recursion=yes ;; -oldincludedir | --oldincludedir | --oldincludedi | --oldincluded \ | --oldinclude | --oldinclud | --oldinclu | --oldincl | --oldinc \ | --oldin | --oldi | --old | --ol | --o) ac_prev=oldincludedir ;; -oldincludedir=* | --oldincludedir=* | --oldincludedi=* | --oldincluded=* \ | --oldinclude=* | --oldinclud=* | --oldinclu=* | --oldincl=* | --oldinc=* \ | --oldin=* | --oldi=* | --old=* | --ol=* | --o=*) oldincludedir=$ac_optarg ;; -prefix | --prefix | --prefi | --pref | --pre | --pr | --p) ac_prev=prefix ;; -prefix=* | --prefix=* | --prefi=* | --pref=* | --pre=* | --pr=* | --p=*) prefix=$ac_optarg ;; -program-prefix | --program-prefix | --program-prefi | --program-pref \ | --program-pre | --program-pr | --program-p) ac_prev=program_prefix ;; -program-prefix=* | --program-prefix=* | --program-prefi=* \ | --program-pref=* | --program-pre=* | --program-pr=* | --program-p=*) program_prefix=$ac_optarg ;; -program-suffix | --program-suffix | --program-suffi | --program-suff \ | --program-suf | --program-su | --program-s) ac_prev=program_suffix ;; -program-suffix=* | --program-suffix=* | --program-suffi=* \ | --program-suff=* | --program-suf=* | --program-su=* | --program-s=*) program_suffix=$ac_optarg ;; -program-transform-name | --program-transform-name \ | --program-transform-nam | --program-transform-na \ | --program-transform-n | --program-transform- \ | --program-transform | --program-transfor \ | --program-transfo | --program-transf \ | --program-trans | --program-tran \ | --progr-tra | --program-tr | --program-t) ac_prev=program_transform_name ;; -program-transform-name=* | --program-transform-name=* \ | --program-transform-nam=* | --program-transform-na=* \ | --program-transform-n=* | --program-transform-=* \ | --program-transform=* | --program-transfor=* \ | --program-transfo=* | --program-transf=* \ | --program-trans=* | --program-tran=* \ | --progr-tra=* | --program-tr=* | --program-t=*) program_transform_name=$ac_optarg ;; -pdfdir | --pdfdir | --pdfdi | --pdfd | --pdf | --pd) ac_prev=pdfdir ;; -pdfdir=* | --pdfdir=* | --pdfdi=* | --pdfd=* | --pdf=* | --pd=*) pdfdir=$ac_optarg ;; -psdir | --psdir | --psdi | --psd | --ps) ac_prev=psdir ;; -psdir=* | --psdir=* | --psdi=* | --psd=* | --ps=*) psdir=$ac_optarg ;; -q | -quiet | --quiet | --quie | --qui | --qu | --q \ | -silent | --silent | --silen | --sile | --sil) silent=yes ;; -sbindir | --sbindir | --sbindi | --sbind | --sbin | --sbi | --sb) ac_prev=sbindir ;; -sbindir=* | --sbindir=* | --sbindi=* | --sbind=* | --sbin=* \ | --sbi=* | --sb=*) sbindir=$ac_optarg ;; -sharedstatedir | --sharedstatedir | --sharedstatedi \ | --sharedstated | --sharedstate | --sharedstat | --sharedsta \ | --sharedst | --shareds | --shared | --share | --shar \ | --sha | --sh) ac_prev=sharedstatedir ;; -sharedstatedir=* | --sharedstatedir=* | --sharedstatedi=* \ | --sharedstated=* | --sharedstate=* | --sharedstat=* | --sharedsta=* \ | --sharedst=* | --shareds=* | --shared=* | --share=* | --shar=* \ | --sha=* | --sh=*) sharedstatedir=$ac_optarg ;; -site | --site | --sit) ac_prev=site ;; -site=* | --site=* | --sit=*) site=$ac_optarg ;; -srcdir | --srcdir | --srcdi | --srcd | --src | --sr) ac_prev=srcdir ;; -srcdir=* | --srcdir=* | --srcdi=* | --srcd=* | --src=* | --sr=*) srcdir=$ac_optarg ;; -sysconfdir | --sysconfdir | --sysconfdi | --sysconfd | --sysconf \ | --syscon | --sysco | --sysc | --sys | --sy) ac_prev=sysconfdir ;; -sysconfdir=* | --sysconfdir=* | --sysconfdi=* | --sysconfd=* | --sysconf=* \ | --syscon=* | --sysco=* | --sysc=* | --sys=* | --sy=*) sysconfdir=$ac_optarg ;; -target | --target | --targe | --targ | --tar | --ta | --t) ac_prev=target_alias ;; -target=* | --target=* | --targe=* | --targ=* | --tar=* | --ta=* | --t=*) target_alias=$ac_optarg ;; -v | -verbose | --verbose | --verbos | --verbo | --verb) verbose=yes ;; -version | --version | --versio | --versi | --vers | -V) ac_init_version=: ;; -with-* | --with-*) ac_useropt=`expr "x$ac_option" : 'x-*with-\([^=]*\)'` # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names. expr "x$ac_useropt" : ".*[^-+._$as_cr_alnum]" >/dev/null && as_fn_error "invalid package name: $ac_useropt" ac_useropt_orig=$ac_useropt ac_useropt=`$as_echo "$ac_useropt" | sed 's/[-+.]/_/g'` case $ac_user_opts in *" "with_$ac_useropt" "*) ;; *) ac_unrecognized_opts="$ac_unrecognized_opts$ac_unrecognized_sep--with-$ac_useropt_orig" ac_unrecognized_sep=', ';; esac eval with_$ac_useropt=\$ac_optarg ;; -without-* | --without-*) ac_useropt=`expr "x$ac_option" : 'x-*without-\(.*\)'` # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names. expr "x$ac_useropt" : ".*[^-+._$as_cr_alnum]" >/dev/null && as_fn_error "invalid package name: $ac_useropt" ac_useropt_orig=$ac_useropt ac_useropt=`$as_echo "$ac_useropt" | sed 's/[-+.]/_/g'` case $ac_user_opts in *" "with_$ac_useropt" "*) ;; *) ac_unrecognized_opts="$ac_unrecognized_opts$ac_unrecognized_sep--without-$ac_useropt_orig" ac_unrecognized_sep=', ';; esac eval with_$ac_useropt=no ;; --x) # Obsolete; use --with-x. with_x=yes ;; -x-includes | --x-includes | --x-include | --x-includ | --x-inclu \ | --x-incl | --x-inc | --x-in | --x-i) ac_prev=x_includes ;; -x-includes=* | --x-includes=* | --x-include=* | --x-includ=* | --x-inclu=* \ | --x-incl=* | --x-inc=* | --x-in=* | --x-i=*) x_includes=$ac_optarg ;; -x-libraries | --x-libraries | --x-librarie | --x-librari \ | --x-librar | --x-libra | --x-libr | --x-lib | --x-li | --x-l) ac_prev=x_libraries ;; -x-libraries=* | --x-libraries=* | --x-librarie=* | --x-librari=* \ | --x-librar=* | --x-libra=* | --x-libr=* | --x-lib=* | --x-li=* | --x-l=*) x_libraries=$ac_optarg ;; -*) as_fn_error "unrecognized option: \`$ac_option' Try \`$0 --help' for more information." ;; *=*) ac_envvar=`expr "x$ac_option" : 'x\([^=]*\)='` # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names. case $ac_envvar in #( '' | [0-9]* | *[!_$as_cr_alnum]* ) as_fn_error "invalid variable name: \`$ac_envvar'" ;; esac eval $ac_envvar=\$ac_optarg export $ac_envvar ;; *) # FIXME: should be removed in autoconf 3.0. $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: you should use --build, --host, --target" >&2 expr "x$ac_option" : ".*[^-._$as_cr_alnum]" >/dev/null && $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: invalid host type: $ac_option" >&2 : ${build_alias=$ac_option} ${host_alias=$ac_option} ${target_alias=$ac_option} ;; esac done if test -n "$ac_prev"; then ac_option=--`echo $ac_prev | sed 's/_/-/g'` as_fn_error "missing argument to $ac_option" fi if test -n "$ac_unrecognized_opts"; then case $enable_option_checking in no) ;; fatal) as_fn_error "unrecognized options: $ac_unrecognized_opts" ;; *) $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: unrecognized options: $ac_unrecognized_opts" >&2 ;; esac fi # Check all directory arguments for consistency. for ac_var in exec_prefix prefix bindir sbindir libexecdir datarootdir \ datadir sysconfdir sharedstatedir localstatedir includedir \ oldincludedir docdir infodir htmldir dvidir pdfdir psdir \ libdir localedir mandir do eval ac_val=\$$ac_var # Remove trailing slashes. case $ac_val in */ ) ac_val=`expr "X$ac_val" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)' \| "X$ac_val" : 'X\(.*\)'` eval $ac_var=\$ac_val;; esac # Be sure to have absolute directory names. case $ac_val in [\\/$]* | ?:[\\/]* ) continue;; NONE | '' ) case $ac_var in *prefix ) continue;; esac;; esac as_fn_error "expected an absolute directory name for --$ac_var: $ac_val" done # There might be people who depend on the old broken behavior: `$host' # used to hold the argument of --host etc. # FIXME: To remove some day. build=$build_alias host=$host_alias target=$target_alias # FIXME: To remove some day. if test "x$host_alias" != x; then if test "x$build_alias" = x; then cross_compiling=maybe $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: If you wanted to set the --build type, don't use --host. If a cross compiler is detected then cross compile mode will be used." >&2 elif test "x$build_alias" != "x$host_alias"; then cross_compiling=yes fi fi ac_tool_prefix= test -n "$host_alias" && ac_tool_prefix=$host_alias- test "$silent" = yes && exec 6>/dev/null ac_pwd=`pwd` && test -n "$ac_pwd" && ac_ls_di=`ls -di .` && ac_pwd_ls_di=`cd "$ac_pwd" && ls -di .` || as_fn_error "working directory cannot be determined" test "X$ac_ls_di" = "X$ac_pwd_ls_di" || as_fn_error "pwd does not report name of working directory" # Find the source files, if location was not specified. if test -z "$srcdir"; then ac_srcdir_defaulted=yes # Try the directory containing this script, then the parent directory. ac_confdir=`$as_dirname -- "$as_myself" || $as_expr X"$as_myself" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \ X"$as_myself" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \ X"$as_myself" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \ X"$as_myself" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null || $as_echo X"$as_myself" | sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\/\)$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\).*/{ s//\1/ q } s/.*/./; q'` srcdir=$ac_confdir if test ! -r "$srcdir/$ac_unique_file"; then srcdir=.. fi else ac_srcdir_defaulted=no fi if test ! -r "$srcdir/$ac_unique_file"; then test "$ac_srcdir_defaulted" = yes && srcdir="$ac_confdir or .." as_fn_error "cannot find sources ($ac_unique_file) in $srcdir" fi ac_msg="sources are in $srcdir, but \`cd $srcdir' does not work" ac_abs_confdir=`( cd "$srcdir" && test -r "./$ac_unique_file" || as_fn_error "$ac_msg" pwd)` # When building in place, set srcdir=. if test "$ac_abs_confdir" = "$ac_pwd"; then srcdir=. fi # Remove unnecessary trailing slashes from srcdir. # Double slashes in file names in object file debugging info # mess up M-x gdb in Emacs. case $srcdir in */) srcdir=`expr "X$srcdir" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)' \| "X$srcdir" : 'X\(.*\)'`;; esac for ac_var in $ac_precious_vars; do eval ac_env_${ac_var}_set=\${${ac_var}+set} eval ac_env_${ac_var}_value=\$${ac_var} eval ac_cv_env_${ac_var}_set=\${${ac_var}+set} eval ac_cv_env_${ac_var}_value=\$${ac_var} done # # Report the --help message. # if test "$ac_init_help" = "long"; then # Omit some internal or obsolete options to make the list less imposing. # This message is too long to be a string in the A/UX 3.1 sh. cat <<_ACEOF \`configure' configures mcron 1.0.6 to adapt to many kinds of systems. Usage: $0 [OPTION]... [VAR=VALUE]... To assign environment variables (e.g., CC, CFLAGS...), specify them as VAR=VALUE. See below for descriptions of some of the useful variables. Defaults for the options are specified in brackets. Configuration: -h, --help display this help and exit --help=short display options specific to this package --help=recursive display the short help of all the included packages -V, --version display version information and exit -q, --quiet, --silent do not print \`checking...' messages --cache-file=FILE cache test results in FILE [disabled] -C, --config-cache alias for \`--cache-file=config.cache' -n, --no-create do not create output files --srcdir=DIR find the sources in DIR [configure dir or \`..'] Installation directories: --prefix=PREFIX install architecture-independent files in PREFIX [$ac_default_prefix] --exec-prefix=EPREFIX install architecture-dependent files in EPREFIX [PREFIX] By default, \`make install' will install all the files in \`$ac_default_prefix/bin', \`$ac_default_prefix/lib' etc. You can specify an installation prefix other than \`$ac_default_prefix' using \`--prefix', for instance \`--prefix=\$HOME'. For better control, use the options below. Fine tuning of the installation directories: --bindir=DIR user executables [EPREFIX/bin] --sbindir=DIR system admin executables [EPREFIX/sbin] --libexecdir=DIR program executables [EPREFIX/libexec] --sysconfdir=DIR read-only single-machine data [PREFIX/etc] --sharedstatedir=DIR modifiable architecture-independent data [PREFIX/com] --localstatedir=DIR modifiable single-machine data [PREFIX/var] --libdir=DIR object code libraries [EPREFIX/lib] --includedir=DIR C header files [PREFIX/include] --oldincludedir=DIR C header files for non-gcc [/usr/include] --datarootdir=DIR read-only arch.-independent data root [PREFIX/share] --datadir=DIR read-only architecture-independent data [DATAROOTDIR] --infodir=DIR info documentation [DATAROOTDIR/info] --localedir=DIR locale-dependent data [DATAROOTDIR/locale] --mandir=DIR man documentation [DATAROOTDIR/man] --docdir=DIR documentation root [DATAROOTDIR/doc/mcron] --htmldir=DIR html documentation [DOCDIR] --dvidir=DIR dvi documentation [DOCDIR] --pdfdir=DIR pdf documentation [DOCDIR] --psdir=DIR ps documentation [DOCDIR] _ACEOF cat <<\_ACEOF Program names: --program-prefix=PREFIX prepend PREFIX to installed program names --program-suffix=SUFFIX append SUFFIX to installed program names --program-transform-name=PROGRAM run sed PROGRAM on installed program names _ACEOF fi if test -n "$ac_init_help"; then case $ac_init_help in short | recursive ) echo "Configuration of mcron 1.0.6:";; esac cat <<\_ACEOF Optional Features: --disable-option-checking ignore unrecognized --enable/--with options --disable-FEATURE do not include FEATURE (same as --enable-FEATURE=no) --enable-FEATURE[=ARG] include FEATURE [ARG=yes] --enable-debug enable debugging and traceback on error --disable-dependency-tracking speeds up one-time build --enable-dependency-tracking do not reject slow dependency extractors --enable-no-vixie-clobber do not install with program names that would override a legacy cron installation Optional Packages: --with-PACKAGE[=ARG] use PACKAGE [ARG=yes] --without-PACKAGE do not use PACKAGE (same as --with-PACKAGE=no) --with-spool-dir the crontab spool directory (/var/cron/tabs) --with-socket-file unix pathname for cron socket (/var/cron/socket) --with-allow-file the file of allowed users (/var/cron/allow) --with-deny-file the file of barred users (/var/cron/deny) --with-pid-file the file to record cron's PID (/var/run/cron.pid) --with-tmp-dir directory to hold temporary files (/tmp) Some influential environment variables: CC C compiler command CFLAGS C compiler flags LDFLAGS linker flags, e.g. -L if you have libraries in a nonstandard directory LIBS libraries to pass to the linker, e.g. -l CPPFLAGS (Objective) C/C++ preprocessor flags, e.g. -I if you have headers in a nonstandard directory Use these variables to override the choices made by `configure' or to help it to find libraries and programs with nonstandard names/locations. Report bugs to . _ACEOF ac_status=$? fi if test "$ac_init_help" = "recursive"; then # If there are subdirs, report their specific --help. for ac_dir in : $ac_subdirs_all; do test "x$ac_dir" = x: && continue test -d "$ac_dir" || { cd "$srcdir" && ac_pwd=`pwd` && srcdir=. && test -d "$ac_dir"; } || continue ac_builddir=. case "$ac_dir" in .) ac_dir_suffix= ac_top_builddir_sub=. ac_top_build_prefix= ;; *) ac_dir_suffix=/`$as_echo "$ac_dir" | sed 's|^\.[\\/]||'` # A ".." for each directory in $ac_dir_suffix. ac_top_builddir_sub=`$as_echo "$ac_dir_suffix" | sed 's|/[^\\/]*|/..|g;s|/||'` case $ac_top_builddir_sub in "") ac_top_builddir_sub=. ac_top_build_prefix= ;; *) ac_top_build_prefix=$ac_top_builddir_sub/ ;; esac ;; esac ac_abs_top_builddir=$ac_pwd ac_abs_builddir=$ac_pwd$ac_dir_suffix # for backward compatibility: ac_top_builddir=$ac_top_build_prefix case $srcdir in .) # We are building in place. ac_srcdir=. ac_top_srcdir=$ac_top_builddir_sub ac_abs_top_srcdir=$ac_pwd ;; [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]* ) # Absolute name. ac_srcdir=$srcdir$ac_dir_suffix; ac_top_srcdir=$srcdir ac_abs_top_srcdir=$srcdir ;; *) # Relative name. ac_srcdir=$ac_top_build_prefix$srcdir$ac_dir_suffix ac_top_srcdir=$ac_top_build_prefix$srcdir ac_abs_top_srcdir=$ac_pwd/$srcdir ;; esac ac_abs_srcdir=$ac_abs_top_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix cd "$ac_dir" || { ac_status=$?; continue; } # Check for guested configure. if test -f "$ac_srcdir/configure.gnu"; then echo && $SHELL "$ac_srcdir/configure.gnu" --help=recursive elif test -f "$ac_srcdir/configure"; then echo && $SHELL "$ac_srcdir/configure" --help=recursive else $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: no configuration information is in $ac_dir" >&2 fi || ac_status=$? cd "$ac_pwd" || { ac_status=$?; break; } done fi test -n "$ac_init_help" && exit $ac_status if $ac_init_version; then cat <<\_ACEOF mcron configure 1.0.6 generated by GNU Autoconf 2.65 Copyright (C) 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it. _ACEOF exit fi ## ------------------------ ## ## Autoconf initialization. ## ## ------------------------ ## # ac_fn_c_try_compile LINENO # -------------------------- # Try to compile conftest.$ac_ext, and return whether this succeeded. ac_fn_c_try_compile () { as_lineno=${as_lineno-"$1"} as_lineno_stack=as_lineno_stack=$as_lineno_stack rm -f conftest.$ac_objext if { { ac_try="$ac_compile" case "(($ac_try" in *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;; *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;; esac eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\"" $as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5 (eval "$ac_compile") 2>conftest.err ac_status=$? if test -s conftest.err; then grep -v '^ *+' conftest.err >conftest.er1 cat conftest.er1 >&5 mv -f conftest.er1 conftest.err fi $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5 test $ac_status = 0; } && { test -z "$ac_c_werror_flag" || test ! -s conftest.err } && test -s conftest.$ac_objext; then : ac_retval=0 else $as_echo "$as_me: failed program was:" >&5 sed 's/^/| /' conftest.$ac_ext >&5 ac_retval=1 fi eval $as_lineno_stack; test "x$as_lineno_stack" = x && { as_lineno=; unset as_lineno;} as_fn_set_status $ac_retval } # ac_fn_c_try_compile cat >config.log <<_ACEOF This file contains any messages produced by compilers while running configure, to aid debugging if configure makes a mistake. It was created by mcron $as_me 1.0.6, which was generated by GNU Autoconf 2.65. Invocation command line was $ $0 $@ _ACEOF exec 5>>config.log { cat <<_ASUNAME ## --------- ## ## Platform. ## ## --------- ## hostname = `(hostname || uname -n) 2>/dev/null | sed 1q` uname -m = `(uname -m) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` uname -r = `(uname -r) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` uname -s = `(uname -s) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` uname -v = `(uname -v) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` /usr/bin/uname -p = `(/usr/bin/uname -p) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` /bin/uname -X = `(/bin/uname -X) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` /bin/arch = `(/bin/arch) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` /usr/bin/arch -k = `(/usr/bin/arch -k) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` /usr/convex/getsysinfo = `(/usr/convex/getsysinfo) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` /usr/bin/hostinfo = `(/usr/bin/hostinfo) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` /bin/machine = `(/bin/machine) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` /usr/bin/oslevel = `(/usr/bin/oslevel) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` /bin/universe = `(/bin/universe) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` _ASUNAME as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. $as_echo "PATH: $as_dir" done IFS=$as_save_IFS } >&5 cat >&5 <<_ACEOF ## ----------- ## ## Core tests. ## ## ----------- ## _ACEOF # Keep a trace of the command line. # Strip out --no-create and --no-recursion so they do not pile up. # Strip out --silent because we don't want to record it for future runs. # Also quote any args containing shell meta-characters. # Make two passes to allow for proper duplicate-argument suppression. ac_configure_args= ac_configure_args0= ac_configure_args1= ac_must_keep_next=false for ac_pass in 1 2 do for ac_arg do case $ac_arg in -no-create | --no-c* | -n | -no-recursion | --no-r*) continue ;; -q | -quiet | --quiet | --quie | --qui | --qu | --q \ | -silent | --silent | --silen | --sile | --sil) continue ;; *\'*) ac_arg=`$as_echo "$ac_arg" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"` ;; esac case $ac_pass in 1) as_fn_append ac_configure_args0 " '$ac_arg'" ;; 2) as_fn_append ac_configure_args1 " '$ac_arg'" if test $ac_must_keep_next = true; then ac_must_keep_next=false # Got value, back to normal. else case $ac_arg in *=* | --config-cache | -C | -disable-* | --disable-* \ | -enable-* | --enable-* | -gas | --g* | -nfp | --nf* \ | -q | -quiet | --q* | -silent | --sil* | -v | -verb* \ | -with-* | --with-* | -without-* | --without-* | --x) case "$ac_configure_args0 " in "$ac_configure_args1"*" '$ac_arg' "* ) continue ;; esac ;; -* ) ac_must_keep_next=true ;; esac fi as_fn_append ac_configure_args " '$ac_arg'" ;; esac done done { ac_configure_args0=; unset ac_configure_args0;} { ac_configure_args1=; unset ac_configure_args1;} # When interrupted or exit'd, cleanup temporary files, and complete # config.log. We remove comments because anyway the quotes in there # would cause problems or look ugly. # WARNING: Use '\'' to represent an apostrophe within the trap. # WARNING: Do not start the trap code with a newline, due to a FreeBSD 4.0 bug. trap 'exit_status=$? # Save into config.log some information that might help in debugging. { echo cat <<\_ASBOX ## ---------------- ## ## Cache variables. ## ## ---------------- ## _ASBOX echo # The following way of writing the cache mishandles newlines in values, ( for ac_var in `(set) 2>&1 | sed -n '\''s/^\([a-zA-Z_][a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)=.*/\1/p'\''`; do eval ac_val=\$$ac_var case $ac_val in #( *${as_nl}*) case $ac_var in #( *_cv_*) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: cache variable $ac_var contains a newline" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: cache variable $ac_var contains a newline" >&2;} ;; esac case $ac_var in #( _ | IFS | as_nl) ;; #( BASH_ARGV | BASH_SOURCE) eval $ac_var= ;; #( *) { eval $ac_var=; unset $ac_var;} ;; esac ;; esac done (set) 2>&1 | case $as_nl`(ac_space='\'' '\''; set) 2>&1` in #( *${as_nl}ac_space=\ *) sed -n \ "s/'\''/'\''\\\\'\'''\''/g; s/^\\([_$as_cr_alnum]*_cv_[_$as_cr_alnum]*\\)=\\(.*\\)/\\1='\''\\2'\''/p" ;; #( *) sed -n "/^[_$as_cr_alnum]*_cv_[_$as_cr_alnum]*=/p" ;; esac | sort ) echo cat <<\_ASBOX ## ----------------- ## ## Output variables. ## ## ----------------- ## _ASBOX echo for ac_var in $ac_subst_vars do eval ac_val=\$$ac_var case $ac_val in *\'\''*) ac_val=`$as_echo "$ac_val" | sed "s/'\''/'\''\\\\\\\\'\'''\''/g"`;; esac $as_echo "$ac_var='\''$ac_val'\''" done | sort echo if test -n "$ac_subst_files"; then cat <<\_ASBOX ## ------------------- ## ## File substitutions. ## ## ------------------- ## _ASBOX echo for ac_var in $ac_subst_files do eval ac_val=\$$ac_var case $ac_val in *\'\''*) ac_val=`$as_echo "$ac_val" | sed "s/'\''/'\''\\\\\\\\'\'''\''/g"`;; esac $as_echo "$ac_var='\''$ac_val'\''" done | sort echo fi if test -s confdefs.h; then cat <<\_ASBOX ## ----------- ## ## confdefs.h. ## ## ----------- ## _ASBOX echo cat confdefs.h echo fi test "$ac_signal" != 0 && $as_echo "$as_me: caught signal $ac_signal" $as_echo "$as_me: exit $exit_status" } >&5 rm -f core *.core core.conftest.* && rm -f -r conftest* confdefs* conf$$* $ac_clean_files && exit $exit_status ' 0 for ac_signal in 1 2 13 15; do trap 'ac_signal='$ac_signal'; as_fn_exit 1' $ac_signal done ac_signal=0 # confdefs.h avoids OS command line length limits that DEFS can exceed. rm -f -r conftest* confdefs.h $as_echo "/* confdefs.h */" > confdefs.h # Predefined preprocessor variables. cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF #define PACKAGE_NAME "$PACKAGE_NAME" _ACEOF cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF #define PACKAGE_TARNAME "$PACKAGE_TARNAME" _ACEOF cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF #define PACKAGE_VERSION "$PACKAGE_VERSION" _ACEOF cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF #define PACKAGE_STRING "$PACKAGE_STRING" _ACEOF cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF #define PACKAGE_BUGREPORT "$PACKAGE_BUGREPORT" _ACEOF cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF #define PACKAGE_URL "$PACKAGE_URL" _ACEOF # Let the site file select an alternate cache file if it wants to. # Prefer an explicitly selected file to automatically selected ones. ac_site_file1=NONE ac_site_file2=NONE if test -n "$CONFIG_SITE"; then ac_site_file1=$CONFIG_SITE elif test "x$prefix" != xNONE; then ac_site_file1=$prefix/share/config.site ac_site_file2=$prefix/etc/config.site else ac_site_file1=$ac_default_prefix/share/config.site ac_site_file2=$ac_default_prefix/etc/config.site fi for ac_site_file in "$ac_site_file1" "$ac_site_file2" do test "x$ac_site_file" = xNONE && continue if test /dev/null != "$ac_site_file" && test -r "$ac_site_file"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: loading site script $ac_site_file" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: loading site script $ac_site_file" >&6;} sed 's/^/| /' "$ac_site_file" >&5 . "$ac_site_file" fi done if test -r "$cache_file"; then # Some versions of bash will fail to source /dev/null (special files # actually), so we avoid doing that. DJGPP emulates it as a regular file. if test /dev/null != "$cache_file" && test -f "$cache_file"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: loading cache $cache_file" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: loading cache $cache_file" >&6;} case $cache_file in [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]* ) . "$cache_file";; *) . "./$cache_file";; esac fi else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: creating cache $cache_file" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: creating cache $cache_file" >&6;} >$cache_file fi # Check that the precious variables saved in the cache have kept the same # value. ac_cache_corrupted=false for ac_var in $ac_precious_vars; do eval ac_old_set=\$ac_cv_env_${ac_var}_set eval ac_new_set=\$ac_env_${ac_var}_set eval ac_old_val=\$ac_cv_env_${ac_var}_value eval ac_new_val=\$ac_env_${ac_var}_value case $ac_old_set,$ac_new_set in set,) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: \`$ac_var' was set to \`$ac_old_val' in the previous run" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: error: \`$ac_var' was set to \`$ac_old_val' in the previous run" >&2;} ac_cache_corrupted=: ;; ,set) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: \`$ac_var' was not set in the previous run" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: error: \`$ac_var' was not set in the previous run" >&2;} ac_cache_corrupted=: ;; ,);; *) if test "x$ac_old_val" != "x$ac_new_val"; then # differences in whitespace do not lead to failure. ac_old_val_w=`echo x $ac_old_val` ac_new_val_w=`echo x $ac_new_val` if test "$ac_old_val_w" != "$ac_new_val_w"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: \`$ac_var' has changed since the previous run:" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: error: \`$ac_var' has changed since the previous run:" >&2;} ac_cache_corrupted=: else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: warning: ignoring whitespace changes in \`$ac_var' since the previous run:" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: warning: ignoring whitespace changes in \`$ac_var' since the previous run:" >&2;} eval $ac_var=\$ac_old_val fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: former value: \`$ac_old_val'" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: former value: \`$ac_old_val'" >&2;} { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: current value: \`$ac_new_val'" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: current value: \`$ac_new_val'" >&2;} fi;; esac # Pass precious variables to config.status. if test "$ac_new_set" = set; then case $ac_new_val in *\'*) ac_arg=$ac_var=`$as_echo "$ac_new_val" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"` ;; *) ac_arg=$ac_var=$ac_new_val ;; esac case " $ac_configure_args " in *" '$ac_arg' "*) ;; # Avoid dups. Use of quotes ensures accuracy. *) as_fn_append ac_configure_args " '$ac_arg'" ;; esac fi done if $ac_cache_corrupted; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;} { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: changes in the environment can compromise the build" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: error: changes in the environment can compromise the build" >&2;} as_fn_error "run \`make distclean' and/or \`rm $cache_file' and start over" "$LINENO" 5 fi ## -------------------- ## ## Main body of script. ## ## -------------------- ## ac_ext=c ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS' ac_compile='$CC -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext >&5' ac_link='$CC -o conftest$ac_exeext $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS >&5' ac_compiler_gnu=$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu am__api_version='1.11' ac_aux_dir= for ac_dir in "$srcdir" "$srcdir/.." "$srcdir/../.."; do for ac_t in install-sh install.sh shtool; do if test -f "$ac_dir/$ac_t"; then ac_aux_dir=$ac_dir ac_install_sh="$ac_aux_dir/$ac_t -c" break 2 fi done done if test -z "$ac_aux_dir"; then as_fn_error "cannot find install-sh, install.sh, or shtool in \"$srcdir\" \"$srcdir/..\" \"$srcdir/../..\"" "$LINENO" 5 fi # These three variables are undocumented and unsupported, # and are intended to be withdrawn in a future Autoconf release. # They can cause serious problems if a builder's source tree is in a directory # whose full name contains unusual characters. ac_config_guess="$SHELL $ac_aux_dir/config.guess" # Please don't use this var. ac_config_sub="$SHELL $ac_aux_dir/config.sub" # Please don't use this var. ac_configure="$SHELL $ac_aux_dir/configure" # Please don't use this var. # Find a good install program. We prefer a C program (faster), # so one script is as good as another. But avoid the broken or # incompatible versions: # SysV /etc/install, /usr/sbin/install # SunOS /usr/etc/install # IRIX /sbin/install # AIX /bin/install # AmigaOS /C/install, which installs bootblocks on floppy discs # AIX 4 /usr/bin/installbsd, which doesn't work without a -g flag # AFS /usr/afsws/bin/install, which mishandles nonexistent args # SVR4 /usr/ucb/install, which tries to use the nonexistent group "staff" # OS/2's system install, which has a completely different semantic # ./install, which can be erroneously created by make from ./install.sh. # Reject install programs that cannot install multiple files. { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for a BSD-compatible install" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for a BSD-compatible install... " >&6; } if test -z "$INSTALL"; then if test "${ac_cv_path_install+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. # Account for people who put trailing slashes in PATH elements. case $as_dir/ in #(( ./ | .// | /[cC]/* | \ /etc/* | /usr/sbin/* | /usr/etc/* | /sbin/* | /usr/afsws/bin/* | \ ?:[\\/]os2[\\/]install[\\/]* | ?:[\\/]OS2[\\/]INSTALL[\\/]* | \ /usr/ucb/* ) ;; *) # OSF1 and SCO ODT 3.0 have their own names for install. # Don't use installbsd from OSF since it installs stuff as root # by default. for ac_prog in ginstall scoinst install; do for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext"; }; then if test $ac_prog = install && grep dspmsg "$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext" >/dev/null 2>&1; then # AIX install. It has an incompatible calling convention. : elif test $ac_prog = install && grep pwplus "$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext" >/dev/null 2>&1; then # program-specific install script used by HP pwplus--don't use. : else rm -rf conftest.one conftest.two conftest.dir echo one > conftest.one echo two > conftest.two mkdir conftest.dir if "$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext" -c conftest.one conftest.two "`pwd`/conftest.dir" && test -s conftest.one && test -s conftest.two && test -s conftest.dir/conftest.one && test -s conftest.dir/conftest.two then ac_cv_path_install="$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext -c" break 3 fi fi fi done done ;; esac done IFS=$as_save_IFS rm -rf conftest.one conftest.two conftest.dir fi if test "${ac_cv_path_install+set}" = set; then INSTALL=$ac_cv_path_install else # As a last resort, use the slow shell script. Don't cache a # value for INSTALL within a source directory, because that will # break other packages using the cache if that directory is # removed, or if the value is a relative name. INSTALL=$ac_install_sh fi fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $INSTALL" >&5 $as_echo "$INSTALL" >&6; } # Use test -z because SunOS4 sh mishandles braces in ${var-val}. # It thinks the first close brace ends the variable substitution. test -z "$INSTALL_PROGRAM" && INSTALL_PROGRAM='${INSTALL}' test -z "$INSTALL_SCRIPT" && INSTALL_SCRIPT='${INSTALL}' test -z "$INSTALL_DATA" && INSTALL_DATA='${INSTALL} -m 644' { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether build environment is sane" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking whether build environment is sane... " >&6; } # Just in case sleep 1 echo timestamp > conftest.file # Reject unsafe characters in $srcdir or the absolute working directory # name. Accept space and tab only in the latter. am_lf=' ' case `pwd` in *[\\\"\#\$\&\'\`$am_lf]*) as_fn_error "unsafe absolute working directory name" "$LINENO" 5;; esac case $srcdir in *[\\\"\#\$\&\'\`$am_lf\ \ ]*) as_fn_error "unsafe srcdir value: \`$srcdir'" "$LINENO" 5;; esac # Do `set' in a subshell so we don't clobber the current shell's # arguments. Must try -L first in case configure is actually a # symlink; some systems play weird games with the mod time of symlinks # (eg FreeBSD returns the mod time of the symlink's containing # directory). if ( set X `ls -Lt "$srcdir/configure" conftest.file 2> /dev/null` if test "$*" = "X"; then # -L didn't work. set X `ls -t "$srcdir/configure" conftest.file` fi rm -f conftest.file if test "$*" != "X $srcdir/configure conftest.file" \ && test "$*" != "X conftest.file $srcdir/configure"; then # If neither matched, then we have a broken ls. This can happen # if, for instance, CONFIG_SHELL is bash and it inherits a # broken ls alias from the environment. This has actually # happened. Such a system could not be considered "sane". as_fn_error "ls -t appears to fail. Make sure there is not a broken alias in your environment" "$LINENO" 5 fi test "$2" = conftest.file ) then # Ok. : else as_fn_error "newly created file is older than distributed files! Check your system clock" "$LINENO" 5 fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: yes" >&5 $as_echo "yes" >&6; } test "$program_prefix" != NONE && program_transform_name="s&^&$program_prefix&;$program_transform_name" # Use a double $ so make ignores it. test "$program_suffix" != NONE && program_transform_name="s&\$&$program_suffix&;$program_transform_name" # Double any \ or $. # By default was `s,x,x', remove it if useless. ac_script='s/[\\$]/&&/g;s/;s,x,x,$//' program_transform_name=`$as_echo "$program_transform_name" | sed "$ac_script"` # expand $ac_aux_dir to an absolute path am_aux_dir=`cd $ac_aux_dir && pwd` if test x"${MISSING+set}" != xset; then case $am_aux_dir in *\ * | *\ *) MISSING="\${SHELL} \"$am_aux_dir/missing\"" ;; *) MISSING="\${SHELL} $am_aux_dir/missing" ;; esac fi # Use eval to expand $SHELL if eval "$MISSING --run true"; then am_missing_run="$MISSING --run " else am_missing_run= { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: \`missing' script is too old or missing" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: \`missing' script is too old or missing" >&2;} fi if test x"${install_sh}" != xset; then case $am_aux_dir in *\ * | *\ *) install_sh="\${SHELL} '$am_aux_dir/install-sh'" ;; *) install_sh="\${SHELL} $am_aux_dir/install-sh" esac fi # Installed binaries are usually stripped using `strip' when the user # run `make install-strip'. However `strip' might not be the right # tool to use in cross-compilation environments, therefore Automake # will honor the `STRIP' environment variable to overrule this program. if test "$cross_compiling" != no; then if test -n "$ac_tool_prefix"; then # Extract the first word of "${ac_tool_prefix}strip", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy ${ac_tool_prefix}strip; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_STRIP+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$STRIP"; then ac_cv_prog_STRIP="$STRIP" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_STRIP="${ac_tool_prefix}strip" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi STRIP=$ac_cv_prog_STRIP if test -n "$STRIP"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $STRIP" >&5 $as_echo "$STRIP" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi fi if test -z "$ac_cv_prog_STRIP"; then ac_ct_STRIP=$STRIP # Extract the first word of "strip", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy strip; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_STRIP+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$ac_ct_STRIP"; then ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_STRIP="$ac_ct_STRIP" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_STRIP="strip" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi ac_ct_STRIP=$ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_STRIP if test -n "$ac_ct_STRIP"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_ct_STRIP" >&5 $as_echo "$ac_ct_STRIP" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi if test "x$ac_ct_STRIP" = x; then STRIP=":" else case $cross_compiling:$ac_tool_warned in yes:) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&2;} ac_tool_warned=yes ;; esac STRIP=$ac_ct_STRIP fi else STRIP="$ac_cv_prog_STRIP" fi fi INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM="\$(install_sh) -c -s" { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for a thread-safe mkdir -p" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for a thread-safe mkdir -p... " >&6; } if test -z "$MKDIR_P"; then if test "${ac_cv_path_mkdir+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH$PATH_SEPARATOR/opt/sfw/bin do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_prog in mkdir gmkdir; do for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext"; } || continue case `"$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext" --version 2>&1` in #( 'mkdir (GNU coreutils) '* | \ 'mkdir (coreutils) '* | \ 'mkdir (fileutils) '4.1*) ac_cv_path_mkdir=$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext break 3;; esac done done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi test -d ./--version && rmdir ./--version if test "${ac_cv_path_mkdir+set}" = set; then MKDIR_P="$ac_cv_path_mkdir -p" else # As a last resort, use the slow shell script. Don't cache a # value for MKDIR_P within a source directory, because that will # break other packages using the cache if that directory is # removed, or if the value is a relative name. MKDIR_P="$ac_install_sh -d" fi fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $MKDIR_P" >&5 $as_echo "$MKDIR_P" >&6; } mkdir_p="$MKDIR_P" case $mkdir_p in [\\/$]* | ?:[\\/]*) ;; */*) mkdir_p="\$(top_builddir)/$mkdir_p" ;; esac for ac_prog in gawk mawk nawk awk do # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_AWK+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$AWK"; then ac_cv_prog_AWK="$AWK" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_AWK="$ac_prog" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi AWK=$ac_cv_prog_AWK if test -n "$AWK"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $AWK" >&5 $as_echo "$AWK" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi test -n "$AWK" && break done { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether ${MAKE-make} sets \$(MAKE)" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking whether ${MAKE-make} sets \$(MAKE)... " >&6; } set x ${MAKE-make} ac_make=`$as_echo "$2" | sed 's/+/p/g; s/[^a-zA-Z0-9_]/_/g'` if { as_var=ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set; eval "test \"\${$as_var+set}\" = set"; }; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else cat >conftest.make <<\_ACEOF SHELL = /bin/sh all: @echo '@@@%%%=$(MAKE)=@@@%%%' _ACEOF # GNU make sometimes prints "make[1]: Entering...", which would confuse us. case `${MAKE-make} -f conftest.make 2>/dev/null` in *@@@%%%=?*=@@@%%%*) eval ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set=yes;; *) eval ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set=no;; esac rm -f conftest.make fi if eval test \$ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set = yes; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: yes" >&5 $as_echo "yes" >&6; } SET_MAKE= else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } SET_MAKE="MAKE=${MAKE-make}" fi rm -rf .tst 2>/dev/null mkdir .tst 2>/dev/null if test -d .tst; then am__leading_dot=. else am__leading_dot=_ fi rmdir .tst 2>/dev/null if test "`cd $srcdir && pwd`" != "`pwd`"; then # Use -I$(srcdir) only when $(srcdir) != ., so that make's output # is not polluted with repeated "-I." am__isrc=' -I$(srcdir)' # test to see if srcdir already configured if test -f $srcdir/config.status; then as_fn_error "source directory already configured; run \"make distclean\" there first" "$LINENO" 5 fi fi # test whether we have cygpath if test -z "$CYGPATH_W"; then if (cygpath --version) >/dev/null 2>/dev/null; then CYGPATH_W='cygpath -w' else CYGPATH_W=echo fi fi # Define the identity of the package. PACKAGE='mcron' VERSION='1.0.6' cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF #define PACKAGE "$PACKAGE" _ACEOF cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF #define VERSION "$VERSION" _ACEOF # Some tools Automake needs. ACLOCAL=${ACLOCAL-"${am_missing_run}aclocal-${am__api_version}"} AUTOCONF=${AUTOCONF-"${am_missing_run}autoconf"} AUTOMAKE=${AUTOMAKE-"${am_missing_run}automake-${am__api_version}"} AUTOHEADER=${AUTOHEADER-"${am_missing_run}autoheader"} MAKEINFO=${MAKEINFO-"${am_missing_run}makeinfo"} # We need awk for the "check" target. The system "awk" is bad on # some platforms. # Always define AMTAR for backward compatibility. AMTAR=${AMTAR-"${am_missing_run}tar"} am__tar='${AMTAR} chof - "$$tardir"'; am__untar='${AMTAR} xf -' { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether debugging is requested" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking whether debugging is requested... " >&6; } # Check whether --enable-debug was given. if test "${enable_debug+set}" = set; then : enableval=$enable_debug; CONFIG_DEBUG=$enableval else CONFIG_DEBUG=no fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CONFIG_DEBUG" >&5 $as_echo "$CONFIG_DEBUG" >&6; } if test "$CONFIG_DEBUG" = "no"; then CONFIG_DEBUG="#f" else CONFIG_DEBUG="#t" fi for ac_prog in gawk mawk nawk awk do # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_AWK+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$AWK"; then ac_cv_prog_AWK="$AWK" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_AWK="$ac_prog" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi AWK=$ac_cv_prog_AWK if test -n "$AWK"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $AWK" >&5 $as_echo "$AWK" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi test -n "$AWK" && break done { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for grep that handles long lines and -e" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for grep that handles long lines and -e... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_path_GREP+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -z "$GREP"; then ac_path_GREP_found=false # Loop through the user's path and test for each of PROGNAME-LIST as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH$PATH_SEPARATOR/usr/xpg4/bin do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_prog in grep ggrep; do for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do ac_path_GREP="$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext" { test -f "$ac_path_GREP" && $as_test_x "$ac_path_GREP"; } || continue # Check for GNU ac_path_GREP and select it if it is found. # Check for GNU $ac_path_GREP case `"$ac_path_GREP" --version 2>&1` in *GNU*) ac_cv_path_GREP="$ac_path_GREP" ac_path_GREP_found=:;; *) ac_count=0 $as_echo_n 0123456789 >"conftest.in" while : do cat "conftest.in" "conftest.in" >"conftest.tmp" mv "conftest.tmp" "conftest.in" cp "conftest.in" "conftest.nl" $as_echo 'GREP' >> "conftest.nl" "$ac_path_GREP" -e 'GREP$' -e '-(cannot match)-' < "conftest.nl" >"conftest.out" 2>/dev/null || break diff "conftest.out" "conftest.nl" >/dev/null 2>&1 || break as_fn_arith $ac_count + 1 && ac_count=$as_val if test $ac_count -gt ${ac_path_GREP_max-0}; then # Best one so far, save it but keep looking for a better one ac_cv_path_GREP="$ac_path_GREP" ac_path_GREP_max=$ac_count fi # 10*(2^10) chars as input seems more than enough test $ac_count -gt 10 && break done rm -f conftest.in conftest.tmp conftest.nl conftest.out;; esac $ac_path_GREP_found && break 3 done done done IFS=$as_save_IFS if test -z "$ac_cv_path_GREP"; then as_fn_error "no acceptable grep could be found in $PATH$PATH_SEPARATOR/usr/xpg4/bin" "$LINENO" 5 fi else ac_cv_path_GREP=$GREP fi fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_path_GREP" >&5 $as_echo "$ac_cv_path_GREP" >&6; } GREP="$ac_cv_path_GREP" { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for egrep" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for egrep... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_path_EGREP+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if echo a | $GREP -E '(a|b)' >/dev/null 2>&1 then ac_cv_path_EGREP="$GREP -E" else if test -z "$EGREP"; then ac_path_EGREP_found=false # Loop through the user's path and test for each of PROGNAME-LIST as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH$PATH_SEPARATOR/usr/xpg4/bin do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_prog in egrep; do for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do ac_path_EGREP="$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext" { test -f "$ac_path_EGREP" && $as_test_x "$ac_path_EGREP"; } || continue # Check for GNU ac_path_EGREP and select it if it is found. # Check for GNU $ac_path_EGREP case `"$ac_path_EGREP" --version 2>&1` in *GNU*) ac_cv_path_EGREP="$ac_path_EGREP" ac_path_EGREP_found=:;; *) ac_count=0 $as_echo_n 0123456789 >"conftest.in" while : do cat "conftest.in" "conftest.in" >"conftest.tmp" mv "conftest.tmp" "conftest.in" cp "conftest.in" "conftest.nl" $as_echo 'EGREP' >> "conftest.nl" "$ac_path_EGREP" 'EGREP$' < "conftest.nl" >"conftest.out" 2>/dev/null || break diff "conftest.out" "conftest.nl" >/dev/null 2>&1 || break as_fn_arith $ac_count + 1 && ac_count=$as_val if test $ac_count -gt ${ac_path_EGREP_max-0}; then # Best one so far, save it but keep looking for a better one ac_cv_path_EGREP="$ac_path_EGREP" ac_path_EGREP_max=$ac_count fi # 10*(2^10) chars as input seems more than enough test $ac_count -gt 10 && break done rm -f conftest.in conftest.tmp conftest.nl conftest.out;; esac $ac_path_EGREP_found && break 3 done done done IFS=$as_save_IFS if test -z "$ac_cv_path_EGREP"; then as_fn_error "no acceptable egrep could be found in $PATH$PATH_SEPARATOR/usr/xpg4/bin" "$LINENO" 5 fi else ac_cv_path_EGREP=$EGREP fi fi fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_path_EGREP" >&5 $as_echo "$ac_cv_path_EGREP" >&6; } EGREP="$ac_cv_path_EGREP" ac_ext=c ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS' ac_compile='$CC -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext >&5' ac_link='$CC -o conftest$ac_exeext $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS >&5' ac_compiler_gnu=$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu if test -n "$ac_tool_prefix"; then # Extract the first word of "${ac_tool_prefix}gcc", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy ${ac_tool_prefix}gcc; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_CC+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$CC"; then ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_CC="${ac_tool_prefix}gcc" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi CC=$ac_cv_prog_CC if test -n "$CC"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CC" >&5 $as_echo "$CC" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi fi if test -z "$ac_cv_prog_CC"; then ac_ct_CC=$CC # Extract the first word of "gcc", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy gcc; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$ac_ct_CC"; then ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC="$ac_ct_CC" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC="gcc" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi ac_ct_CC=$ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC if test -n "$ac_ct_CC"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_ct_CC" >&5 $as_echo "$ac_ct_CC" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi if test "x$ac_ct_CC" = x; then CC="" else case $cross_compiling:$ac_tool_warned in yes:) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&2;} ac_tool_warned=yes ;; esac CC=$ac_ct_CC fi else CC="$ac_cv_prog_CC" fi if test -z "$CC"; then if test -n "$ac_tool_prefix"; then # Extract the first word of "${ac_tool_prefix}cc", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy ${ac_tool_prefix}cc; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_CC+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$CC"; then ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_CC="${ac_tool_prefix}cc" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi CC=$ac_cv_prog_CC if test -n "$CC"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CC" >&5 $as_echo "$CC" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi fi fi if test -z "$CC"; then # Extract the first word of "cc", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy cc; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_CC+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$CC"; then ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test. else ac_prog_rejected=no as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then if test "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" = "/usr/ucb/cc"; then ac_prog_rejected=yes continue fi ac_cv_prog_CC="cc" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS if test $ac_prog_rejected = yes; then # We found a bogon in the path, so make sure we never use it. set dummy $ac_cv_prog_CC shift if test $# != 0; then # We chose a different compiler from the bogus one. # However, it has the same basename, so the bogon will be chosen # first if we set CC to just the basename; use the full file name. shift ac_cv_prog_CC="$as_dir/$ac_word${1+' '}$@" fi fi fi fi CC=$ac_cv_prog_CC if test -n "$CC"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CC" >&5 $as_echo "$CC" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi fi if test -z "$CC"; then if test -n "$ac_tool_prefix"; then for ac_prog in cl.exe do # Extract the first word of "$ac_tool_prefix$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy $ac_tool_prefix$ac_prog; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_CC+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$CC"; then ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_CC="$ac_tool_prefix$ac_prog" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi CC=$ac_cv_prog_CC if test -n "$CC"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CC" >&5 $as_echo "$CC" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi test -n "$CC" && break done fi if test -z "$CC"; then ac_ct_CC=$CC for ac_prog in cl.exe do # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$ac_ct_CC"; then ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC="$ac_ct_CC" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC="$ac_prog" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi ac_ct_CC=$ac_cv_prog_ac_ct_CC if test -n "$ac_ct_CC"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_ct_CC" >&5 $as_echo "$ac_ct_CC" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi test -n "$ac_ct_CC" && break done if test "x$ac_ct_CC" = x; then CC="" else case $cross_compiling:$ac_tool_warned in yes:) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: using cross tools not prefixed with host triplet" >&2;} ac_tool_warned=yes ;; esac CC=$ac_ct_CC fi fi fi test -z "$CC" && { { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;} as_fn_error "no acceptable C compiler found in \$PATH See \`config.log' for more details." "$LINENO" 5; } # Provide some information about the compiler. $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for C compiler version" >&5 set X $ac_compile ac_compiler=$2 for ac_option in --version -v -V -qversion; do { { ac_try="$ac_compiler $ac_option >&5" case "(($ac_try" in *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;; *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;; esac eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\"" $as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5 (eval "$ac_compiler $ac_option >&5") 2>conftest.err ac_status=$? if test -s conftest.err; then sed '10a\ ... rest of stderr output deleted ... 10q' conftest.err >conftest.er1 cat conftest.er1 >&5 fi rm -f conftest.er1 conftest.err $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5 test $ac_status = 0; } done cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext /* end confdefs.h. */ int main () { ; return 0; } _ACEOF ac_clean_files_save=$ac_clean_files ac_clean_files="$ac_clean_files a.out a.out.dSYM a.exe b.out" # Try to create an executable without -o first, disregard a.out. # It will help us diagnose broken compilers, and finding out an intuition # of exeext. { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether the C compiler works" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking whether the C compiler works... " >&6; } ac_link_default=`$as_echo "$ac_link" | sed 's/ -o *conftest[^ ]*//'` # The possible output files: ac_files="a.out conftest.exe conftest a.exe a_out.exe b.out conftest.*" ac_rmfiles= for ac_file in $ac_files do case $ac_file in *.$ac_ext | *.xcoff | *.tds | *.d | *.pdb | *.xSYM | *.bb | *.bbg | *.map | *.inf | *.dSYM | *.o | *.obj ) ;; * ) ac_rmfiles="$ac_rmfiles $ac_file";; esac done rm -f $ac_rmfiles if { { ac_try="$ac_link_default" case "(($ac_try" in *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;; *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;; esac eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\"" $as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5 (eval "$ac_link_default") 2>&5 ac_status=$? $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5 test $ac_status = 0; }; then : # Autoconf-2.13 could set the ac_cv_exeext variable to `no'. # So ignore a value of `no', otherwise this would lead to `EXEEXT = no' # in a Makefile. We should not override ac_cv_exeext if it was cached, # so that the user can short-circuit this test for compilers unknown to # Autoconf. for ac_file in $ac_files '' do test -f "$ac_file" || continue case $ac_file in *.$ac_ext | *.xcoff | *.tds | *.d | *.pdb | *.xSYM | *.bb | *.bbg | *.map | *.inf | *.dSYM | *.o | *.obj ) ;; [ab].out ) # We found the default executable, but exeext='' is most # certainly right. break;; *.* ) if test "${ac_cv_exeext+set}" = set && test "$ac_cv_exeext" != no; then :; else ac_cv_exeext=`expr "$ac_file" : '[^.]*\(\..*\)'` fi # We set ac_cv_exeext here because the later test for it is not # safe: cross compilers may not add the suffix if given an `-o' # argument, so we may need to know it at that point already. # Even if this section looks crufty: it has the advantage of # actually working. break;; * ) break;; esac done test "$ac_cv_exeext" = no && ac_cv_exeext= else ac_file='' fi if test -z "$ac_file"; then : { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } $as_echo "$as_me: failed program was:" >&5 sed 's/^/| /' conftest.$ac_ext >&5 { { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;} { as_fn_set_status 77 as_fn_error "C compiler cannot create executables See \`config.log' for more details." "$LINENO" 5; }; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: yes" >&5 $as_echo "yes" >&6; } fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for C compiler default output file name" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for C compiler default output file name... " >&6; } { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_file" >&5 $as_echo "$ac_file" >&6; } ac_exeext=$ac_cv_exeext rm -f -r a.out a.out.dSYM a.exe conftest$ac_cv_exeext b.out ac_clean_files=$ac_clean_files_save { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for suffix of executables" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for suffix of executables... " >&6; } if { { ac_try="$ac_link" case "(($ac_try" in *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;; *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;; esac eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\"" $as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5 (eval "$ac_link") 2>&5 ac_status=$? $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5 test $ac_status = 0; }; then : # If both `conftest.exe' and `conftest' are `present' (well, observable) # catch `conftest.exe'. For instance with Cygwin, `ls conftest' will # work properly (i.e., refer to `conftest.exe'), while it won't with # `rm'. for ac_file in conftest.exe conftest conftest.*; do test -f "$ac_file" || continue case $ac_file in *.$ac_ext | *.xcoff | *.tds | *.d | *.pdb | *.xSYM | *.bb | *.bbg | *.map | *.inf | *.dSYM | *.o | *.obj ) ;; *.* ) ac_cv_exeext=`expr "$ac_file" : '[^.]*\(\..*\)'` break;; * ) break;; esac done else { { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;} as_fn_error "cannot compute suffix of executables: cannot compile and link See \`config.log' for more details." "$LINENO" 5; } fi rm -f conftest conftest$ac_cv_exeext { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_exeext" >&5 $as_echo "$ac_cv_exeext" >&6; } rm -f conftest.$ac_ext EXEEXT=$ac_cv_exeext ac_exeext=$EXEEXT cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext /* end confdefs.h. */ #include int main () { FILE *f = fopen ("conftest.out", "w"); return ferror (f) || fclose (f) != 0; ; return 0; } _ACEOF ac_clean_files="$ac_clean_files conftest.out" # Check that the compiler produces executables we can run. If not, either # the compiler is broken, or we cross compile. { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether we are cross compiling" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking whether we are cross compiling... " >&6; } if test "$cross_compiling" != yes; then { { ac_try="$ac_link" case "(($ac_try" in *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;; *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;; esac eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\"" $as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5 (eval "$ac_link") 2>&5 ac_status=$? $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5 test $ac_status = 0; } if { ac_try='./conftest$ac_cv_exeext' { { case "(($ac_try" in *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;; *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;; esac eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\"" $as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5 (eval "$ac_try") 2>&5 ac_status=$? $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5 test $ac_status = 0; }; }; then cross_compiling=no else if test "$cross_compiling" = maybe; then cross_compiling=yes else { { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;} as_fn_error "cannot run C compiled programs. If you meant to cross compile, use \`--host'. See \`config.log' for more details." "$LINENO" 5; } fi fi fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $cross_compiling" >&5 $as_echo "$cross_compiling" >&6; } rm -f conftest.$ac_ext conftest$ac_cv_exeext conftest.out ac_clean_files=$ac_clean_files_save { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for suffix of object files" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for suffix of object files... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_objext+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext /* end confdefs.h. */ int main () { ; return 0; } _ACEOF rm -f conftest.o conftest.obj if { { ac_try="$ac_compile" case "(($ac_try" in *\"* | *\`* | *\\*) ac_try_echo=\$ac_try;; *) ac_try_echo=$ac_try;; esac eval ac_try_echo="\"\$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: $ac_try_echo\"" $as_echo "$ac_try_echo"; } >&5 (eval "$ac_compile") 2>&5 ac_status=$? $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: \$? = $ac_status" >&5 test $ac_status = 0; }; then : for ac_file in conftest.o conftest.obj conftest.*; do test -f "$ac_file" || continue; case $ac_file in *.$ac_ext | *.xcoff | *.tds | *.d | *.pdb | *.xSYM | *.bb | *.bbg | *.map | *.inf | *.dSYM ) ;; *) ac_cv_objext=`expr "$ac_file" : '.*\.\(.*\)'` break;; esac done else $as_echo "$as_me: failed program was:" >&5 sed 's/^/| /' conftest.$ac_ext >&5 { { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;} as_fn_error "cannot compute suffix of object files: cannot compile See \`config.log' for more details." "$LINENO" 5; } fi rm -f conftest.$ac_cv_objext conftest.$ac_ext fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_objext" >&5 $as_echo "$ac_cv_objext" >&6; } OBJEXT=$ac_cv_objext ac_objext=$OBJEXT { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether we are using the GNU C compiler" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking whether we are using the GNU C compiler... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext /* end confdefs.h. */ int main () { #ifndef __GNUC__ choke me #endif ; return 0; } _ACEOF if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then : ac_compiler_gnu=yes else ac_compiler_gnu=no fi rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu=$ac_compiler_gnu fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu" >&5 $as_echo "$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu" >&6; } if test $ac_compiler_gnu = yes; then GCC=yes else GCC= fi ac_test_CFLAGS=${CFLAGS+set} ac_save_CFLAGS=$CFLAGS { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether $CC accepts -g" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking whether $CC accepts -g... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_cc_g+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else ac_save_c_werror_flag=$ac_c_werror_flag ac_c_werror_flag=yes ac_cv_prog_cc_g=no CFLAGS="-g" cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext /* end confdefs.h. */ int main () { ; return 0; } _ACEOF if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then : ac_cv_prog_cc_g=yes else CFLAGS="" cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext /* end confdefs.h. */ int main () { ; return 0; } _ACEOF if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then : else ac_c_werror_flag=$ac_save_c_werror_flag CFLAGS="-g" cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext /* end confdefs.h. */ int main () { ; return 0; } _ACEOF if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then : ac_cv_prog_cc_g=yes fi rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext fi rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext fi rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext conftest.$ac_ext ac_c_werror_flag=$ac_save_c_werror_flag fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_prog_cc_g" >&5 $as_echo "$ac_cv_prog_cc_g" >&6; } if test "$ac_test_CFLAGS" = set; then CFLAGS=$ac_save_CFLAGS elif test $ac_cv_prog_cc_g = yes; then if test "$GCC" = yes; then CFLAGS="-g -O2" else CFLAGS="-g" fi else if test "$GCC" = yes; then CFLAGS="-O2" else CFLAGS= fi fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $CC option to accept ISO C89" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $CC option to accept ISO C89... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_cc_c89+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else ac_cv_prog_cc_c89=no ac_save_CC=$CC cat confdefs.h - <<_ACEOF >conftest.$ac_ext /* end confdefs.h. */ #include #include #include #include /* Most of the following tests are stolen from RCS 5.7's src/conf.sh. */ struct buf { int x; }; FILE * (*rcsopen) (struct buf *, struct stat *, int); static char *e (p, i) char **p; int i; { return p[i]; } static char *f (char * (*g) (char **, int), char **p, ...) { char *s; va_list v; va_start (v,p); s = g (p, va_arg (v,int)); va_end (v); return s; } /* OSF 4.0 Compaq cc is some sort of almost-ANSI by default. It has function prototypes and stuff, but not '\xHH' hex character constants. These don't provoke an error unfortunately, instead are silently treated as 'x'. The following induces an error, until -std is added to get proper ANSI mode. Curiously '\x00'!='x' always comes out true, for an array size at least. It's necessary to write '\x00'==0 to get something that's true only with -std. */ int osf4_cc_array ['\x00' == 0 ? 1 : -1]; /* IBM C 6 for AIX is almost-ANSI by default, but it replaces macro parameters inside strings and character constants. */ #define FOO(x) 'x' int xlc6_cc_array[FOO(a) == 'x' ? 1 : -1]; int test (int i, double x); struct s1 {int (*f) (int a);}; struct s2 {int (*f) (double a);}; int pairnames (int, char **, FILE *(*)(struct buf *, struct stat *, int), int, int); int argc; char **argv; int main () { return f (e, argv, 0) != argv[0] || f (e, argv, 1) != argv[1]; ; return 0; } _ACEOF for ac_arg in '' -qlanglvl=extc89 -qlanglvl=ansi -std \ -Ae "-Aa -D_HPUX_SOURCE" "-Xc -D__EXTENSIONS__" do CC="$ac_save_CC $ac_arg" if ac_fn_c_try_compile "$LINENO"; then : ac_cv_prog_cc_c89=$ac_arg fi rm -f core conftest.err conftest.$ac_objext test "x$ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" != "xno" && break done rm -f conftest.$ac_ext CC=$ac_save_CC fi # AC_CACHE_VAL case "x$ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" in x) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: none needed" >&5 $as_echo "none needed" >&6; } ;; xno) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: unsupported" >&5 $as_echo "unsupported" >&6; } ;; *) CC="$CC $ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" >&5 $as_echo "$ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" >&6; } ;; esac if test "x$ac_cv_prog_cc_c89" != xno; then : fi ac_ext=c ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS' ac_compile='$CC -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext >&5' ac_link='$CC -o conftest$ac_exeext $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS >&5' ac_compiler_gnu=$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu DEPDIR="${am__leading_dot}deps" ac_config_commands="$ac_config_commands depfiles" am_make=${MAKE-make} cat > confinc << 'END' am__doit: @echo this is the am__doit target .PHONY: am__doit END # If we don't find an include directive, just comment out the code. { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for style of include used by $am_make" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for style of include used by $am_make... " >&6; } am__include="#" am__quote= _am_result=none # First try GNU make style include. echo "include confinc" > confmf # Ignore all kinds of additional output from `make'. case `$am_make -s -f confmf 2> /dev/null` in #( *the\ am__doit\ target*) am__include=include am__quote= _am_result=GNU ;; esac # Now try BSD make style include. if test "$am__include" = "#"; then echo '.include "confinc"' > confmf case `$am_make -s -f confmf 2> /dev/null` in #( *the\ am__doit\ target*) am__include=.include am__quote="\"" _am_result=BSD ;; esac fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $_am_result" >&5 $as_echo "$_am_result" >&6; } rm -f confinc confmf # Check whether --enable-dependency-tracking was given. if test "${enable_dependency_tracking+set}" = set; then : enableval=$enable_dependency_tracking; fi if test "x$enable_dependency_tracking" != xno; then am_depcomp="$ac_aux_dir/depcomp" AMDEPBACKSLASH='\' fi if test "x$enable_dependency_tracking" != xno; then AMDEP_TRUE= AMDEP_FALSE='#' else AMDEP_TRUE='#' AMDEP_FALSE= fi depcc="$CC" am_compiler_list= { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking dependency style of $depcc" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking dependency style of $depcc... " >&6; } if test "${am_cv_CC_dependencies_compiler_type+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -z "$AMDEP_TRUE" && test -f "$am_depcomp"; then # We make a subdir and do the tests there. Otherwise we can end up # making bogus files that we don't know about and never remove. For # instance it was reported that on HP-UX the gcc test will end up # making a dummy file named `D' -- because `-MD' means `put the output # in D'. mkdir conftest.dir # Copy depcomp to subdir because otherwise we won't find it if we're # using a relative directory. cp "$am_depcomp" conftest.dir cd conftest.dir # We will build objects and dependencies in a subdirectory because # it helps to detect inapplicable dependency modes. For instance # both Tru64's cc and ICC support -MD to output dependencies as a # side effect of compilation, but ICC will put the dependencies in # the current directory while Tru64 will put them in the object # directory. mkdir sub am_cv_CC_dependencies_compiler_type=none if test "$am_compiler_list" = ""; then am_compiler_list=`sed -n 's/^#*\([a-zA-Z0-9]*\))$/\1/p' < ./depcomp` fi am__universal=false case " $depcc " in #( *\ -arch\ *\ -arch\ *) am__universal=true ;; esac for depmode in $am_compiler_list; do # Setup a source with many dependencies, because some compilers # like to wrap large dependency lists on column 80 (with \), and # we should not choose a depcomp mode which is confused by this. # # We need to recreate these files for each test, as the compiler may # overwrite some of them when testing with obscure command lines. # This happens at least with the AIX C compiler. : > sub/conftest.c for i in 1 2 3 4 5 6; do echo '#include "conftst'$i'.h"' >> sub/conftest.c # Using `: > sub/conftst$i.h' creates only sub/conftst1.h with # Solaris 8's {/usr,}/bin/sh. touch sub/conftst$i.h done echo "${am__include} ${am__quote}sub/conftest.Po${am__quote}" > confmf # We check with `-c' and `-o' for the sake of the "dashmstdout" # mode. It turns out that the SunPro C++ compiler does not properly # handle `-M -o', and we need to detect this. Also, some Intel # versions had trouble with output in subdirs am__obj=sub/conftest.${OBJEXT-o} am__minus_obj="-o $am__obj" case $depmode in gcc) # This depmode causes a compiler race in universal mode. test "$am__universal" = false || continue ;; nosideeffect) # after this tag, mechanisms are not by side-effect, so they'll # only be used when explicitly requested if test "x$enable_dependency_tracking" = xyes; then continue else break fi ;; msvisualcpp | msvcmsys) # This compiler won't grok `-c -o', but also, the minuso test has # not run yet. These depmodes are late enough in the game, and # so weak that their functioning should not be impacted. am__obj=conftest.${OBJEXT-o} am__minus_obj= ;; none) break ;; esac if depmode=$depmode \ source=sub/conftest.c object=$am__obj \ depfile=sub/conftest.Po tmpdepfile=sub/conftest.TPo \ $SHELL ./depcomp $depcc -c $am__minus_obj sub/conftest.c \ >/dev/null 2>conftest.err && grep sub/conftst1.h sub/conftest.Po > /dev/null 2>&1 && grep sub/conftst6.h sub/conftest.Po > /dev/null 2>&1 && grep $am__obj sub/conftest.Po > /dev/null 2>&1 && ${MAKE-make} -s -f confmf > /dev/null 2>&1; then # icc doesn't choke on unknown options, it will just issue warnings # or remarks (even with -Werror). So we grep stderr for any message # that says an option was ignored or not supported. # When given -MP, icc 7.0 and 7.1 complain thusly: # icc: Command line warning: ignoring option '-M'; no argument required # The diagnosis changed in icc 8.0: # icc: Command line remark: option '-MP' not supported if (grep 'ignoring option' conftest.err || grep 'not supported' conftest.err) >/dev/null 2>&1; then :; else am_cv_CC_dependencies_compiler_type=$depmode break fi fi done cd .. rm -rf conftest.dir else am_cv_CC_dependencies_compiler_type=none fi fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $am_cv_CC_dependencies_compiler_type" >&5 $as_echo "$am_cv_CC_dependencies_compiler_type" >&6; } CCDEPMODE=depmode=$am_cv_CC_dependencies_compiler_type if test "x$enable_dependency_tracking" != xno \ && test "$am_cv_CC_dependencies_compiler_type" = gcc3; then am__fastdepCC_TRUE= am__fastdepCC_FALSE='#' else am__fastdepCC_TRUE='#' am__fastdepCC_FALSE= fi # Extract the first word of "guile", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy guile; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_path_GUILE+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else case $GUILE in [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*) ac_cv_path_GUILE="$GUILE" # Let the user override the test with a path. ;; *) as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_path_GUILE="$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS ;; esac fi GUILE=$ac_cv_path_GUILE if test -n "$GUILE"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $GUILE" >&5 $as_echo "$GUILE" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi if test "$GUILE" = "" ; then as_fn_error "guile required but not found" "$LINENO" 5 fi # Extract the first word of "guile-config", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy guile-config; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_path_GUILE_CONFIG+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else case $GUILE_CONFIG in [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*) ac_cv_path_GUILE_CONFIG="$GUILE_CONFIG" # Let the user override the test with a path. ;; *) as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_path_GUILE_CONFIG="$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS ;; esac fi GUILE_CONFIG=$ac_cv_path_GUILE_CONFIG if test -n "$GUILE_CONFIG"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $GUILE_CONFIG" >&5 $as_echo "$GUILE_CONFIG" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi if test "$GUILE_CONFIG" = "" ; then as_fn_error "guile-config required but not found" "$LINENO" 5 fi # Extract the first word of "guile-tools", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy guile-tools; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_path_GUILE_TOOLS+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else case $GUILE_TOOLS in [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*) ac_cv_path_GUILE_TOOLS="$GUILE_TOOLS" # Let the user override the test with a path. ;; *) as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_path_GUILE_TOOLS="$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS ;; esac fi GUILE_TOOLS=$ac_cv_path_GUILE_TOOLS if test -n "$GUILE_TOOLS"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $GUILE_TOOLS" >&5 $as_echo "$GUILE_TOOLS" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking libguile compile flags" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking libguile compile flags... " >&6; } GUILE_CFLAGS="`$GUILE_CONFIG compile`" { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $GUILE_CFLAGS" >&5 $as_echo "$GUILE_CFLAGS" >&6; } { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking libguile link flags" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking libguile link flags... " >&6; } GUILE_LDFLAGS="`$GUILE_CONFIG link`" { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $GUILE_LDFLAGS" >&5 $as_echo "$GUILE_LDFLAGS" >&6; } { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for Guile site directory" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for Guile site directory... " >&6; } GUILE_SITE=`$GUILE_CONFIG info pkgdatadir`/site { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $GUILE_SITE" >&5 $as_echo "$GUILE_SITE" >&6; } # Checks for programs. for ac_prog in sed do # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_SED+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$SED"; then ac_cv_prog_SED="$SED" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_SED="$ac_prog" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi SED=$ac_cv_prog_SED if test -n "$SED"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $SED" >&5 $as_echo "$SED" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi test -n "$SED" && break done if test "x$ac_cv_prog_SED" = "x"; then as_fn_error "sed not found" "$LINENO" 5 fi for ac_prog in head do # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_HEAD+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$HEAD"; then ac_cv_prog_HEAD="$HEAD" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_HEAD="$ac_prog" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi HEAD=$ac_cv_prog_HEAD if test -n "$HEAD"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $HEAD" >&5 $as_echo "$HEAD" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi test -n "$HEAD" && break done if test "x$ac_cv_prog_HEAD" = "x"; then as_fn_error "head not found" "$LINENO" 5 fi for ac_prog in ed do # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_ED+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$ED"; then ac_cv_prog_ED="$ED" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_ED="$ac_prog" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi ED=$ac_cv_prog_ED if test -n "$ED"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ED" >&5 $as_echo "$ED" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi test -n "$ED" && break done if test "x$ac_cv_prog_ED" = "x"; then as_fn_error "ed not found" "$LINENO" 5 fi for ac_prog in which do # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_WHICH+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$WHICH"; then ac_cv_prog_WHICH="$WHICH" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_WHICH="$ac_prog" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi WHICH=$ac_cv_prog_WHICH if test -n "$WHICH"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $WHICH" >&5 $as_echo "$WHICH" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi test -n "$WHICH" && break done if test "x$ac_cv_prog_WHICH" = "x"; then as_fn_error "which not found" "$LINENO" 5 fi for ac_prog in cp do # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_CP+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$CP"; then ac_cv_prog_CP="$CP" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_CP="$ac_prog" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi CP=$ac_cv_prog_CP if test -n "$CP"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CP" >&5 $as_echo "$CP" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi test -n "$CP" && break done if test "x$ac_cv_prog_CP" = "x"; then as_fn_error "cp not found" "$LINENO" 5 fi # Check the Guile version. { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for guile version >= 1.8.0" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for guile version >= 1.8.0... " >&6; } if $GUILE --version | $HEAD -1 | $AWK '{print $2}' | \ $EGREP -q '^1\.8\.'; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: OK" >&5 $as_echo "OK" >&6; } else as_fn_error "Sorry, Guile 1.8.0 or greater is needed to run mcron" "$LINENO" 5 fi # Now find a sendmail or equivalent. for ac_prog in sendmail do # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$SENDMAIL"; then ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL="$SENDMAIL" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL="$ac_prog" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi SENDMAIL=$ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL if test -n "$SENDMAIL"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $SENDMAIL" >&5 $as_echo "$SENDMAIL" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi test -n "$SENDMAIL" && break done if test "x$ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL" != "x"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking sendmail path and arguments" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking sendmail path and arguments... " >&6; } ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL="`$ac_cv_prog_WHICH sendmail` -FCronDaemon -odi -oem " { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL" >&5 $as_echo "$ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL" >&6; } else for ac_prog in mail do # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2 { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; } if test "${ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL+set}" = set; then : $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6 else if test -n "$SENDMAIL"; then ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL="$SENDMAIL" # Let the user override the test. else as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL="$ac_prog" $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5 break 2 fi done done IFS=$as_save_IFS fi fi SENDMAIL=$ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL if test -n "$SENDMAIL"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $SENDMAIL" >&5 $as_echo "$SENDMAIL" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5 $as_echo "no" >&6; } fi test -n "$SENDMAIL" && break done if test "x$ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL" != "x"; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking mail path" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking mail path... " >&6; } ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL="`$ac_cv_prog_WHICH mail` -d " { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL" >&5 $as_echo "$ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL" >&6; } else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: No mail program found" >&5 $as_echo "No mail program found" >&6; } fi fi SENDMAIL=$ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL # Find out if we are avoiding Vixie. { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking whether to avoid clobbering a Vixie installation" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking whether to avoid clobbering a Vixie installation... " >&6; } # Check whether --enable-no-vixie-clobber was given. if test "${enable_no_vixie_clobber+set}" = set; then : enableval=$enable_no_vixie_clobber; NO_VIXIE_CLOBBER=$enableval else NO_VIXIE_CLOBBER=no fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $NO_VIXIE_CLOBBER" >&5 $as_echo "$NO_VIXIE_CLOBBER" >&6; } # Configure the various files that mcron uses at runtime. { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking which spool directory to use" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking which spool directory to use... " >&6; } # Check whether --with-spool-dir was given. if test "${with_spool_dir+set}" = set; then : withval=$with_spool_dir; CONFIG_SPOOL_DIR=$withval else CONFIG_SPOOL_DIR=/var/cron/tabs fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CONFIG_SPOOL_DIR" >&5 $as_echo "$CONFIG_SPOOL_DIR" >&6; } { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking name of socket" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking name of socket... " >&6; } # Check whether --with-socket-file was given. if test "${with_socket_file+set}" = set; then : withval=$with_socket_file; CONFIG_SOCKET_FILE=$withval else CONFIG_SOCKET_FILE=/var/cron/socket fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CONFIG_SOCKET_FILE" >&5 $as_echo "$CONFIG_SOCKET_FILE" >&6; } { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking name of allow file" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking name of allow file... " >&6; } # Check whether --with-allow-file was given. if test "${with_allow_file+set}" = set; then : withval=$with_allow_file; CONFIG_ALLOW_FILE=$withval else CONFIG_ALLOW_FILE=/var/cron/allow fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CONFIG_ALLOW_FILE" >&5 $as_echo "$CONFIG_ALLOW_FILE" >&6; } { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking name of deny file" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking name of deny file... " >&6; } # Check whether --with-deny-file was given. if test "${with_deny_file+set}" = set; then : withval=$with_deny_file; CONFIG_DENY_FILE=$withval else CONFIG_DENY_FILE=/var/cron/deny fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CONFIG_DENY_FILE" >&5 $as_echo "$CONFIG_DENY_FILE" >&6; } { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking name of PID file" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking name of PID file... " >&6; } # Check whether --with-pid-file was given. if test "${with_pid_file+set}" = set; then : withval=$with_pid_file; CONFIG_PID_FILE=$withval else CONFIG_PID_FILE=/var/run/cron.pid fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CONFIG_PID_FILE" >&5 $as_echo "$CONFIG_PID_FILE" >&6; } { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking directory to hold temporary files" >&5 $as_echo_n "checking directory to hold temporary files... " >&6; } # Check whether --with-tmp-dir was given. if test "${with_tmp_dir+set}" = set; then : withval=$with_tmp_dir; CONFIG_TMP_DIR=$withval else CONFIG_TMP_DIR=/tmp fi { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CONFIG_TMP_DIR" >&5 $as_echo "$CONFIG_TMP_DIR" >&6; } # This is to support `make DESTDIR=...' real_program_prefix=`echo $program_prefix | sed s/NONE//` ac_config_files="$ac_config_files makefile config.scm mcron.texinfo" cat >confcache <<\_ACEOF # This file is a shell script that caches the results of configure # tests run on this system so they can be shared between configure # scripts and configure runs, see configure's option --config-cache. # It is not useful on other systems. If it contains results you don't # want to keep, you may remove or edit it. # # config.status only pays attention to the cache file if you give it # the --recheck option to rerun configure. # # `ac_cv_env_foo' variables (set or unset) will be overridden when # loading this file, other *unset* `ac_cv_foo' will be assigned the # following values. _ACEOF # The following way of writing the cache mishandles newlines in values, # but we know of no workaround that is simple, portable, and efficient. # So, we kill variables containing newlines. # Ultrix sh set writes to stderr and can't be redirected directly, # and sets the high bit in the cache file unless we assign to the vars. ( for ac_var in `(set) 2>&1 | sed -n 's/^\([a-zA-Z_][a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)=.*/\1/p'`; do eval ac_val=\$$ac_var case $ac_val in #( *${as_nl}*) case $ac_var in #( *_cv_*) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: cache variable $ac_var contains a newline" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: cache variable $ac_var contains a newline" >&2;} ;; esac case $ac_var in #( _ | IFS | as_nl) ;; #( BASH_ARGV | BASH_SOURCE) eval $ac_var= ;; #( *) { eval $ac_var=; unset $ac_var;} ;; esac ;; esac done (set) 2>&1 | case $as_nl`(ac_space=' '; set) 2>&1` in #( *${as_nl}ac_space=\ *) # `set' does not quote correctly, so add quotes: double-quote # substitution turns \\\\ into \\, and sed turns \\ into \. sed -n \ "s/'/'\\\\''/g; s/^\\([_$as_cr_alnum]*_cv_[_$as_cr_alnum]*\\)=\\(.*\\)/\\1='\\2'/p" ;; #( *) # `set' quotes correctly as required by POSIX, so do not add quotes. sed -n "/^[_$as_cr_alnum]*_cv_[_$as_cr_alnum]*=/p" ;; esac | sort ) | sed ' /^ac_cv_env_/b end t clear :clear s/^\([^=]*\)=\(.*[{}].*\)$/test "${\1+set}" = set || &/ t end s/^\([^=]*\)=\(.*\)$/\1=${\1=\2}/ :end' >>confcache if diff "$cache_file" confcache >/dev/null 2>&1; then :; else if test -w "$cache_file"; then test "x$cache_file" != "x/dev/null" && { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: updating cache $cache_file" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: updating cache $cache_file" >&6;} cat confcache >$cache_file else { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: not updating unwritable cache $cache_file" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: not updating unwritable cache $cache_file" >&6;} fi fi rm -f confcache test "x$prefix" = xNONE && prefix=$ac_default_prefix # Let make expand exec_prefix. test "x$exec_prefix" = xNONE && exec_prefix='${prefix}' # Transform confdefs.h into DEFS. # Protect against shell expansion while executing Makefile rules. # Protect against Makefile macro expansion. # # If the first sed substitution is executed (which looks for macros that # take arguments), then branch to the quote section. Otherwise, # look for a macro that doesn't take arguments. ac_script=' :mline /\\$/{ N s,\\\n,, b mline } t clear :clear s/^[ ]*#[ ]*define[ ][ ]*\([^ (][^ (]*([^)]*)\)[ ]*\(.*\)/-D\1=\2/g t quote s/^[ ]*#[ ]*define[ ][ ]*\([^ ][^ ]*\)[ ]*\(.*\)/-D\1=\2/g t quote b any :quote s/[ `~#$^&*(){}\\|;'\''"<>?]/\\&/g s/\[/\\&/g s/\]/\\&/g s/\$/$$/g H :any ${ g s/^\n// s/\n/ /g p } ' DEFS=`sed -n "$ac_script" confdefs.h` ac_libobjs= ac_ltlibobjs= for ac_i in : $LIBOBJS; do test "x$ac_i" = x: && continue # 1. Remove the extension, and $U if already installed. ac_script='s/\$U\././;s/\.o$//;s/\.obj$//' ac_i=`$as_echo "$ac_i" | sed "$ac_script"` # 2. Prepend LIBOBJDIR. When used with automake>=1.10 LIBOBJDIR # will be set to the directory where LIBOBJS objects are built. as_fn_append ac_libobjs " \${LIBOBJDIR}$ac_i\$U.$ac_objext" as_fn_append ac_ltlibobjs " \${LIBOBJDIR}$ac_i"'$U.lo' done LIBOBJS=$ac_libobjs LTLIBOBJS=$ac_ltlibobjs if test -n "$EXEEXT"; then am__EXEEXT_TRUE= am__EXEEXT_FALSE='#' else am__EXEEXT_TRUE='#' am__EXEEXT_FALSE= fi if test -z "${AMDEP_TRUE}" && test -z "${AMDEP_FALSE}"; then as_fn_error "conditional \"AMDEP\" was never defined. Usually this means the macro was only invoked conditionally." "$LINENO" 5 fi if test -z "${am__fastdepCC_TRUE}" && test -z "${am__fastdepCC_FALSE}"; then as_fn_error "conditional \"am__fastdepCC\" was never defined. Usually this means the macro was only invoked conditionally." "$LINENO" 5 fi : ${CONFIG_STATUS=./config.status} ac_write_fail=0 ac_clean_files_save=$ac_clean_files ac_clean_files="$ac_clean_files $CONFIG_STATUS" { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: creating $CONFIG_STATUS" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: creating $CONFIG_STATUS" >&6;} as_write_fail=0 cat >$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ASEOF || as_write_fail=1 #! $SHELL # Generated by $as_me. # Run this file to recreate the current configuration. # Compiler output produced by configure, useful for debugging # configure, is in config.log if it exists. debug=false ac_cs_recheck=false ac_cs_silent=false SHELL=\${CONFIG_SHELL-$SHELL} export SHELL _ASEOF cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ASEOF || as_write_fail=1 ## -------------------- ## ## M4sh Initialization. ## ## -------------------- ## # Be more Bourne compatible DUALCASE=1; export DUALCASE # for MKS sh if test -n "${ZSH_VERSION+set}" && (emulate sh) >/dev/null 2>&1; then : emulate sh NULLCMD=: # Pre-4.2 versions of Zsh do word splitting on ${1+"$@"}, which # is contrary to our usage. Disable this feature. alias -g '${1+"$@"}'='"$@"' setopt NO_GLOB_SUBST else case `(set -o) 2>/dev/null` in #( *posix*) : set -o posix ;; #( *) : ;; esac fi as_nl=' ' export as_nl # Printing a long string crashes Solaris 7 /usr/bin/printf. as_echo='\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\' as_echo=$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo as_echo=$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo # Prefer a ksh shell builtin over an external printf program on Solaris, # but without wasting forks for bash or zsh. if test -z "$BASH_VERSION$ZSH_VERSION" \ && (test "X`print -r -- $as_echo`" = "X$as_echo") 2>/dev/null; then as_echo='print -r --' as_echo_n='print -rn --' elif (test "X`printf %s $as_echo`" = "X$as_echo") 2>/dev/null; then as_echo='printf %s\n' as_echo_n='printf %s' else if test "X`(/usr/ucb/echo -n -n $as_echo) 2>/dev/null`" = "X-n $as_echo"; then as_echo_body='eval /usr/ucb/echo -n "$1$as_nl"' as_echo_n='/usr/ucb/echo -n' else as_echo_body='eval expr "X$1" : "X\\(.*\\)"' as_echo_n_body='eval arg=$1; case $arg in #( *"$as_nl"*) expr "X$arg" : "X\\(.*\\)$as_nl"; arg=`expr "X$arg" : ".*$as_nl\\(.*\\)"`;; esac; expr "X$arg" : "X\\(.*\\)" | tr -d "$as_nl" ' export as_echo_n_body as_echo_n='sh -c $as_echo_n_body as_echo' fi export as_echo_body as_echo='sh -c $as_echo_body as_echo' fi # The user is always right. if test "${PATH_SEPARATOR+set}" != set; then PATH_SEPARATOR=: (PATH='/bin;/bin'; FPATH=$PATH; sh -c :) >/dev/null 2>&1 && { (PATH='/bin:/bin'; FPATH=$PATH; sh -c :) >/dev/null 2>&1 || PATH_SEPARATOR=';' } fi # IFS # We need space, tab and new line, in precisely that order. Quoting is # there to prevent editors from complaining about space-tab. # (If _AS_PATH_WALK were called with IFS unset, it would disable word # splitting by setting IFS to empty value.) IFS=" "" $as_nl" # Find who we are. Look in the path if we contain no directory separator. case $0 in #(( *[\\/]* ) as_myself=$0 ;; *) as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR for as_dir in $PATH do IFS=$as_save_IFS test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=. test -r "$as_dir/$0" && as_myself=$as_dir/$0 && break done IFS=$as_save_IFS ;; esac # We did not find ourselves, most probably we were run as `sh COMMAND' # in which case we are not to be found in the path. if test "x$as_myself" = x; then as_myself=$0 fi if test ! -f "$as_myself"; then $as_echo "$as_myself: error: cannot find myself; rerun with an absolute file name" >&2 exit 1 fi # Unset variables that we do not need and which cause bugs (e.g. in # pre-3.0 UWIN ksh). But do not cause bugs in bash 2.01; the "|| exit 1" # suppresses any "Segmentation fault" message there. '((' could # trigger a bug in pdksh 5.2.14. for as_var in BASH_ENV ENV MAIL MAILPATH do eval test x\${$as_var+set} = xset \ && ( (unset $as_var) || exit 1) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset $as_var || : done PS1='$ ' PS2='> ' PS4='+ ' # NLS nuisances. LC_ALL=C export LC_ALL LANGUAGE=C export LANGUAGE # CDPATH. (unset CDPATH) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset CDPATH # as_fn_error ERROR [LINENO LOG_FD] # --------------------------------- # Output "`basename $0`: error: ERROR" to stderr. If LINENO and LOG_FD are # provided, also output the error to LOG_FD, referencing LINENO. Then exit the # script with status $?, using 1 if that was 0. as_fn_error () { as_status=$?; test $as_status -eq 0 && as_status=1 if test "$3"; then as_lineno=${as_lineno-"$2"} as_lineno_stack=as_lineno_stack=$as_lineno_stack $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: $1" >&$3 fi $as_echo "$as_me: error: $1" >&2 as_fn_exit $as_status } # as_fn_error # as_fn_set_status STATUS # ----------------------- # Set $? to STATUS, without forking. as_fn_set_status () { return $1 } # as_fn_set_status # as_fn_exit STATUS # ----------------- # Exit the shell with STATUS, even in a "trap 0" or "set -e" context. as_fn_exit () { set +e as_fn_set_status $1 exit $1 } # as_fn_exit # as_fn_unset VAR # --------------- # Portably unset VAR. as_fn_unset () { { eval $1=; unset $1;} } as_unset=as_fn_unset # as_fn_append VAR VALUE # ---------------------- # Append the text in VALUE to the end of the definition contained in VAR. Take # advantage of any shell optimizations that allow amortized linear growth over # repeated appends, instead of the typical quadratic growth present in naive # implementations. if (eval "as_var=1; as_var+=2; test x\$as_var = x12") 2>/dev/null; then : eval 'as_fn_append () { eval $1+=\$2 }' else as_fn_append () { eval $1=\$$1\$2 } fi # as_fn_append # as_fn_arith ARG... # ------------------ # Perform arithmetic evaluation on the ARGs, and store the result in the # global $as_val. Take advantage of shells that can avoid forks. The arguments # must be portable across $(()) and expr. if (eval "test \$(( 1 + 1 )) = 2") 2>/dev/null; then : eval 'as_fn_arith () { as_val=$(( $* )) }' else as_fn_arith () { as_val=`expr "$@" || test $? -eq 1` } fi # as_fn_arith if expr a : '\(a\)' >/dev/null 2>&1 && test "X`expr 00001 : '.*\(...\)'`" = X001; then as_expr=expr else as_expr=false fi if (basename -- /) >/dev/null 2>&1 && test "X`basename -- / 2>&1`" = "X/"; then as_basename=basename else as_basename=false fi if (as_dir=`dirname -- /` && test "X$as_dir" = X/) >/dev/null 2>&1; then as_dirname=dirname else as_dirname=false fi as_me=`$as_basename -- "$0" || $as_expr X/"$0" : '.*/\([^/][^/]*\)/*$' \| \ X"$0" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \ X"$0" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null || $as_echo X/"$0" | sed '/^.*\/\([^/][^/]*\)\/*$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\/\(\/\/\)$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\/\(\/\).*/{ s//\1/ q } s/.*/./; q'` # Avoid depending upon Character Ranges. as_cr_letters='abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz' as_cr_LETTERS='ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ' as_cr_Letters=$as_cr_letters$as_cr_LETTERS as_cr_digits='0123456789' as_cr_alnum=$as_cr_Letters$as_cr_digits ECHO_C= ECHO_N= ECHO_T= case `echo -n x` in #((((( -n*) case `echo 'xy\c'` in *c*) ECHO_T=' ';; # ECHO_T is single tab character. xy) ECHO_C='\c';; *) echo `echo ksh88 bug on AIX 6.1` > /dev/null ECHO_T=' ';; esac;; *) ECHO_N='-n';; esac rm -f conf$$ conf$$.exe conf$$.file if test -d conf$$.dir; then rm -f conf$$.dir/conf$$.file else rm -f conf$$.dir mkdir conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null fi if (echo >conf$$.file) 2>/dev/null; then if ln -s conf$$.file conf$$ 2>/dev/null; then as_ln_s='ln -s' # ... but there are two gotchas: # 1) On MSYS, both `ln -s file dir' and `ln file dir' fail. # 2) DJGPP < 2.04 has no symlinks; `ln -s' creates a wrapper executable. # In both cases, we have to default to `cp -p'. ln -s conf$$.file conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null && test ! -f conf$$.exe || as_ln_s='cp -p' elif ln conf$$.file conf$$ 2>/dev/null; then as_ln_s=ln else as_ln_s='cp -p' fi else as_ln_s='cp -p' fi rm -f conf$$ conf$$.exe conf$$.dir/conf$$.file conf$$.file rmdir conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null # as_fn_mkdir_p # ------------- # Create "$as_dir" as a directory, including parents if necessary. as_fn_mkdir_p () { case $as_dir in #( -*) as_dir=./$as_dir;; esac test -d "$as_dir" || eval $as_mkdir_p || { as_dirs= while :; do case $as_dir in #( *\'*) as_qdir=`$as_echo "$as_dir" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"`;; #'( *) as_qdir=$as_dir;; esac as_dirs="'$as_qdir' $as_dirs" as_dir=`$as_dirname -- "$as_dir" || $as_expr X"$as_dir" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \ X"$as_dir" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \ X"$as_dir" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \ X"$as_dir" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null || $as_echo X"$as_dir" | sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\/\)$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\).*/{ s//\1/ q } s/.*/./; q'` test -d "$as_dir" && break done test -z "$as_dirs" || eval "mkdir $as_dirs" } || test -d "$as_dir" || as_fn_error "cannot create directory $as_dir" } # as_fn_mkdir_p if mkdir -p . 2>/dev/null; then as_mkdir_p='mkdir -p "$as_dir"' else test -d ./-p && rmdir ./-p as_mkdir_p=false fi if test -x / >/dev/null 2>&1; then as_test_x='test -x' else if ls -dL / >/dev/null 2>&1; then as_ls_L_option=L else as_ls_L_option= fi as_test_x=' eval sh -c '\'' if test -d "$1"; then test -d "$1/."; else case $1 in #( -*)set "./$1";; esac; case `ls -ld'$as_ls_L_option' "$1" 2>/dev/null` in #(( ???[sx]*):;;*)false;;esac;fi '\'' sh ' fi as_executable_p=$as_test_x # Sed expression to map a string onto a valid CPP name. as_tr_cpp="eval sed 'y%*$as_cr_letters%P$as_cr_LETTERS%;s%[^_$as_cr_alnum]%_%g'" # Sed expression to map a string onto a valid variable name. as_tr_sh="eval sed 'y%*+%pp%;s%[^_$as_cr_alnum]%_%g'" exec 6>&1 ## ----------------------------------- ## ## Main body of $CONFIG_STATUS script. ## ## ----------------------------------- ## _ASEOF test $as_write_fail = 0 && chmod +x $CONFIG_STATUS || ac_write_fail=1 cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 # Save the log message, to keep $0 and so on meaningful, and to # report actual input values of CONFIG_FILES etc. instead of their # values after options handling. ac_log=" This file was extended by mcron $as_me 1.0.6, which was generated by GNU Autoconf 2.65. Invocation command line was CONFIG_FILES = $CONFIG_FILES CONFIG_HEADERS = $CONFIG_HEADERS CONFIG_LINKS = $CONFIG_LINKS CONFIG_COMMANDS = $CONFIG_COMMANDS $ $0 $@ on `(hostname || uname -n) 2>/dev/null | sed 1q` " _ACEOF case $ac_config_files in *" "*) set x $ac_config_files; shift; ac_config_files=$*;; esac cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 # Files that config.status was made for. config_files="$ac_config_files" config_commands="$ac_config_commands" _ACEOF cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 ac_cs_usage="\ \`$as_me' instantiates files and other configuration actions from templates according to the current configuration. Unless the files and actions are specified as TAGs, all are instantiated by default. Usage: $0 [OPTION]... [TAG]... -h, --help print this help, then exit -V, --version print version number and configuration settings, then exit --config print configuration, then exit -q, --quiet, --silent do not print progress messages -d, --debug don't remove temporary files --recheck update $as_me by reconfiguring in the same conditions --file=FILE[:TEMPLATE] instantiate the configuration file FILE Configuration files: $config_files Configuration commands: $config_commands Report bugs to ." _ACEOF cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 ac_cs_config="`$as_echo "$ac_configure_args" | sed 's/^ //; s/[\\""\`\$]/\\\\&/g'`" ac_cs_version="\\ mcron config.status 1.0.6 configured by $0, generated by GNU Autoconf 2.65, with options \\"\$ac_cs_config\\" Copyright (C) 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This config.status script is free software; the Free Software Foundation gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it." ac_pwd='$ac_pwd' srcdir='$srcdir' INSTALL='$INSTALL' MKDIR_P='$MKDIR_P' AWK='$AWK' test -n "\$AWK" || AWK=awk _ACEOF cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 # The default lists apply if the user does not specify any file. ac_need_defaults=: while test $# != 0 do case $1 in --*=*) ac_option=`expr "X$1" : 'X\([^=]*\)='` ac_optarg=`expr "X$1" : 'X[^=]*=\(.*\)'` ac_shift=: ;; *) ac_option=$1 ac_optarg=$2 ac_shift=shift ;; esac case $ac_option in # Handling of the options. -recheck | --recheck | --rechec | --reche | --rech | --rec | --re | --r) ac_cs_recheck=: ;; --version | --versio | --versi | --vers | --ver | --ve | --v | -V ) $as_echo "$ac_cs_version"; exit ;; --config | --confi | --conf | --con | --co | --c ) $as_echo "$ac_cs_config"; exit ;; --debug | --debu | --deb | --de | --d | -d ) debug=: ;; --file | --fil | --fi | --f ) $ac_shift case $ac_optarg in *\'*) ac_optarg=`$as_echo "$ac_optarg" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"` ;; esac as_fn_append CONFIG_FILES " '$ac_optarg'" ac_need_defaults=false;; --he | --h | --help | --hel | -h ) $as_echo "$ac_cs_usage"; exit ;; -q | -quiet | --quiet | --quie | --qui | --qu | --q \ | -silent | --silent | --silen | --sile | --sil | --si | --s) ac_cs_silent=: ;; # This is an error. -*) as_fn_error "unrecognized option: \`$1' Try \`$0 --help' for more information." ;; *) as_fn_append ac_config_targets " $1" ac_need_defaults=false ;; esac shift done ac_configure_extra_args= if $ac_cs_silent; then exec 6>/dev/null ac_configure_extra_args="$ac_configure_extra_args --silent" fi _ACEOF cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 if \$ac_cs_recheck; then set X '$SHELL' '$0' $ac_configure_args \$ac_configure_extra_args --no-create --no-recursion shift \$as_echo "running CONFIG_SHELL=$SHELL \$*" >&6 CONFIG_SHELL='$SHELL' export CONFIG_SHELL exec "\$@" fi _ACEOF cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 exec 5>>config.log { echo sed 'h;s/./-/g;s/^.../## /;s/...$/ ##/;p;x;p;x' <<_ASBOX ## Running $as_me. ## _ASBOX $as_echo "$ac_log" } >&5 _ACEOF cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 # # INIT-COMMANDS # AMDEP_TRUE="$AMDEP_TRUE" ac_aux_dir="$ac_aux_dir" _ACEOF cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 # Handling of arguments. for ac_config_target in $ac_config_targets do case $ac_config_target in "depfiles") CONFIG_COMMANDS="$CONFIG_COMMANDS depfiles" ;; "makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES makefile" ;; "config.scm") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES config.scm" ;; "mcron.texinfo") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES mcron.texinfo" ;; *) as_fn_error "invalid argument: \`$ac_config_target'" "$LINENO" 5;; esac done # If the user did not use the arguments to specify the items to instantiate, # then the envvar interface is used. Set only those that are not. # We use the long form for the default assignment because of an extremely # bizarre bug on SunOS 4.1.3. if $ac_need_defaults; then test "${CONFIG_FILES+set}" = set || CONFIG_FILES=$config_files test "${CONFIG_COMMANDS+set}" = set || CONFIG_COMMANDS=$config_commands fi # Have a temporary directory for convenience. Make it in the build tree # simply because there is no reason against having it here, and in addition, # creating and moving files from /tmp can sometimes cause problems. # Hook for its removal unless debugging. # Note that there is a small window in which the directory will not be cleaned: # after its creation but before its name has been assigned to `$tmp'. $debug || { tmp= trap 'exit_status=$? { test -z "$tmp" || test ! -d "$tmp" || rm -fr "$tmp"; } && exit $exit_status ' 0 trap 'as_fn_exit 1' 1 2 13 15 } # Create a (secure) tmp directory for tmp files. { tmp=`(umask 077 && mktemp -d "./confXXXXXX") 2>/dev/null` && test -n "$tmp" && test -d "$tmp" } || { tmp=./conf$$-$RANDOM (umask 077 && mkdir "$tmp") } || as_fn_error "cannot create a temporary directory in ." "$LINENO" 5 # Set up the scripts for CONFIG_FILES section. # No need to generate them if there are no CONFIG_FILES. # This happens for instance with `./config.status config.h'. if test -n "$CONFIG_FILES"; then ac_cr=`echo X | tr X '\015'` # On cygwin, bash can eat \r inside `` if the user requested igncr. # But we know of no other shell where ac_cr would be empty at this # point, so we can use a bashism as a fallback. if test "x$ac_cr" = x; then eval ac_cr=\$\'\\r\' fi ac_cs_awk_cr=`$AWK 'BEGIN { print "a\rb" }' /dev/null` if test "$ac_cs_awk_cr" = "a${ac_cr}b"; then ac_cs_awk_cr='\r' else ac_cs_awk_cr=$ac_cr fi echo 'BEGIN {' >"$tmp/subs1.awk" && _ACEOF { echo "cat >conf$$subs.awk <<_ACEOF" && echo "$ac_subst_vars" | sed 's/.*/&!$&$ac_delim/' && echo "_ACEOF" } >conf$$subs.sh || as_fn_error "could not make $CONFIG_STATUS" "$LINENO" 5 ac_delim_num=`echo "$ac_subst_vars" | grep -c '$'` ac_delim='%!_!# ' for ac_last_try in false false false false false :; do . ./conf$$subs.sh || as_fn_error "could not make $CONFIG_STATUS" "$LINENO" 5 ac_delim_n=`sed -n "s/.*$ac_delim\$/X/p" conf$$subs.awk | grep -c X` if test $ac_delim_n = $ac_delim_num; then break elif $ac_last_try; then as_fn_error "could not make $CONFIG_STATUS" "$LINENO" 5 else ac_delim="$ac_delim!$ac_delim _$ac_delim!! " fi done rm -f conf$$subs.sh cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 cat >>"\$tmp/subs1.awk" <<\\_ACAWK && _ACEOF sed -n ' h s/^/S["/; s/!.*/"]=/ p g s/^[^!]*!// :repl t repl s/'"$ac_delim"'$// t delim :nl h s/\(.\{148\}\)..*/\1/ t more1 s/["\\]/\\&/g; s/^/"/; s/$/\\n"\\/ p n b repl :more1 s/["\\]/\\&/g; s/^/"/; s/$/"\\/ p g s/.\{148\}// t nl :delim h s/\(.\{148\}\)..*/\1/ t more2 s/["\\]/\\&/g; s/^/"/; s/$/"/ p b :more2 s/["\\]/\\&/g; s/^/"/; s/$/"\\/ p g s/.\{148\}// t delim ' >$CONFIG_STATUS || ac_write_fail=1 rm -f conf$$subs.awk cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 _ACAWK cat >>"\$tmp/subs1.awk" <<_ACAWK && for (key in S) S_is_set[key] = 1 FS = "" } { line = $ 0 nfields = split(line, field, "@") substed = 0 len = length(field[1]) for (i = 2; i < nfields; i++) { key = field[i] keylen = length(key) if (S_is_set[key]) { value = S[key] line = substr(line, 1, len) "" value "" substr(line, len + keylen + 3) len += length(value) + length(field[++i]) substed = 1 } else len += 1 + keylen } print line } _ACAWK _ACEOF cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 if sed "s/$ac_cr//" < /dev/null > /dev/null 2>&1; then sed "s/$ac_cr\$//; s/$ac_cr/$ac_cs_awk_cr/g" else cat fi < "$tmp/subs1.awk" > "$tmp/subs.awk" \ || as_fn_error "could not setup config files machinery" "$LINENO" 5 _ACEOF # VPATH may cause trouble with some makes, so we remove $(srcdir), # ${srcdir} and @srcdir@ from VPATH if srcdir is ".", strip leading and # trailing colons and then remove the whole line if VPATH becomes empty # (actually we leave an empty line to preserve line numbers). if test "x$srcdir" = x.; then ac_vpsub='/^[ ]*VPATH[ ]*=/{ s/:*\$(srcdir):*/:/ s/:*\${srcdir}:*/:/ s/:*@srcdir@:*/:/ s/^\([^=]*=[ ]*\):*/\1/ s/:*$// s/^[^=]*=[ ]*$// }' fi cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 fi # test -n "$CONFIG_FILES" eval set X " :F $CONFIG_FILES :C $CONFIG_COMMANDS" shift for ac_tag do case $ac_tag in :[FHLC]) ac_mode=$ac_tag; continue;; esac case $ac_mode$ac_tag in :[FHL]*:*);; :L* | :C*:*) as_fn_error "invalid tag \`$ac_tag'" "$LINENO" 5;; :[FH]-) ac_tag=-:-;; :[FH]*) ac_tag=$ac_tag:$ac_tag.in;; esac ac_save_IFS=$IFS IFS=: set x $ac_tag IFS=$ac_save_IFS shift ac_file=$1 shift case $ac_mode in :L) ac_source=$1;; :[FH]) ac_file_inputs= for ac_f do case $ac_f in -) ac_f="$tmp/stdin";; *) # Look for the file first in the build tree, then in the source tree # (if the path is not absolute). The absolute path cannot be DOS-style, # because $ac_f cannot contain `:'. test -f "$ac_f" || case $ac_f in [\\/$]*) false;; *) test -f "$srcdir/$ac_f" && ac_f="$srcdir/$ac_f";; esac || as_fn_error "cannot find input file: \`$ac_f'" "$LINENO" 5;; esac case $ac_f in *\'*) ac_f=`$as_echo "$ac_f" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"`;; esac as_fn_append ac_file_inputs " '$ac_f'" done # Let's still pretend it is `configure' which instantiates (i.e., don't # use $as_me), people would be surprised to read: # /* config.h. Generated by config.status. */ configure_input='Generated from '` $as_echo "$*" | sed 's|^[^:]*/||;s|:[^:]*/|, |g' `' by configure.' if test x"$ac_file" != x-; then configure_input="$ac_file. $configure_input" { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: creating $ac_file" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: creating $ac_file" >&6;} fi # Neutralize special characters interpreted by sed in replacement strings. case $configure_input in #( *\&* | *\|* | *\\* ) ac_sed_conf_input=`$as_echo "$configure_input" | sed 's/[\\\\&|]/\\\\&/g'`;; #( *) ac_sed_conf_input=$configure_input;; esac case $ac_tag in *:-:* | *:-) cat >"$tmp/stdin" \ || as_fn_error "could not create $ac_file" "$LINENO" 5 ;; esac ;; esac ac_dir=`$as_dirname -- "$ac_file" || $as_expr X"$ac_file" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \ X"$ac_file" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \ X"$ac_file" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \ X"$ac_file" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null || $as_echo X"$ac_file" | sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\/\)$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\).*/{ s//\1/ q } s/.*/./; q'` as_dir="$ac_dir"; as_fn_mkdir_p ac_builddir=. case "$ac_dir" in .) ac_dir_suffix= ac_top_builddir_sub=. ac_top_build_prefix= ;; *) ac_dir_suffix=/`$as_echo "$ac_dir" | sed 's|^\.[\\/]||'` # A ".." for each directory in $ac_dir_suffix. ac_top_builddir_sub=`$as_echo "$ac_dir_suffix" | sed 's|/[^\\/]*|/..|g;s|/||'` case $ac_top_builddir_sub in "") ac_top_builddir_sub=. ac_top_build_prefix= ;; *) ac_top_build_prefix=$ac_top_builddir_sub/ ;; esac ;; esac ac_abs_top_builddir=$ac_pwd ac_abs_builddir=$ac_pwd$ac_dir_suffix # for backward compatibility: ac_top_builddir=$ac_top_build_prefix case $srcdir in .) # We are building in place. ac_srcdir=. ac_top_srcdir=$ac_top_builddir_sub ac_abs_top_srcdir=$ac_pwd ;; [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]* ) # Absolute name. ac_srcdir=$srcdir$ac_dir_suffix; ac_top_srcdir=$srcdir ac_abs_top_srcdir=$srcdir ;; *) # Relative name. ac_srcdir=$ac_top_build_prefix$srcdir$ac_dir_suffix ac_top_srcdir=$ac_top_build_prefix$srcdir ac_abs_top_srcdir=$ac_pwd/$srcdir ;; esac ac_abs_srcdir=$ac_abs_top_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix case $ac_mode in :F) # # CONFIG_FILE # case $INSTALL in [\\/$]* | ?:[\\/]* ) ac_INSTALL=$INSTALL ;; *) ac_INSTALL=$ac_top_build_prefix$INSTALL ;; esac ac_MKDIR_P=$MKDIR_P case $MKDIR_P in [\\/$]* | ?:[\\/]* ) ;; */*) ac_MKDIR_P=$ac_top_build_prefix$MKDIR_P ;; esac _ACEOF cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 # If the template does not know about datarootdir, expand it. # FIXME: This hack should be removed a few years after 2.60. ac_datarootdir_hack=; ac_datarootdir_seen= ac_sed_dataroot=' /datarootdir/ { p q } /@datadir@/p /@docdir@/p /@infodir@/p /@localedir@/p /@mandir@/p' case `eval "sed -n \"\$ac_sed_dataroot\" $ac_file_inputs"` in *datarootdir*) ac_datarootdir_seen=yes;; *@datadir@*|*@docdir@*|*@infodir@*|*@localedir@*|*@mandir@*) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: $ac_file_inputs seems to ignore the --datarootdir setting" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: $ac_file_inputs seems to ignore the --datarootdir setting" >&2;} _ACEOF cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 ac_datarootdir_hack=' s&@datadir@&$datadir&g s&@docdir@&$docdir&g s&@infodir@&$infodir&g s&@localedir@&$localedir&g s&@mandir@&$mandir&g s&\\\${datarootdir}&$datarootdir&g' ;; esac _ACEOF # Neutralize VPATH when `$srcdir' = `.'. # Shell code in configure.ac might set extrasub. # FIXME: do we really want to maintain this feature? cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 ac_sed_extra="$ac_vpsub $extrasub _ACEOF cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1 :t /@[a-zA-Z_][a-zA-Z_0-9]*@/!b s|@configure_input@|$ac_sed_conf_input|;t t s&@top_builddir@&$ac_top_builddir_sub&;t t s&@top_build_prefix@&$ac_top_build_prefix&;t t s&@srcdir@&$ac_srcdir&;t t s&@abs_srcdir@&$ac_abs_srcdir&;t t s&@top_srcdir@&$ac_top_srcdir&;t t s&@abs_top_srcdir@&$ac_abs_top_srcdir&;t t s&@builddir@&$ac_builddir&;t t s&@abs_builddir@&$ac_abs_builddir&;t t s&@abs_top_builddir@&$ac_abs_top_builddir&;t t s&@INSTALL@&$ac_INSTALL&;t t s&@MKDIR_P@&$ac_MKDIR_P&;t t $ac_datarootdir_hack " eval sed \"\$ac_sed_extra\" "$ac_file_inputs" | $AWK -f "$tmp/subs.awk" >$tmp/out \ || as_fn_error "could not create $ac_file" "$LINENO" 5 test -z "$ac_datarootdir_hack$ac_datarootdir_seen" && { ac_out=`sed -n '/\${datarootdir}/p' "$tmp/out"`; test -n "$ac_out"; } && { ac_out=`sed -n '/^[ ]*datarootdir[ ]*:*=/p' "$tmp/out"`; test -z "$ac_out"; } && { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: $ac_file contains a reference to the variable \`datarootdir' which seems to be undefined. Please make sure it is defined." >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: $ac_file contains a reference to the variable \`datarootdir' which seems to be undefined. Please make sure it is defined." >&2;} rm -f "$tmp/stdin" case $ac_file in -) cat "$tmp/out" && rm -f "$tmp/out";; *) rm -f "$ac_file" && mv "$tmp/out" "$ac_file";; esac \ || as_fn_error "could not create $ac_file" "$LINENO" 5 ;; :C) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: executing $ac_file commands" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: executing $ac_file commands" >&6;} ;; esac case $ac_file$ac_mode in "depfiles":C) test x"$AMDEP_TRUE" != x"" || { # Autoconf 2.62 quotes --file arguments for eval, but not when files # are listed without --file. Let's play safe and only enable the eval # if we detect the quoting. case $CONFIG_FILES in *\'*) eval set x "$CONFIG_FILES" ;; *) set x $CONFIG_FILES ;; esac shift for mf do # Strip MF so we end up with the name of the file. mf=`echo "$mf" | sed -e 's/:.*$//'` # Check whether this is an Automake generated Makefile or not. # We used to match only the files named `Makefile.in', but # some people rename them; so instead we look at the file content. # Grep'ing the first line is not enough: some people post-process # each Makefile.in and add a new line on top of each file to say so. # Grep'ing the whole file is not good either: AIX grep has a line # limit of 2048, but all sed's we know have understand at least 4000. if sed -n 's,^#.*generated by automake.*,X,p' "$mf" | grep X >/dev/null 2>&1; then dirpart=`$as_dirname -- "$mf" || $as_expr X"$mf" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \ X"$mf" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \ X"$mf" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \ X"$mf" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null || $as_echo X"$mf" | sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\/\)$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\).*/{ s//\1/ q } s/.*/./; q'` else continue fi # Extract the definition of DEPDIR, am__include, and am__quote # from the Makefile without running `make'. DEPDIR=`sed -n 's/^DEPDIR = //p' < "$mf"` test -z "$DEPDIR" && continue am__include=`sed -n 's/^am__include = //p' < "$mf"` test -z "am__include" && continue am__quote=`sed -n 's/^am__quote = //p' < "$mf"` # When using ansi2knr, U may be empty or an underscore; expand it U=`sed -n 's/^U = //p' < "$mf"` # Find all dependency output files, they are included files with # $(DEPDIR) in their names. We invoke sed twice because it is the # simplest approach to changing $(DEPDIR) to its actual value in the # expansion. for file in `sed -n " s/^$am__include $am__quote\(.*(DEPDIR).*\)$am__quote"'$/\1/p' <"$mf" | \ sed -e 's/\$(DEPDIR)/'"$DEPDIR"'/g' -e 's/\$U/'"$U"'/g'`; do # Make sure the directory exists. test -f "$dirpart/$file" && continue fdir=`$as_dirname -- "$file" || $as_expr X"$file" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \ X"$file" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \ X"$file" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \ X"$file" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null || $as_echo X"$file" | sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\/\)$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\).*/{ s//\1/ q } s/.*/./; q'` as_dir=$dirpart/$fdir; as_fn_mkdir_p # echo "creating $dirpart/$file" echo '# dummy' > "$dirpart/$file" done done } ;; esac done # for ac_tag as_fn_exit 0 _ACEOF ac_clean_files=$ac_clean_files_save test $ac_write_fail = 0 || as_fn_error "write failure creating $CONFIG_STATUS" "$LINENO" 5 # configure is writing to config.log, and then calls config.status. # config.status does its own redirection, appending to config.log. # Unfortunately, on DOS this fails, as config.log is still kept open # by configure, so config.status won't be able to write to it; its # output is simply discarded. So we exec the FD to /dev/null, # effectively closing config.log, so it can be properly (re)opened and # appended to by config.status. When coming back to configure, we # need to make the FD available again. if test "$no_create" != yes; then ac_cs_success=: ac_config_status_args= test "$silent" = yes && ac_config_status_args="$ac_config_status_args --quiet" exec 5>/dev/null $SHELL $CONFIG_STATUS $ac_config_status_args || ac_cs_success=false exec 5>>config.log # Use ||, not &&, to avoid exiting from the if with $? = 1, which # would make configure fail if this is the last instruction. $ac_cs_success || as_fn_exit $? fi if test -n "$ac_unrecognized_opts" && test "$enable_option_checking" != no; then { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: unrecognized options: $ac_unrecognized_opts" >&5 $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: unrecognized options: $ac_unrecognized_opts" >&2;} fi mcron-1.0.6/redirect.scm0000644000175000017500000001673311404766201012075 00000000000000;; Copyright (C) 2003 Dale Mellor ;; ;; This file is part of GNU mcron. ;; ;; GNU mcron is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under ;; the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free ;; Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) ;; any later version. ;; ;; GNU mcron is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ;; ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or ;; FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for ;; more details. ;; ;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along ;; with GNU mcron. If not, see . ;; This module provides the (with-mail-out action . user) procedure. This ;; procedure runs the action in a child process, allowing the user control over ;; the input and output (including standard error). The input is governed (only ;; in the case of a string action) by the placing of percentage signs in the ;; string; the first delimits the true action from the standard input, and ;; subsequent ones denote newlines to be placed into the input. The output (if ;; there actually is any) is controlled by the MAILTO environment variable. If ;; this is not defined, output is e-mailed to the user passed as argument, if ;; any, or else the owner of the action; if defined but empty then any output is ;; sunk to /dev/null; otherwise output is e-mailed to the address held in the ;; MAILTO variable. (define-module (mcron redirect) #:export (with-mail-out) #:use-module ((mcron config) :select (config-sendmail)) #:use-module (mcron vixie-time)) ;; An action string consists of a sequence of characters forming a command ;; executable by the shell, possibly followed by an non-escaped percentage ;; sign. The text after the percentage sign is to be fed to the command's ;; standard input, with further unescaped percents being substituted with ;; newlines. The escape character can itself be escaped. ;; ;; This regexp separates the two halves of the string, and indeed determines if ;; the second part is present. (define action-string-regexp (make-regexp "((\\\\%|[^%])*)%(.*)$")) ;; This regexp identifies an escaped percentage sign. (define e-percent (make-regexp "\\\\%")) ;; Function to execute some action (this may be a shell command, lamdba function ;; or list of scheme procedures) in a forked process, with the input coming from ;; the string, and output (including the error output) being sent to a pipe ;; opened on a mail transport. (use-modules (ice-9 popen)) (define (with-mail-out action . user) ;; Determine the name of the user who is to recieve the mail, looking for a ;; name in the optional user argument, then in the MAILTO environment ;; variable, and finally in the LOGNAME environment variable. (The case ;; MAILTO="" is dealt with specially below.) (let* ((mailto (getenv "MAILTO")) (user (cond (mailto mailto) ((not (null? user)) (car user)) (else (getenv "LOGNAME")))) (parent->child (pipe)) (child->parent (pipe)) (child-pid (primitive-fork))) ;; The child process. Close redundant ends of pipes, remap the standard ;; streams, and run the action, taking care to chop off the input part of an ;; action string. (if (eqv? child-pid 0) (begin (close (cdr parent->child)) (close (car child->parent)) (dup2 (port->fdes (car parent->child)) 0) (close (car parent->child)) (dup2 (port->fdes (cdr child->parent)) 1) (close (cdr child->parent)) (dup2 1 2) (cond ((string? action) (let ((match (regexp-exec action-string-regexp action))) (system (if match (let ((action (match:substring match 1))) (do ((match (regexp-exec e-percent action) (regexp-exec e-percent action))) ((not match)) (set! action (string-append (match:prefix match) "%" (match:suffix match)))) action) action)))) ((procedure? action) (action)) ((list? action) (primitive-eval action))) (primitive-exit 0))) ;; The parent process. Get rid of redundant pipe ends. (close (car parent->child)) (close (cdr child->parent)) ;; Put stuff to child from after '%' in command line, replacing ;; other %'s with newlines. Ugly or what? (if (string? action) (let ((port (cdr parent->child)) (match (regexp-exec action-string-regexp action))) (if (and match (match:substring match 3)) (with-input-from-string (match:substring match 3) (lambda () (let loop () (let ((next-char (read-char))) (if (not (eof-object? next-char)) (cond ((char=? next-char #\%) (newline port) (loop)) ((char=? next-char #\\) (let ((escape (read-char))) (if (eof-object? escape) (display #\\ port) (if (char=? escape #\%) (begin (display #\% port) (loop)) (begin (display #\\ port) (display escape port) (loop)))))) (else (display next-char port) (loop))))))))))) ;; So the child process doesn't hang on to its input expecting more stuff. (close (cdr parent->child)) ;; That's got streaming into the child's input out of the way, now we stream ;; the child's output to a mail sink, but only if there is something there ;; in the first place. (if (eof-object? (peek-char (car child->parent))) (read-char (car child->parent)) (begin (set-current-output-port (if (and (string? mailto) (string=? mailto "")) (open-output-file "/dev/null") (open-output-pipe (string-append config-sendmail " " user)))) (set-current-input-port (car child->parent)) (display "To: ") (display user) (newline) (display "From: mcron") (newline) (display (string-append "Subject: " user "@" (gethostname))) (newline) (newline) (do ((next-char (read-char) (read-char))) ((eof-object? next-char)) (display next-char)))) (close (car child->parent)) (waitpid child-pid))) mcron-1.0.6/configure.ac0000644000175000017500000001307511407206147012053 00000000000000# -*- Autoconf -*- # Process this file with autoconf to produce a configure script. # Copyright (C) 2003, 2005 Dale Mellor # # This file is part of GNU mcron. # # GNU mcron is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under # the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free # Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) # any later version. # # GNU mcron is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT # ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or # FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for # more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along # with GNU mcron. If not, see . AC_PREREQ(2.61) AC_INIT([mcron], [1.0.6], [dale_mellor@users.sourceforge.net]) AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether debugging is requested]) AC_ARG_ENABLE(debug, AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-debug], [enable debugging and traceback on error]), CONFIG_DEBUG=$enableval, CONFIG_DEBUG=no) AC_MSG_RESULT($CONFIG_DEBUG) if test "$CONFIG_DEBUG" = "no"; then CONFIG_DEBUG="#f" else CONFIG_DEBUG="#t" fi AC_SUBST(CONFIG_DEBUG) AC_PROG_AWK AC_PROG_EGREP AC_PROG_CC GUILE_PROGS GUILE_FLAGS GUILE_SITE_DIR # Checks for programs. AC_CHECK_PROGS(SED, sed) if test "x$ac_cv_prog_SED" = "x"; then AC_MSG_ERROR(sed not found) fi AC_CHECK_PROGS(HEAD, head) if test "x$ac_cv_prog_HEAD" = "x"; then AC_MSG_ERROR(head not found) fi AC_CHECK_PROGS(ED, ed) if test "x$ac_cv_prog_ED" = "x"; then AC_MSG_ERROR(ed not found) fi AC_CHECK_PROGS(WHICH, which) if test "x$ac_cv_prog_WHICH" = "x"; then AC_MSG_ERROR(which not found) fi AC_CHECK_PROGS(CP, cp) if test "x$ac_cv_prog_CP" = "x"; then AC_MSG_ERROR(cp not found) fi # Check the Guile version. AC_MSG_CHECKING(for guile version >= 1.8.0) if [$GUILE --version | $HEAD -1 | $AWK '{print $2}' | \ $EGREP -q '^1\.8\.']; then AC_MSG_RESULT(OK) else AC_MSG_ERROR([Sorry, Guile 1.8.0 or greater is needed to run mcron]) fi # Now find a sendmail or equivalent. AC_CHECK_PROGS(SENDMAIL, sendmail) if test "x$ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL" != "x"; then AC_MSG_CHECKING(sendmail path and arguments) ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL="`$ac_cv_prog_WHICH sendmail` -FCronDaemon -odi -oem " dnl -or0s" AC_MSG_RESULT($ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL) else AC_CHECK_PROGS(SENDMAIL, mail) if test "x$ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL" != "x"; then AC_MSG_CHECKING(mail path) ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL="`$ac_cv_prog_WHICH mail` -d " AC_MSG_RESULT($ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL) else AC_MSG_RESULT(No mail program found) fi fi SENDMAIL=$ac_cv_prog_SENDMAIL # Find out if we are avoiding Vixie. AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether to avoid clobbering a Vixie installation]) AC_ARG_ENABLE(no-vixie-clobber, AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-no-vixie-clobber], [do not install with program names that would override a legacy cron installation]), NO_VIXIE_CLOBBER=$enableval, NO_VIXIE_CLOBBER=[no]) AC_MSG_RESULT($NO_VIXIE_CLOBBER) AC_SUBST(NO_VIXIE_CLOBBER) # Configure the various files that mcron uses at runtime. AC_MSG_CHECKING([which spool directory to use]) AC_ARG_WITH(spool-dir, AC_HELP_STRING([--with-spool-dir], [the crontab spool directory (/var/cron/tabs)]), CONFIG_SPOOL_DIR=$withval, CONFIG_SPOOL_DIR=[/var/cron/tabs]) AC_MSG_RESULT($CONFIG_SPOOL_DIR) AC_SUBST(CONFIG_SPOOL_DIR) AC_MSG_CHECKING([name of socket]) AC_ARG_WITH(socket-file, AC_HELP_STRING([--with-socket-file], [unix pathname for cron socket (/var/cron/socket)]), CONFIG_SOCKET_FILE=$withval, CONFIG_SOCKET_FILE=[/var/cron/socket]) AC_MSG_RESULT($CONFIG_SOCKET_FILE) AC_SUBST(CONFIG_SOCKET_FILE) AC_MSG_CHECKING([name of allow file]) AC_ARG_WITH(allow-file, AC_HELP_STRING([--with-allow-file], [the file of allowed users (/var/cron/allow)]), CONFIG_ALLOW_FILE=$withval, CONFIG_ALLOW_FILE=[/var/cron/allow]) AC_MSG_RESULT($CONFIG_ALLOW_FILE) AC_SUBST(CONFIG_ALLOW_FILE) AC_MSG_CHECKING([name of deny file]) AC_ARG_WITH(deny-file, AC_HELP_STRING([--with-deny-file], [the file of barred users (/var/cron/deny)]), CONFIG_DENY_FILE=$withval, CONFIG_DENY_FILE=[/var/cron/deny]) AC_MSG_RESULT($CONFIG_DENY_FILE) AC_SUBST(CONFIG_DENY_FILE) AC_MSG_CHECKING([name of PID file]) AC_ARG_WITH(pid-file, AC_HELP_STRING([--with-pid-file], [the file to record cron's PID (/var/run/cron.pid)]), CONFIG_PID_FILE=$withval, CONFIG_PID_FILE=[/var/run/cron.pid]) AC_MSG_RESULT($CONFIG_PID_FILE) AC_SUBST(CONFIG_PID_FILE) AC_MSG_CHECKING([directory to hold temporary files]) AC_ARG_WITH(tmp-dir, AC_HELP_STRING([--with-tmp-dir], [directory to hold temporary files (/tmp)]), CONFIG_TMP_DIR=$withval, CONFIG_TMP_DIR=[/tmp]) AC_MSG_RESULT($CONFIG_TMP_DIR) AC_SUBST(CONFIG_TMP_DIR) # This is to support `make DESTDIR=...' real_program_prefix=`echo $program_prefix | sed s/NONE//` AC_SUBST(real_program_prefix) AC_CONFIG_FILES(makefile config.scm mcron.texinfo) AC_OUTPUT mcron-1.0.6/crontab.scm0000644000175000017500000001762211404766201011722 00000000000000;; Copyright (C) 2003 Dale Mellor ;; ;; This file is part of GNU mcron. ;; ;; GNU mcron is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under ;; the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free ;; Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) ;; any later version. ;; ;; GNU mcron is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ;; ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or ;; FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for ;; more details. ;; ;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along ;; with GNU mcron. If not, see . ;; Apart from the collecting of options and the handling of --help and --version ;; (which are done in the main.scm file), this file provides all the ;; functionality of the crontab personality. It is designed to be loaded and run ;; once, and then the calling program can exit and the crontab program will have ;; completed its function. ;; Procedure to communicate with running cron daemon that a user has modified ;; his crontab. The user name is written to the /var/cron/socket UNIX socket. (define (hit-server user-name) (catch #t (lambda () (let ((socket (socket AF_UNIX SOCK_STREAM 0))) (connect socket AF_UNIX config-socket-file) (display user-name socket) (close socket))) (lambda (key . args) (display "Warning: a cron daemon is not running.\n")))) ;; Procedure to scan a file containing one user name per line (such as ;; /var/cron/allow and /var/cron/deny), and determine if the given name is in ;; there. The procedure returns #t, #f, or '() if the file does not exist. (define (in-access-file? file name) (catch #t (lambda () (with-input-from-file file (lambda () (let loop ((input (read-line))) (if (eof-object? input) #f (if (string=? input name) #t (loop (read-line)))))))) (lambda (key . args) '()))) ;; This program should have been installed SUID root. Here we get the passwd ;; entry for the real user who is running this program. (define crontab-real-user (passwd:name (getpw (getuid)))) ;; If the real user is not allowed to use crontab due to the /var/cron/allow ;; and/or /var/cron/deny files, bomb out now. (if (or (eq? (in-access-file? config-allow-file crontab-real-user) #f) (eq? (in-access-file? config-deny-file crontab-real-user) #t)) (mcron-error 6 "Access denied by system operator.")) ;; Check that no more than one of the mutually exclusive options are being used. (if (> (+ (if (option-ref options 'edit #f) 1 0) (if (option-ref options 'list #f) 1 0) (if (option-ref options 'remove #f) 1 0)) 1) (mcron-error 7 "Only one of options -e, -l or -r can be used.")) ;; Check that a non-root user is trying to read someone else's files. (if (and (not (eqv? (getuid) 0)) (option-ref options 'user #f)) (mcron-error 8 "Only root can use the -u option.")) ;; Iff the --user option is given, the crontab-user may be different from the ;; real user. (define crontab-user (option-ref options 'user crontab-real-user)) ;; So now we know which crontab file we will be manipulating. (define crontab-file (string-append config-spool-dir "/" crontab-user)) ;; Display the prompt and wait for user to type his choice. Return #t if the ;; answer begins with 'y' or 'Y', return #f if it begins with 'n' or 'N', ;; otherwise ask again. (define (get-yes-no prompt . re-prompt) (if (not (null? re-prompt)) (display "Please answer y or n.\n")) (display (string-append prompt " ")) (let ((r (read-line))) (if (not (string-null? r)) (case (string-ref r 0) ((#\y #\Y) #t) ((#\n #\N) #f) (else (get-yes-no prompt #t))) (get-yes-no prompt #t)))) ;; There are four possible sub-personalities to the crontab personality: list, ;; remove, edit and replace (when the user uses no options but supplies file ;; names on the command line). (cond ;; In the list personality, we simply open the crontab and copy it ;; character-by-character to the standard output. If anything goes wrong, it ;; can only mean that this user does not have a crontab file. ((option-ref options 'list #f) (catch #t (lambda () (with-input-from-file crontab-file (lambda () (do ((input (read-char) (read-char))) ((eof-object? input)) (display input))))) (lambda (key . args) (display (string-append "No crontab for " crontab-user " exists.\n"))))) ;; In the edit personality, we determine the name of a temporary file and an ;; editor command, copy an existing crontab file (if it is there) to the ;; temporary file, making sure the ownership is set so the real user can edit ;; it; once the editor returns we try to read the file to check that it is ;; parseable (but do nothing more with the configuration), and if it is okay ;; (this program is still running!) we move the temporary file to the real ;; crontab, wake the cron daemon up, and remove the temporary file. If the ;; parse fails, we give user a choice of editing the file again or quitting ;; the program and losing all changes made. ((option-ref options 'edit #f) (let ((temp-file (string-append config-tmp-dir "/crontab." (number->string (getpid))))) (catch #t (lambda () (copy-file crontab-file temp-file)) (lambda (key . args) (with-output-to-file temp-file noop))) (chown temp-file (getuid) (getgid)) (let retry () (system (string-append (or (getenv "VISUAL") (getenv "EDITOR") "vi") " " temp-file)) (catch 'mcron-error (lambda () (read-vixie-file temp-file)) (lambda (key exit-code . msg) (apply mcron-error 0 msg) (if (get-yes-no "Edit again?") (retry) (begin (mcron-error 0 "Crontab not changed") (primitive-exit 0)))))) (copy-file temp-file crontab-file) (delete-file temp-file) (hit-server crontab-user))) ;; In the remove personality we simply make an effort to delete the crontab and ;; wake the daemon. No worries if this fails. ((option-ref options 'remove #f) (catch #t (lambda () (delete-file crontab-file) (hit-server crontab-user)) noop)) ;; !!!! This comment is wrong. ;; In the case of the replace personality we loop over all the arguments on the ;; command line, and for each one parse the file to make sure it is parseable ;; (but subsequently ignore the configuration), and all being well we copy it ;; to the crontab location; we deal with the standard input in the same way but ;; different. :-) In either case the server is woken so that it will read the ;; newly installed crontab. ((not (null? (option-ref options '() '()))) (let ((input-file (car (option-ref options '() '())))) (catch-mcron-error (if (string=? input-file "-") (let ((input-string (stdin->string))) (read-vixie-port (open-input-string input-string)) (with-output-to-file crontab-file (lambda () (display input-string)))) (begin (read-vixie-file input-file) (copy-file input-file crontab-file)))) (hit-server crontab-user))) ;; The user is being silly. The message here is identical to the one Vixie cron ;; used to put out, for total compatibility. (else (mcron-error 15 "usage error: file name must be specified for replace."))) mcron-1.0.6/mcron.10000644000175000017500000000262011407220521010747 00000000000000.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.37.1. .TH MCRON "1" "June 2010" "mcron " "User Commands" .SH NAME mcron \- a program to run tasks at regular (or not) intervals .SH SYNOPSIS .B mcron [\fIOPTIONS\fR] [\fIFILES\fR] .SH DESCRIPTION Run an mcron process according to the specifications in the FILES (`\-' for standard input), or use all the files in ~/.cron with .guile or .vixie extensions. .TP \fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-version\fR Display version .TP \fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR Display this help message .TP \fB\-sN\fR, \fB\-\-schedule[\fR=\fI]N\fR Display the next N jobs that will be run by mcron .TP \fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-daemon\fR Immediately detach the program from the terminal and run as a daemon process .TP \fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-stdin=\fR(guile|vixie) Format of data passed as standard input or file arguments (default guile) .SH AUTHOR Written by Dale Mellor .SH "REPORTING BUGS" Report bugs to dale_mellor@users.sourceforge.net. .PP mcron (mcron 1.0.6) .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright \(co 2003, 2006 Dale Mellor .br This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. .SH "SEE ALSO" The full documentation for .B mcron is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the .B info and .B mcron programs are properly installed at your site, the command .IP .B info mcron .PP should give you access to the complete manual. mcron-1.0.6/mcron.c0000644000175000017500000004653611405116022011045 00000000000000/* -*-c-*- */ /* * Copyright (C) 2003 Dale Mellor * * This file is part of GNU mcron. * * GNU mcron is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under * the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free * Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) * any later version. * * GNU mcron is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT * ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or * FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for * more details. * * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along * with GNU mcron. If not, see . */ /* This C code represents the thinnest possible wrapper around the Guile code which constitutes all the functionality of the mcron program. There are two plus one reasons why we need to do this, and one very unfortunate consequence. Firstly, SUID does not work on an executable script. In the end, it is the execution of the translator, in our case guile, which determines the effective user, and it is not wise to make the system guile installation SUID root! Secondly, executable scripts show up in ugly ways in listings of the system process table. Guile in particular, with its multi-line #! ...\ \n -s ...!# idiosyncracies shows up in process listings in a way that is difficult to determine what program is actually running. A third reason for the C wrapper which might be mentioned is that a security-conscious system administrator can choose to only install a binary, thus removing the possibility of a user studying a guile script and working out ways of hacking it to his own ends, or worse still finding a way to modify it to his own ends. Unfortunately, running the guile script from inside a C program means that the sigaction function does not work. Instead, it is necessary to perform the signal processing in C. The guile code itself is substituted for the GU1LE_PROGRAM_GOES_HERE (sic) token by the makefile, which processes the scheme to make it look like one big string. */ #include #include #include /* This is a function designed to be installed as a signal handler, for signals which are supposed to initiate shutdown of this program. It calls the scheme procedure (see mcron.scm for details) to do all the work, and then exits. */ void react_to_terminal_signal (int sig) { scm_eval_string (scm_take0str ("(delete-run-file)") ); exit (1); } /* This is a function designed to be callable from scheme, and sets up all the signal handlers required by the cron personality. */ SCM set_cron_signals () { static struct sigaction sa; memset (&sa, 0, sizeof (sa)); sa.sa_handler = react_to_terminal_signal; sigaction (SIGTERM, &sa, 0); sigaction (SIGINT, &sa, 0); sigaction (SIGQUIT, &sa, 0); sigaction (SIGHUP, &sa, 0); return SCM_BOOL_T; } /* The effective main function (i.e. the one that actually does some work). We register the function above with the guile system, and then execute the mcron guile program. */ void inner_main () { scm_c_define_gsubr ("c-set-cron-signals", 0, 0, 0, set_cron_signals); scm_eval_string (scm_take0str ( "(use-modules (mcron config))" "(if config-debug (begin (debug-enable 'debug)" " (debug-enable 'backtrace)))" "(use-modules (ice-9 regex) (ice-9 rdelim))" "(define command-name (match:substring (regexp-exec (make-regexp \"[[:alpha:]]*$\")" " (car (command-line)))))" "(define (mcron-error exit-code . rest)" " (with-output-to-port (current-error-port)" " (lambda ()" " (for-each display (append (list command-name \": \") rest))" " (newline)))" " (if (and exit-code (not (eq? exit-code 0)))" " (primitive-exit exit-code)))" "(defmacro catch-mcron-error (. body)" " `(catch 'mcron-error" " (lambda ()" " ,@body)" " (lambda (key exit-code . msg)" " (apply mcron-error exit-code msg))))" "(define command-type (cond ((string=? command-name \"mcron\") 'mcron)" " ((or (string=? command-name \"cron\")" " (string=? command-name \"crond\")) 'cron)" " ((string=? command-name \"crontab\") 'crontab)" " (else" " (mcron-error 12 \"The command name is invalid.\"))))" "(use-modules (ice-9 getopt-long))" "(define options" " (catch" " 'misc-error" " (lambda ()" " (getopt-long (command-line)" " (append" " (case command-type" " ((crontab)" " '((user (single-char #\\u) (value #t))" " (edit (single-char #\\e) (value #f))" " (list (single-char #\\l) (value #f))" " (remove (single-char #\\r) (value #f))))" " (else `((schedule (single-char #\\s) (value #t)" " (predicate" " ,(lambda (value)" " (string->number value))))" " (daemon (single-char #\\d) (value #f))" " (noetc (single-char #\\n) (value #f))" " (stdin (single-char #\\i) (value #t)" " (predicate" " ,(lambda (value)" " (or (string=? \"vixie\" value)" " (string=? \"guile\" value))))))))" " '((version (single-char #\\v) (value #f))" " (help (single-char #\\h) (value #f))))))" " (lambda (key func fmt args . rest)" " (mcron-error 1 (apply format (append (list #f fmt) args))))))" "(if (option-ref options 'version #f)" " (begin" " (display (string-append \"\\n" "\" command-name \" (\" config-package-string \")\\n" "Written by Dale Mellor\\n" "\\n" "Copyright (C) 2003, 2006 Dale Mellor\\n" "This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO\\n" "warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.\\n" "\"))" " (quit)))" "(if (option-ref options 'help #f)" " (begin" " (display (string-append \"" "Usage: \" (car (command-line))" "(case command-type" " ((mcron)" "\" [OPTIONS] [FILES]\\n" "Run an mcron process according to the specifications in the FILES (`-' for\\n" "standard input), or use all the files in ~/.cron with .guile or .vixie\\n" "extensions.\\n" "\\n" " -v, --version Display version\\n" " -h, --help Display this help message\\n" " -sN, --schedule[=]N Display the next N jobs that will be run by mcron\\n" " -d, --daemon Immediately detach the program from the terminal and\\n" " run as a daemon process\\n" " -i, --stdin=(guile|vixie) Format of data passed as standard input or\\n" " file arguments (default guile)\")" " ((cron)" "\" [OPTIONS]\\n" "Unless an option is specified, run a cron daemon as a detached process, \\n" "reading all the information in the users' crontabs and in /etc/crontab.\\n" "\\n" " -v, --version Display version\\n" " -h, --help Display this help message\\n" " -sN, --schedule[=]N Display the next N jobs that will be run by cron\\n" " -n, --noetc Do not check /etc/crontab for updates (HIGHLY\\n" " RECOMMENDED).\")" " ((crontab)" " (string-append \" [-u user] file\\n\"" " \" \" (car (command-line)) \" [-u user] { -e | -l | -r }\\n\"" " \" (default operation is replace, per 1003.2)\\n\"" " \" -e (edit user's crontab)\\n\"" " \" -l (list user's crontab)\\n\"" " \" -r (delete user's crontab)\\n\"))" " (else \"rubbish\"))" "\"\\n\\n" "Report bugs to \" config-package-bugreport \".\\n" "\"))" " (quit)))" "(define (delete-run-file)" " (catch #t (lambda () (delete-file config-pid-file)" " (delete-file config-socket-file))" " noop)" " (quit))" "(if (eq? command-type 'cron)" " (begin" " (if (not (eqv? (getuid) 0))" " (mcron-error 16" " \"This program must be run by the root user (and should \"" " \"have been installed as such).\"))" " (if (access? config-pid-file F_OK)" " (mcron-error 1" " \"A cron daemon is already running.\\n\"" " \" (If you are sure this is not true, remove the file\\n\"" " \" \"" " config-pid-file" " \".)\"))" " (if (not (option-ref options 'schedule #f))" " (with-output-to-file config-pid-file noop))" " (setenv \"MAILTO\" #f)" " (c-set-cron-signals)))" "(use-modules (mcron core)" " (mcron job-specifier)" " (mcron vixie-specification))" "(define (stdin->string)" " (with-output-to-string (lambda () (do ((in (read-char) (read-char)))" " ((eof-object? in))" " (display in)))))" "(if (eq? command-type 'crontab)" " (begin" "(define (hit-server user-name)" " (catch #t (lambda ()" " (let ((socket (socket AF_UNIX SOCK_STREAM 0)))" " (connect socket AF_UNIX config-socket-file)" " (display user-name socket)" " (close socket)))" " (lambda (key . args)" " (display \"Warning: a cron daemon is not running.\\n\"))))" "(define (in-access-file? file name)" " (catch #t (lambda ()" " (with-input-from-file file (lambda ()" " (let loop ((input (read-line)))" " (if (eof-object? input)" " #f" " (if (string=? input name)" " #t" " (loop (read-line))))))))" " (lambda (key . args) '())))" "(define crontab-real-user (passwd:name (getpw (getuid))))" "(if (or (eq? (in-access-file? config-allow-file crontab-real-user) #f)" " (eq? (in-access-file? config-deny-file crontab-real-user) #t))" " (mcron-error 6 \"Access denied by system operator.\"))" "(if (> (+ (if (option-ref options 'edit #f) 1 0)" " (if (option-ref options 'list #f) 1 0)" " (if (option-ref options 'remove #f) 1 0))" " 1)" " (mcron-error 7 \"Only one of options -e, -l or -r can be used.\"))" "(if (and (not (eqv? (getuid) 0))" " (option-ref options 'user #f))" " (mcron-error 8 \"Only root can use the -u option.\"))" "(define crontab-user (option-ref options 'user crontab-real-user))" "(define crontab-file (string-append config-spool-dir \"/\" crontab-user))" "(define (get-yes-no prompt . re-prompt)" " (if (not (null? re-prompt))" " (display \"Please answer y or n.\\n\"))" " (display (string-append prompt \" \"))" " (let ((r (read-line)))" " (if (not (string-null? r))" " (case (string-ref r 0)" " ((#\\y #\\Y) #t)" " ((#\\n #\\N) #f)" " (else (get-yes-no prompt #t)))" " (get-yes-no prompt #t))))" "(cond" " ((option-ref options 'list #f)" " (catch #t (lambda ()" " (with-input-from-file crontab-file (lambda ()" " (do ((input (read-char) (read-char)))" " ((eof-object? input))" " (display input)))))" " (lambda (key . args)" " (display (string-append \"No crontab for \"" " crontab-user" " \" exists.\\n\")))))" " ((option-ref options 'edit #f)" " (let ((temp-file (string-append config-tmp-dir" " \"/crontab.\"" " (number->string (getpid)))))" " (catch #t (lambda () (copy-file crontab-file temp-file))" " (lambda (key . args) (with-output-to-file temp-file noop)))" " (chown temp-file (getuid) (getgid))" " (let retry ()" " (system (string-append" " (or (getenv \"VISUAL\") (getenv \"EDITOR\") \"vi\")" " \" \"" " temp-file))" " (catch 'mcron-error" " (lambda () (read-vixie-file temp-file))" " (lambda (key exit-code . msg)" " (apply mcron-error 0 msg)" " (if (get-yes-no \"Edit again?\")" " (retry)" " (begin" " (mcron-error 0 \"Crontab not changed\")" " (primitive-exit 0))))))" " (copy-file temp-file crontab-file)" " (delete-file temp-file)" " (hit-server crontab-user)))" " ((option-ref options 'remove #f)" " (catch #t (lambda () (delete-file crontab-file)" " (hit-server crontab-user))" " noop))" " ((not (null? (option-ref options '() '())))" " (let ((input-file (car (option-ref options '() '()))))" " (catch-mcron-error" " (if (string=? input-file \"-\")" " (let ((input-string (stdin->string)))" " (read-vixie-port (open-input-string input-string))" " (with-output-to-file crontab-file (lambda ()" " (display input-string))))" " (begin" " (read-vixie-file input-file)" " (copy-file input-file crontab-file))))" " (hit-server crontab-user)))" " (else" " (mcron-error 15 \"usage error: file name must be specified for replace.\")))" " (quit)))" "(define (regular-file? file)" " (catch 'system-error" " (lambda ()" " (eq? (stat:type (stat file)) 'regular))" " (lambda (key call fmt args . rest)" " (mcron-error 0 (apply format (append (list #f fmt) args)))" " #f)))" "(define guile-file-regexp (make-regexp \"\\\\.gui(le)?$\"))" "(define vixie-file-regexp (make-regexp \"\\\\.vix(ie)?$\"))" "(define (process-user-file file-path . assume-guile)" " (cond ((string=? file-path \"-\")" " (if (string=? (option-ref options 'stdin \"guile\") \"vixie\")" " (read-vixie-port (current-input-port))" " (eval-string (stdin->string))))" " ((or (not (null? assume-guile))" " (regexp-exec guile-file-regexp file-path))" " (load file-path))" " ((regexp-exec vixie-file-regexp file-path)" " (read-vixie-file file-path))))" "(define (process-files-in-user-directory)" " (catch #t (lambda ()" " (let* ((dir-path (string-append (passwd:dir (getpw (getuid)))" " \"/.cron\"))" " (directory (opendir dir-path)))" " (do ((file-name (readdir directory) (readdir directory)))" " ((eof-object? file-name) (closedir directory))" " (process-user-file (string-append dir-path" " \"/\"" " file-name)))))" " (lambda (key . args)" " (mcron-error 13 \"Cannot read files in your ~/.cron directory.\"))))" "(define (valid-user user-name)" " (setpwent)" " (do ((entry (getpw) (getpw)))" " ((or (not entry)" " (string=? (passwd:name entry) user-name))" " (endpwent)" " entry)))" "(use-modules (srfi srfi-2)) " "(define (process-files-in-system-directory)" " (catch #t" " (lambda ()" " (let ((directory (opendir config-spool-dir)))" " (do ((file-name (readdir directory) (readdir directory)))" " ((eof-object? file-name))" " (and-let* ((user (valid-user file-name)))" " (set-configuration-user user) " " (catch-mcron-error" " (read-vixie-file (string-append config-spool-dir" " \"/\"" " file-name)))))))" " (lambda (key . args)" " (mcron-error" " 4" " \"You do not have permission to access the system crontabs.\"))))" "(case command-type" " ((mcron) (if (null? (option-ref options '() '()))" " (process-files-in-user-directory)" " (for-each (lambda (file-path)" " (process-user-file file-path #t))" " (option-ref options '() '()))))" " ((cron) (process-files-in-system-directory)" " (use-system-job-list)" " (catch-mcron-error" " (read-vixie-file \"/etc/crontab\" parse-system-vixie-line))" " (use-user-job-list)" " (if (not (option-ref options 'noetc #f))" " (begin" " (display" " \"WARNING: cron will check for updates to /etc/crontab EVERY MINUTE. If you do\\n" "not use this file, or you are prepared to manually restart cron whenever you\\n" "make a change, then it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you use the --noetc\\n" "option.\\n\")" " (set-configuration-user \"root\")" " (job '(- (next-minute-from (next-minute)) 6)" " check-system-crontab" " \"/etc/crontab update checker.\")))))" "(and-let* ((count (option-ref options 'schedule #f)))" " (set! count (string->number count))" " (display (get-schedule (if (<= count 0) 1 count)))" " (quit))" "(if (option-ref options 'daemon (eq? command-type 'cron))" " (begin" " (if (not (eqv? (primitive-fork) 0))" " (quit))" " (setsid)" " (if (eq? command-type 'cron)" " (with-output-to-file config-pid-file" " (lambda () (display (getpid)) (newline))))))" "(define fd-list '())" "(if (eq? command-type 'cron)" " (catch #t" " (lambda ()" " (let ((socket (socket AF_UNIX SOCK_STREAM 0)))" " (bind socket AF_UNIX config-socket-file)" " (listen socket 5)" " (set! fd-list (list socket))))" " (lambda (key . args)" " (delete-file config-pid-file)" " (mcron-error 1" " \"Cannot bind to UNIX socket \"" " config-socket-file))))" " " "(define (process-update-request)" " (let* ((socket (car (accept (car fd-list))))" " (user-name (read-line socket)))" " (close socket)" " (set-configuration-time (current-time))" " (catch-mcron-error" " (if (string=? user-name \"/etc/crontab\")" " (begin" " (clear-system-jobs)" " (use-system-job-list)" " (read-vixie-file \"/etc/crontab\" parse-system-vixie-line)" " (use-user-job-list))" " (let ((user (getpw user-name)))" " (remove-user-jobs user)" " (set-configuration-user user)" " (read-vixie-file (string-append config-spool-dir \"/\" user-name)))))))" "(catch-mcron-error" " (while #t" " (run-job-loop fd-list)" " (if (not (null? fd-list))" " (process-update-request))))" ) ); } /* The real main function. Does nothing but start up the guile subsystem. */ int main (int argc, char **argv) { setenv ("GUILE_LOAD_PATH", GUILE_LOAD_PATH, 1); scm_boot_guile (argc, argv, inner_main, 0); return 0; } mcron-1.0.6/main.scm0000644000175000017500000004401311404766201011210 00000000000000;; Copyright (C) 2003 Dale Mellor ;; ;; This file is part of GNU mcron. ;; ;; GNU mcron is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under ;; the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free ;; Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) ;; any later version. ;; ;; GNU mcron is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ;; ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or ;; FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for ;; more details. ;; ;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along ;; with GNU mcron. If not, see . ;; This is the 'main' routine for the whole system; the top of this file is the ;; global entry point (after the minimal C wrapper, mcron.c.template); to all ;; intents and purposes the program is pure Guile and starts here. ;; ;; This file is built into mcron.c.template by the makefile, which stringifies ;; the whole lot, and escapes quotation marks and escape characters ;; accordingly. Bear this in mind when considering literal multi-line strings. ;; ;; (l0ad "crontab.scm") (sic) is inlined by the makefile. All other ;; functionality comes through modules in .../share/guile/site/mcron/*.scm. ;; Pull in some constants set by the builder (via autoconf) at configuration ;; time. Turn debugging on if indicated. (use-modules (mcron config)) (if config-debug (begin (debug-enable 'debug) (debug-enable 'backtrace))) ;; To determine the name of the program, scan the first item of the command line ;; backwards for the first non-alphabetic character. This allows names like ;; in.cron to be accepted as an invocation of the cron command. (use-modules (ice-9 regex) (ice-9 rdelim)) (define command-name (match:substring (regexp-exec (make-regexp "[[:alpha:]]*$") (car (command-line))))) ;; Code contributed by Sergey Poznyakoff. Print an error message (made up from ;; the parts of rest), and if the error is fatal (present and non-zero) then ;; exit to the system with this code. (define (mcron-error exit-code . rest) (with-output-to-port (current-error-port) (lambda () (for-each display (append (list command-name ": ") rest)) (newline))) (if (and exit-code (not (eq? exit-code 0))) (primitive-exit exit-code))) ;; Code contributed by Sergey Poznyakoff. Execute body. If an 'mcron-error ;; exception occurs, print its diagnostics and exit with its error code. (defmacro catch-mcron-error (. body) `(catch 'mcron-error (lambda () ,@body) (lambda (key exit-code . msg) (apply mcron-error exit-code msg)))) ;; We will be doing a lot of testing of the command name, so it makes sense to ;; perform the string comparisons once and for all here. (define command-type (cond ((string=? command-name "mcron") 'mcron) ((or (string=? command-name "cron") (string=? command-name "crond")) 'cron) ((string=? command-name "crontab") 'crontab) (else (mcron-error 12 "The command name is invalid.")))) ;; There are a different set of options for the crontab personality compared to ;; all the others, with the --help and --version options common to all the ;; personalities. (use-modules (ice-9 getopt-long)) (define options (catch 'misc-error (lambda () (getopt-long (command-line) (append (case command-type ((crontab) '((user (single-char #\u) (value #t)) (edit (single-char #\e) (value #f)) (list (single-char #\l) (value #f)) (remove (single-char #\r) (value #f)))) (else `((schedule (single-char #\s) (value #t) (predicate ,(lambda (value) (string->number value)))) (daemon (single-char #\d) (value #f)) (noetc (single-char #\n) (value #f)) (stdin (single-char #\i) (value #t) (predicate ,(lambda (value) (or (string=? "vixie" value) (string=? "guile" value)))))))) '((version (single-char #\v) (value #f)) (help (single-char #\h) (value #f)))))) (lambda (key func fmt args . rest) (mcron-error 1 (apply format (append (list #f fmt) args)))))) ;; If the user asked for the version of this program, give it to him and get ;; out. (if (option-ref options 'version #f) (begin (display (string-append "\n " command-name " (" config-package-string ")\n Written by Dale Mellor\n \n Copyright (C) 2003, 2006 Dale Mellor\n This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO\n warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.\n ")) (quit))) ;; Likewise if the user requested the help text. (if (option-ref options 'help #f) (begin (display (string-append " Usage: " (car (command-line)) (case command-type ((mcron) " [OPTIONS] [FILES]\n Run an mcron process according to the specifications in the FILES (`-' for\n standard input), or use all the files in ~/.cron with .guile or .vixie\n extensions.\n \n -v, --version Display version\n -h, --help Display this help message\n -sN, --schedule[=]N Display the next N jobs that will be run by mcron\n -d, --daemon Immediately detach the program from the terminal and\n run as a daemon process\n -i, --stdin=(guile|vixie) Format of data passed as standard input or\n file arguments (default guile)") ((cron) " [OPTIONS]\n Unless an option is specified, run a cron daemon as a detached process, \n reading all the information in the users' crontabs and in /etc/crontab.\n \n -v, --version Display version\n -h, --help Display this help message\n -sN, --schedule[=]N Display the next N jobs that will be run by cron\n -n, --noetc Do not check /etc/crontab for updates (HIGHLY\n RECOMMENDED).") ((crontab) (string-append " [-u user] file\n" " " (car (command-line)) " [-u user] { -e | -l | -r }\n" " (default operation is replace, per 1003.2)\n" " -e (edit user's crontab)\n" " -l (list user's crontab)\n" " -r (delete user's crontab)\n")) (else "rubbish")) "\n\n Report bugs to " config-package-bugreport ".\n ")) (quit))) ;; This is called from the C front-end whenever a terminal signal is ;; received. We remove the /var/run/cron.pid file so that crontab and other ;; invocations of cron don't get the wrong idea that a daemon is currently ;; running. (define (delete-run-file) (catch #t (lambda () (delete-file config-pid-file) (delete-file config-socket-file)) noop) (quit)) ;; Setup the cron process, if appropriate. If there is already a ;; /var/run/cron.pid file, then we must assume a cron daemon is already running ;; and refuse to start another one. ;; ;; Otherwise, clear the MAILTO environment variable so that output from cron ;; jobs is sent to the various users (this may still be overridden in the ;; configuration files), and call the function in the C wrapper to set up ;; terminal signal responses to vector to the procedure above. The PID file will ;; be filled in properly later when we have forked our daemon process (but not ;; done if we are only viewing the schedules). (if (eq? command-type 'cron) (begin (if (not (eqv? (getuid) 0)) (mcron-error 16 "This program must be run by the root user (and should " "have been installed as such).")) (if (access? config-pid-file F_OK) (mcron-error 1 "A cron daemon is already running.\n" " (If you are sure this is not true, remove the file\n" " " config-pid-file ".)")) (if (not (option-ref options 'schedule #f)) (with-output-to-file config-pid-file noop)) (setenv "MAILTO" #f) (c-set-cron-signals))) ;; Define the functions available to the configuration files. While we're here, ;; we'll get the core loaded as well. (use-modules (mcron core) (mcron job-specifier) (mcron vixie-specification)) ;; Procedure to slurp the standard input into a string. (define (stdin->string) (with-output-to-string (lambda () (do ((in (read-char) (read-char))) ((eof-object? in)) (display in))))) ;; Now we have the procedures in place for dealing with the contents of ;; configuration files, the crontab personality is able to validate such ;; files. If the user requested the crontab personality, we load and run the ;; code here and then get out. (if (eq? command-type 'crontab) (begin (load "crontab.scm") (quit))) ;; Code contributed by Sergey Poznyakoff. Determine if the given file is a ;; regular file or not. (define (regular-file? file) (catch 'system-error (lambda () (eq? (stat:type (stat file)) 'regular)) (lambda (key call fmt args . rest) (mcron-error 0 (apply format (append (list #f fmt) args))) #f))) ;; Procedure which processes any configuration file according to the ;; extension. If a file is not recognized, it is silently ignored (this deals ;; properly with most editors' backup files, for instance). (define guile-file-regexp (make-regexp "\\.gui(le)?$")) (define vixie-file-regexp (make-regexp "\\.vix(ie)?$")) (define (process-user-file file-path . assume-guile) (cond ((string=? file-path "-") (if (string=? (option-ref options 'stdin "guile") "vixie") (read-vixie-port (current-input-port)) (eval-string (stdin->string)))) ((or (not (null? assume-guile)) (regexp-exec guile-file-regexp file-path)) (load file-path)) ((regexp-exec vixie-file-regexp file-path) (read-vixie-file file-path)))) ;; Procedure to run through all the files in a user's ~/.cron directory (only ;; happens under the mcron personality). (define (process-files-in-user-directory) (catch #t (lambda () (let* ((dir-path (string-append (passwd:dir (getpw (getuid))) "/.cron")) (directory (opendir dir-path))) (do ((file-name (readdir directory) (readdir directory))) ((eof-object? file-name) (closedir directory)) (process-user-file (string-append dir-path "/" file-name))))) (lambda (key . args) (mcron-error 13 "Cannot read files in your ~/.cron directory.")))) ;; Procedure to check that a user name is in the passwd database (it may happen ;; that a user is removed after creating a crontab). If the user name is valid, ;; the full passwd entry for that user is returned to the caller. (define (valid-user user-name) (setpwent) (do ((entry (getpw) (getpw))) ((or (not entry) (string=? (passwd:name entry) user-name)) (endpwent) entry))) ;; Procedure to process all the files in the crontab directory, making sure that ;; each file is for a legitimate user and setting the configuration-user to that ;; user. In this way, when the job procedure is run on behalf of the ;; configuration files, the jobs are registered with the system with the ;; appropriate user. Note that only the root user should be able to perform this ;; operation, but we leave it to the permissions on the /var/cron/tabs directory ;; to enforce this. (use-modules (srfi srfi-2)) ;; For and-let*. (define (process-files-in-system-directory) (catch #t (lambda () (let ((directory (opendir config-spool-dir))) (do ((file-name (readdir directory) (readdir directory))) ((eof-object? file-name)) (and-let* ((user (valid-user file-name))) (set-configuration-user user) ;; / ?? !!!! (catch-mcron-error (read-vixie-file (string-append config-spool-dir "/" file-name))))))) (lambda (key . args) (mcron-error 4 "You do not have permission to access the system crontabs.")))) ;; Having defined all the necessary procedures for scanning various sets of ;; files, we perform the actual configuration of the program depending on the ;; personality we are running as. If it is mcron, we either scan the files ;; passed on the command line, or else all the ones in the user's .cron ;; directory. If we are running under the cron personality, we read the ;; /var/cron/tabs directory and also the /etc/crontab file. (case command-type ((mcron) (if (null? (option-ref options '() '())) (process-files-in-user-directory) (for-each (lambda (file-path) (process-user-file file-path #t)) (option-ref options '() '())))) ((cron) (process-files-in-system-directory) (use-system-job-list) (catch-mcron-error (read-vixie-file "/etc/crontab" parse-system-vixie-line)) (use-user-job-list) (if (not (option-ref options 'noetc #f)) (begin (display "WARNING: cron will check for updates to /etc/crontab EVERY MINUTE. If you do\n not use this file, or you are prepared to manually restart cron whenever you\n make a change, then it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you use the --noetc\n option.\n") (set-configuration-user "root") (job '(- (next-minute-from (next-minute)) 6) check-system-crontab "/etc/crontab update checker."))))) ;; If the user has requested a schedule of jobs that will run, we provide the ;; information here and then get out. ;; ;; Start by determining the number of time points in the future that output is ;; required for. This may be provided on the command line as a parameter to the ;; --schedule option, or else we assume a default of 8. Finally, ensure that the ;; count is some positive integer. (and-let* ((count (option-ref options 'schedule #f))) (set! count (string->number count)) (display (get-schedule (if (<= count 0) 1 count))) (quit)) ;; If we are supposed to run as a daemon process (either a --daemon option has ;; been explicitly used, or we are running as cron or crond), detach from the ;; terminal now. If we are running as cron, we can now write the PID file. (if (option-ref options 'daemon (eq? command-type 'cron)) (begin (if (not (eqv? (primitive-fork) 0)) (quit)) (setsid) (if (eq? command-type 'cron) (with-output-to-file config-pid-file (lambda () (display (getpid)) (newline)))))) ;; If we are running as cron or crond, we establish a socket to listen for ;; updates from a crontab program. This is put into fd-list so that we can ;; inform the main wait-run-wait execution loop to listen for incoming messages ;; on this socket. (define fd-list '()) (if (eq? command-type 'cron) (catch #t (lambda () (let ((socket (socket AF_UNIX SOCK_STREAM 0))) (bind socket AF_UNIX config-socket-file) (listen socket 5) (set! fd-list (list socket)))) (lambda (key . args) (delete-file config-pid-file) (mcron-error 1 "Cannot bind to UNIX socket " config-socket-file)))) ;; This function is called whenever a message comes in on the above socket. We ;; read a user name from the socket, dealing with the "/etc/crontab" special ;; case, remove all the user's jobs from the job list, and then re-read the ;; user's updated file. In the special case we drop all the system jobs and ;; re-read the /etc/crontab file. (define (process-update-request) (let* ((socket (car (accept (car fd-list)))) (user-name (read-line socket))) (close socket) (set-configuration-time (current-time)) (catch-mcron-error (if (string=? user-name "/etc/crontab") (begin (clear-system-jobs) (use-system-job-list) (read-vixie-file "/etc/crontab" parse-system-vixie-line) (use-user-job-list)) (let ((user (getpw user-name))) (remove-user-jobs user) (set-configuration-user user) (read-vixie-file (string-append config-spool-dir "/" user-name))))))) ;; Added by Sergey Poznyakoff. This no-op will collect zombie child processes ;; as soon as they die. This is a big improvement as previously they stayed ;; around the system until the next time mcron wakes to fire a new job off. ;; Unfortunately it seems to interact badly with the select system call, ;; wreaking havoc... ;; (sigaction SIGCHLD (lambda (sig) noop) SA_RESTART) ;; Now the main loop. Forever execute the run-job-loop procedure in the mcron ;; core, and when it drops out (can only be because a message has come in on the ;; socket) we process the socket request before restarting the loop again. ;; Sergey Poznyakoff: we can also drop out of run-job-loop because of a SIGCHLD, ;; so must test fd-list. (catch-mcron-error (while #t (run-job-loop fd-list) (if (not (null? fd-list)) (process-update-request)))) mcron-1.0.6/install-sh0000755000175000017500000003253711405144110011562 00000000000000#!/bin/sh # install - install a program, script, or datafile scriptversion=2009-04-28.21; # UTC # This originates from X11R5 (mit/util/scripts/install.sh), which was # later released in X11R6 (xc/config/util/install.sh) with the # following copyright and license. # # Copyright (C) 1994 X Consortium # # Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy # of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to # deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the # rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or # sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is # furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: # # The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in # all copies or substantial portions of the Software. # # THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR # IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, # FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE # X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN # AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNEC- # TION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. # # Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not # be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other deal- # ings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consor- # tium. # # # FSF changes to this file are in the public domain. # # Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent # `make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it # when there is no Makefile. # # This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written # from scratch. nl=' ' IFS=" "" $nl" # set DOITPROG to echo to test this script # Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it. doit=${DOITPROG-} if test -z "$doit"; then doit_exec=exec else doit_exec=$doit fi # Put in absolute file names if you don't have them in your path; # or use environment vars. chgrpprog=${CHGRPPROG-chgrp} chmodprog=${CHMODPROG-chmod} chownprog=${CHOWNPROG-chown} cmpprog=${CMPPROG-cmp} cpprog=${CPPROG-cp} mkdirprog=${MKDIRPROG-mkdir} mvprog=${MVPROG-mv} rmprog=${RMPROG-rm} stripprog=${STRIPPROG-strip} posix_glob='?' initialize_posix_glob=' test "$posix_glob" != "?" || { if (set -f) 2>/dev/null; then posix_glob= else posix_glob=: fi } ' posix_mkdir= # Desired mode of installed file. mode=0755 chgrpcmd= chmodcmd=$chmodprog chowncmd= mvcmd=$mvprog rmcmd="$rmprog -f" stripcmd= src= dst= dir_arg= dst_arg= copy_on_change=false no_target_directory= usage="\ Usage: $0 [OPTION]... [-T] SRCFILE DSTFILE or: $0 [OPTION]... SRCFILES... DIRECTORY or: $0 [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SRCFILES... or: $0 [OPTION]... -d DIRECTORIES... In the 1st form, copy SRCFILE to DSTFILE. In the 2nd and 3rd, copy all SRCFILES to DIRECTORY. In the 4th, create DIRECTORIES. Options: --help display this help and exit. --version display version info and exit. -c (ignored) -C install only if different (preserve the last data modification time) -d create directories instead of installing files. -g GROUP $chgrpprog installed files to GROUP. -m MODE $chmodprog installed files to MODE. -o USER $chownprog installed files to USER. -s $stripprog installed files. -t DIRECTORY install into DIRECTORY. -T report an error if DSTFILE is a directory. Environment variables override the default commands: CHGRPPROG CHMODPROG CHOWNPROG CMPPROG CPPROG MKDIRPROG MVPROG RMPROG STRIPPROG " while test $# -ne 0; do case $1 in -c) ;; -C) copy_on_change=true;; -d) dir_arg=true;; -g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2" shift;; --help) echo "$usage"; exit $?;; -m) mode=$2 case $mode in *' '* | *' '* | *' '* | *'*'* | *'?'* | *'['*) echo "$0: invalid mode: $mode" >&2 exit 1;; esac shift;; -o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2" shift;; -s) stripcmd=$stripprog;; -t) dst_arg=$2 shift;; -T) no_target_directory=true;; --version) echo "$0 $scriptversion"; exit $?;; --) shift break;; -*) echo "$0: invalid option: $1" >&2 exit 1;; *) break;; esac shift done if test $# -ne 0 && test -z "$dir_arg$dst_arg"; then # When -d is used, all remaining arguments are directories to create. # When -t is used, the destination is already specified. # Otherwise, the last argument is the destination. Remove it from $@. for arg do if test -n "$dst_arg"; then # $@ is not empty: it contains at least $arg. set fnord "$@" "$dst_arg" shift # fnord fi shift # arg dst_arg=$arg done fi if test $# -eq 0; then if test -z "$dir_arg"; then echo "$0: no input file specified." >&2 exit 1 fi # It's OK to call `install-sh -d' without argument. # This can happen when creating conditional directories. exit 0 fi if test -z "$dir_arg"; then trap '(exit $?); exit' 1 2 13 15 # Set umask so as not to create temps with too-generous modes. # However, 'strip' requires both read and write access to temps. case $mode in # Optimize common cases. *644) cp_umask=133;; *755) cp_umask=22;; *[0-7]) if test -z "$stripcmd"; then u_plus_rw= else u_plus_rw='% 200' fi cp_umask=`expr '(' 777 - $mode % 1000 ')' $u_plus_rw`;; *) if test -z "$stripcmd"; then u_plus_rw= else u_plus_rw=,u+rw fi cp_umask=$mode$u_plus_rw;; esac fi for src do # Protect names starting with `-'. case $src in -*) src=./$src;; esac if test -n "$dir_arg"; then dst=$src dstdir=$dst test -d "$dstdir" dstdir_status=$? else # Waiting for this to be detected by the "$cpprog $src $dsttmp" command # might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad # if $src (and thus $dsttmp) contains '*'. if test ! -f "$src" && test ! -d "$src"; then echo "$0: $src does not exist." >&2 exit 1 fi if test -z "$dst_arg"; then echo "$0: no destination specified." >&2 exit 1 fi dst=$dst_arg # Protect names starting with `-'. case $dst in -*) dst=./$dst;; esac # If destination is a directory, append the input filename; won't work # if double slashes aren't ignored. if test -d "$dst"; then if test -n "$no_target_directory"; then echo "$0: $dst_arg: Is a directory" >&2 exit 1 fi dstdir=$dst dst=$dstdir/`basename "$src"` dstdir_status=0 else # Prefer dirname, but fall back on a substitute if dirname fails. dstdir=` (dirname "$dst") 2>/dev/null || expr X"$dst" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \ X"$dst" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \ X"$dst" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \ X"$dst" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null || echo X"$dst" | sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\/\)$/{ s//\1/ q } /^X\(\/\).*/{ s//\1/ q } s/.*/./; q' ` test -d "$dstdir" dstdir_status=$? fi fi obsolete_mkdir_used=false if test $dstdir_status != 0; then case $posix_mkdir in '') # Create intermediate dirs using mode 755 as modified by the umask. # This is like FreeBSD 'install' as of 1997-10-28. umask=`umask` case $stripcmd.$umask in # Optimize common cases. *[2367][2367]) mkdir_umask=$umask;; .*0[02][02] | .[02][02] | .[02]) mkdir_umask=22;; *[0-7]) mkdir_umask=`expr $umask + 22 \ - $umask % 100 % 40 + $umask % 20 \ - $umask % 10 % 4 + $umask % 2 `;; *) mkdir_umask=$umask,go-w;; esac # With -d, create the new directory with the user-specified mode. # Otherwise, rely on $mkdir_umask. if test -n "$dir_arg"; then mkdir_mode=-m$mode else mkdir_mode= fi posix_mkdir=false case $umask in *[123567][0-7][0-7]) # POSIX mkdir -p sets u+wx bits regardless of umask, which # is incompatible with FreeBSD 'install' when (umask & 300) != 0. ;; *) tmpdir=${TMPDIR-/tmp}/ins$RANDOM-$$ trap 'ret=$?; rmdir "$tmpdir/d" "$tmpdir" 2>/dev/null; exit $ret' 0 if (umask $mkdir_umask && exec $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode -p -- "$tmpdir/d") >/dev/null 2>&1 then if test -z "$dir_arg" || { # Check for POSIX incompatibilities with -m. # HP-UX 11.23 and IRIX 6.5 mkdir -m -p sets group- or # other-writeable bit of parent directory when it shouldn't. # FreeBSD 6.1 mkdir -m -p sets mode of existing directory. ls_ld_tmpdir=`ls -ld "$tmpdir"` case $ls_ld_tmpdir in d????-?r-*) different_mode=700;; d????-?--*) different_mode=755;; *) false;; esac && $mkdirprog -m$different_mode -p -- "$tmpdir" && { ls_ld_tmpdir_1=`ls -ld "$tmpdir"` test "$ls_ld_tmpdir" = "$ls_ld_tmpdir_1" } } then posix_mkdir=: fi rmdir "$tmpdir/d" "$tmpdir" else # Remove any dirs left behind by ancient mkdir implementations. rmdir ./$mkdir_mode ./-p ./-- 2>/dev/null fi trap '' 0;; esac;; esac if $posix_mkdir && ( umask $mkdir_umask && $doit_exec $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode -p -- "$dstdir" ) then : else # The umask is ridiculous, or mkdir does not conform to POSIX, # or it failed possibly due to a race condition. Create the # directory the slow way, step by step, checking for races as we go. case $dstdir in /*) prefix='/';; -*) prefix='./';; *) prefix='';; esac eval "$initialize_posix_glob" oIFS=$IFS IFS=/ $posix_glob set -f set fnord $dstdir shift $posix_glob set +f IFS=$oIFS prefixes= for d do test -z "$d" && continue prefix=$prefix$d if test -d "$prefix"; then prefixes= else if $posix_mkdir; then (umask=$mkdir_umask && $doit_exec $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode -p -- "$dstdir") && break # Don't fail if two instances are running concurrently. test -d "$prefix" || exit 1 else case $prefix in *\'*) qprefix=`echo "$prefix" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"`;; *) qprefix=$prefix;; esac prefixes="$prefixes '$qprefix'" fi fi prefix=$prefix/ done if test -n "$prefixes"; then # Don't fail if two instances are running concurrently. (umask $mkdir_umask && eval "\$doit_exec \$mkdirprog $prefixes") || test -d "$dstdir" || exit 1 obsolete_mkdir_used=true fi fi fi if test -n "$dir_arg"; then { test -z "$chowncmd" || $doit $chowncmd "$dst"; } && { test -z "$chgrpcmd" || $doit $chgrpcmd "$dst"; } && { test "$obsolete_mkdir_used$chowncmd$chgrpcmd" = false || test -z "$chmodcmd" || $doit $chmodcmd $mode "$dst"; } || exit 1 else # Make a couple of temp file names in the proper directory. dsttmp=$dstdir/_inst.$$_ rmtmp=$dstdir/_rm.$$_ # Trap to clean up those temp files at exit. trap 'ret=$?; rm -f "$dsttmp" "$rmtmp" && exit $ret' 0 # Copy the file name to the temp name. (umask $cp_umask && $doit_exec $cpprog "$src" "$dsttmp") && # and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits. # # If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing. If we want to # ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore # errors from the above "$doit $cpprog $src $dsttmp" command. # { test -z "$chowncmd" || $doit $chowncmd "$dsttmp"; } && { test -z "$chgrpcmd" || $doit $chgrpcmd "$dsttmp"; } && { test -z "$stripcmd" || $doit $stripcmd "$dsttmp"; } && { test -z "$chmodcmd" || $doit $chmodcmd $mode "$dsttmp"; } && # If -C, don't bother to copy if it wouldn't change the file. if $copy_on_change && old=`LC_ALL=C ls -dlL "$dst" 2>/dev/null` && new=`LC_ALL=C ls -dlL "$dsttmp" 2>/dev/null` && eval "$initialize_posix_glob" && $posix_glob set -f && set X $old && old=:$2:$4:$5:$6 && set X $new && new=:$2:$4:$5:$6 && $posix_glob set +f && test "$old" = "$new" && $cmpprog "$dst" "$dsttmp" >/dev/null 2>&1 then rm -f "$dsttmp" else # Rename the file to the real destination. $doit $mvcmd -f "$dsttmp" "$dst" 2>/dev/null || # The rename failed, perhaps because mv can't rename something else # to itself, or perhaps because mv is so ancient that it does not # support -f. { # Now remove or move aside any old file at destination location. # We try this two ways since rm can't unlink itself on some # systems and the destination file might be busy for other # reasons. In this case, the final cleanup might fail but the new # file should still install successfully. { test ! -f "$dst" || $doit $rmcmd -f "$dst" 2>/dev/null || { $doit $mvcmd -f "$dst" "$rmtmp" 2>/dev/null && { $doit $rmcmd -f "$rmtmp" 2>/dev/null; :; } } || { echo "$0: cannot unlink or rename $dst" >&2 (exit 1); exit 1 } } && # Now rename the file to the real destination. $doit $mvcmd "$dsttmp" "$dst" } fi || exit 1 trap '' 0 fi done # Local variables: # eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) # time-stamp-start: "scriptversion=" # time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" # time-stamp-time-zone: "UTC" # time-stamp-end: "; # UTC" # End: mcron-1.0.6/missing0000755000175000017500000002623311405144110011151 00000000000000#! /bin/sh # Common stub for a few missing GNU programs while installing. scriptversion=2009-04-28.21; # UTC # Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, # 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # Originally by Fran,cois Pinard , 1996. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program. If not, see . # As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you # distribute this file as part of a program that contains a # configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under # the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program. if test $# -eq 0; then echo 1>&2 "Try \`$0 --help' for more information" exit 1 fi run=: sed_output='s/.* --output[ =]\([^ ]*\).*/\1/p' sed_minuso='s/.* -o \([^ ]*\).*/\1/p' # In the cases where this matters, `missing' is being run in the # srcdir already. if test -f configure.ac; then configure_ac=configure.ac else configure_ac=configure.in fi msg="missing on your system" case $1 in --run) # Try to run requested program, and just exit if it succeeds. run= shift "$@" && exit 0 # Exit code 63 means version mismatch. This often happens # when the user try to use an ancient version of a tool on # a file that requires a minimum version. In this case we # we should proceed has if the program had been absent, or # if --run hadn't been passed. if test $? = 63; then run=: msg="probably too old" fi ;; -h|--h|--he|--hel|--help) echo "\ $0 [OPTION]... PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]... Handle \`PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]...' for when PROGRAM is missing, or return an error status if there is no known handling for PROGRAM. Options: -h, --help display this help and exit -v, --version output version information and exit --run try to run the given command, and emulate it if it fails Supported PROGRAM values: aclocal touch file \`aclocal.m4' autoconf touch file \`configure' autoheader touch file \`config.h.in' autom4te touch the output file, or create a stub one automake touch all \`Makefile.in' files bison create \`y.tab.[ch]', if possible, from existing .[ch] flex create \`lex.yy.c', if possible, from existing .c help2man touch the output file lex create \`lex.yy.c', if possible, from existing .c makeinfo touch the output file tar try tar, gnutar, gtar, then tar without non-portable flags yacc create \`y.tab.[ch]', if possible, from existing .[ch] Version suffixes to PROGRAM as well as the prefixes \`gnu-', \`gnu', and \`g' are ignored when checking the name. Send bug reports to ." exit $? ;; -v|--v|--ve|--ver|--vers|--versi|--versio|--version) echo "missing $scriptversion (GNU Automake)" exit $? ;; -*) echo 1>&2 "$0: Unknown \`$1' option" echo 1>&2 "Try \`$0 --help' for more information" exit 1 ;; esac # normalize program name to check for. program=`echo "$1" | sed ' s/^gnu-//; t s/^gnu//; t s/^g//; t'` # Now exit if we have it, but it failed. Also exit now if we # don't have it and --version was passed (most likely to detect # the program). This is about non-GNU programs, so use $1 not # $program. case $1 in lex*|yacc*) # Not GNU programs, they don't have --version. ;; tar*) if test -n "$run"; then echo 1>&2 "ERROR: \`tar' requires --run" exit 1 elif test "x$2" = "x--version" || test "x$2" = "x--help"; then exit 1 fi ;; *) if test -z "$run" && ($1 --version) > /dev/null 2>&1; then # We have it, but it failed. exit 1 elif test "x$2" = "x--version" || test "x$2" = "x--help"; then # Could not run --version or --help. This is probably someone # running `$TOOL --version' or `$TOOL --help' to check whether # $TOOL exists and not knowing $TOOL uses missing. exit 1 fi ;; esac # If it does not exist, or fails to run (possibly an outdated version), # try to emulate it. case $program in aclocal*) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is $msg. You should only need it if you modified \`acinclude.m4' or \`${configure_ac}'. You might want to install the \`Automake' and \`Perl' packages. Grab them from any GNU archive site." touch aclocal.m4 ;; autoconf*) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is $msg. You should only need it if you modified \`${configure_ac}'. You might want to install the \`Autoconf' and \`GNU m4' packages. Grab them from any GNU archive site." touch configure ;; autoheader*) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is $msg. You should only need it if you modified \`acconfig.h' or \`${configure_ac}'. You might want to install the \`Autoconf' and \`GNU m4' packages. Grab them from any GNU archive site." files=`sed -n 's/^[ ]*A[CM]_CONFIG_HEADER(\([^)]*\)).*/\1/p' ${configure_ac}` test -z "$files" && files="config.h" touch_files= for f in $files; do case $f in *:*) touch_files="$touch_files "`echo "$f" | sed -e 's/^[^:]*://' -e 's/:.*//'`;; *) touch_files="$touch_files $f.in";; esac done touch $touch_files ;; automake*) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is $msg. You should only need it if you modified \`Makefile.am', \`acinclude.m4' or \`${configure_ac}'. You might want to install the \`Automake' and \`Perl' packages. Grab them from any GNU archive site." find . -type f -name Makefile.am -print | sed 's/\.am$/.in/' | while read f; do touch "$f"; done ;; autom4te*) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is needed, but is $msg. You might have modified some files without having the proper tools for further handling them. You can get \`$1' as part of \`Autoconf' from any GNU archive site." file=`echo "$*" | sed -n "$sed_output"` test -z "$file" && file=`echo "$*" | sed -n "$sed_minuso"` if test -f "$file"; then touch $file else test -z "$file" || exec >$file echo "#! /bin/sh" echo "# Created by GNU Automake missing as a replacement of" echo "# $ $@" echo "exit 0" chmod +x $file exit 1 fi ;; bison*|yacc*) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' $msg. You should only need it if you modified a \`.y' file. You may need the \`Bison' package in order for those modifications to take effect. You can get \`Bison' from any GNU archive site." rm -f y.tab.c y.tab.h if test $# -ne 1; then eval LASTARG="\${$#}" case $LASTARG in *.y) SRCFILE=`echo "$LASTARG" | sed 's/y$/c/'` if test -f "$SRCFILE"; then cp "$SRCFILE" y.tab.c fi SRCFILE=`echo "$LASTARG" | sed 's/y$/h/'` if test -f "$SRCFILE"; then cp "$SRCFILE" y.tab.h fi ;; esac fi if test ! -f y.tab.h; then echo >y.tab.h fi if test ! -f y.tab.c; then echo 'main() { return 0; }' >y.tab.c fi ;; lex*|flex*) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is $msg. You should only need it if you modified a \`.l' file. You may need the \`Flex' package in order for those modifications to take effect. You can get \`Flex' from any GNU archive site." rm -f lex.yy.c if test $# -ne 1; then eval LASTARG="\${$#}" case $LASTARG in *.l) SRCFILE=`echo "$LASTARG" | sed 's/l$/c/'` if test -f "$SRCFILE"; then cp "$SRCFILE" lex.yy.c fi ;; esac fi if test ! -f lex.yy.c; then echo 'main() { return 0; }' >lex.yy.c fi ;; help2man*) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is $msg. You should only need it if you modified a dependency of a manual page. You may need the \`Help2man' package in order for those modifications to take effect. You can get \`Help2man' from any GNU archive site." file=`echo "$*" | sed -n "$sed_output"` test -z "$file" && file=`echo "$*" | sed -n "$sed_minuso"` if test -f "$file"; then touch $file else test -z "$file" || exec >$file echo ".ab help2man is required to generate this page" exit $? fi ;; makeinfo*) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is $msg. You should only need it if you modified a \`.texi' or \`.texinfo' file, or any other file indirectly affecting the aspect of the manual. The spurious call might also be the consequence of using a buggy \`make' (AIX, DU, IRIX). You might want to install the \`Texinfo' package or the \`GNU make' package. Grab either from any GNU archive site." # The file to touch is that specified with -o ... file=`echo "$*" | sed -n "$sed_output"` test -z "$file" && file=`echo "$*" | sed -n "$sed_minuso"` if test -z "$file"; then # ... or it is the one specified with @setfilename ... infile=`echo "$*" | sed 's/.* \([^ ]*\) *$/\1/'` file=`sed -n ' /^@setfilename/{ s/.* \([^ ]*\) *$/\1/ p q }' $infile` # ... or it is derived from the source name (dir/f.texi becomes f.info) test -z "$file" && file=`echo "$infile" | sed 's,.*/,,;s,.[^.]*$,,'`.info fi # If the file does not exist, the user really needs makeinfo; # let's fail without touching anything. test -f $file || exit 1 touch $file ;; tar*) shift # We have already tried tar in the generic part. # Look for gnutar/gtar before invocation to avoid ugly error # messages. if (gnutar --version > /dev/null 2>&1); then gnutar "$@" && exit 0 fi if (gtar --version > /dev/null 2>&1); then gtar "$@" && exit 0 fi firstarg="$1" if shift; then case $firstarg in *o*) firstarg=`echo "$firstarg" | sed s/o//` tar "$firstarg" "$@" && exit 0 ;; esac case $firstarg in *h*) firstarg=`echo "$firstarg" | sed s/h//` tar "$firstarg" "$@" && exit 0 ;; esac fi echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: I can't seem to be able to run \`tar' with the given arguments. You may want to install GNU tar or Free paxutils, or check the command line arguments." exit 1 ;; *) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is needed, and is $msg. You might have modified some files without having the proper tools for further handling them. Check the \`README' file, it often tells you about the needed prerequisites for installing this package. You may also peek at any GNU archive site, in case some other package would contain this missing \`$1' program." exit 1 ;; esac exit 0 # Local variables: # eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) # time-stamp-start: "scriptversion=" # time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" # time-stamp-time-zone: "UTC" # time-stamp-end: "; # UTC" # End: mcron-1.0.6/mcron.texinfo.in0000644000175000017500000013671111407206152012705 00000000000000\input texinfo @c %**start of header @setfilename mcron.info @settitle mcron @VERSION@ @c %**end of header @syncodeindex fn cp @copying This manual is for GNU mcron (version @VERSION@), which is a program for running jobs at scheduled times. Copyright @copyright{} 2003, 2005, 2006 Dale Mellor @quotation Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''. @end quotation @end copying @ifinfo @dircategory Individual utilities @direntry * mcron: (mcron). Run jobs at scheduled times. @end direntry @end ifinfo @titlepage @title mcron - Mellor's cron daemon @author Dale Mellor @page @vskip 0pt plus 1fill @c @insertcopying @end titlepage @contents @ifnottex @node Top, Introduction, (dir), (dir) @top mcron This file documents the @code{mcron} command (Mellor's cron) for running jobs at scheduled times. @c @insertcopying @end ifnottex @menu * Introduction:: Introducing mcron. * Simple examples:: How to use mcron 99.9% of the time. * Syntax:: All the possibilities for configuring cron jobs. * Invoking:: What happens when you run the mcron command. * Guile modules:: Incorporating mcron into another Guile program. * Index:: The complete index. @detailmenu --- The Detailed Node Listing --- Simple examples * Guile Simple Examples:: * Vixie Simple Examples:: Full available syntax * Guile Syntax:: * Extended Guile examples:: * Vixie Syntax:: Extended Guile examples * AT commands:: * Every second Sunday:: * Two hours every day:: * Missing the first appointment:: * Penultimate day of every month:: Vixie * Paul Vixie's copyright:: * Crontab file:: * Incompatibilities with old Unices:: Detailed invoking * Invoking mcron:: * Invoking cron or crond:: * Invoking crontab:: * Behaviour on laptops:: * Exit codes:: Guile modules * The core module:: The job list and execution loop. * The redirect module:: Sending output of jobs to a mail box. * The vixie-time module:: Parsing vixie-style time specifications. * The job-specifier module:: All commands for scheme configuration files. * The vixie-specification module:: Commands for reading vixie-style crontabs. @end detailmenu @end menu @node Introduction, Simple examples, Top, Top @chapter Introducing mcron @cindex introduction @cindex mcron The mcron program represents a complete re-think of the cron concept originally found in the Berkeley and AT&T unices, and subsequently rationalized by Paul Vixie. The original idea was to have a daemon that wakes up every minute, scans a set of files under a special directory, and determines from those files if any shell commands should be executed in this minute. The new idea is to read the required command instructions, work out which command needs to be executed next, and then sleep until the inferred time has arrived. On waking the commands are run, and the time of the next command is computed. Furthermore, the specifications are written in scheme, allowing at the same time simple command execution instructions and very much more flexible ones to be composed than the original Vixie format. This has several useful advantages over the original idea. (Changes to user crontabs are signalled directly to mcron by the crontab program; cron must still scan the /etc/crontab file once every minute, although use of this file is highly discouraged and this behaviour can be turned off). @cindex advantages of mcron @itemize @bullet @item Does not consume CPU resources when not needed. Many cron daemons only run jobs once an hour, or even just once a day. @item Can easily allow for finer time-points to be specified, i.e. seconds. In principle this could be extended to microseconds, but this is not implemented. @item Times can be more or less regular. For example, a job that runs every 17 hours can be specified, or a job that runs on the first Sunday of every month. @item Times can be dynamic. Arbitrary Guile (scheme) code can be provided to compute the next time that a command needs to be run. This could, for example, take the system load into consideration. @item Turns out to be easy to provide complete backwards compatibility with Vixie cron. @item Each user looks after his own files in his own directory. He can use more than one to break up complicated cron specifications. @item Each user can run his own daemon. This removes the need for suid programs to manipulate the crontabs, and eliminates many security concerns that surround all existing cron programs. @item The user can obtain an advance schedule of all the jobs that are due to run. @item Vixie cron is implemented in 4500 lines of C code; mcron is 2000 lines of scheme, despite the fact that it offers many more features and much more flexibility, and complete compatibility with Vixie cron. @end itemize A full discussion of the design and philosophy of mcron can be found in the white paper at @url{http://www.gnu.org/software/mcron/design.html}. @node Simple examples, Syntax, Introduction, Top @chapter Simple examples The vast majority of uses of cron are sublimely simple: run a program every hour, or every day. With this in mind the design of mcron has been to allow such simple specifications to be made easily. The examples show how to create the command descriptions, and subsequently how to run mcron to make them happen. @menu * Guile Simple Examples:: * Vixie Simple Examples:: @end menu @node Guile Simple Examples, Vixie Simple Examples, Simple examples, Simple examples @section Guile @cindex guile examples @cindex examples, guile @cindex example, run a program every hour You have an executable @code{my-program} in your home directory, which you want to run every hour. Create a file @code{job.guile} in directory @code{~/.cron} with the following contents @example (job '(next-hour) "my-program") @end example then run the command @code{mcron}. Want the program to run fifteen minutes past the hour, every two hours? Edit the file to read @example (job '(next-minute-from (next-hour (range 0 24 2)) 15) "my-program") @end example and run the command @code{mcron}. Or, if you are not comfortable with Scheme, you could use (and see also the next section) @example (job "15 */2 * * *" "my-program") @end example and run the @code{mcron} command. If you want to run other jobs, you can either add more lines to this file, or you can create other files in your @code{.cron} directory with the @code{.guile} extension. Alternatively, you can use any file you want and pass it as an argument to @code{mcron}, or even pipe the commands into the standard input. @node Vixie Simple Examples, , Guile Simple Examples, Simple examples @section Vixie @cindex examples @cindex examples, vixie @cindex vixie examples You have an executable @code{my-program} in your home directory, which you want to run every hour. Create a file @code{job.vixie} in directory @code{~/.cron} with the following contents @example 0 * * * * my-program @end example then run the command @code{mcron}. @cindex vixie compatibility @cindex compatibility Alternatively (full compatibility with Vixie cron), set your environment variable @code{EDITOR} to your favorite editor, run @code{crontab -e}, put the above line into the edit buffer, save and exit. For this to work the @code{cron} daemon must be already running on your system, as root. @node Syntax, Invoking, Simple examples, Top @chapter Full available syntax @menu * Guile Syntax:: * Extended Guile examples:: * Vixie Syntax:: @end menu @node Guile Syntax, Extended Guile examples, Syntax, Syntax @section Guile Syntax @subsection Job specification @cindex guile syntax @cindex syntax, guile @findex job In Guile-formatted configuration files each command that needs executing is introduced with the @code{job} function. This function always takes two arguments, the first a time specification, and the second a command specification. An optional third argument may contain a string to display when this job is listed in a schedule. @cindex time specification, procedure @cindex procedure time specification The first argument can be a procedure, a list, or a string. If a function is supplied, it must take exactly one argument, which will be the ``current'' time in UNIX format, and the return value of the function must be the time in UNIX format when this action should next be run. The following functions are available to facilitate the computation: @findex next-second-from @code{(next-second-from time . args)} without arguments this returns the second after the current one. With the extra arguments, these form a list of seconds in the minute when the action should run, and the function will return the time of the next allowed second (which may be in the next minute of the hour). @footnote{Note that while commands can be scheduled to run at any second, it is unlikely that they will be executed then but some time shortly thereafter, depending on the load on the system and the number of jobs that mcron has to start at the same time.} @findex next-minute-from @findex next-hour-from @findex next-day-from @findex next-week-from @findex next-month-from @findex next-year-from Similarly to @code{next-second-from}, there are also @code{next-minute-from}, @code{next-hour-from}, @code{next-day-from}, @code{next-week-from}, @code{next-month-from}, @code{next-year-from}. @findex range Furthermore, the optional argument can be fulfilled by the function @code{(range start end . step)}, which will provide a list of values from start to (but not including) end, with the step if given. For example @code{(range 0 10 2)} will yield the list @code{'(0 2 4 6 8)}. @findex next-second @findex next-minute @findex next-hour @findex next-day @findex next-week @findex next-month @findex next-year @cindex time specification, list @cindex list time specification If the first argument to the @code{job} function is a list, it is taken to be program code made up of the functions @code{(next-second . args)}, @code{(next-minute...)}, etc, where the optional arguments can be supplied with the @code{(range)} function above (these functions are analogous to the ones above except that they implicitly assume the current time; it is supplied by the mcron core when the list is eval'd). @cindex time specification @cindex time specification, string @cindex string time specification @cindex time specification, vixie-style @cindex vixie-style time specification If the first argument to the @code{job} function is a string, it is expected to be a Vixie cron-style time specification. See the section on Vixie syntax for this. @cindex job execution @cindex command execution @cindex execution The second argument to the @code{(job)} function can be either a string, a list, or a function. In all cases the command is executed in the user's home directory, under the user's own UID. If a string is passed, it is assumed to be shell script and is executed with the user's default shell. If a list is passed it is assumed to be scheme code and is eval'd as such. A supplied function should take exactly zero arguments, and will be called at the pertinent times. @subsection Sending output as e-mail @cindex email output @cindex email from guile script @cindex standard input to commands @findex with-mail-out When jobs are specified in a vixie-style configuration, the command is broken at a percentage sign, and the stuff that comes after this is sent into the command's standard input. Furthermore, any output from the command is mailed to the user. This functionality is provided for compatibility with Vixie cron, but it is also available to scheme configuration files. The command (with-mail-out action . user) can be used to direct output from the action (which may be a procedure, list, or string) into an e-mail to the user. In the case that the action is a string, then percentage signs are processed as per the vixie specifications, and information is piped to the shell command's standard input. @subsection Setting environment variables @cindex environment variables in scheme @cindex setting environment variables @findex append-environment-mods Also for compatibility with Vixie cron, mcron has the ability to set environment variables in configuration files. To access this functionality from a scheme configuration file, use the command (append-environment-mods name value), where name is the name of an environment variable, and value is the value put to it. A value of #f will remove the variable from the environment. Note that environment modifications are accumulated as the configuration file is processed, so when a job actually runs, its environment will be modified according to the modifications specified before the job specification in the configuration file. @node Extended Guile examples, Vixie Syntax, Guile Syntax, Syntax @section Extended Guile examples @cindex examples, extended guile @cindex extended guile examples While Guile gives you flexibility to do anything, and the power to represent complex requirements succinctly, things are not always as they seem. The following examples illustrate some pitfalls, and demonstrate how to code around them. @menu * AT commands:: * Every second Sunday:: * Two hours every day:: * Missing the first appointment:: * Penultimate day of every month:: @end menu @node AT commands, Every second Sunday, Extended Guile examples, Extended Guile examples @subsection Synthesizing ``at'' commands @cindex at command The current implementation of mcron does not provide for an at command (a command-line program that allows the user to specify that a job runs exactly once at a certain time). This can, however, be achieved. Suppose the program @code{my-program} needs to be run at midnight tonight. A Guile script like the following would work (but a printed schedule, obtained with the @code{--schedule} option, will show superfluous entries). @example (job '(next-day) (lambda () (system "my-program") (kill (getppid) SIGINT))) @end example @node Every second Sunday, Two hours every day, AT commands, Extended Guile examples @subsection Every second Sunday @cindex examples, every second sunday To run @code{my-program} on the second Sunday of every month, a Guile script like the following should suffice (it is left as an exercise to the student to understand how this works!). @example (job (lambda (current-time) (let* ((next-month (next-month-from current-time)) (first-day (tm:wday (localtime next-month))) (second-sunday (if (eqv? first-day 0) 8 (- 14 first-day)))) (+ next-month (* 24 60 60 second-sunday)))) "my-program") @end example @node Two hours every day, Missing the first appointment, Every second Sunday, Extended Guile examples @subsection Two hours every day @cindex examples, two hours every day @cindex pitfalls, two hours every day Surprisingly perhaps, the following will @strong{not} have the desired effect. @example (job '(next-hour-from (next-day) '(1 2)) "my-program") @end example Rather than running the my-program program at one o'clock and two o'clock every day, it will only run it at one o'clock. This is because each time mcron has to compute the next time to run the command, it first obtains the next day, and then finds the earliest hour in that day to run at. Thus, after running the command at one o'clock, the program first skips forwards to the next midnight (missing the two o'clock appointment), and then finds the next one o'clock schedule. The following simple command is the correct way to specify this behaviour. @example (job '(next-hour '(1 2)) "my-program") @end example @node Missing the first appointment, Penultimate day of every month, Two hours every day, Extended Guile examples @subsection Missing the first appointment @cindex examples, missing the first appointment @cindex pitfalls, missing the first appointment The command @example (job '(next-hour-from (next-day) '(16)) "my-program") @end example will run @code{my-program} every day at four o'clock in the afternoon. However, if mcron is started with this script at midday, the first time the command will run will be four o'clock tomorrow; today's appointment will be missed (one time only). The correct way to specify this requirement is simply @example (job '(next-hour '(16)) "my-program") @end example @node Penultimate day of every month, , Missing the first appointment, Extended Guile examples @subsection Penultimate day of every month @cindex examples, penultimate day of every month The following will run the @code{my-program} program on the second-to-last day of every month. @example (job '(- (next-month-from (next-month)) (* 48 3600)) "my-program") @end example @node Vixie Syntax, , Extended Guile examples, Syntax @section Vixie @cindex syntax, vixie @cindex vixie syntax @cindex vixie definition @cindex vixie compatibility @cindex compatibility, vixie @emph{NOTE} that this section is definitive. If there is a difference in behaviour between the mcron program and this part of the manual, then there is a bug in the program. This section is also copied verbatim from Paul Vixie's documentation for his cron program, and his copyright notice is duly reproduced below. There are three problems with this specification. @cindex zero'th day of month @cindex 0'th day of month 1. It is allowed to specify days of the month in the range 0-31. What does it mean to specify day 0? Looking at the Vixie source code, it seems that if this date appears as part of a list, it has no effect. However, if it appears on its own, the effect is to say ``don't run on any particular day of the month, only take the week-day specification into account.'' Mcron has been coded to mimic this behaviour as a special case (unmodified mcron logic implies that this date specification would cause jobs to run on the last day of the previous month). @cindex thirteenth month of year @cindex 13th month of year 2. Similarly to the above (but different), months of the year can be specified in the range 0-12. In the case of mcron (don't know what Vixie cron did) month 12 will cause the program to wait until January of the following year (but don't rely on this). @cindex shell @cindex environment variables, shell @cindex /etc/passwd 3. Somewhere it says that cron sets the SHELL environment variable to /bin/sh, and elsewhere it implies that the default behaviour is for the user's default shell to be used to execute commands. Mcron sets the variable and runs the command in the user's default shell, as advertised by the /etc/passwd file. @menu * Paul Vixie's copyright:: * Crontab file:: * Incompatibilities with old Unices:: @end menu @node Paul Vixie's copyright, Crontab file, Vixie Syntax, Vixie Syntax @subsection Paul Vixie's copyright @cindex copyright, Paul Vixie's @cindex Paul Vixie's copyright @quotation Copyright 1988,1990,1993,1994 by Paul Vixie All rights reserved Distribute freely, except: don't remove my name from the source or documentation (don't take credit for my work), mark your changes (don't get me blamed for your possible bugs), don't alter or remove this notice. May be sold if buildable source is provided to buyer. No warrantee of any kind, express or implied, is included with this software; use at your own risk, responsibility for damages (if any) to anyone resulting from the use of this software rests entirely with the user. @end quotation @node Crontab file, Incompatibilities with old Unices, Paul Vixie's copyright, Vixie Syntax @subsection Crontab files @cindex crontab file @cindex vixie crontab file A @code{crontab} file contains instructions to the @code{cron} daemon of the general form: ``run this command at this time on this date''. Each user has their own crontab, and commands in any given crontab will be executed as the user who owns the crontab. Uucp and News will usually have their own crontabs, eliminating the need for explicitly running @code{su} as part of a cron command. @cindex comments, vixie-style Blank lines and leading spaces and tabs are ignored. Lines whose first non-space character is a pound-sign (#) are comments, and are ignored. Note that comments are not allowed on the same line as cron commands, since they will be taken to be part of the command. Similarly, comments are not allowed on the same line as environment variable settings. An active line in a crontab will be either an environment setting or a cron command. An environment setting is of the form, @cindex environment setting, vixie-style @example name = value @end example where the spaces around the equal-sign (=) are optional, and any subsequent non-leading spaces in @code{value} will be part of the value assigned to @code{name}. The @code{value} string may be placed in quotes (single or double, but matching) to preserve leading or trailing blanks. @cindex environment variables, SHELL @cindex environment variables, LOGNAME @cindex environment variables, HOME @cindex SHELL environment variable @cindex LOGNAME environment variable @cindex HOME environment variable @cindex /etc/passwd Several environment variables are set up automatically by the @code{cron} daemon. SHELL is set to /bin/sh, and LOGNAME and HOME are set from the /etc/passwd line of the crontab's owner. HOME and SHELL may be overridden by settings in the crontab; LOGNAME may not. @cindex environment variables, USER @cindex USER environment variable @cindex BSD (Another note: the LOGNAME variable is sometimes called USER on BSD systems... on these systems, USER will be set also.) @footnote{mcron has not been ported to BSD, so these notes are not relevant.} @cindex environment variables, MAILTO @cindex MAILTO environment variable In addition to LOGNAME, HOME, and SHELL, @code{cron} will look at MAILTO if it has any reason to send mail as a result of running commands in ``this'' crontab. If MAILTO is defined (and non-empty), mail is sent to the user so named. If MAILTO is defined but empty (MAILTO=""), no mail will be sent. Otherwise mail is sent to the owner of the crontab. This option is useful if you decide on /bin/mail instead of /usr/lib/sendmail as your mailer when you install cron -- /bin/mail doesn't do aliasing, and UUCP usually doesn't read its mail. The format of a cron command is very much the V7 standard, with a number of upward-compatible extensions. Each line has five time and date fields, followed by a user name if this is the system crontab file, followed by a command. Commands are executed by @code{cron} when the minute, hour, and month of year fields match the current time, @strong{and} when at least one of the two day fields (day of month, or day of week) match the current time (see ``Note'' below). @code{cron} examines cron entries once every minute. The time and date fields are: @cindex vixie time specification fields @cindex fields, vixie time specification @multitable @columnfractions .2 .5 @item Field @tab Allowed values @item ----- @tab -------------- @item minute @tab 0-59 @item hour @tab 0-23 @item day of month @tab 0-31 @item month @tab 0-12 (or names, see below) @item day of week @tab 0-7 (0 or 7 is Sun, or use names) @end multitable A field may be an asterisk (*), which always stands for ``first-last''. @cindex ranges in vixie time specifications Ranges of numbers are allowed. Ranges are two numbers separated with a hyphen. The specified range is inclusive. For example, 8-11 for an ``hours'' entry specifies execution at hours 8, 9, 10 and 11. @cindex lists in vixie time specifications Lists are allowed. A list is a set of numbers (or ranges) separated by commas. Examples: ``1,2,5,9'', ``0-4,8-12''. @cindex steps in vixie time specifications Step values can be used in conjunction with ranges. Following a range with ``/'' specifies skips of the number's value through the range. For example, ``0-23/2'' can be used in the hours field to specify command execution every other hour (the alternative in the V7 standard is ``0,2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18,20,22''). Steps are also permitted after an asterisk, so if you want to say ``every two hours'', just use ``*/2''. @cindex names in vixie-style time specifications Names can also be used for the ``month'' and ``day of week'' fields. Use the first three letters of the particular day or month (case doesn't matter). Ranges or lists of names are not allowed. @footnote{Mcron allows any alphabetic characters after a name, so full names of days or months are also valid.} @cindex % character on vixie-style commands @cindex standard input, vixie-style The ``sixth'' field (the rest of the line) specifies the command to be run. The entire command portion of the line, up to a newline or % character, will be executed by /bin/sh or by the shell specified in the SHELL variable of the cronfile. Percent-signs (%) in the command, unless escaped with backslash (\\), will be changed into newline characters, and all data after the first % will be sent to the command as standard input. @cindex day specification, vixie-style @cindex vixie-style day specification Note: The day of a command's execution can be specified by two fields -- day of month, and day of week. If both fields are restricted (ie, aren't *), the command will be run when @emph{either} field matches the current time. For example, ``30 4 1,15 * 5'' would cause a command to be run at 4:30 am on the 1st and 15th of each month, plus every Friday. EXAMPLE CRON FILE @example # use /bin/sh to run commands, no matter what /etc/passwd says SHELL=/bin/sh # mail any output to `paul', no matter whose crontab this is MAILTO=paul # # run five minutes after midnight, every day 5 0 * * * $HOME/bin/daily.job >> $HOME/tmp/out 2>&1 # run at 2:15pm on the first of every month -- output mailed to paul 15 14 1 * * $HOME/bin/monthly # run at 10 pm on weekdays, annoy Joe 0 22 * * 1-5 mail -s "It's 10pm" joe%Joe,%%Where are your kids?% 23 0-23/2 * * * echo "run 23 minutes after midn, 2am, 4am ..., everyday" 5 4 * * sun echo "run at 5 after 4 every sunday" @end example @node Incompatibilities with old Unices, , Crontab file, Vixie Syntax @subsection Extensions and incompatibilities @cindex incompatibilities with old Unices @cindex extensions, vixie over old Unices This section lists differences between Paul Vixie's cron and the olde-worlde BSD and AT&T programs, for the benefit of system administrators and users who are upgrading all the way. @itemize @bullet @item @cindex day 7 When specifying day of week, both day 0 and day 7 will be considered Sunday. BSD and AT&T seem to disagree about this. @item Lists and ranges are allowed to co-exist in the same field. "1-3,7-9" would be rejected by AT&T or BSD cron -- they want to see "1-3" or "7,8,9" ONLY. @item Ranges can include "steps", so "1-9/2" is the same as "1,3,5,7,9". @item Names of months or days of the week can be specified by name. @item Environment variables can be set in the crontab. In BSD or AT&T, the environment handed to child processes is basically the one from /etc/rc. @item Command output is mailed to the crontab owner (BSD can't do this), can be mailed to a person other than the crontab owner (SysV can't do this), or the feature can be turned off and no mail will be sent at all (SysV can't do this either). @end itemize @node Invoking, Guile modules, Syntax, Top @chapter Detailed invoking @cindex invoking @cindex personality @cindex mcron program @cindex cron program @cindex crond program @cindex crontab program The program adopts one of three different personalities depending on the name used to invoke it. In a standard installation, the program is installed in the system under the names mcron, cron and crontab (installed SUID). The recommended way to invoke the program is via the mcron personality described in the next section. The program can also be run as cron by root, and by the SUID program crontab by individual users to gain backwards compatibility with Vixie cron. However, due to the fact that this daemon process is shared by, and under control of, all the users of the system it is possible (though very unlikely) that it may become unusable, hence the recommendation to use the mcron personality. @cindex deprecated, vixie personality Furthermore, the Vixie personality is considered deprecated by this author (it offers not a single advantage over the mcron personality, and bloats the code by a factor of three). It is unlikely that this personality will ever actually go away, but the program may in future be split into two distinct parts, and new developments will only take place in the part which implements the mcron personality. @menu * Invoking mcron:: * Invoking cron or crond:: * Invoking crontab:: * Behaviour on laptops:: * Exit codes:: @end menu @node Invoking mcron, Invoking cron or crond, Invoking, Invoking @section Invoking mcron @cindex invoking mcron @cindex mcron options @cindex mcron arguments @cindex command line, mcron @cindex mcron command line Mcron should be run by the user who wants to schedule his jobs. It may be made a background job using the facilities of the shell. The basic command is @code{mcron [OPTION ...] [file ...]} which has the effect of reading all the configuration files specified (subject to the options) and then waiting until it is time to execute some command. If no files are given on the command line, then mcron will look in the user's ~/.cron directory. In either case, files which end in the extension .vixie or .vix will be assumed to contain Vixie-style crontabs, and files ending .guile or .gle will be assumed to contain scheme code and will be executed as such; ANY OTHER FILES WILL BE IGNORED - specify a file name of ``-'' and then pipe the files into the standard input if you really want to read them, possibly using the @code{stdin} option to specify the type of file. The program accepts the following options. @table @option @item -s [count] @itemx --schedule[=count] @cindex printout of jobs schedule @cindex schedule of jobs, listing @cindex options, schedule @cindex options, -s @cindex -s option @cindex --schedule option With this option specified no commands are run. Instead, the program computes the times the commands would be run and prints the information to the screen, and then immediately exits. The count, if supplied, indicates the number of commands to display. The default value is 8. @cindex daemon option @cindex options, daemon @cindex options, -d @cindex -d option @cindex --daemon option @item -d @itemx --daemon With this option the program will detach itself from the controlling terminal and run as a daemon process. @cindex stdin option @cindex options, stdin @cindex options, -i @cindex -i option @cindex --stdin option @cindex standard input, configuring from @cindex configuring from standard input @item -i (vixie|guile) @itemx --stdin=(vixie|guile) This option is used to indicate whether the configuration information being passed on the standard input is in Vixie format or Guile format. Guile is the default. @cindex -v option @cindex --version option @cindex options, -v @cindex options, version @item -v @itemx --version This option causes a message to be printed on the standard output with information about the version and copyright for the current program. @cindex -h option @cindex --help option @cindex options, -h @cindex options, --help @item -h @itemx --help This causes a short but complete usage message to be displayed on standard output. @end table @node Invoking cron or crond, Invoking crontab, Invoking mcron, Invoking @section Invoking cron or crond @cindex cron, invokation @cindex invoking cron @cindex crond, invokation @cindex invoking crond @cindex @CONFIG_SPOOL_DIR@ @cindex @CONFIG_SOCKET_FILE@ NOTE THAT THIS SECTION ONLY APPLIES IF THE @code{cron} or @code{crond}, and @code{crontab} PROGRAMS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED BY THE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR. If the program runs by the name of @code{cron} or @code{crond}, then it will read all the files in @code{@CONFIG_SPOOL_DIR@} (which should only be readable by root) and the file @code{/etc/crontab}, and then detaches itself from the terminal to live forever as a daemon process. Additionally, it creates a UNIX socket at @code{@CONFIG_SOCKET_FILE@}, and listens for messages sent to that socket consisting of a user name whose crontabs have been changed. In this case, the program will re-read that user's crontab. This is for correct functioning with the crontab program. Further, if the @code{--noetc} option was not used, a job is scheduled to run every minute to check if /etc/crontab has been modified recently. If so, this file will also be re-read. The options which may be used with this program are as follows. @table @option @cindex -v option @cindex --version option @cindex options, -v @cindex options, version @item -v @itemx --version This option causes a message to be printed on the standard output with information about the version and copyright for the current program. @cindex -h option @cindex --help option @cindex options, -h @cindex options, --help @item -h @itemx --help This causes a short but complete usage message to be displayed on standard output. @item -s [count] @itemx --schedule[=count] @cindex printout of jobs schedule @cindex schedule of jobs, listing @cindex options, schedule @cindex options, -s @cindex -s option @cindex --schedule option With this option specified no commands are run. Instead, the program computes the times the commands would be run and prints the information to the screen, and then immediately exits. The count, if supplied, indicates the number of commands to display. The default value is 8. @cindex -n option @cindex --noetc option @cindex options, -n @cindex options, --noetc @item -n @itemx --noetc This tells cron not to add a job to the system which wakes up every minute to check for modifications to @code{/etc/crontab}. It is recommended that this option be used (and further that the @code{/etc/crontab} file be taken off the system altogether!) @end table @node Invoking crontab, Behaviour on laptops, Invoking cron or crond, Invoking @section Invoking crontab @cindex crontab, invoking @cindex invoking crontab This program is run by individual users to inspect or modify their crontab files. If a change is made to the file, then the root daemon process will be given a kick, and will immediately read the new configuration. A warning will be issued to standard output if it appears that a cron daemon is not running. The command is used as @code{crontab [-u user] file} or @code{crontab [-u user] ( -l | -e | -r )} Only the root user can use the -u option, to specify the manipulation of another user's crontab file. In the first instance, the entire crontab file of the user is replaced with the contents of the specified file, or standard input if the file is ``-''. In the latter case, the program behaves according to which of the (mutually exclusive) options was given (note that the long options are an mcron extension). @table @option @cindex -l option @cindex list option, crontab @cindex options, -l @cindex options, --list @cindex viewing a crontab @cindex listing a crontab @item -l @itemx --list Print the user's crontab file to the standard output, and exit. @cindex -r option @cindex remove option @cindex options, -r @cindex options, --remove @cindex deleting a crontab @cindex removing a crontab @item -r @item --remove Delete the user's crontab file, and exit. @cindex -e option @cindex edit option @cindex options, -e @cindex options, --edit @cindex editing a crontab @cindex creating a crontab @item -e @item --edit Using the editor specified in the user's VISUAL or EDITOR environment variables, allow the user to edit his crontab. Once the user exits the editor, the crontab is checked for parseability, and if it is okay then it is installed as the user's new crontab and the daemon is notified that a change has taken place, so that the new file will become immediately effective. @end table @node Behaviour on laptops, Exit codes, Invoking crontab, Invoking @section Behaviour on laptops @cindex laptops @cindex power suspend While mcron has not been designed to work anachronistically, the behaviour of mcron when a laptop emerges from a suspended state is well defined, and the following description explains what happens in this situation. When a laptop awakes from a suspended state, all jobs which would have run while the laptop was suspended will run exactly once immediately (and simultaneously) when the laptop awakes, and then the next time that those jobs run will be computed based on the time the laptop was awoken. Any jobs which would not have run during the suspense period will be unaffected, and will still run at their proper times. @node Exit codes, , Behaviour on laptops, Invoking @section Exit codes @cindex exit codes @cindex error conditions @cindex errors The following are the status codes returned to the operating system when the program terminates. @table @asis @item 0 No problems. @item 1 An attempt has been made to start cron but there is already a @CONFIG_PID_FILE@ file. If there really is no other cron daemon running (this does not include invokations of mcron) then you should remove this file before attempting to run cron. @item 2 In parsing a guile configuration file, a @code{job} command has been seen but the second argument is neither a procedure, list or string. This argument is the job's action, and needs to be specified in one of these forms. @item 3 In parsing a guile configuration file, a @code{job} command has been seen but the first argument is neither a procedure, list or string. This argument is the job's next-time specification, and needs to be specified in one of these forms. @item 4 An attempt to run cron has been made by a user who does not have permission to access the crontabs in @CONFIG_SPOOL_DIR@. These files should be readable only by root, and the cron daemon must be run as root. @item 5 An attempt to run mcron has been made, but there are no jobs to schedule! @item 6 The system administrator has blocked this user from using crontab with the files @CONFIG_ALLOW_FILE@ and @CONFIG_DENY_FILE@. @item 7 Crontab has been run with more than one of the arguments @code{-l}, @code{-r}, @code{-e}. These are mutually exclusive options. @item 8 Crontab has been run with the -u option by a user other than root. Only root is allowed to use this option. @item 9 An invalid vixie-style time specification has been supplied. @item 10 An invalid vixie-style job specification has been supplied. @item 11 A bad line has been seen in /etc/crontab. @item 12 The last component of the name of the program was not one of @code{mcron}, @code{cron}, @code{crond} or @code{crontab}. @item 13 Either the ~/.cron directory does not exist, or there is a problem reading the files there. @c @item 14 @c There is a problem writing to /var/cron/update. This is probably @c because the crontab program is not installed SUID root, as it should @c be. @item 15 Crontab has been run without any arguments at all. There is no default behaviour in this case. @item 16 Cron has been run by a user other than root. @end table @node Guile modules, Index, Invoking, Top @chapter Guile modules Some of the key parts of mcron are implemented as modules so they can be incorporated into other Guile programs, or even into C-sourced programs if they are linked against libguile. It may be, for example, that a program needs to perform house-keeping functions at certain times of the day, in which case it can spawn (either fork or thread) a sub-process which uses a built-in mcron. Another example may be a program which must sleep until some non-absolute time specified on the Gregorian calendar (the first day of next week, for example). Finally, it may be the wish of the user to provide a program with the functionality of mcron plus a bit extra. The core module maintains mcron's internal job lists, and provides the main wait-run-wait loop that is mcron's main function. It also introduces the facilities for accumulating a set of environment modifiers, which take effect when jobs run. @menu * The core module:: The job list and execution loop. * The redirect module:: Sending output of jobs to a mail box. * The vixie-time module:: Parsing vixie-style time specifications. * The job-specifier module:: All commands for scheme configuration files. * The vixie-specification module:: Commands for reading vixie-style crontabs. @end menu @node The core module, The redirect module, Guile modules, Guile modules @section The core module @cindex guile module @cindex core module @cindex modules, core This module may be used by including @code{(use-modules (mcron core))} in a program. The main functions are @code{add-job} and @code{run-job-loop}, which allow a program to create a list of job specifications to run, and then to initiate the wait-run-wait loop firing the jobs off at the requisite times. However, before they are introduced two functions which manipulate the environment that takes effect when a job runs are defined. @cindex environment The environment is a set of name-value pairs which is built up incrementally. Each time the @code{add-job} function is called, the environment modifiers that have been accumulated up to that point are stored with the new job specification, and when the job actually runs these name-value pairs are used to modify the run-time environment in effect. @deffn{Scheme procedure} append-environment-mods name value When a job is run make sure the environment variable @var{name} has the value @var{value}. @end deffn @deffn{Scheme procedure} clear-environment-mods This procedure causes all the environment modifiers that have been specified so far to be forgotten. @end deffn @deffn{Scheme procedure} add-job time-proc action displayable configuration-time configuration-user This procedure adds a job specification to the list of all jobs to run. @var{time-proc} should be a procedure taking exactly one argument which will be a UNIX time. This procedure must compute the next time that the job should run, and return the result. @var{action} should be a procedure taking no arguments, and contains the instructions that actually get executed whenever the job is scheduled to run. @var{displayable} should be a string, and is only for the use of humans; it can be anything which identifies or simply gives a clue as to the purpose or function of this job. @var{configuration-time} is the time from which the first invokation of this job should be computed. Finally, @var{configuration-user} should be the passwd entry for the user under whose personality the job is to run. @end deffn @deffn{Scheme procedure} run-job-loop . fd-list @cindex file descriptors @cindex interrupting the mcron loop This procedure returns only under exceptional circumstances, but usually loops forever waiting for the next time to arrive when a job needs to run, running that job, recomputing the next run time, and then waiting again. However, the wait can be interrupted by data becoming available for reading on one of the file descriptors in the fd-list, if supplied. Only in this case will the procedure return to the calling program, which may then make modifications to the job list before calling the @code{run-job-loop} procedure again to resume execution of the mcron core. @end deffn @deffn{Scheme procedure} remove-user-jobs user The argument @var{user} should be a string naming a user (his login name), or an integer UID, or an object representing the user's passwd entry. All jobs on the current job list that are scheduled to be run under this personality are removed from the job list. @end deffn @deffn{Scheme procedure} get-schedule count @cindex schedule of jobs The argument @var{count} should be an integer value giving the number of time-points in the future to report that jobs will run as. Note that this procedure is disruptive; if @code{run-job-loop} is called after this procedure, the first job to run will be the one after the last job that was reported in the schedule report. The report itself is returned to the calling program as a string. @end deffn @node The redirect module, The vixie-time module, The core module, Guile modules @section The redirect module @cindex redirect module @cindex modules, redirect This module is introduced to a program with the command @code{(use-modules (mcron redirect))}. This module provides the @code{with-mail-out} function, described fully in @ref{Guile Syntax}. @node The vixie-time module, The job-specifier module, The redirect module, Guile modules @section The vixie-time module @cindex vixie-time module @cindex modules, vixie-time This module is introduced to a program by @code{(use-modules (mcron vixie-time))}. This module provides a single method for converting a vixie-style time specification into a procedure which can be used as the @code{next-time-function} to the core @code{add-job} procedure, or to the @code{job-specifier} @code{job} procedure. See @ref{Vixie Syntax} for full details of the allowed format for the time string. @deffn{Scheme procedure} parse-vixie-time time-string The single argument @var{time-string} should be a string containing a vixie-style time specification, and the return value is the required procedure. @end deffn @node The job-specifier module, The vixie-specification module, The vixie-time module, Guile modules @section The job-specifier module @cindex job-specifier module @cindex modules, job-specifier This module is introduced to a program by @code{(use-modules (mcron job-specifier))}. This module provides all the functions available to user's Guile configuration files, namely @code{range}, @code{next-year-from}, @code{next-year}, @code{next-month-from}, @code{next-month}, @code{next-day-from}, @code{next-day}, @code{next-hour-from}, @code{next-hour}, @code{next-minute-from}, @code{next-minute}, @code{next-second-from}, @code{next-second}, and last but not least, @code{job}. See @ref{Guile Syntax} for full details. Once this module is loaded, a scheme configuration file can be used to put jobs onto the job list simply by @code{load}ing the file. @node The vixie-specification module, , The job-specifier module, Guile modules @section The vixie-specification module @cindex vixie-specification module @cindex modules, vixie-specification To use this module, put the command @code{(use-modules (mcron vixie-specification))} into your program. This module exports a couple of functions for adding jobs to the internal job list according to a Vixie-style crontab file. @deffn{Scheme procedure} read-vixie-port port . parse-line This procedure reads a crontab from the given port, and adds jobs to the job list accordingly, taking care of environment specifications and comments which may appear in such a file. @var{parse-line} should not normally be used, except that if you are parsing a (deprecated) @code{/etc/crontab} file with a slightly modified syntax, you may pass the value @var{parse-system-vixie-line} as the optional argument. @end deffn @deffn{Scheme procedure} read-vixie-file name . parse-line This procedure attempts to open the named file, and if it fails will return silently. Otherwise, the behaviour is identical to @code{read-vixie-port} above. @end deffn Once this module has been declared in a program, a crontab file can be used to augment the current job list with a call to @code{read-vixie-file}. @node Index, , Guile modules, Top @unnumbered Index @printindex cp @bye mcron-1.0.6/mcron.c.template0000644000175000017500000000746011404766201012661 00000000000000/* -*-c-*- */ /* * Copyright (C) 2003 Dale Mellor * * This file is part of GNU mcron. * * GNU mcron is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under * the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free * Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) * any later version. * * GNU mcron is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT * ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or * FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for * more details. * * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along * with GNU mcron. If not, see . */ /* This C code represents the thinnest possible wrapper around the Guile code which constitutes all the functionality of the mcron program. There are two plus one reasons why we need to do this, and one very unfortunate consequence. Firstly, SUID does not work on an executable script. In the end, it is the execution of the translator, in our case guile, which determines the effective user, and it is not wise to make the system guile installation SUID root! Secondly, executable scripts show up in ugly ways in listings of the system process table. Guile in particular, with its multi-line #! ...\ \n -s ...!# idiosyncracies shows up in process listings in a way that is difficult to determine what program is actually running. A third reason for the C wrapper which might be mentioned is that a security-conscious system administrator can choose to only install a binary, thus removing the possibility of a user studying a guile script and working out ways of hacking it to his own ends, or worse still finding a way to modify it to his own ends. Unfortunately, running the guile script from inside a C program means that the sigaction function does not work. Instead, it is necessary to perform the signal processing in C. The guile code itself is substituted for the GU1LE_PROGRAM_GOES_HERE (sic) token by the makefile, which processes the scheme to make it look like one big string. */ #include #include #include /* This is a function designed to be installed as a signal handler, for signals which are supposed to initiate shutdown of this program. It calls the scheme procedure (see mcron.scm for details) to do all the work, and then exits. */ void react_to_terminal_signal (int sig) { scm_eval_string (scm_take0str ("(delete-run-file)") ); exit (1); } /* This is a function designed to be callable from scheme, and sets up all the signal handlers required by the cron personality. */ SCM set_cron_signals () { static struct sigaction sa; memset (&sa, 0, sizeof (sa)); sa.sa_handler = react_to_terminal_signal; sigaction (SIGTERM, &sa, 0); sigaction (SIGINT, &sa, 0); sigaction (SIGQUIT, &sa, 0); sigaction (SIGHUP, &sa, 0); return SCM_BOOL_T; } /* The effective main function (i.e. the one that actually does some work). We register the function above with the guile system, and then execute the mcron guile program. */ void inner_main () { scm_c_define_gsubr ("c-set-cron-signals", 0, 0, 0, set_cron_signals); scm_eval_string (scm_take0str ( GUILE_PROGRAM_GOES_HERE ) ); } /* The real main function. Does nothing but start up the guile subsystem. */ int main (int argc, char **argv) { setenv ("GUILE_LOAD_PATH", GUILE_LOAD_PATH, 1); scm_boot_guile (argc, argv, inner_main, 0); return 0; } mcron-1.0.6/environment.scm0000644000175000017500000000736011404766201012634 00000000000000;; Copyright (C) 2003 Dale Mellor ;; ;; This file is part of GNU mcron. ;; ;; GNU mcron is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under ;; the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free ;; Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) ;; any later version. ;; ;; GNU mcron is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ;; ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or ;; FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for ;; more details. ;; ;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along ;; with GNU mcron. If not, see . ;; This file defines the variable current-environment-mods, and the procedures ;; append-environment-mods (which is available to user configuration files), ;; clear-environment-mods and modify-environment. The idea is that the ;; current-environment-mods is a list of pairs of environment names and values, ;; and represents the cumulated environment settings in a configuration ;; file. When a job definition is seen in a configuration file, the ;; current-environment-mods are copied into the internal job description, and ;; when the job actually runs these environment modifications are applied to ;; the UNIX environment in which the job runs. (define-module (mcron environment) #:export (modify-environment clear-environment-mods append-environment-mods get-current-environment-mods-copy)) ;; The env-alist is an association list of variable names and values. Variables ;; later in the list will take precedence over variables before. We return a ;; fixed-up version in which some variables are given specific default values ;; (which the user can override), and two variables which the user is not ;; allowed to control are added at the end of the list. (define (impose-default-environment env-alist passwd-entry) (append `(("HOME" . ,(passwd:dir passwd-entry)) ("CWD" . ,(passwd:dir passwd-entry)) ("SHELL" . ,(passwd:shell passwd-entry)) ("TERM" . #f) ("TERMCAP" . #f)) env-alist `(("LOGNAME" . ,(passwd:name passwd-entry)) ("USER" . ,(passwd:name passwd-entry))))) ;; Modify the UNIX environment for the current process according to the given ;; association list of variables, with the default variable values imposed. (define (modify-environment env-alist passwd-entry) (for-each (lambda (variable) (setenv (car variable) (cdr variable))) (impose-default-environment env-alist passwd-entry))) ;; As we parse configuration files, we build up an alist of environment ;; variables here. (define current-environment-mods '()) ;; Each time a job is added to the system, we take a snapshot of the current ;; set of environment modifiers. (define (get-current-environment-mods-copy) (list-copy current-environment-mods)) ;; When we start to parse a new configuration file, we want to start with a ;; fresh environment (actually an umodified version of the pervading mcron ;; environment). (define (clear-environment-mods) (set! current-environment-mods '())) ;; Procedure to add another environment setting to the alist above. This is ;; used both implicitly by the Vixie parser, and can be used directly by users ;; in scheme configuration files. The return value is purely for the ;; convenience of the parse-vixie-environment in the vixie-specification module ;; (yuk). (define (append-environment-mods name value) (set! current-environment-mods (append current-environment-mods (list (cons name value)))) #t) mcron-1.0.6/vixie-specification.scm0000644000175000017500000002120511404766201014224 00000000000000;; Copyright (C) 2003 Dale Mellor ;; ;; This file is part of GNU mcron. ;; ;; GNU mcron is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under ;; the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free ;; Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) ;; any later version. ;; ;; GNU mcron is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ;; ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or ;; FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for ;; more details. ;; ;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along ;; with GNU mcron. If not, see . ;; This file provides methods for reading a complete Vixie-style configuration ;; file, either from a real file or an already opened port. It also exposes the ;; method for parsing the time-specification part of a Vixie string, so that ;; these can be used to form the next-time-function of a job in a Guile ;; configuration file. (define-module (mcron vixie-specification) #:export (parse-user-vixie-line parse-system-vixie-line read-vixie-port read-vixie-file check-system-crontab) #:use-module ((mcron config) :select (config-socket-file)) #:use-module (mcron core) #:use-module (mcron job-specifier) #:use-module (mcron redirect) #:use-module (mcron vixie-time)) (use-modules (ice-9 regex) (ice-9 rdelim) (srfi srfi-1) (srfi srfi-2) (srfi srfi-13) (srfi srfi-14)) ;; A line in a Vixie-style crontab file which gives a command specification ;; carries two pieces of information: a time specification consisting of five ;; space-separated items, and a command which is also separated from the time ;; specification by a space. The line is broken into the two components, and the ;; job procedure run to add the two pieces of information to the job list (this ;; will in turn use the above function to turn the time specification into a ;; function for computing future run times of the command). (define parse-user-vixie-line-regexp (make-regexp "^[[:space:]]*(([^[:space:]]+[[:space:]]+){5})(.*)$")) (define (parse-user-vixie-line line) (let ((match (regexp-exec parse-user-vixie-line-regexp line))) (if (not match) (throw 'mcron-error 10 "Bad job line in Vixie file.")) (job (match:substring match 1) (lambda () (with-mail-out (match:substring match 3))) (match:substring match 3)))) ;; The case of reading a line from /etc/crontab is similar to above but the user ;; ID appears in the sixth field, before the action. (define parse-system-vixie-line-regexp (make-regexp (string-append "^[[:space:]]*(([^[:space:]]+[[:space:]]+){5})" "([[:alpha:]][[:alnum:]_]*)[[:space:]]+(.*)$"))) (define (parse-system-vixie-line line) (let ((match (regexp-exec parse-system-vixie-line-regexp line))) (if (not match) (throw 'mcron-error 11 "Bad job line in /etc/crontab.")) (let ((user (match:substring match 3))) (set-configuration-user user) (job (match:substring match 1) (lambda () (with-mail-out (match:substring match 4) user)) (match:substring match 4))))) ;; Procedure to act on an environment variable specification in a Vixie-style ;; configuration file, by adding an entry to the alist above. Returns #t if the ;; operation was successful, #f if the line could not be interpreted as an ;; environment specification. (define parse-vixie-environment-regexp1 (make-regexp "^[ \t]*([[:alpha:]_][[:alnum:]_]*)[ \t]*=[ \t]*\"(.*)\"[ \t]*$")) (define parse-vixie-environment-regexp2 (make-regexp "^[ \t]*([[:alpha:]_][[:alnum:]_]*)[ \t]*=[ \t]*'(.*)'[ \t]*$")) (define parse-vixie-environment-regexp3 (make-regexp "^[ \t]*([[:alpha:]_][[:alnum:]_]*)[ \t]*=[ \t]*(.*[^ \t])[ \t]*$")) (define parse-vixie-environment-regexp4 (make-regexp "^[ \t]*([[:alpha:]_][[:alnum:]_]*)[ \t]*=[ \t]*$")) (define (parse-vixie-environment string) (let ((match (or (regexp-exec parse-vixie-environment-regexp1 string) (regexp-exec parse-vixie-environment-regexp2 string) (regexp-exec parse-vixie-environment-regexp3 string)))) (if match (append-environment-mods (match:substring match 1) (match:substring match 2)) (and-let* ((match (regexp-exec parse-vixie-environment-regexp4 string))) (append-environment-mods (match:substring match 1) #f))))) ;; The next procedure reads an entire Vixie-style file. For each line in the ;; file there are three possibilities (after continuation lines have been ;; appended): the line is blank or contains only a comment, the line contains an ;; environment modifier which will be handled in the mcron environment module, ;; or the line contains a command specification in which case we use the ;; procedure above to add an entry to the internal job list. ;; ;; Note that the environment modifications are cleared, so that there is no ;; interference between crontab files (this might lead to unpredictable ;; behaviour because the order in which crontab files are processed, if there is ;; more than one, is generally undefined). (define read-vixie-file-comment-regexp (make-regexp "^[[:space:]]*(#.*)?$")) (define (read-vixie-port port . parse-vixie-line) (clear-environment-mods) (if port (let ((parse-vixie-line (if (null? parse-vixie-line) parse-user-vixie-line (car parse-vixie-line)))) (do ((line (read-line port) (read-line port)) (line-number 1 (1+ line-number))) ((eof-object? line)) (let ((report-line line-number)) ;; If the line ends with \, append the next line. (while (and (>= (string-length line) 1) (char=? (string-ref line (- (string-length line) 1)) #\\)) (let ((next-line (read-line port))) (if (eof-object? next-line) (set! next-line "")) (set! line-number (1+ line-number)) (set! line (string-append (substring line 0 (- (string-length line) 1)) next-line)))) (catch 'mcron-error (lambda () ;; Consider the three cases mentioned in the description. (or (regexp-exec read-vixie-file-comment-regexp line) (parse-vixie-environment line) (parse-vixie-line line))) (lambda (key exit-code . msg) (throw 'mcron-error exit-code (apply string-append (number->string report-line) ": " msg))))))))) ;; If a file cannot be opened, we must silently ignore it because it may have ;; been removed by crontab. However, if the file is there it must be parseable, ;; otherwise the error must be propagated to the caller. (define (read-vixie-file file-path . parse-vixie-line) (let ((port #f)) (catch #t (lambda () (set! port (open-input-file file-path))) (lambda (key . args) (set! port #f))) (if port (catch 'mcron-error (lambda () (if (null? parse-vixie-line) (read-vixie-port port) (read-vixie-port port (car parse-vixie-line))) (close port)) (lambda (key exit-code . msg) (close port) (throw 'mcron-error exit-code (apply string-append file-path ":" msg))))))) ;; A procedure which determines if the /etc/crontab file has been recently ;; modified, and, if so, signals the main routine to re-read the file. We run ;; under the with-mail-to command so that the process runs as a child, ;; preventing lockup. If cron is supposed to check for updates to /etc/crontab, ;; then this procedure will be called about 5 seconds before every minute. (define (check-system-crontab) (with-mail-out (lambda () (let ((mtime (stat:mtime (stat "/etc/crontab")))) (if (> mtime (- (current-time) 60)) (let ((socket (socket AF_UNIX SOCK_STREAM 0))) (connect socket AF_UNIX config-socket-file) (display "/etc/crontab" socket) (close socket))))))) mcron-1.0.6/AUTHORS0000644000175000017500000000132111407206151010617 00000000000000Authors of GNU mcron. Copyright (C) 2003, 2005, 2006 Dale Mellor Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification, are permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright notice and this notice are preserved. Dale Mellor (dale_mellor@users.sourceforge.net) wrote everything from scratch, with some reference to Paul Vixie's code, with the exceptions noted below. The section of the manual which describes in detail the syntax for Vixie-style configuration files is copied verbatim from Paul Vixie's own distribution, on the understanding that this is permitted under his copyright notice, which is reproduced in its entirety in this section of the manual. mcron-1.0.6/job-specifier.scm0000644000175000017500000002612011404766201013004 00000000000000;; Copyright (C) 2003 Dale Mellor ;; ;; This file is part of GNU mcron. ;; ;; GNU mcron is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under ;; the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free ;; Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) ;; any later version. ;; ;; GNU mcron is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ;; ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or ;; FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for ;; more details. ;; ;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along ;; with GNU mcron. If not, see . ;; This module defines all the functions that can be used by scheme mcron ;; configuration files, namely the procedures for working out next times, the ;; job procedure for registering new jobs (actually a wrapper around the core ;; add-job function), and the procedure for declaring environment modifications. (define-module (mcron job-specifier) #:export (range next-year-from next-year next-month-from next-month next-day-from next-day next-hour-from next-hour next-minute-from next-minute next-second-from next-second set-configuration-user set-configuration-time job find-best-next) #:use-module (mcron core) #:use-module (mcron environment) #:use-module (mcron vixie-time) #:re-export (append-environment-mods)) ;; Function (available to user configuration files) which produces a list of ;; values from start up to (but not including) end. An optional step may be ;; supplied, and (if positive) only every step'th value will go into the ;; list. For example, (range 1 6 2) returns '(1 3 5). (define (range start end . step) (let ((step (if (or (null? step) (<= (car step) 0)) 1 (car step)))) (let loop ((start start)) (if (>= start end) '() (cons start (loop (+ start step))))))) ;; Internal function (not supposed to be used directly in configuration files; ;; it is exported from the module for the convenience of other parts of the ;; mcron implementation) which takes a value and a list of possible next values ;; (all assumed less than 9999). It returns a pair consisting of the smallest ;; element of the list, and the smallest element larger than the current ;; value. If an example of the latter cannot be found, 9999 will be returned. (define (find-best-next current next-list) (let ((current-best (cons 9999 9999))) (for-each (lambda (allowed-time) (if (< allowed-time (car current-best)) (set-car! current-best allowed-time)) (if (and (> allowed-time current) (< allowed-time (cdr current-best))) (set-cdr! current-best allowed-time))) next-list) current-best)) ;; Internal function to return the time corresponding to some near future ;; hour. If hour-list is not supplied, the time returned corresponds to the ;; start of the next hour of the day. ;; ;; If the hour-list is supplied the time returned corresponds to the first hour ;; of the day in the future which is contained in the list. If all the values in ;; the list are less than the current hour, then the time returned will ;; correspond to the first hour in the list *on the following day*. ;; ;; ... except that the function is actually generalized to deal with seconds, ;; minutes, etc., in an obvious way :-) ;; ;; Note that value-list always comes from an optional argument to a procedure, ;; so is wrapped up as the first element of a list (i.e. it is a list inside a ;; list). (define (bump-time time value-list component higher-component set-component! set-higher-component!) (if (null? value-list) (set-component! time (+ (component time) 1)) (let ((best-next (find-best-next (component time) (car value-list)))) (if (eqv? 9999 (cdr best-next)) (begin (set-higher-component! time (+ (higher-component time) 1)) (set-component! time (car best-next))) (set-component! time (cdr best-next))))) (car (mktime time))) ;; Set of configuration methods which use the above general function to bump ;; specific components of time to the next legitimate value. In each case, all ;; the components smaller than that of interest are taken to zero, so that for ;; example the time of the next year will be the time at which the next year ;; actually starts. (define (next-year-from current-time . year-list) (let ((time (localtime current-time))) (set-tm:mon time 0) (set-tm:mday time 1) (set-tm:hour time 0) (set-tm:min time 0) (set-tm:sec time 0) (bump-time time year-list tm:year tm:year set-tm:year set-tm:year))) (define (next-month-from current-time . month-list) (let ((time (localtime current-time))) (set-tm:mday time 1) (set-tm:hour time 0) (set-tm:min time 0) (set-tm:sec time 0) (bump-time time month-list tm:mon tm:year set-tm:mon set-tm:year))) (define (next-day-from current-time . day-list) (let ((time (localtime current-time))) (set-tm:hour time 0) (set-tm:min time 0) (set-tm:sec time 0) (bump-time time day-list tm:mday tm:mon set-tm:mday set-tm:mon))) (define (next-hour-from current-time . hour-list) (let ((time (localtime current-time))) (set-tm:min time 0) (set-tm:sec time 0) (bump-time time hour-list tm:hour tm:mday set-tm:hour set-tm:mday))) (define (next-minute-from current-time . minute-list) (let ((time (localtime current-time))) (set-tm:sec time 0) (bump-time time minute-list tm:min tm:hour set-tm:min set-tm:hour))) (define (next-second-from current-time . second-list) (let ((time (localtime current-time))) (bump-time time second-list tm:sec tm:min set-tm:sec set-tm:min))) ;; The current-action-time is the time a job was last run, the time from which ;; the next time to run a job must be computed. (When the program is first run, ;; this time is set to the configuration time so that jobs run from that moment ;; forwards.) Once we have this, we supply versions of the time computation ;; commands above which implicitly assume this value. (define current-action-time 0) ;; We want to provide functions which take a single optional argument (as well ;; as implicitly the current action time), but unlike usual scheme behaviour if ;; the argument is missing we want to act like it is really missing, and if it ;; is there we want to act like it is a genuine argument, not a list of ;; optionals. (define (maybe-args function args) (if (null? args) (function current-action-time) (function current-action-time (car args)))) ;; These are the convenience functions we were striving to define for the ;; configuration files. They are wrappers for the next-X-from functions above, ;; but implicitly use the current-action-time for the time argument. (define (next-year . args) (maybe-args next-year-from args)) (define (next-month . args) (maybe-args next-month-from args)) (define (next-day . args) (maybe-args next-day-from args)) (define (next-hour . args) (maybe-args next-hour-from args)) (define (next-minute . args) (maybe-args next-minute-from args)) (define (next-second . args) (maybe-args next-second-from args)) ;; The default user for running jobs is the current one (who invoked this ;; program). There are exceptions: when cron parses /etc/crontab the user is ;; specified on each individual line; when cron parses /var/cron/tabs/* the user ;; is derived from the filename of the crontab. These cases are dealt with by ;; mutating this variable. Note that the variable is only used at configuration ;; time; a UID is stored with each job and it is that which takes effect when ;; the job actually runs. (define configuration-user (getpw (getuid))) (define configuration-time (current-time)) (define (set-configuration-user user) (set! configuration-user (if (or (string? user) (integer? user)) (getpw user) user))) (define (set-configuration-time time) (set! configuration-time time)) ;; The job function, available to configuration files for adding a job rule to ;; the system. ;; ;; Here we must 'normalize' the next-time-function so that it is always a lambda ;; function which takes one argument (the last time the job ran) and returns a ;; single value (the next time the job should run). If the input value is a ;; string this is parsed as a Vixie-style time specification, and if it is a ;; list then we arrange to eval it (but note that such lists are expected to ;; ignore the function parameter - the last run time is always read from the ;; current-action-time global variable). A similar normalization is applied to ;; the action. ;; ;; Here we also compute the first time that the job is supposed to run, by ;; finding the next legitimate time from the current configuration time (set ;; right at the top of this program). (define (job time-proc action . displayable) (let ((action (cond ((procedure? action) action) ((list? action) (lambda () (primitive-eval action))) ((string? action) (lambda () (system action))) (else (throw 'mcron-error 2 "job: invalid second argument (action; should be lambda" " function, string or list)")))) (time-proc (cond ((procedure? time-proc) time-proc) ((string? time-proc) (parse-vixie-time time-proc)) ((list? time-proc) (lambda (current-time) (primitive-eval time-proc))) (else (throw 'mcron-error 3 "job: invalid first argument (next-time-function; should ") "be function, string or list)"))) (displayable (cond ((not (null? displayable)) (car displayable)) ((procedure? action) "Lambda function") ((string? action) action) ((list? action) (with-output-to-string (lambda () (display action))))))) (add-job (lambda (current-time) (set! current-action-time current-time) ;; ?? !!!! Code ;; Contributed by Sergey Poznyakoff to allow for daylight savings ;; time changes. (let* ((next (time-proc current-time)) (gmtoff (tm:gmtoff (localtime next))) (d (+ next (- gmtoff (tm:gmtoff (localtime current-time)))))) (if (eqv? (tm:gmtoff (localtime d)) gmtoff) d next))) action displayable configuration-time configuration-user))) mcron-1.0.6/mcron.texinfo0000644000175000017500000013664511407210014012276 00000000000000\input texinfo @c %**start of header @setfilename mcron.info @settitle mcron 1.0.6 @c %**end of header @syncodeindex fn cp @copying This manual is for GNU mcron (version 1.0.6), which is a program for running jobs at scheduled times. Copyright @copyright{} 2003, 2005, 2006 Dale Mellor @quotation Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''. @end quotation @end copying @ifinfo @dircategory Individual utilities @direntry * mcron: (mcron). Run jobs at scheduled times. @end direntry @end ifinfo @titlepage @title mcron - Mellor's cron daemon @author Dale Mellor @page @vskip 0pt plus 1fill @c @insertcopying @end titlepage @contents @ifnottex @node Top, Introduction, (dir), (dir) @top mcron This file documents the @code{mcron} command (Mellor's cron) for running jobs at scheduled times. @c @insertcopying @end ifnottex @menu * Introduction:: Introducing mcron. * Simple examples:: How to use mcron 99.9% of the time. * Syntax:: All the possibilities for configuring cron jobs. * Invoking:: What happens when you run the mcron command. * Guile modules:: Incorporating mcron into another Guile program. * Index:: The complete index. @detailmenu --- The Detailed Node Listing --- Simple examples * Guile Simple Examples:: * Vixie Simple Examples:: Full available syntax * Guile Syntax:: * Extended Guile examples:: * Vixie Syntax:: Extended Guile examples * AT commands:: * Every second Sunday:: * Two hours every day:: * Missing the first appointment:: * Penultimate day of every month:: Vixie * Paul Vixie's copyright:: * Crontab file:: * Incompatibilities with old Unices:: Detailed invoking * Invoking mcron:: * Invoking cron or crond:: * Invoking crontab:: * Behaviour on laptops:: * Exit codes:: Guile modules * The core module:: The job list and execution loop. * The redirect module:: Sending output of jobs to a mail box. * The vixie-time module:: Parsing vixie-style time specifications. * The job-specifier module:: All commands for scheme configuration files. * The vixie-specification module:: Commands for reading vixie-style crontabs. @end detailmenu @end menu @node Introduction, Simple examples, Top, Top @chapter Introducing mcron @cindex introduction @cindex mcron The mcron program represents a complete re-think of the cron concept originally found in the Berkeley and AT&T unices, and subsequently rationalized by Paul Vixie. The original idea was to have a daemon that wakes up every minute, scans a set of files under a special directory, and determines from those files if any shell commands should be executed in this minute. The new idea is to read the required command instructions, work out which command needs to be executed next, and then sleep until the inferred time has arrived. On waking the commands are run, and the time of the next command is computed. Furthermore, the specifications are written in scheme, allowing at the same time simple command execution instructions and very much more flexible ones to be composed than the original Vixie format. This has several useful advantages over the original idea. (Changes to user crontabs are signalled directly to mcron by the crontab program; cron must still scan the /etc/crontab file once every minute, although use of this file is highly discouraged and this behaviour can be turned off). @cindex advantages of mcron @itemize @bullet @item Does not consume CPU resources when not needed. Many cron daemons only run jobs once an hour, or even just once a day. @item Can easily allow for finer time-points to be specified, i.e. seconds. In principle this could be extended to microseconds, but this is not implemented. @item Times can be more or less regular. For example, a job that runs every 17 hours can be specified, or a job that runs on the first Sunday of every month. @item Times can be dynamic. Arbitrary Guile (scheme) code can be provided to compute the next time that a command needs to be run. This could, for example, take the system load into consideration. @item Turns out to be easy to provide complete backwards compatibility with Vixie cron. @item Each user looks after his own files in his own directory. He can use more than one to break up complicated cron specifications. @item Each user can run his own daemon. This removes the need for suid programs to manipulate the crontabs, and eliminates many security concerns that surround all existing cron programs. @item The user can obtain an advance schedule of all the jobs that are due to run. @item Vixie cron is implemented in 4500 lines of C code; mcron is 2000 lines of scheme, despite the fact that it offers many more features and much more flexibility, and complete compatibility with Vixie cron. @end itemize A full discussion of the design and philosophy of mcron can be found in the white paper at @url{http://www.gnu.org/software/mcron/design.html}. @node Simple examples, Syntax, Introduction, Top @chapter Simple examples The vast majority of uses of cron are sublimely simple: run a program every hour, or every day. With this in mind the design of mcron has been to allow such simple specifications to be made easily. The examples show how to create the command descriptions, and subsequently how to run mcron to make them happen. @menu * Guile Simple Examples:: * Vixie Simple Examples:: @end menu @node Guile Simple Examples, Vixie Simple Examples, Simple examples, Simple examples @section Guile @cindex guile examples @cindex examples, guile @cindex example, run a program every hour You have an executable @code{my-program} in your home directory, which you want to run every hour. Create a file @code{job.guile} in directory @code{~/.cron} with the following contents @example (job '(next-hour) "my-program") @end example then run the command @code{mcron}. Want the program to run fifteen minutes past the hour, every two hours? Edit the file to read @example (job '(next-minute-from (next-hour (range 0 24 2)) 15) "my-program") @end example and run the command @code{mcron}. Or, if you are not comfortable with Scheme, you could use (and see also the next section) @example (job "15 */2 * * *" "my-program") @end example and run the @code{mcron} command. If you want to run other jobs, you can either add more lines to this file, or you can create other files in your @code{.cron} directory with the @code{.guile} extension. Alternatively, you can use any file you want and pass it as an argument to @code{mcron}, or even pipe the commands into the standard input. @node Vixie Simple Examples, , Guile Simple Examples, Simple examples @section Vixie @cindex examples @cindex examples, vixie @cindex vixie examples You have an executable @code{my-program} in your home directory, which you want to run every hour. Create a file @code{job.vixie} in directory @code{~/.cron} with the following contents @example 0 * * * * my-program @end example then run the command @code{mcron}. @cindex vixie compatibility @cindex compatibility Alternatively (full compatibility with Vixie cron), set your environment variable @code{EDITOR} to your favorite editor, run @code{crontab -e}, put the above line into the edit buffer, save and exit. For this to work the @code{cron} daemon must be already running on your system, as root. @node Syntax, Invoking, Simple examples, Top @chapter Full available syntax @menu * Guile Syntax:: * Extended Guile examples:: * Vixie Syntax:: @end menu @node Guile Syntax, Extended Guile examples, Syntax, Syntax @section Guile Syntax @subsection Job specification @cindex guile syntax @cindex syntax, guile @findex job In Guile-formatted configuration files each command that needs executing is introduced with the @code{job} function. This function always takes two arguments, the first a time specification, and the second a command specification. An optional third argument may contain a string to display when this job is listed in a schedule. @cindex time specification, procedure @cindex procedure time specification The first argument can be a procedure, a list, or a string. If a function is supplied, it must take exactly one argument, which will be the ``current'' time in UNIX format, and the return value of the function must be the time in UNIX format when this action should next be run. The following functions are available to facilitate the computation: @findex next-second-from @code{(next-second-from time . args)} without arguments this returns the second after the current one. With the extra arguments, these form a list of seconds in the minute when the action should run, and the function will return the time of the next allowed second (which may be in the next minute of the hour). @footnote{Note that while commands can be scheduled to run at any second, it is unlikely that they will be executed then but some time shortly thereafter, depending on the load on the system and the number of jobs that mcron has to start at the same time.} @findex next-minute-from @findex next-hour-from @findex next-day-from @findex next-week-from @findex next-month-from @findex next-year-from Similarly to @code{next-second-from}, there are also @code{next-minute-from}, @code{next-hour-from}, @code{next-day-from}, @code{next-week-from}, @code{next-month-from}, @code{next-year-from}. @findex range Furthermore, the optional argument can be fulfilled by the function @code{(range start end . step)}, which will provide a list of values from start to (but not including) end, with the step if given. For example @code{(range 0 10 2)} will yield the list @code{'(0 2 4 6 8)}. @findex next-second @findex next-minute @findex next-hour @findex next-day @findex next-week @findex next-month @findex next-year @cindex time specification, list @cindex list time specification If the first argument to the @code{job} function is a list, it is taken to be program code made up of the functions @code{(next-second . args)}, @code{(next-minute...)}, etc, where the optional arguments can be supplied with the @code{(range)} function above (these functions are analogous to the ones above except that they implicitly assume the current time; it is supplied by the mcron core when the list is eval'd). @cindex time specification @cindex time specification, string @cindex string time specification @cindex time specification, vixie-style @cindex vixie-style time specification If the first argument to the @code{job} function is a string, it is expected to be a Vixie cron-style time specification. See the section on Vixie syntax for this. @cindex job execution @cindex command execution @cindex execution The second argument to the @code{(job)} function can be either a string, a list, or a function. In all cases the command is executed in the user's home directory, under the user's own UID. If a string is passed, it is assumed to be shell script and is executed with the user's default shell. If a list is passed it is assumed to be scheme code and is eval'd as such. A supplied function should take exactly zero arguments, and will be called at the pertinent times. @subsection Sending output as e-mail @cindex email output @cindex email from guile script @cindex standard input to commands @findex with-mail-out When jobs are specified in a vixie-style configuration, the command is broken at a percentage sign, and the stuff that comes after this is sent into the command's standard input. Furthermore, any output from the command is mailed to the user. This functionality is provided for compatibility with Vixie cron, but it is also available to scheme configuration files. The command (with-mail-out action . user) can be used to direct output from the action (which may be a procedure, list, or string) into an e-mail to the user. In the case that the action is a string, then percentage signs are processed as per the vixie specifications, and information is piped to the shell command's standard input. @subsection Setting environment variables @cindex environment variables in scheme @cindex setting environment variables @findex append-environment-mods Also for compatibility with Vixie cron, mcron has the ability to set environment variables in configuration files. To access this functionality from a scheme configuration file, use the command (append-environment-mods name value), where name is the name of an environment variable, and value is the value put to it. A value of #f will remove the variable from the environment. Note that environment modifications are accumulated as the configuration file is processed, so when a job actually runs, its environment will be modified according to the modifications specified before the job specification in the configuration file. @node Extended Guile examples, Vixie Syntax, Guile Syntax, Syntax @section Extended Guile examples @cindex examples, extended guile @cindex extended guile examples While Guile gives you flexibility to do anything, and the power to represent complex requirements succinctly, things are not always as they seem. The following examples illustrate some pitfalls, and demonstrate how to code around them. @menu * AT commands:: * Every second Sunday:: * Two hours every day:: * Missing the first appointment:: * Penultimate day of every month:: @end menu @node AT commands, Every second Sunday, Extended Guile examples, Extended Guile examples @subsection Synthesizing ``at'' commands @cindex at command The current implementation of mcron does not provide for an at command (a command-line program that allows the user to specify that a job runs exactly once at a certain time). This can, however, be achieved. Suppose the program @code{my-program} needs to be run at midnight tonight. A Guile script like the following would work (but a printed schedule, obtained with the @code{--schedule} option, will show superfluous entries). @example (job '(next-day) (lambda () (system "my-program") (kill (getppid) SIGINT))) @end example @node Every second Sunday, Two hours every day, AT commands, Extended Guile examples @subsection Every second Sunday @cindex examples, every second sunday To run @code{my-program} on the second Sunday of every month, a Guile script like the following should suffice (it is left as an exercise to the student to understand how this works!). @example (job (lambda (current-time) (let* ((next-month (next-month-from current-time)) (first-day (tm:wday (localtime next-month))) (second-sunday (if (eqv? first-day 0) 8 (- 14 first-day)))) (+ next-month (* 24 60 60 second-sunday)))) "my-program") @end example @node Two hours every day, Missing the first appointment, Every second Sunday, Extended Guile examples @subsection Two hours every day @cindex examples, two hours every day @cindex pitfalls, two hours every day Surprisingly perhaps, the following will @strong{not} have the desired effect. @example (job '(next-hour-from (next-day) '(1 2)) "my-program") @end example Rather than running the my-program program at one o'clock and two o'clock every day, it will only run it at one o'clock. This is because each time mcron has to compute the next time to run the command, it first obtains the next day, and then finds the earliest hour in that day to run at. Thus, after running the command at one o'clock, the program first skips forwards to the next midnight (missing the two o'clock appointment), and then finds the next one o'clock schedule. The following simple command is the correct way to specify this behaviour. @example (job '(next-hour '(1 2)) "my-program") @end example @node Missing the first appointment, Penultimate day of every month, Two hours every day, Extended Guile examples @subsection Missing the first appointment @cindex examples, missing the first appointment @cindex pitfalls, missing the first appointment The command @example (job '(next-hour-from (next-day) '(16)) "my-program") @end example will run @code{my-program} every day at four o'clock in the afternoon. However, if mcron is started with this script at midday, the first time the command will run will be four o'clock tomorrow; today's appointment will be missed (one time only). The correct way to specify this requirement is simply @example (job '(next-hour '(16)) "my-program") @end example @node Penultimate day of every month, , Missing the first appointment, Extended Guile examples @subsection Penultimate day of every month @cindex examples, penultimate day of every month The following will run the @code{my-program} program on the second-to-last day of every month. @example (job '(- (next-month-from (next-month)) (* 48 3600)) "my-program") @end example @node Vixie Syntax, , Extended Guile examples, Syntax @section Vixie @cindex syntax, vixie @cindex vixie syntax @cindex vixie definition @cindex vixie compatibility @cindex compatibility, vixie @emph{NOTE} that this section is definitive. If there is a difference in behaviour between the mcron program and this part of the manual, then there is a bug in the program. This section is also copied verbatim from Paul Vixie's documentation for his cron program, and his copyright notice is duly reproduced below. There are three problems with this specification. @cindex zero'th day of month @cindex 0'th day of month 1. It is allowed to specify days of the month in the range 0-31. What does it mean to specify day 0? Looking at the Vixie source code, it seems that if this date appears as part of a list, it has no effect. However, if it appears on its own, the effect is to say ``don't run on any particular day of the month, only take the week-day specification into account.'' Mcron has been coded to mimic this behaviour as a special case (unmodified mcron logic implies that this date specification would cause jobs to run on the last day of the previous month). @cindex thirteenth month of year @cindex 13th month of year 2. Similarly to the above (but different), months of the year can be specified in the range 0-12. In the case of mcron (don't know what Vixie cron did) month 12 will cause the program to wait until January of the following year (but don't rely on this). @cindex shell @cindex environment variables, shell @cindex /etc/passwd 3. Somewhere it says that cron sets the SHELL environment variable to /bin/sh, and elsewhere it implies that the default behaviour is for the user's default shell to be used to execute commands. Mcron sets the variable and runs the command in the user's default shell, as advertised by the /etc/passwd file. @menu * Paul Vixie's copyright:: * Crontab file:: * Incompatibilities with old Unices:: @end menu @node Paul Vixie's copyright, Crontab file, Vixie Syntax, Vixie Syntax @subsection Paul Vixie's copyright @cindex copyright, Paul Vixie's @cindex Paul Vixie's copyright @quotation Copyright 1988,1990,1993,1994 by Paul Vixie All rights reserved Distribute freely, except: don't remove my name from the source or documentation (don't take credit for my work), mark your changes (don't get me blamed for your possible bugs), don't alter or remove this notice. May be sold if buildable source is provided to buyer. No warrantee of any kind, express or implied, is included with this software; use at your own risk, responsibility for damages (if any) to anyone resulting from the use of this software rests entirely with the user. @end quotation @node Crontab file, Incompatibilities with old Unices, Paul Vixie's copyright, Vixie Syntax @subsection Crontab files @cindex crontab file @cindex vixie crontab file A @code{crontab} file contains instructions to the @code{cron} daemon of the general form: ``run this command at this time on this date''. Each user has their own crontab, and commands in any given crontab will be executed as the user who owns the crontab. Uucp and News will usually have their own crontabs, eliminating the need for explicitly running @code{su} as part of a cron command. @cindex comments, vixie-style Blank lines and leading spaces and tabs are ignored. Lines whose first non-space character is a pound-sign (#) are comments, and are ignored. Note that comments are not allowed on the same line as cron commands, since they will be taken to be part of the command. Similarly, comments are not allowed on the same line as environment variable settings. An active line in a crontab will be either an environment setting or a cron command. An environment setting is of the form, @cindex environment setting, vixie-style @example name = value @end example where the spaces around the equal-sign (=) are optional, and any subsequent non-leading spaces in @code{value} will be part of the value assigned to @code{name}. The @code{value} string may be placed in quotes (single or double, but matching) to preserve leading or trailing blanks. @cindex environment variables, SHELL @cindex environment variables, LOGNAME @cindex environment variables, HOME @cindex SHELL environment variable @cindex LOGNAME environment variable @cindex HOME environment variable @cindex /etc/passwd Several environment variables are set up automatically by the @code{cron} daemon. SHELL is set to /bin/sh, and LOGNAME and HOME are set from the /etc/passwd line of the crontab's owner. HOME and SHELL may be overridden by settings in the crontab; LOGNAME may not. @cindex environment variables, USER @cindex USER environment variable @cindex BSD (Another note: the LOGNAME variable is sometimes called USER on BSD systems... on these systems, USER will be set also.) @footnote{mcron has not been ported to BSD, so these notes are not relevant.} @cindex environment variables, MAILTO @cindex MAILTO environment variable In addition to LOGNAME, HOME, and SHELL, @code{cron} will look at MAILTO if it has any reason to send mail as a result of running commands in ``this'' crontab. If MAILTO is defined (and non-empty), mail is sent to the user so named. If MAILTO is defined but empty (MAILTO=""), no mail will be sent. Otherwise mail is sent to the owner of the crontab. This option is useful if you decide on /bin/mail instead of /usr/lib/sendmail as your mailer when you install cron -- /bin/mail doesn't do aliasing, and UUCP usually doesn't read its mail. The format of a cron command is very much the V7 standard, with a number of upward-compatible extensions. Each line has five time and date fields, followed by a user name if this is the system crontab file, followed by a command. Commands are executed by @code{cron} when the minute, hour, and month of year fields match the current time, @strong{and} when at least one of the two day fields (day of month, or day of week) match the current time (see ``Note'' below). @code{cron} examines cron entries once every minute. The time and date fields are: @cindex vixie time specification fields @cindex fields, vixie time specification @multitable @columnfractions .2 .5 @item Field @tab Allowed values @item ----- @tab -------------- @item minute @tab 0-59 @item hour @tab 0-23 @item day of month @tab 0-31 @item month @tab 0-12 (or names, see below) @item day of week @tab 0-7 (0 or 7 is Sun, or use names) @end multitable A field may be an asterisk (*), which always stands for ``first-last''. @cindex ranges in vixie time specifications Ranges of numbers are allowed. Ranges are two numbers separated with a hyphen. The specified range is inclusive. For example, 8-11 for an ``hours'' entry specifies execution at hours 8, 9, 10 and 11. @cindex lists in vixie time specifications Lists are allowed. A list is a set of numbers (or ranges) separated by commas. Examples: ``1,2,5,9'', ``0-4,8-12''. @cindex steps in vixie time specifications Step values can be used in conjunction with ranges. Following a range with ``/'' specifies skips of the number's value through the range. For example, ``0-23/2'' can be used in the hours field to specify command execution every other hour (the alternative in the V7 standard is ``0,2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18,20,22''). Steps are also permitted after an asterisk, so if you want to say ``every two hours'', just use ``*/2''. @cindex names in vixie-style time specifications Names can also be used for the ``month'' and ``day of week'' fields. Use the first three letters of the particular day or month (case doesn't matter). Ranges or lists of names are not allowed. @footnote{Mcron allows any alphabetic characters after a name, so full names of days or months are also valid.} @cindex % character on vixie-style commands @cindex standard input, vixie-style The ``sixth'' field (the rest of the line) specifies the command to be run. The entire command portion of the line, up to a newline or % character, will be executed by /bin/sh or by the shell specified in the SHELL variable of the cronfile. Percent-signs (%) in the command, unless escaped with backslash (\\), will be changed into newline characters, and all data after the first % will be sent to the command as standard input. @cindex day specification, vixie-style @cindex vixie-style day specification Note: The day of a command's execution can be specified by two fields -- day of month, and day of week. If both fields are restricted (ie, aren't *), the command will be run when @emph{either} field matches the current time. For example, ``30 4 1,15 * 5'' would cause a command to be run at 4:30 am on the 1st and 15th of each month, plus every Friday. EXAMPLE CRON FILE @example # use /bin/sh to run commands, no matter what /etc/passwd says SHELL=/bin/sh # mail any output to `paul', no matter whose crontab this is MAILTO=paul # # run five minutes after midnight, every day 5 0 * * * $HOME/bin/daily.job >> $HOME/tmp/out 2>&1 # run at 2:15pm on the first of every month -- output mailed to paul 15 14 1 * * $HOME/bin/monthly # run at 10 pm on weekdays, annoy Joe 0 22 * * 1-5 mail -s "It's 10pm" joe%Joe,%%Where are your kids?% 23 0-23/2 * * * echo "run 23 minutes after midn, 2am, 4am ..., everyday" 5 4 * * sun echo "run at 5 after 4 every sunday" @end example @node Incompatibilities with old Unices, , Crontab file, Vixie Syntax @subsection Extensions and incompatibilities @cindex incompatibilities with old Unices @cindex extensions, vixie over old Unices This section lists differences between Paul Vixie's cron and the olde-worlde BSD and AT&T programs, for the benefit of system administrators and users who are upgrading all the way. @itemize @bullet @item @cindex day 7 When specifying day of week, both day 0 and day 7 will be considered Sunday. BSD and AT&T seem to disagree about this. @item Lists and ranges are allowed to co-exist in the same field. "1-3,7-9" would be rejected by AT&T or BSD cron -- they want to see "1-3" or "7,8,9" ONLY. @item Ranges can include "steps", so "1-9/2" is the same as "1,3,5,7,9". @item Names of months or days of the week can be specified by name. @item Environment variables can be set in the crontab. In BSD or AT&T, the environment handed to child processes is basically the one from /etc/rc. @item Command output is mailed to the crontab owner (BSD can't do this), can be mailed to a person other than the crontab owner (SysV can't do this), or the feature can be turned off and no mail will be sent at all (SysV can't do this either). @end itemize @node Invoking, Guile modules, Syntax, Top @chapter Detailed invoking @cindex invoking @cindex personality @cindex mcron program @cindex cron program @cindex crond program @cindex crontab program The program adopts one of three different personalities depending on the name used to invoke it. In a standard installation, the program is installed in the system under the names mcron, cron and crontab (installed SUID). The recommended way to invoke the program is via the mcron personality described in the next section. The program can also be run as cron by root, and by the SUID program crontab by individual users to gain backwards compatibility with Vixie cron. However, due to the fact that this daemon process is shared by, and under control of, all the users of the system it is possible (though very unlikely) that it may become unusable, hence the recommendation to use the mcron personality. @cindex deprecated, vixie personality Furthermore, the Vixie personality is considered deprecated by this author (it offers not a single advantage over the mcron personality, and bloats the code by a factor of three). It is unlikely that this personality will ever actually go away, but the program may in future be split into two distinct parts, and new developments will only take place in the part which implements the mcron personality. @menu * Invoking mcron:: * Invoking cron or crond:: * Invoking crontab:: * Behaviour on laptops:: * Exit codes:: @end menu @node Invoking mcron, Invoking cron or crond, Invoking, Invoking @section Invoking mcron @cindex invoking mcron @cindex mcron options @cindex mcron arguments @cindex command line, mcron @cindex mcron command line Mcron should be run by the user who wants to schedule his jobs. It may be made a background job using the facilities of the shell. The basic command is @code{mcron [OPTION ...] [file ...]} which has the effect of reading all the configuration files specified (subject to the options) and then waiting until it is time to execute some command. If no files are given on the command line, then mcron will look in the user's ~/.cron directory. In either case, files which end in the extension .vixie or .vix will be assumed to contain Vixie-style crontabs, and files ending .guile or .gle will be assumed to contain scheme code and will be executed as such; ANY OTHER FILES WILL BE IGNORED - specify a file name of ``-'' and then pipe the files into the standard input if you really want to read them, possibly using the @code{stdin} option to specify the type of file. The program accepts the following options. @table @option @item -s [count] @itemx --schedule[=count] @cindex printout of jobs schedule @cindex schedule of jobs, listing @cindex options, schedule @cindex options, -s @cindex -s option @cindex --schedule option With this option specified no commands are run. Instead, the program computes the times the commands would be run and prints the information to the screen, and then immediately exits. The count, if supplied, indicates the number of commands to display. The default value is 8. @cindex daemon option @cindex options, daemon @cindex options, -d @cindex -d option @cindex --daemon option @item -d @itemx --daemon With this option the program will detach itself from the controlling terminal and run as a daemon process. @cindex stdin option @cindex options, stdin @cindex options, -i @cindex -i option @cindex --stdin option @cindex standard input, configuring from @cindex configuring from standard input @item -i (vixie|guile) @itemx --stdin=(vixie|guile) This option is used to indicate whether the configuration information being passed on the standard input is in Vixie format or Guile format. Guile is the default. @cindex -v option @cindex --version option @cindex options, -v @cindex options, version @item -v @itemx --version This option causes a message to be printed on the standard output with information about the version and copyright for the current program. @cindex -h option @cindex --help option @cindex options, -h @cindex options, --help @item -h @itemx --help This causes a short but complete usage message to be displayed on standard output. @end table @node Invoking cron or crond, Invoking crontab, Invoking mcron, Invoking @section Invoking cron or crond @cindex cron, invokation @cindex invoking cron @cindex crond, invokation @cindex invoking crond @cindex /var/cron/tabs @cindex /var/cron/socket NOTE THAT THIS SECTION ONLY APPLIES IF THE @code{cron} or @code{crond}, and @code{crontab} PROGRAMS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED BY THE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR. If the program runs by the name of @code{cron} or @code{crond}, then it will read all the files in @code{/var/cron/tabs} (which should only be readable by root) and the file @code{/etc/crontab}, and then detaches itself from the terminal to live forever as a daemon process. Additionally, it creates a UNIX socket at @code{/var/cron/socket}, and listens for messages sent to that socket consisting of a user name whose crontabs have been changed. In this case, the program will re-read that user's crontab. This is for correct functioning with the crontab program. Further, if the @code{--noetc} option was not used, a job is scheduled to run every minute to check if /etc/crontab has been modified recently. If so, this file will also be re-read. The options which may be used with this program are as follows. @table @option @cindex -v option @cindex --version option @cindex options, -v @cindex options, version @item -v @itemx --version This option causes a message to be printed on the standard output with information about the version and copyright for the current program. @cindex -h option @cindex --help option @cindex options, -h @cindex options, --help @item -h @itemx --help This causes a short but complete usage message to be displayed on standard output. @item -s [count] @itemx --schedule[=count] @cindex printout of jobs schedule @cindex schedule of jobs, listing @cindex options, schedule @cindex options, -s @cindex -s option @cindex --schedule option With this option specified no commands are run. Instead, the program computes the times the commands would be run and prints the information to the screen, and then immediately exits. The count, if supplied, indicates the number of commands to display. The default value is 8. @cindex -n option @cindex --noetc option @cindex options, -n @cindex options, --noetc @item -n @itemx --noetc This tells cron not to add a job to the system which wakes up every minute to check for modifications to @code{/etc/crontab}. It is recommended that this option be used (and further that the @code{/etc/crontab} file be taken off the system altogether!) @end table @node Invoking crontab, Behaviour on laptops, Invoking cron or crond, Invoking @section Invoking crontab @cindex crontab, invoking @cindex invoking crontab This program is run by individual users to inspect or modify their crontab files. If a change is made to the file, then the root daemon process will be given a kick, and will immediately read the new configuration. A warning will be issued to standard output if it appears that a cron daemon is not running. The command is used as @code{crontab [-u user] file} or @code{crontab [-u user] ( -l | -e | -r )} Only the root user can use the -u option, to specify the manipulation of another user's crontab file. In the first instance, the entire crontab file of the user is replaced with the contents of the specified file, or standard input if the file is ``-''. In the latter case, the program behaves according to which of the (mutually exclusive) options was given (note that the long options are an mcron extension). @table @option @cindex -l option @cindex list option, crontab @cindex options, -l @cindex options, --list @cindex viewing a crontab @cindex listing a crontab @item -l @itemx --list Print the user's crontab file to the standard output, and exit. @cindex -r option @cindex remove option @cindex options, -r @cindex options, --remove @cindex deleting a crontab @cindex removing a crontab @item -r @item --remove Delete the user's crontab file, and exit. @cindex -e option @cindex edit option @cindex options, -e @cindex options, --edit @cindex editing a crontab @cindex creating a crontab @item -e @item --edit Using the editor specified in the user's VISUAL or EDITOR environment variables, allow the user to edit his crontab. Once the user exits the editor, the crontab is checked for parseability, and if it is okay then it is installed as the user's new crontab and the daemon is notified that a change has taken place, so that the new file will become immediately effective. @end table @node Behaviour on laptops, Exit codes, Invoking crontab, Invoking @section Behaviour on laptops @cindex laptops @cindex power suspend While mcron has not been designed to work anachronistically, the behaviour of mcron when a laptop emerges from a suspended state is well defined, and the following description explains what happens in this situation. When a laptop awakes from a suspended state, all jobs which would have run while the laptop was suspended will run exactly once immediately (and simultaneously) when the laptop awakes, and then the next time that those jobs run will be computed based on the time the laptop was awoken. Any jobs which would not have run during the suspense period will be unaffected, and will still run at their proper times. @node Exit codes, , Behaviour on laptops, Invoking @section Exit codes @cindex exit codes @cindex error conditions @cindex errors The following are the status codes returned to the operating system when the program terminates. @table @asis @item 0 No problems. @item 1 An attempt has been made to start cron but there is already a /var/run/cron.pid file. If there really is no other cron daemon running (this does not include invokations of mcron) then you should remove this file before attempting to run cron. @item 2 In parsing a guile configuration file, a @code{job} command has been seen but the second argument is neither a procedure, list or string. This argument is the job's action, and needs to be specified in one of these forms. @item 3 In parsing a guile configuration file, a @code{job} command has been seen but the first argument is neither a procedure, list or string. This argument is the job's next-time specification, and needs to be specified in one of these forms. @item 4 An attempt to run cron has been made by a user who does not have permission to access the crontabs in /var/cron/tabs. These files should be readable only by root, and the cron daemon must be run as root. @item 5 An attempt to run mcron has been made, but there are no jobs to schedule! @item 6 The system administrator has blocked this user from using crontab with the files /var/cron/allow and /var/cron/deny. @item 7 Crontab has been run with more than one of the arguments @code{-l}, @code{-r}, @code{-e}. These are mutually exclusive options. @item 8 Crontab has been run with the -u option by a user other than root. Only root is allowed to use this option. @item 9 An invalid vixie-style time specification has been supplied. @item 10 An invalid vixie-style job specification has been supplied. @item 11 A bad line has been seen in /etc/crontab. @item 12 The last component of the name of the program was not one of @code{mcron}, @code{cron}, @code{crond} or @code{crontab}. @item 13 Either the ~/.cron directory does not exist, or there is a problem reading the files there. @c @item 14 @c There is a problem writing to /var/cron/update. This is probably @c because the crontab program is not installed SUID root, as it should @c be. @item 15 Crontab has been run without any arguments at all. There is no default behaviour in this case. @item 16 Cron has been run by a user other than root. @end table @node Guile modules, Index, Invoking, Top @chapter Guile modules Some of the key parts of mcron are implemented as modules so they can be incorporated into other Guile programs, or even into C-sourced programs if they are linked against libguile. It may be, for example, that a program needs to perform house-keeping functions at certain times of the day, in which case it can spawn (either fork or thread) a sub-process which uses a built-in mcron. Another example may be a program which must sleep until some non-absolute time specified on the Gregorian calendar (the first day of next week, for example). Finally, it may be the wish of the user to provide a program with the functionality of mcron plus a bit extra. The core module maintains mcron's internal job lists, and provides the main wait-run-wait loop that is mcron's main function. It also introduces the facilities for accumulating a set of environment modifiers, which take effect when jobs run. @menu * The core module:: The job list and execution loop. * The redirect module:: Sending output of jobs to a mail box. * The vixie-time module:: Parsing vixie-style time specifications. * The job-specifier module:: All commands for scheme configuration files. * The vixie-specification module:: Commands for reading vixie-style crontabs. @end menu @node The core module, The redirect module, Guile modules, Guile modules @section The core module @cindex guile module @cindex core module @cindex modules, core This module may be used by including @code{(use-modules (mcron core))} in a program. The main functions are @code{add-job} and @code{run-job-loop}, which allow a program to create a list of job specifications to run, and then to initiate the wait-run-wait loop firing the jobs off at the requisite times. However, before they are introduced two functions which manipulate the environment that takes effect when a job runs are defined. @cindex environment The environment is a set of name-value pairs which is built up incrementally. Each time the @code{add-job} function is called, the environment modifiers that have been accumulated up to that point are stored with the new job specification, and when the job actually runs these name-value pairs are used to modify the run-time environment in effect. @deffn{Scheme procedure} append-environment-mods name value When a job is run make sure the environment variable @var{name} has the value @var{value}. @end deffn @deffn{Scheme procedure} clear-environment-mods This procedure causes all the environment modifiers that have been specified so far to be forgotten. @end deffn @deffn{Scheme procedure} add-job time-proc action displayable configuration-time configuration-user This procedure adds a job specification to the list of all jobs to run. @var{time-proc} should be a procedure taking exactly one argument which will be a UNIX time. This procedure must compute the next time that the job should run, and return the result. @var{action} should be a procedure taking no arguments, and contains the instructions that actually get executed whenever the job is scheduled to run. @var{displayable} should be a string, and is only for the use of humans; it can be anything which identifies or simply gives a clue as to the purpose or function of this job. @var{configuration-time} is the time from which the first invokation of this job should be computed. Finally, @var{configuration-user} should be the passwd entry for the user under whose personality the job is to run. @end deffn @deffn{Scheme procedure} run-job-loop . fd-list @cindex file descriptors @cindex interrupting the mcron loop This procedure returns only under exceptional circumstances, but usually loops forever waiting for the next time to arrive when a job needs to run, running that job, recomputing the next run time, and then waiting again. However, the wait can be interrupted by data becoming available for reading on one of the file descriptors in the fd-list, if supplied. Only in this case will the procedure return to the calling program, which may then make modifications to the job list before calling the @code{run-job-loop} procedure again to resume execution of the mcron core. @end deffn @deffn{Scheme procedure} remove-user-jobs user The argument @var{user} should be a string naming a user (his login name), or an integer UID, or an object representing the user's passwd entry. All jobs on the current job list that are scheduled to be run under this personality are removed from the job list. @end deffn @deffn{Scheme procedure} get-schedule count @cindex schedule of jobs The argument @var{count} should be an integer value giving the number of time-points in the future to report that jobs will run as. Note that this procedure is disruptive; if @code{run-job-loop} is called after this procedure, the first job to run will be the one after the last job that was reported in the schedule report. The report itself is returned to the calling program as a string. @end deffn @node The redirect module, The vixie-time module, The core module, Guile modules @section The redirect module @cindex redirect module @cindex modules, redirect This module is introduced to a program with the command @code{(use-modules (mcron redirect))}. This module provides the @code{with-mail-out} function, described fully in @ref{Guile Syntax}. @node The vixie-time module, The job-specifier module, The redirect module, Guile modules @section The vixie-time module @cindex vixie-time module @cindex modules, vixie-time This module is introduced to a program by @code{(use-modules (mcron vixie-time))}. This module provides a single method for converting a vixie-style time specification into a procedure which can be used as the @code{next-time-function} to the core @code{add-job} procedure, or to the @code{job-specifier} @code{job} procedure. See @ref{Vixie Syntax} for full details of the allowed format for the time string. @deffn{Scheme procedure} parse-vixie-time time-string The single argument @var{time-string} should be a string containing a vixie-style time specification, and the return value is the required procedure. @end deffn @node The job-specifier module, The vixie-specification module, The vixie-time module, Guile modules @section The job-specifier module @cindex job-specifier module @cindex modules, job-specifier This module is introduced to a program by @code{(use-modules (mcron job-specifier))}. This module provides all the functions available to user's Guile configuration files, namely @code{range}, @code{next-year-from}, @code{next-year}, @code{next-month-from}, @code{next-month}, @code{next-day-from}, @code{next-day}, @code{next-hour-from}, @code{next-hour}, @code{next-minute-from}, @code{next-minute}, @code{next-second-from}, @code{next-second}, and last but not least, @code{job}. See @ref{Guile Syntax} for full details. Once this module is loaded, a scheme configuration file can be used to put jobs onto the job list simply by @code{load}ing the file. @node The vixie-specification module, , The job-specifier module, Guile modules @section The vixie-specification module @cindex vixie-specification module @cindex modules, vixie-specification To use this module, put the command @code{(use-modules (mcron vixie-specification))} into your program. This module exports a couple of functions for adding jobs to the internal job list according to a Vixie-style crontab file. @deffn{Scheme procedure} read-vixie-port port . parse-line This procedure reads a crontab from the given port, and adds jobs to the job list accordingly, taking care of environment specifications and comments which may appear in such a file. @var{parse-line} should not normally be used, except that if you are parsing a (deprecated) @code{/etc/crontab} file with a slightly modified syntax, you may pass the value @var{parse-system-vixie-line} as the optional argument. @end deffn @deffn{Scheme procedure} read-vixie-file name . parse-line This procedure attempts to open the named file, and if it fails will return silently. Otherwise, the behaviour is identical to @code{read-vixie-port} above. @end deffn Once this module has been declared in a program, a crontab file can be used to augment the current job list with a call to @code{read-vixie-file}. @node Index, , Guile modules, Top @unnumbered Index @printindex cp @bye mcron-1.0.6/INSTALL0000644000175000017500000003633211405144110010604 00000000000000Installation Instructions ************************* Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification, are permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright notice and this notice are preserved. This file is offered as-is, without warranty of any kind. Basic Installation ================== Briefly, the shell commands `./configure; make; make install' should configure, build, and install this package. The following more-detailed instructions are generic; see the `README' file for instructions specific to this package. Some packages provide this `INSTALL' file but do not implement all of the features documented below. The lack of an optional feature in a given package is not necessarily a bug. More recommendations for GNU packages can be found in *note Makefile Conventions: (standards)Makefile Conventions. The `configure' shell script attempts to guess correct values for various system-dependent variables used during compilation. It uses those values to create a `Makefile' in each directory of the package. It may also create one or more `.h' files containing system-dependent definitions. Finally, it creates a shell script `config.status' that you can run in the future to recreate the current configuration, and a file `config.log' containing compiler output (useful mainly for debugging `configure'). It can also use an optional file (typically called `config.cache' and enabled with `--cache-file=config.cache' or simply `-C') that saves the results of its tests to speed up reconfiguring. Caching is disabled by default to prevent problems with accidental use of stale cache files. If you need to do unusual things to compile the package, please try to figure out how `configure' could check whether to do them, and mail diffs or instructions to the address given in the `README' so they can be considered for the next release. If you are using the cache, and at some point `config.cache' contains results you don't want to keep, you may remove or edit it. The file `configure.ac' (or `configure.in') is used to create `configure' by a program called `autoconf'. You need `configure.ac' if you want to change it or regenerate `configure' using a newer version of `autoconf'. The simplest way to compile this package is: 1. `cd' to the directory containing the package's source code and type `./configure' to configure the package for your system. Running `configure' might take a while. While running, it prints some messages telling which features it is checking for. 2. Type `make' to compile the package. 3. Optionally, type `make check' to run any self-tests that come with the package, generally using the just-built uninstalled binaries. 4. Type `make install' to install the programs and any data files and documentation. When installing into a prefix owned by root, it is recommended that the package be configured and built as a regular user, and only the `make install' phase executed with root privileges. 5. Optionally, type `make installcheck' to repeat any self-tests, but this time using the binaries in their final installed location. This target does not install anything. Running this target as a regular user, particularly if the prior `make install' required root privileges, verifies that the installation completed correctly. 6. You can remove the program binaries and object files from the source code directory by typing `make clean'. To also remove the files that `configure' created (so you can compile the package for a different kind of computer), type `make distclean'. There is also a `make maintainer-clean' target, but that is intended mainly for the package's developers. If you use it, you may have to get all sorts of other programs in order to regenerate files that came with the distribution. 7. Often, you can also type `make uninstall' to remove the installed files again. In practice, not all packages have tested that uninstallation works correctly, even though it is required by the GNU Coding Standards. 8. Some packages, particularly those that use Automake, provide `make distcheck', which can by used by developers to test that all other targets like `make install' and `make uninstall' work correctly. This target is generally not run by end users. Compilers and Options ===================== Some systems require unusual options for compilation or linking that the `configure' script does not know about. Run `./configure --help' for details on some of the pertinent environment variables. You can give `configure' initial values for configuration parameters by setting variables in the command line or in the environment. Here is an example: ./configure CC=c99 CFLAGS=-g LIBS=-lposix *Note Defining Variables::, for more details. Compiling For Multiple Architectures ==================================== You can compile the package for more than one kind of computer at the same time, by placing the object files for each architecture in their own directory. To do this, you can use GNU `make'. `cd' to the directory where you want the object files and executables to go and run the `configure' script. `configure' automatically checks for the source code in the directory that `configure' is in and in `..'. This is known as a "VPATH" build. With a non-GNU `make', it is safer to compile the package for one architecture at a time in the source code directory. After you have installed the package for one architecture, use `make distclean' before reconfiguring for another architecture. On MacOS X 10.5 and later systems, you can create libraries and executables that work on multiple system types--known as "fat" or "universal" binaries--by specifying multiple `-arch' options to the compiler but only a single `-arch' option to the preprocessor. Like this: ./configure CC="gcc -arch i386 -arch x86_64 -arch ppc -arch ppc64" \ CXX="g++ -arch i386 -arch x86_64 -arch ppc -arch ppc64" \ CPP="gcc -E" CXXCPP="g++ -E" This is not guaranteed to produce working output in all cases, you may have to build one architecture at a time and combine the results using the `lipo' tool if you have problems. Installation Names ================== By default, `make install' installs the package's commands under `/usr/local/bin', include files under `/usr/local/include', etc. You can specify an installation prefix other than `/usr/local' by giving `configure' the option `--prefix=PREFIX', where PREFIX must be an absolute file name. You can specify separate installation prefixes for architecture-specific files and architecture-independent files. If you pass the option `--exec-prefix=PREFIX' to `configure', the package uses PREFIX as the prefix for installing programs and libraries. Documentation and other data files still use the regular prefix. In addition, if you use an unusual directory layout you can give options like `--bindir=DIR' to specify different values for particular kinds of files. Run `configure --help' for a list of the directories you can set and what kinds of files go in them. In general, the default for these options is expressed in terms of `${prefix}', so that specifying just `--prefix' will affect all of the other directory specifications that were not explicitly provided. The most portable way to affect installation locations is to pass the correct locations to `configure'; however, many packages provide one or both of the following shortcuts of passing variable assignments to the `make install' command line to change installation locations without having to reconfigure or recompile. The first method involves providing an override variable for each affected directory. For example, `make install prefix=/alternate/directory' will choose an alternate location for all directory configuration variables that were expressed in terms of `${prefix}'. Any directories that were specified during `configure', but not in terms of `${prefix}', must each be overridden at install time for the entire installation to be relocated. The approach of makefile variable overrides for each directory variable is required by the GNU Coding Standards, and ideally causes no recompilation. However, some platforms have known limitations with the semantics of shared libraries that end up requiring recompilation when using this method, particularly noticeable in packages that use GNU Libtool. The second method involves providing the `DESTDIR' variable. For example, `make install DESTDIR=/alternate/directory' will prepend `/alternate/directory' before all installation names. The approach of `DESTDIR' overrides is not required by the GNU Coding Standards, and does not work on platforms that have drive letters. On the other hand, it does better at avoiding recompilation issues, and works well even when some directory options were not specified in terms of `${prefix}' at `configure' time. Optional Features ================= If the package supports it, you can cause programs to be installed with an extra prefix or suffix on their names by giving `configure' the option `--program-prefix=PREFIX' or `--program-suffix=SUFFIX'. Some packages pay attention to `--enable-FEATURE' options to `configure', where FEATURE indicates an optional part of the package. They may also pay attention to `--with-PACKAGE' options, where PACKAGE is something like `gnu-as' or `x' (for the X Window System). The `README' should mention any `--enable-' and `--with-' options that the package recognizes. For packages that use the X Window System, `configure' can usually find the X include and library files automatically, but if it doesn't, you can use the `configure' options `--x-includes=DIR' and `--x-libraries=DIR' to specify their locations. Some packages offer the ability to configure how verbose the execution of `make' will be. For these packages, running `./configure --enable-silent-rules' sets the default to minimal output, which can be overridden with `make V=1'; while running `./configure --disable-silent-rules' sets the default to verbose, which can be overridden with `make V=0'. Particular systems ================== On HP-UX, the default C compiler is not ANSI C compatible. If GNU CC is not installed, it is recommended to use the following options in order to use an ANSI C compiler: ./configure CC="cc -Ae -D_XOPEN_SOURCE=500" and if that doesn't work, install pre-built binaries of GCC for HP-UX. On OSF/1 a.k.a. Tru64, some versions of the default C compiler cannot parse its `' header file. The option `-nodtk' can be used as a workaround. If GNU CC is not installed, it is therefore recommended to try ./configure CC="cc" and if that doesn't work, try ./configure CC="cc -nodtk" On Solaris, don't put `/usr/ucb' early in your `PATH'. This directory contains several dysfunctional programs; working variants of these programs are available in `/usr/bin'. So, if you need `/usr/ucb' in your `PATH', put it _after_ `/usr/bin'. On Haiku, software installed for all users goes in `/boot/common', not `/usr/local'. It is recommended to use the following options: ./configure --prefix=/boot/common Specifying the System Type ========================== There may be some features `configure' cannot figure out automatically, but needs to determine by the type of machine the package will run on. Usually, assuming the package is built to be run on the _same_ architectures, `configure' can figure that out, but if it prints a message saying it cannot guess the machine type, give it the `--build=TYPE' option. TYPE can either be a short name for the system type, such as `sun4', or a canonical name which has the form: CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM where SYSTEM can have one of these forms: OS KERNEL-OS See the file `config.sub' for the possible values of each field. If `config.sub' isn't included in this package, then this package doesn't need to know the machine type. If you are _building_ compiler tools for cross-compiling, you should use the option `--target=TYPE' to select the type of system they will produce code for. If you want to _use_ a cross compiler, that generates code for a platform different from the build platform, you should specify the "host" platform (i.e., that on which the generated programs will eventually be run) with `--host=TYPE'. Sharing Defaults ================ If you want to set default values for `configure' scripts to share, you can create a site shell script called `config.site' that gives default values for variables like `CC', `cache_file', and `prefix'. `configure' looks for `PREFIX/share/config.site' if it exists, then `PREFIX/etc/config.site' if it exists. Or, you can set the `CONFIG_SITE' environment variable to the location of the site script. A warning: not all `configure' scripts look for a site script. Defining Variables ================== Variables not defined in a site shell script can be set in the environment passed to `configure'. However, some packages may run configure again during the build, and the customized values of these variables may be lost. In order to avoid this problem, you should set them in the `configure' command line, using `VAR=value'. For example: ./configure CC=/usr/local2/bin/gcc causes the specified `gcc' to be used as the C compiler (unless it is overridden in the site shell script). Unfortunately, this technique does not work for `CONFIG_SHELL' due to an Autoconf bug. Until the bug is fixed you can use this workaround: CONFIG_SHELL=/bin/bash /bin/bash ./configure CONFIG_SHELL=/bin/bash `configure' Invocation ====================== `configure' recognizes the following options to control how it operates. `--help' `-h' Print a summary of all of the options to `configure', and exit. `--help=short' `--help=recursive' Print a summary of the options unique to this package's `configure', and exit. The `short' variant lists options used only in the top level, while the `recursive' variant lists options also present in any nested packages. `--version' `-V' Print the version of Autoconf used to generate the `configure' script, and exit. `--cache-file=FILE' Enable the cache: use and save the results of the tests in FILE, traditionally `config.cache'. FILE defaults to `/dev/null' to disable caching. `--config-cache' `-C' Alias for `--cache-file=config.cache'. `--quiet' `--silent' `-q' Do not print messages saying which checks are being made. To suppress all normal output, redirect it to `/dev/null' (any error messages will still be shown). `--srcdir=DIR' Look for the package's source code in directory DIR. Usually `configure' can determine that directory automatically. `--prefix=DIR' Use DIR as the installation prefix. *note Installation Names:: for more details, including other options available for fine-tuning the installation locations. `--no-create' `-n' Run the configure checks, but stop before creating any output files. `configure' also accepts some other, not widely useful, options. Run `configure --help' for more details. mcron-1.0.6/makefile.am0000644000175000017500000000657711405144056011670 00000000000000## Makefile for the toplevel directory of mcron. ## Copyright (C) 2003 Dale Mellor ## # This file is part of GNU mcron. # # GNU mcron is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under # the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free # Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) # any later version. # # GNU mcron is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT # ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or # FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for # more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along # with GNU mcron. If not, see . ## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in ED = @ED@ # !!!! Are these needed? CP = @CP@ MAINTAINERCLEANFILES = configure makefile makefile.in config.guess config.sub \ install-sh missing texinfo.tex INSTALL \ aclocal.m4 compile depcomp CLEANFILES = mcron.c core.scm EXTRA_DIST = makefile.ed main.scm mcron-core.scm vixie-specification.scm \ crontab.scm environment.scm job-specifier.scm redirect.scm \ vixie-time.scm mcron.c.template BUGS AM_LDFLAGS = @GUILE_LDFLAGS@ AM_CFLAGS = @GUILE_CFLAGS@ -DGUILE_LOAD_PATH=\"$(datadir)\" info_TEXINFOS = mcron.texinfo dist_man1_MANS = mcron.1 bin_PROGRAMS = mcron mcron_SOURCES = mcron.c pkgdata_DATA = core.scm environment.scm job-specifier.scm redirect.scm \ vixie-time.scm vixie-specification.scm config.scm # If you're wondering, the configure script keeps deleting all files with a name # like core.*, so we have to keep re-making it (I lost a good day's work because # of this). core.scm : mcron-core.scm $(CP) mcron-core.scm core.scm mcron.c : main.scm crontab.scm makefile.ed mcron.c.template @echo 'Building mcron.c...' @$(ED) < makefile.ed > /dev/null 2>&1 @rm -f mcron.escaped.scm > /dev/null 2>&1 #full program prefix fpp = $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/@real_program_prefix@ install-exec-hook: @if [ "x@NO_VIXIE_CLOBBER@" != "xyes" -a "`id -u`" -eq "0" ]; then \ rm -f $(fpp)cron$(EXEEXT) > /dev/null 2>&1; \ $(INSTALL) --mode='u=rwx' mcron$(EXEEXT) $(fpp)cron$(EXEEXT); \ rm -f $(fpp)crontab$(EXEEXT) > /dev/null 2>&1; \ $(INSTALL) --mode='u=rwxs,og=rx' mcron$(EXEEXT) $(fpp)crontab$(EXEEXT); \ $(INSTALL) -d --mode='u=rwx' $(DESTDIR)/var/cron; \ $(INSTALL) -d --mode='u=rwx,og=rx' $(DESTDIR)/var/run; \ $(INSTALL) -d --mode='u=rwx,og=rx' $(DESTDIR)@GUILE_SITE@; \ $(INSTALL) -d --mode='u=rwx,og=rx' $(DESTDIR)@GUILE_SITE@/mcron; \ elif [ "x@NO_VIXIE_CLOBBER@" = "xyes" ]; then \ echo "Not installing Vixie-style programs"; \ else \ echo "+++ WARNING: NON-ROOT INSTALL: ONLY mcron WILL BE INSTALLED, NOT ANY OF THE VIXIE REPLACEMENT PROGRAMS"; \ fi @echo @echo " AFTER INSTALLATION, CONSIDER RUNNING make cook-up-man" @echo uninstall-hook: if [ "`id -u`" -eq "0" ]; then \ rm -f $(fpp){cron,crontab}$(EXEEXT); \ fi # Not part of formal package building, but a rule for manual use to get the # elemental man page. Will only work once the mcron program is installed. cook-up-man: help2man -n 'a program to run tasks at regular (or not) intervals' \ $(fpp)mcron > mcron.1 $(MAKE) install mcron-1.0.6/makefile.ed0000644000175000017500000000170011404766201011643 00000000000000# Copyright (C) 2003 Dale Mellor # # This file is part of GNU mcron. # # GNU mcron is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under # the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free # Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) # any later version. # # GNU mcron is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT # ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or # FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for # more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along # with GNU mcron. If not, see . # # # e main.scm /\(load "crontab.scm"\)/d -1r crontab.scm %s/\\/\\\\/g %s/"/\\"/g %s/ *;;.*$/ /g g/^ *$/d %s/^/\"/ %s/$/\"/ w mcron.escaped.scm e mcron.c.template /GUILE_PROGRAM_GOES_HERE/d -1r mcron.escaped.scm w mcron.c q mcron-1.0.6/makefile.in0000644000175000017500000010775411407210001011662 00000000000000# makefile.in generated by automake 1.11.1 from makefile.am. # @configure_input@ # Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, # 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, # Inc. # This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without # even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A # PARTICULAR PURPOSE. @SET_MAKE@ # This file is part of GNU mcron. # # GNU mcron is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under # the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free # Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) # any later version. # # GNU mcron is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT # ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or # FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for # more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along # with GNU mcron. If not, see . VPATH = @srcdir@ pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) transform = $(program_transform_name) NORMAL_INSTALL = : PRE_INSTALL = : POST_INSTALL = : NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : PRE_UNINSTALL = : POST_UNINSTALL = : bin_PROGRAMS = mcron$(EXEEXT) subdir = . DIST_COMMON = README $(am__configure_deps) $(dist_man1_MANS) \ $(srcdir)/config.scm.in $(srcdir)/makefile.am \ $(srcdir)/makefile.in $(srcdir)/mcron.texinfo.in \ $(top_srcdir)/configure AUTHORS COPYING ChangeLog INSTALL NEWS \ TODO depcomp install-sh missing texinfo.tex ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ $(ACLOCAL_M4) am__CONFIG_DISTCLEAN_FILES = config.status config.cache config.log \ configure.lineno config.status.lineno mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = config.scm mcron.texinfo CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(bindir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" \ "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(pkgdatadir)" PROGRAMS = $(bin_PROGRAMS) am_mcron_OBJECTS = mcron.$(OBJEXT) mcron_OBJECTS = $(am_mcron_OBJECTS) mcron_LDADD = $(LDADD) DEFAULT_INCLUDES = -I.@am__isrc@ depcomp = $(SHELL) $(top_srcdir)/depcomp am__depfiles_maybe = depfiles am__mv = mv -f COMPILE = $(CC) $(DEFS) $(DEFAULT_INCLUDES) $(INCLUDES) $(AM_CPPFLAGS) \ $(CPPFLAGS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) CCLD = $(CC) LINK = $(CCLD) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) $(AM_LDFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS) -o $@ SOURCES = $(mcron_SOURCES) DIST_SOURCES = $(mcron_SOURCES) INFO_DEPS = $(srcdir)/mcron.info am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR = $(srcdir) DVIS = mcron.dvi PDFS = mcron.pdf PSS = mcron.ps HTMLS = mcron.html TEXINFOS = mcron.texinfo TEXI2DVI = texi2dvi TEXI2PDF = $(TEXI2DVI) --pdf --batch MAKEINFOHTML = $(MAKEINFO) --html AM_MAKEINFOHTMLFLAGS = $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) DVIPS = dvips am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ *) f=$$p;; \ esac; am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; am__install_max = 40 am__nobase_strip_setup = \ srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` am__nobase_strip = \ for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' am__base_list = \ sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' man1dir = $(mandir)/man1 NROFF = nroff MANS = $(dist_man1_MANS) DATA = $(pkgdata_DATA) ETAGS = etags CTAGS = ctags DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) distdir = $(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION) top_distdir = $(distdir) am__remove_distdir = \ { test ! -d "$(distdir)" \ || { find "$(distdir)" -type d ! -perm -200 -exec chmod u+w {} ';' \ && rm -fr "$(distdir)"; }; } DIST_ARCHIVES = $(distdir).tar.gz GZIP_ENV = --best distuninstallcheck_listfiles = find . -type f -print distcleancheck_listfiles = find . -type f -print ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ AMTAR = @AMTAR@ AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ AWK = @AWK@ CC = @CC@ CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ CONFIG_ALLOW_FILE = @CONFIG_ALLOW_FILE@ CONFIG_DEBUG = @CONFIG_DEBUG@ CONFIG_DENY_FILE = @CONFIG_DENY_FILE@ CONFIG_PID_FILE = @CONFIG_PID_FILE@ CONFIG_SOCKET_FILE = @CONFIG_SOCKET_FILE@ CONFIG_SPOOL_DIR = @CONFIG_SPOOL_DIR@ CONFIG_TMP_DIR = @CONFIG_TMP_DIR@ CP = @CP@ CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ DEFS = @DEFS@ DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ ED = @ED@ # !!!! Are these needed? EGREP = @EGREP@ EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ GREP = @GREP@ GUILE = @GUILE@ GUILE_CFLAGS = @GUILE_CFLAGS@ GUILE_CONFIG = @GUILE_CONFIG@ GUILE_LDFLAGS = @GUILE_LDFLAGS@ GUILE_SITE = @GUILE_SITE@ GUILE_TOOLS = @GUILE_TOOLS@ HEAD = @HEAD@ INSTALL = @INSTALL@ INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ LIBS = @LIBS@ LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ NO_VIXIE_CLOBBER = @NO_VIXIE_CLOBBER@ OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ SED = @SED@ SENDMAIL = @SENDMAIL@ SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ SHELL = @SHELL@ STRIP = @STRIP@ VERSION = @VERSION@ WHICH = @WHICH@ abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ am__include = @am__include@ am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ am__quote = @am__quote@ am__tar = @am__tar@ am__untar = @am__untar@ bindir = @bindir@ build_alias = @build_alias@ builddir = @builddir@ datadir = @datadir@ datarootdir = @datarootdir@ docdir = @docdir@ dvidir = @dvidir@ exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ host_alias = @host_alias@ htmldir = @htmldir@ includedir = @includedir@ infodir = @infodir@ install_sh = @install_sh@ libdir = @libdir@ libexecdir = @libexecdir@ localedir = @localedir@ localstatedir = @localstatedir@ mandir = @mandir@ mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ pdfdir = @pdfdir@ prefix = @prefix@ program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ psdir = @psdir@ real_program_prefix = @real_program_prefix@ sbindir = @sbindir@ sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ srcdir = @srcdir@ sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ target_alias = @target_alias@ top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ top_builddir = @top_builddir@ top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ MAINTAINERCLEANFILES = configure makefile makefile.in config.guess config.sub \ install-sh missing texinfo.tex INSTALL \ aclocal.m4 compile depcomp CLEANFILES = mcron.c core.scm EXTRA_DIST = makefile.ed main.scm mcron-core.scm vixie-specification.scm \ crontab.scm environment.scm job-specifier.scm redirect.scm \ vixie-time.scm mcron.c.template BUGS AM_LDFLAGS = @GUILE_LDFLAGS@ AM_CFLAGS = @GUILE_CFLAGS@ -DGUILE_LOAD_PATH=\"$(datadir)\" info_TEXINFOS = mcron.texinfo dist_man1_MANS = mcron.1 mcron_SOURCES = mcron.c pkgdata_DATA = core.scm environment.scm job-specifier.scm redirect.scm \ vixie-time.scm vixie-specification.scm config.scm #full program prefix fpp = $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/@real_program_prefix@ all: all-am .SUFFIXES: .SUFFIXES: .c .dvi .html .info .o .obj .pdf .ps .texinfo am--refresh: @: $(srcdir)/makefile.in: $(srcdir)/makefile.am $(am__configure_deps) @for dep in $?; do \ case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ *$$dep*) \ echo ' cd $(srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu'; \ $(am__cd) $(srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu \ && exit 0; \ exit 1;; \ esac; \ done; \ echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu makefile'; \ $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu makefile .PRECIOUS: makefile makefile: $(srcdir)/makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status @case '$?' in \ *config.status*) \ echo ' $(SHELL) ./config.status'; \ $(SHELL) ./config.status;; \ *) \ echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $@ $(am__depfiles_maybe)'; \ cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $@ $(am__depfiles_maybe);; \ esac; $(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) $(SHELL) ./config.status --recheck $(top_srcdir)/configure: $(am__configure_deps) $(am__cd) $(srcdir) && $(AUTOCONF) $(ACLOCAL_M4): $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(am__cd) $(srcdir) && $(ACLOCAL) $(ACLOCAL_AMFLAGS) $(am__aclocal_m4_deps): config.scm: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/config.scm.in cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $@ mcron.texinfo: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/mcron.texinfo.in cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $@ install-binPROGRAMS: $(bin_PROGRAMS) @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) test -z "$(bindir)" || $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(bindir)" @list='$(bin_PROGRAMS)'; test -n "$(bindir)" || list=; \ for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ sed 's/$(EXEEXT)$$//' | \ while read p p1; do if test -f $$p; \ then echo "$$p"; echo "$$p"; else :; fi; \ done | \ sed -e 'p;s,.*/,,;n;h' -e 's|.*|.|' \ -e 'p;x;s,.*/,,;s/$(EXEEXT)$$//;$(transform);s/$$/$(EXEEXT)/' | \ sed 'N;N;N;s,\n, ,g' | \ $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = ""; dirs["."] = 1 } \ { d=$$3; if (dirs[d] != 1) { print "d", d; dirs[d] = 1 } \ if ($$2 == $$4) files[d] = files[d] " " $$1; \ else { print "f", $$3 "/" $$4, $$1; } } \ END { for (d in files) print "f", d, files[d] }' | \ while read type dir files; do \ if test "$$dir" = .; then dir=; else dir=/$$dir; fi; \ test -z "$$files" || { \ echo " $(INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV) $(INSTALL_PROGRAM) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(bindir)$$dir'"; \ $(INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV) $(INSTALL_PROGRAM) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(bindir)$$dir" || exit $$?; \ } \ ; done uninstall-binPROGRAMS: @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) @list='$(bin_PROGRAMS)'; test -n "$(bindir)" || list=; \ files=`for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | \ sed -e 'h;s,^.*/,,;s/$(EXEEXT)$$//;$(transform)' \ -e 's/$$/$(EXEEXT)/' `; \ test -n "$$list" || exit 0; \ echo " ( cd '$(DESTDIR)$(bindir)' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ cd "$(DESTDIR)$(bindir)" && rm -f $$files clean-binPROGRAMS: -test -z "$(bin_PROGRAMS)" || rm -f $(bin_PROGRAMS) mcron$(EXEEXT): $(mcron_OBJECTS) $(mcron_DEPENDENCIES) @rm -f mcron$(EXEEXT) $(LINK) $(mcron_OBJECTS) $(mcron_LDADD) $(LIBS) mostlyclean-compile: -rm -f *.$(OBJEXT) distclean-compile: -rm -f *.tab.c @AMDEP_TRUE@@am__include@ @am__quote@./$(DEPDIR)/mcron.Po@am__quote@ .c.o: @am__fastdepCC_TRUE@ $(COMPILE) -MT $@ -MD -MP -MF $(DEPDIR)/$*.Tpo -c -o $@ $< @am__fastdepCC_TRUE@ $(am__mv) $(DEPDIR)/$*.Tpo $(DEPDIR)/$*.Po @AMDEP_TRUE@@am__fastdepCC_FALSE@ source='$<' object='$@' libtool=no @AMDEPBACKSLASH@ @AMDEP_TRUE@@am__fastdepCC_FALSE@ DEPDIR=$(DEPDIR) $(CCDEPMODE) $(depcomp) @AMDEPBACKSLASH@ @am__fastdepCC_FALSE@ $(COMPILE) -c $< .c.obj: @am__fastdepCC_TRUE@ $(COMPILE) -MT $@ -MD -MP -MF $(DEPDIR)/$*.Tpo -c -o $@ `$(CYGPATH_W) '$<'` @am__fastdepCC_TRUE@ $(am__mv) $(DEPDIR)/$*.Tpo $(DEPDIR)/$*.Po @AMDEP_TRUE@@am__fastdepCC_FALSE@ source='$<' object='$@' libtool=no @AMDEPBACKSLASH@ @AMDEP_TRUE@@am__fastdepCC_FALSE@ DEPDIR=$(DEPDIR) $(CCDEPMODE) $(depcomp) @AMDEPBACKSLASH@ @am__fastdepCC_FALSE@ $(COMPILE) -c `$(CYGPATH_W) '$<'` .texinfo.info: restore=: && backupdir="$(am__leading_dot)am$$$$" && \ am__cwd=`pwd` && $(am__cd) $(srcdir) && \ rm -rf $$backupdir && mkdir $$backupdir && \ if ($(MAKEINFO) --version) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \ for f in $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9] $(@:.info=).i[0-9] $(@:.info=).i[0-9][0-9]; do \ if test -f $$f; then mv $$f $$backupdir; restore=mv; else :; fi; \ done; \ else :; fi && \ cd "$$am__cwd"; \ if $(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir) \ -o $@ $<; \ then \ rc=0; \ $(am__cd) $(srcdir); \ else \ rc=$$?; \ $(am__cd) $(srcdir) && \ $$restore $$backupdir/* `echo "./$@" | sed 's|[^/]*$$||'`; \ fi; \ rm -rf $$backupdir; exit $$rc .texinfo.dvi: TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \ MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir)' \ $(TEXI2DVI) $< .texinfo.pdf: TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \ MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir)' \ $(TEXI2PDF) $< .texinfo.html: rm -rf $(@:.html=.htp) if $(MAKEINFOHTML) $(AM_MAKEINFOHTMLFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir) \ -o $(@:.html=.htp) $<; \ then \ rm -rf $@; \ if test ! -d $(@:.html=.htp) && test -d $(@:.html=); then \ mv $(@:.html=) $@; else mv $(@:.html=.htp) $@; fi; \ else \ if test ! -d $(@:.html=.htp) && test -d $(@:.html=); then \ rm -rf $(@:.html=); else rm -Rf $(@:.html=.htp) $@; fi; \ exit 1; \ fi $(srcdir)/mcron.info: mcron.texinfo mcron.dvi: mcron.texinfo mcron.pdf: mcron.texinfo mcron.html: mcron.texinfo .dvi.ps: TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \ $(DVIPS) -o $@ $< uninstall-dvi-am: @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) @list='$(DVIS)'; test -n "$(dvidir)" || list=; \ for p in $$list; do \ $(am__strip_dir) \ echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)/$$f'"; \ rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)/$$f"; \ done uninstall-html-am: @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) @list='$(HTMLS)'; test -n "$(htmldir)" || list=; \ for p in $$list; do \ $(am__strip_dir) \ echo " rm -rf '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \ rm -rf "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f"; \ done uninstall-info-am: @$(PRE_UNINSTALL) @if test -d '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' && \ (install-info --version && \ install-info --version 2>&1 | sed 1q | grep -i -v debian) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \ list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \ for file in $$list; do \ relfile=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \ echo " install-info --info-dir='$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' --remove '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile'"; \ if install-info --info-dir="$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" --remove "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile"; \ then :; else test ! -f "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile" || exit 1; fi; \ done; \ else :; fi @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) @list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \ for file in $$list; do \ relfile=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \ relfile_i=`echo "$$relfile" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \ (if test -d "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" && cd "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)"; then \ echo " cd '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' && rm -f $$relfile $$relfile-[0-9] $$relfile-[0-9][0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9][0-9]"; \ rm -f $$relfile $$relfile-[0-9] $$relfile-[0-9][0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9][0-9]; \ else :; fi); \ done uninstall-pdf-am: @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) @list='$(PDFS)'; test -n "$(pdfdir)" || list=; \ for p in $$list; do \ $(am__strip_dir) \ echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)/$$f'"; \ rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)/$$f"; \ done uninstall-ps-am: @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) @list='$(PSS)'; test -n "$(psdir)" || list=; \ for p in $$list; do \ $(am__strip_dir) \ echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)/$$f'"; \ rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)/$$f"; \ done dist-info: $(INFO_DEPS) @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; \ list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \ for base in $$list; do \ case $$base in \ $(srcdir)/*) base=`echo "$$base" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ esac; \ if test -f $$base; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ base_i=`echo "$$base" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \ for file in $$d/$$base $$d/$$base-[0-9] $$d/$$base-[0-9][0-9] $$d/$$base_i[0-9] $$d/$$base_i[0-9][0-9]; do \ if test -f $$file; then \ relfile=`expr "$$file" : "$$d/\(.*\)"`; \ test -f "$(distdir)/$$relfile" || \ cp -p $$file "$(distdir)/$$relfile"; \ else :; fi; \ done; \ done mostlyclean-aminfo: -rm -rf mcron.aux mcron.cp mcron.cps mcron.fn mcron.ky mcron.kys mcron.log \ mcron.pg mcron.pgs mcron.tmp mcron.toc mcron.tp mcron.tps \ mcron.vr mcron.vrs clean-aminfo: -test -z "mcron.dvi mcron.pdf mcron.ps mcron.html" \ || rm -rf mcron.dvi mcron.pdf mcron.ps mcron.html maintainer-clean-aminfo: @list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; for i in $$list; do \ i_i=`echo "$$i" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \ echo " rm -f $$i $$i-[0-9] $$i-[0-9][0-9] $$i_i[0-9] $$i_i[0-9][0-9]"; \ rm -f $$i $$i-[0-9] $$i-[0-9][0-9] $$i_i[0-9] $$i_i[0-9][0-9]; \ done install-man1: $(dist_man1_MANS) @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) test -z "$(man1dir)" || $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" @list='$(dist_man1_MANS)'; test -n "$(man1dir)" || exit 0; \ { for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done; \ } | while read p; do \ if test -f $$p; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ echo "$$d$$p"; echo "$$p"; \ done | \ sed -e 'n;s,.*/,,;p;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,' | \ sed 'N;N;s,\n, ,g' | { \ list=; while read file base inst; do \ if test "$$base" = "$$inst"; then list="$$list $$file"; else \ echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$file' '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst'"; \ $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$file" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst" || exit $$?; \ fi; \ done; \ for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done | $(am__base_list) | \ while read files; do \ test -z "$$files" || { \ echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit $$?; }; \ done; } uninstall-man1: @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) @list='$(dist_man1_MANS)'; test -n "$(man1dir)" || exit 0; \ files=`{ for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done; \ } | sed -e 's,.*/,,;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,'`; \ test -z "$$files" || { \ echo " ( cd '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ cd "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" && rm -f $$files; } install-pkgdataDATA: $(pkgdata_DATA) @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) test -z "$(pkgdatadir)" || $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(pkgdatadir)" @list='$(pkgdata_DATA)'; test -n "$(pkgdatadir)" || list=; \ for p in $$list; do \ if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ echo "$$d$$p"; \ done | $(am__base_list) | \ while read files; do \ echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(pkgdatadir)'"; \ $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(pkgdatadir)" || exit $$?; \ done uninstall-pkgdataDATA: @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) @list='$(pkgdata_DATA)'; test -n "$(pkgdatadir)" || list=; \ files=`for p in $$list; do echo $$p; done | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; \ test -n "$$files" || exit 0; \ echo " ( cd '$(DESTDIR)$(pkgdatadir)' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ cd "$(DESTDIR)$(pkgdatadir)" && rm -f $$files ID: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(LISP) $(TAGS_FILES) list='$(SOURCES) $(HEADERS) $(LISP) $(TAGS_FILES)'; \ unique=`for i in $$list; do \ if test -f "$$i"; then echo $$i; else echo $(srcdir)/$$i; fi; \ done | \ $(AWK) '{ files[$$0] = 1; nonempty = 1; } \ END { if (nonempty) { for (i in files) print i; }; }'`; \ mkid -fID $$unique tags: TAGS TAGS: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_DEPENDENCIES) \ $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) set x; \ here=`pwd`; \ list='$(SOURCES) $(HEADERS) $(LISP) $(TAGS_FILES)'; \ unique=`for i in $$list; do \ if test -f "$$i"; then echo $$i; else echo $(srcdir)/$$i; fi; \ done | \ $(AWK) '{ files[$$0] = 1; nonempty = 1; } \ END { if (nonempty) { for (i in files) print i; }; }'`; \ shift; \ if test -z "$(ETAGS_ARGS)$$*$$unique"; then :; else \ test -n "$$unique" || unique=$$empty_fix; \ if test $$# -gt 0; then \ $(ETAGS) $(ETAGSFLAGS) $(AM_ETAGSFLAGS) $(ETAGS_ARGS) \ "$$@" $$unique; \ else \ $(ETAGS) $(ETAGSFLAGS) $(AM_ETAGSFLAGS) $(ETAGS_ARGS) \ $$unique; \ fi; \ fi ctags: CTAGS CTAGS: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_DEPENDENCIES) \ $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) list='$(SOURCES) $(HEADERS) $(LISP) $(TAGS_FILES)'; \ unique=`for i in $$list; do \ if test -f "$$i"; then echo $$i; else echo $(srcdir)/$$i; fi; \ done | \ $(AWK) '{ files[$$0] = 1; nonempty = 1; } \ END { if (nonempty) { for (i in files) print i; }; }'`; \ test -z "$(CTAGS_ARGS)$$unique" \ || $(CTAGS) $(CTAGSFLAGS) $(AM_CTAGSFLAGS) $(CTAGS_ARGS) \ $$unique GTAGS: here=`$(am__cd) $(top_builddir) && pwd` \ && $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) \ && gtags -i $(GTAGS_ARGS) "$$here" distclean-tags: -rm -f TAGS ID GTAGS GRTAGS GSYMS GPATH tags distdir: $(DISTFILES) @list='$(MANS)'; if test -n "$$list"; then \ list=`for p in $$list; do \ if test -f $$p; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ if test -f "$$d$$p"; then echo "$$d$$p"; else :; fi; done`; \ if test -n "$$list" && \ grep 'ab help2man is required to generate this page' $$list >/dev/null; then \ echo "error: found man pages containing the \`missing help2man' replacement text:" >&2; \ grep -l 'ab help2man is required to generate this page' $$list | sed 's/^/ /' >&2; \ echo " to fix them, install help2man, remove and regenerate the man pages;" >&2; \ echo " typically \`make maintainer-clean' will remove them" >&2; \ exit 1; \ else :; fi; \ else :; fi $(am__remove_distdir) test -d "$(distdir)" || mkdir "$(distdir)" @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ case $$dist_files in \ */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ sort -u` ;; \ esac; \ for file in $$dist_files; do \ if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ fi; \ if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ fi; \ cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ else \ test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ || exit 1; \ fi; \ done $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) \ top_distdir="$(top_distdir)" distdir="$(distdir)" \ dist-info -test -n "$(am__skip_mode_fix)" \ || find "$(distdir)" -type d ! -perm -755 \ -exec chmod u+rwx,go+rx {} \; -o \ ! -type d ! -perm -444 -links 1 -exec chmod a+r {} \; -o \ ! -type d ! -perm -400 -exec chmod a+r {} \; -o \ ! -type d ! -perm -444 -exec $(install_sh) -c -m a+r {} {} \; \ || chmod -R a+r "$(distdir)" dist-gzip: distdir tardir=$(distdir) && $(am__tar) | GZIP=$(GZIP_ENV) gzip -c >$(distdir).tar.gz $(am__remove_distdir) dist-bzip2: distdir tardir=$(distdir) && $(am__tar) | bzip2 -9 -c >$(distdir).tar.bz2 $(am__remove_distdir) dist-lzma: distdir tardir=$(distdir) && $(am__tar) | lzma -9 -c >$(distdir).tar.lzma $(am__remove_distdir) dist-xz: distdir tardir=$(distdir) && $(am__tar) | xz -c >$(distdir).tar.xz $(am__remove_distdir) dist-tarZ: distdir tardir=$(distdir) && $(am__tar) | compress -c >$(distdir).tar.Z $(am__remove_distdir) dist-shar: distdir shar $(distdir) | GZIP=$(GZIP_ENV) gzip -c >$(distdir).shar.gz $(am__remove_distdir) dist-zip: distdir -rm -f $(distdir).zip zip -rq $(distdir).zip $(distdir) $(am__remove_distdir) dist dist-all: distdir tardir=$(distdir) && $(am__tar) | GZIP=$(GZIP_ENV) gzip -c >$(distdir).tar.gz $(am__remove_distdir) # This target untars the dist file and tries a VPATH configuration. Then # it guarantees that the distribution is self-contained by making another # tarfile. distcheck: dist case '$(DIST_ARCHIVES)' in \ *.tar.gz*) \ GZIP=$(GZIP_ENV) gzip -dc $(distdir).tar.gz | $(am__untar) ;;\ *.tar.bz2*) \ bzip2 -dc $(distdir).tar.bz2 | $(am__untar) ;;\ *.tar.lzma*) \ lzma -dc $(distdir).tar.lzma | $(am__untar) ;;\ *.tar.xz*) \ xz -dc $(distdir).tar.xz | $(am__untar) ;;\ *.tar.Z*) \ uncompress -c $(distdir).tar.Z | $(am__untar) ;;\ *.shar.gz*) \ GZIP=$(GZIP_ENV) gzip -dc $(distdir).shar.gz | unshar ;;\ *.zip*) \ unzip $(distdir).zip ;;\ esac chmod -R a-w $(distdir); chmod a+w $(distdir) mkdir $(distdir)/_build mkdir $(distdir)/_inst chmod a-w $(distdir) test -d $(distdir)/_build || exit 0; \ dc_install_base=`$(am__cd) $(distdir)/_inst && pwd | sed -e 's,^[^:\\/]:[\\/],/,'` \ && dc_destdir="$${TMPDIR-/tmp}/am-dc-$$$$/" \ && am__cwd=`pwd` \ && $(am__cd) $(distdir)/_build \ && ../configure --srcdir=.. --prefix="$$dc_install_base" \ $(DISTCHECK_CONFIGURE_FLAGS) \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) dvi \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) check \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) installcheck \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) uninstall \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distuninstallcheck_dir="$$dc_install_base" \ distuninstallcheck \ && chmod -R a-w "$$dc_install_base" \ && ({ \ (cd ../.. && umask 077 && mkdir "$$dc_destdir") \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) DESTDIR="$$dc_destdir" install \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) DESTDIR="$$dc_destdir" uninstall \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) DESTDIR="$$dc_destdir" \ distuninstallcheck_dir="$$dc_destdir" distuninstallcheck; \ } || { rm -rf "$$dc_destdir"; exit 1; }) \ && rm -rf "$$dc_destdir" \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) dist \ && rm -rf $(DIST_ARCHIVES) \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distcleancheck \ && cd "$$am__cwd" \ || exit 1 $(am__remove_distdir) @(echo "$(distdir) archives ready for distribution: "; \ list='$(DIST_ARCHIVES)'; for i in $$list; do echo $$i; done) | \ sed -e 1h -e 1s/./=/g -e 1p -e 1x -e '$$p' -e '$$x' distuninstallcheck: @$(am__cd) '$(distuninstallcheck_dir)' \ && test `$(distuninstallcheck_listfiles) | wc -l` -le 1 \ || { echo "ERROR: files left after uninstall:" ; \ if test -n "$(DESTDIR)"; then \ echo " (check DESTDIR support)"; \ fi ; \ $(distuninstallcheck_listfiles) ; \ exit 1; } >&2 distcleancheck: distclean @if test '$(srcdir)' = . ; then \ echo "ERROR: distcleancheck can only run from a VPATH build" ; \ exit 1 ; \ fi @test `$(distcleancheck_listfiles) | wc -l` -eq 0 \ || { echo "ERROR: files left in build directory after distclean:" ; \ $(distcleancheck_listfiles) ; \ exit 1; } >&2 check-am: all-am check: check-am all-am: makefile $(INFO_DEPS) $(PROGRAMS) $(MANS) $(DATA) installdirs: for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(bindir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(pkgdatadir)"; do \ test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ done install: install-am install-exec: install-exec-am install-data: install-data-am uninstall: uninstall-am install-am: all-am @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am installcheck: installcheck-am install-strip: $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ `test -z '$(STRIP)' || \ echo "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'"` install mostlyclean-generic: clean-generic: -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) distclean-generic: -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) maintainer-clean-generic: @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." -test -z "$(MAINTAINERCLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(MAINTAINERCLEANFILES) clean: clean-am clean-am: clean-aminfo clean-binPROGRAMS clean-generic mostlyclean-am distclean: distclean-am -rm -f $(am__CONFIG_DISTCLEAN_FILES) -rm -rf ./$(DEPDIR) -rm -f makefile distclean-am: clean-am distclean-compile distclean-generic \ distclean-tags dvi: dvi-am dvi-am: $(DVIS) html: html-am html-am: $(HTMLS) info: info-am info-am: $(INFO_DEPS) install-data-am: install-info-am install-man install-pkgdataDATA install-dvi: install-dvi-am install-dvi-am: $(DVIS) @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) test -z "$(dvidir)" || $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)" @list='$(DVIS)'; test -n "$(dvidir)" || list=; \ for p in $$list; do \ if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ echo "$$d$$p"; \ done | $(am__base_list) | \ while read files; do \ echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)'"; \ $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)" || exit $$?; \ done install-exec-am: install-binPROGRAMS @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-hook install-html: install-html-am install-html-am: $(HTMLS) @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) test -z "$(htmldir)" || $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)" @list='$(HTMLS)'; list2=; test -n "$(htmldir)" || list=; \ for p in $$list; do \ if test -f "$$p" || test -d "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ $(am__strip_dir) \ if test -d "$$d$$p"; then \ echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \ $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f" || exit 1; \ echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$d$$p'/* '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \ $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$d$$p"/* "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f" || exit $$?; \ else \ list2="$$list2 $$d$$p"; \ fi; \ done; \ test -z "$$list2" || { echo "$$list2" | $(am__base_list) | \ while read files; do \ echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)'"; \ $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)" || exit $$?; \ done; } install-info: install-info-am install-info-am: $(INFO_DEPS) @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) test -z "$(infodir)" || $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; \ list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; test -n "$(infodir)" || list=; \ for file in $$list; do \ case $$file in \ $(srcdir)/*) file=`echo "$$file" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ esac; \ if test -f $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ file_i=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \ for ifile in $$d/$$file $$d/$$file-[0-9] $$d/$$file-[0-9][0-9] \ $$d/$$file_i[0-9] $$d/$$file_i[0-9][0-9] ; do \ if test -f $$ifile; then \ echo "$$ifile"; \ else : ; fi; \ done; \ done | $(am__base_list) | \ while read files; do \ echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)'"; \ $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" || exit $$?; done @$(POST_INSTALL) @if (install-info --version && \ install-info --version 2>&1 | sed 1q | grep -i -v debian) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \ list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; test -n "$(infodir)" || list=; \ for file in $$list; do \ relfile=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \ echo " install-info --info-dir='$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile'";\ install-info --info-dir="$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile" || :;\ done; \ else : ; fi install-man: install-man1 install-pdf: install-pdf-am install-pdf-am: $(PDFS) @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) test -z "$(pdfdir)" || $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)" @list='$(PDFS)'; test -n "$(pdfdir)" || list=; \ for p in $$list; do \ if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ echo "$$d$$p"; \ done | $(am__base_list) | \ while read files; do \ echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)'"; \ $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)" || exit $$?; done install-ps: install-ps-am install-ps-am: $(PSS) @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) test -z "$(psdir)" || $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)" @list='$(PSS)'; test -n "$(psdir)" || list=; \ for p in $$list; do \ if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ echo "$$d$$p"; \ done | $(am__base_list) | \ while read files; do \ echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)'"; \ $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)" || exit $$?; done installcheck-am: maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am -rm -f $(am__CONFIG_DISTCLEAN_FILES) -rm -rf $(top_srcdir)/autom4te.cache -rm -rf ./$(DEPDIR) -rm -f makefile maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-aminfo \ maintainer-clean-generic mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-aminfo mostlyclean-compile \ mostlyclean-generic pdf: pdf-am pdf-am: $(PDFS) ps: ps-am ps-am: $(PSS) uninstall-am: uninstall-binPROGRAMS uninstall-dvi-am uninstall-html-am \ uninstall-info-am uninstall-man uninstall-pdf-am \ uninstall-pkgdataDATA uninstall-ps-am @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) uninstall-hook uninstall-man: uninstall-man1 .MAKE: install-am install-exec-am install-strip uninstall-am .PHONY: CTAGS GTAGS all all-am am--refresh check check-am clean \ clean-aminfo clean-binPROGRAMS clean-generic ctags dist \ dist-all dist-bzip2 dist-gzip dist-info dist-lzma dist-shar \ dist-tarZ dist-xz dist-zip distcheck distclean \ distclean-compile distclean-generic distclean-tags \ distcleancheck distdir distuninstallcheck dvi dvi-am html \ html-am info info-am install install-am install-binPROGRAMS \ install-data install-data-am install-dvi install-dvi-am \ install-exec install-exec-am install-exec-hook install-html \ install-html-am install-info install-info-am install-man \ install-man1 install-pdf install-pdf-am install-pkgdataDATA \ install-ps install-ps-am install-strip installcheck \ installcheck-am installdirs maintainer-clean \ maintainer-clean-aminfo maintainer-clean-generic mostlyclean \ mostlyclean-aminfo mostlyclean-compile mostlyclean-generic pdf \ pdf-am ps ps-am tags uninstall uninstall-am \ uninstall-binPROGRAMS uninstall-dvi-am uninstall-hook \ uninstall-html-am uninstall-info-am uninstall-man \ uninstall-man1 uninstall-pdf-am uninstall-pkgdataDATA \ uninstall-ps-am # If you're wondering, the configure script keeps deleting all files with a name # like core.*, so we have to keep re-making it (I lost a good day's work because # of this). core.scm : mcron-core.scm $(CP) mcron-core.scm core.scm mcron.c : main.scm crontab.scm makefile.ed mcron.c.template @echo 'Building mcron.c...' @$(ED) < makefile.ed > /dev/null 2>&1 @rm -f mcron.escaped.scm > /dev/null 2>&1 install-exec-hook: @if [ "x@NO_VIXIE_CLOBBER@" != "xyes" -a "`id -u`" -eq "0" ]; then \ rm -f $(fpp)cron$(EXEEXT) > /dev/null 2>&1; \ $(INSTALL) --mode='u=rwx' mcron$(EXEEXT) $(fpp)cron$(EXEEXT); \ rm -f $(fpp)crontab$(EXEEXT) > /dev/null 2>&1; \ $(INSTALL) --mode='u=rwxs,og=rx' mcron$(EXEEXT) $(fpp)crontab$(EXEEXT); \ $(INSTALL) -d --mode='u=rwx' $(DESTDIR)/var/cron; \ $(INSTALL) -d --mode='u=rwx,og=rx' $(DESTDIR)/var/run; \ $(INSTALL) -d --mode='u=rwx,og=rx' $(DESTDIR)@GUILE_SITE@; \ $(INSTALL) -d --mode='u=rwx,og=rx' $(DESTDIR)@GUILE_SITE@/mcron; \ elif [ "x@NO_VIXIE_CLOBBER@" = "xyes" ]; then \ echo "Not installing Vixie-style programs"; \ else \ echo "+++ WARNING: NON-ROOT INSTALL: ONLY mcron WILL BE INSTALLED, NOT ANY OF THE VIXIE REPLACEMENT PROGRAMS"; \ fi @echo @echo " AFTER INSTALLATION, CONSIDER RUNNING make cook-up-man" @echo uninstall-hook: if [ "`id -u`" -eq "0" ]; then \ rm -f $(fpp){cron,crontab}$(EXEEXT); \ fi # Not part of formal package building, but a rule for manual use to get the # elemental man page. Will only work once the mcron program is installed. cook-up-man: help2man -n 'a program to run tasks at regular (or not) intervals' \ $(fpp)mcron > mcron.1 $(MAKE) install # Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. # Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. .NOEXPORT: mcron-1.0.6/texinfo.tex0000644000175000017500000110035111405144110011743 00000000000000% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. % % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi % \def\texinfoversion{2009-08-14.15} % % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, % 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. % % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the % License, or (at your option) any later version. % % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU % General Public License for more details. % % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License % along with this program. If not, see . % % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without % restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) % % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug % reports; you can get the latest version from: % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or % ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex % (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. % % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. % % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: % tex foo.texi % texindex foo.?? % tex foo.texi % tex foo.texi % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. % % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the % full Texinfo distribution. % % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} % If in a .fmt file, print the version number % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because % they might have appeared in the input file name. \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} \chardef\other=12 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. % For @tex, we can use \tabalign. \let\+ = \relax % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. \let\ptexb=\b \let\ptexbullet=\bullet \let\ptexc=\c \let\ptexcomma=\, \let\ptexdot=\. \let\ptexdots=\dots \let\ptexend=\end \let\ptexequiv=\equiv \let\ptexexclam=\! \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote \let\ptexgtr=> \let\ptexhat=^ \let\ptexi=\i \let\ptexindent=\indent \let\ptexinsert=\insert \let\ptexlbrace=\{ \let\ptexless=< \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent \let\ptexplus=+ \let\ptexrbrace=\} \let\ptexslash=\/ \let\ptexstar=\* \let\ptext=\t \let\ptextop=\top {\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% Math-mode def from plain.tex. \let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it % starts a new line in the output. \newlinechar = `^^J % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. % \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. \else \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} \fi % Set up fixed words for English if not already set. \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi % \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi % \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. \chardef\spacecat = 10 \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} % sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences. \chardef\colonChar = `\: \chardef\commaChar = `\, \chardef\dashChar = `\- \chardef\dotChar = `\. \chardef\exclamChar= `\! \chardef\lquoteChar= `\` \chardef\questChar = `\? \chardef\rquoteChar= `\' \chardef\semiChar = `\; \chardef\underChar = `\_ % Ignore a token. % \def\gobble#1{} % The following is used inside several \edef's. \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} % Hyphenation fixes. \hyphenation{ Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces spell-ing spell-ings stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space wide-spread wrap-around } % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. \newdimen\bindingoffset \newdimen\normaloffset \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight % For a final copy, take out the rectangles % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). % \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). % \def\|{% % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. \leavevmode % % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. \vadjust{% % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. \vskip-\baselineskip % % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. \llap{% % % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt % % This is the space between the bar and the text. \hskip 12pt }% }% } % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. % \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% \def\loggingall{% \tracingstats2 \tracingpages1 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingoutput1 \tracingmacros2 \tracingrestores1 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging \tracingscantokens1 \tracingifs1 \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2 \tracingassigns1 \fi \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex \errorcontextlines16 }% % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. % \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} % For @cropmarks command. % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. % \newif\ifcropmarks \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue % % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 % \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. % % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. % % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is % described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two % marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and % one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK... \def\domark{% \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% \mark{% \the\toks0 \the\toks2 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 }% } % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., % @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very % first @chapter. \def\gettopheadingmarks{% \ifcase0\topmark\fi \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi } \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. \def\lastchapterdefs{} \def\lastsectiondefs{} \def\prevchapterdefs{} \def\prevsectiondefs{} \def\lastcolordefs{} % Main output routine. \chardef\PAGE = 255 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} \newbox\headlinebox \newbox\footlinebox % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. \def\onepageout#1{% \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi % \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi % % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% % {% % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends % before the \shipout runs. % \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; % it needs to be % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} \shipout\vbox{% % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi % \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup \hsize = \outerhsize \vskip-\topandbottommargin \vtop to0pt{% \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% \nointerlineskip \line{% \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% \hfill \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% }% \vss}% \vskip\topandbottommargin \line\bgroup \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi \vbox\bgroup \fi % \unvbox\headlinebox \pagebody{#1}% \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. \vskip 24pt \unvbox\footlinebox \fi % \ifcropmarks \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick \vbox to0pt{\vss \line{% \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% \hfill \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% }% \nointerlineskip \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% }% \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause \fi }% end of \shipout\vbox }% end of group with \indexdummies \advancepageno \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi } \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} {\catcode`\@ =11 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi \dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} } % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) % \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} \def\nstop{\vbox {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} \def\nsbot{\vbox {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. % \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} \def\parseargusing#1#2{% \def\argtorun{#2}% \begingroup \obeylines \spaceisspace #1% \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. } {\obeylines % \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% }% } % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} % Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `\^^M' is replaced by a single space. % % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., % @end itemize @c foo % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed % by \finishparsearg. % \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% \def\temp{#3}% \ifx\temp\empty % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: \let\temp\finishparsearg \else \let\temp\argcheckspaces \fi % Put the space token in: \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm } % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, % just before passing the control to \argtorun. % (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger % that a pair of braces would be stripped. % % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. % \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} % \parseargdef\foo{...} % is roughly equivalent to % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} % \def\Xfoo#1{...} % % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 \def\parseargdef#1{% \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% } \def\doparseargdef#1#2{% \def#2{\parsearg#1}% \def#1##1% } % Several utility definitions with active space: { \obeyspaces \gdef\obeyedspace{ } % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input % should produce a line of output anyway. % \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} } \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: % % \envdef\foo{...} % \def\Efoo{...} % % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. % % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this % special case.) % At run-time, environments start with this: \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} % initialize \let\thisenv\empty % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} % Check whether we're in the right environment: \def\checkenv#1{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\thisenv\temp \else \badenverr \fi } % Environment mismatch, #1 expected: \def\badenverr{% \errhelp = \EMsimple \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, not \inenvironment\thisenv}% } \def\inenvironment#1{% \ifx#1\empty out of any environment% \else in environment \expandafter\string#1% \fi } % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv % \parseargdef\end{% \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname \else % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname \csname E#1\endcsname \endgroup \fi } \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} %% Simple single-character @ commands % @@ prints an @ % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). \def\@{{\tt\char64}} % This is turned off because it was never documented % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' %% but suppressing ligatures. %\def\`{{`}} %\def\'{{'}} % Used to generate quoted braces. \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} \let\{=\mylbrace \let\}=\myrbrace \begingroup % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% !endgroup % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. \let\comma = , % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. \let\, = \c \let\dotaccent = \. \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} \let\tieaccent = \t \let\ubaraccent = \b \let\udotaccent = \d % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. \def\questiondown{?`} \def\exclamdown{!`} \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. \def\imacro{i} \def\jmacro{j} \def\dotless#1{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% \fi\fi } % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) % \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and % \scriptscriptstyle). % \def\LaTeX{% L\kern-.36em {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% \kern-.15em \TeX } % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. {\catcode`@ = 11 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble % if the definition is written into an index file. \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } } % @: forces normal size whitespace following. \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } % @* forces a line break. \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} % @/ allows a line break. \let\/=\allowbreak % @. is an end-of-sentence period. \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} % @? is an end-of-sentence query. \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. % \def\onword{on} \def\offword{off} % \parseargdef\frenchspacing{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing \else \errhelp = \EMsimple \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}% \fi\fi } % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and % the text is small, which looks bad. % % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). % \newbox\groupbox \def\vfilllimit{0.7} % \envdef\group{% \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% \fi \startsavinginserts % \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. \comment } % % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space % above. But it's pretty close. \def\Egroup{% % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth \egroup % End the \vtop. % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big % group, force a page break. \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight \page \fi \fi \box\groupbox \prevdepth = \dimen1 \checkinserts } % % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. % \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% where each line of input produces a line of output.} % @need space-in-mils % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in % Old definition--didn't work. %\parseargdef\need{\par % %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally %% if the depth of the box does not fit. %{\baselineskip=0pt% %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak %\prevdepth=-1000pt %}} \parseargdef\need{% % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a % paragraph. \par % % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. \dimen0 = #1\mil \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 % % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. % And a page break here is fine. \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% % % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. % % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. \penalty9999 % % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. \kern -#1\mil % % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. \nobreak \fi } % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). \let\br = \par % @page forces the start of a new page. % \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} % @exdent text.... % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. % That's how much \exdent should take out. \newskip\exdentamount % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. % \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} % \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% \nobreak \kern-\strutdepth \vtop to \strutdepth{% \baselineskip=\strutdepth \vss % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. \ifx#1l% \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% \else \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% \fi \null }% }} \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} % % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; % else use TEXT for both). % \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts \def\righttext{#2}% \else \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text \def\righttext{#1}% \fi % \ifodd\pageno \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin \else \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% \fi \temp } % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. % \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} \def\includezzz#1{% \pushthisfilestack \def\thisfile{#1}% {% \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% % % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes % definitions, etc. \expandafter }\temp \popthisfilestack } \def\filenamecatcodes{% \catcode`\\=\other \catcode`~=\other \catcode`^=\other \catcode`_=\other \catcode`|=\other \catcode`<=\other \catcode`>=\other \catcode`+=\other \catcode`-=\other \catcode`\`=\other \catcode`\'=\other } \def\pushthisfilestack{% \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm } \def\pushthisfilestackX{% \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm } \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% } \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: the stack of filenames is empty.}} \def\thisfile{} % @center line % outputs that line, centered. % \parseargdef\center{% \ifhmode \let\next\centerH \else \let\next\centerV \fi \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% } \def\centerH#1{% {% \hfil\break \advance\hsize by -\leftskip \advance\hsize by -\rightskip \line{#1}% \break }% } \def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} % @comment ...line which is ignored... % @c is the same as @comment % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% \commentxxx} {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} \let\c=\comment % @paragraphindent NCHARS % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. % \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords \def\noneword{none} % \parseargdef\paragraphindent{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\asisword \else \ifx\temp\noneword \defaultparindent = 0pt \else \defaultparindent = #1em \fi \fi \parindent = \defaultparindent } % @exampleindent NCHARS % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. \parseargdef\exampleindent{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\asisword \else \ifx\temp\noneword \lispnarrowing = 0pt \else \lispnarrowing = #1em \fi \fi } % @firstparagraphindent WORD % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such % paragraphs. % % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. % By default, we suppress indentation. % \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} \def\insertword{insert} % \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\noneword \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent \else\ifx\temp\insertword \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax \else \errhelp = \EMsimple \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% \fi\fi } % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. % % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next % paragraph. % \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% \gdef\indent{% \restorefirstparagraphindent \indent }% \gdef\noindent{% \restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent }% \global\everypar = {% \kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent }% } \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% \global \let \indent = \ptexindent \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent \global \everypar = {}% } % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. % \def\asis#1{#1} % @math outputs its argument in math mode. % % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, % which is what @var uses. { \catcode`\_ = \active \gdef\mathunderscore{% \catcode`\_=\active \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% } } % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but % this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not % otherwise define @\. % % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} % \def\math{% \tex \mathunderscore \let\\ = \mathbackslash \mathactive % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode \let\"=\ddot \let\'=\acute \let\==\bar \let\^=\hat \let\`=\grave \let\u=\breve \let\v=\check \let\~=\tilde \let\dotaccent=\dot $\finishmath } \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). % { \catcode`^ = \active \catcode`< = \active \catcode`> = \active \catcode`+ = \active \catcode`' = \active \gdef\mathactive{% \let^ = \ptexhat \let< = \ptexless \let> = \ptexgtr \let+ = \ptexplus \let' = \ptexquoteright } } % Some math mode symbols. \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} \def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi} \def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi} \def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi} % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do % whichever is larger. % \def\dots{% \leavevmode \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em \dimen0 = \wd0 \else \dimen0 = 1.5em \fi \hbox to \dimen0{% \hskip 0pt plus.25fil .\hskip 0pt plus1fil .\hskip 0pt plus1fil .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil }% } % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. % \def\enddots{% \dots \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor } % @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up % Texinfo's parsing. % \let\comma = , % @refill is a no-op. \let\refill=\relax % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). % \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. \let\novalidate = \linksfalse % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. \def\setfilename{% \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. \iflinks \tryauxfile % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. \openindices \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. % % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. \openin 1 texinfo.cnf \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi \closein 1 % \comment % Ignore the actual filename. } % Called from \setfilename. % \def\openindices{% \newindex{cp}% \newcodeindex{fn}% \newcodeindex{vr}% \newcodeindex{tp}% \newcodeindex{ky}% \newcodeindex{pg}% } % @bye. \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} \message{pdf,} % adobe `portable' document format \newcount\tempnum \newcount\lnkcount \newtoks\filename \newcount\filenamelength \newcount\pgn \newtoks\toksA \newtoks\toksB \newtoks\toksC \newtoks\toksD \newbox\boxA \newcount\countA \newif\ifpdf \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined, % borrowed from ifpdf.sty. \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined \else \ifx\pdfoutput\relax \else \ifcase\pdfoutput \else \pdftrue \fi \fi \fi % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. % http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html % (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX % user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so % that's what we do). % double active backslashes. % {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active @gdef@activebackslashdouble{% @catcode`@\=@active @let\=@doublebackslash} } % To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are % not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as % us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor % changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission % from the author, Heiko Oberdiek. % % #1 is the tokens to replace. % #2 is the replacement. % #3 is the control sequence with the string. % \def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{% \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{% ##1% \ifx\\##2\\% \else #2% \HyReturnAfterFi{% \HyPsdReplace##2\END }% \fi }% \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}% } \long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1} % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements. \def\backslashparens#1{% \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest. \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}% \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}% } \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI output) for that.)} \ifpdf % % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex, % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead % of actual black. \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} % % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} % % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. \def\setcolor#1{% \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% \domark \pdfsetcolor{#1}% } % \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} \def\lastcolordefs{} % \def\makefootline{% \baselineskip24pt \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% } % \def\makeheadline{% \vbox to 0pt{% \vskip-22.5pt \line{% \vbox to8.5pt{}% % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. \getcolormarks % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% }% \vss }% \nointerlineskip } % % \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} % % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% % % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among % others). Let's try in that order. \let\pdfimgext=\empty \begingroup \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% \fi \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% \fi \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% \fi \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% \fi \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% \fi \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% \fi \closein 1 \endgroup % % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \immediate\pdfimage \else \immediate\pdfximage \fi \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 #1.\pdfimgext \else {#1.\pdfimgext}% \fi \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage \fi} % \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. \indexnofonts \turnoffactive \activebackslashdouble \makevalueexpandable \def\pdfdestname{#1}% \backslashparens\pdfdestname \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% }} % % used to mark target names; must be expandable. \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} % % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed} \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed} \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} % % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines % come from Petr Olsak \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax \advance\tempnum by 1 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} % % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. % #4 is the page number % \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the % page number. We could generate a destination for the section % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% \else % Doubled backslashes in the name. {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}% \fi % % Also double the backslashes in the display string. {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}% % \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% } % \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% \begingroup % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace % % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% \def\thischapnum{##2}% \def\thissecnum{0}% \def\thissubsecnum{0}% }% \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% \def\thissecnum{##2}% \def\thissubsecnum{0}% }% \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% }% \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% }% \def\thischapnum{0}% \def\thissecnum{0}% \def\thissubsecnum{0}% % % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et % al. a second time, below. \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% \readdatafile{toc}% % % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. % % We use the node names as the destinations. \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% % % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. % % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. \indexnofonts \setupdatafile \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash \input \tocreadfilename \endgroup } % \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% \advance\filenamelength by 1 \fi \fi \nextsp} \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink \else \let \startlink \pdfstartlink \fi % make a live url in pdf output. \def\pdfurl#1{% \begingroup % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one % people have actually reported a problem with. % \normalturnoffactive \def\@{@}% \let\/=\empty \makevalueexpandable % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just % special-casing \var here? \def\var##1{##1}% % \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% \endgroup} \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} \def\maketoks{% \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax \ifx\first0\adn0 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 \else \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else \let\next=\maketoks \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi \fi \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi \next} \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} \def\pdflink#1{% \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} \else % non-pdf mode \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble \let\pdfurl = \gobble \let\endlink = \relax \let\setcolor = \gobble \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput \message{fonts,} % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in % italics, not bold italics. % \def\setfontstyle#1{% \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font } % Select #1 fonts with the current style. % \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} % Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since % in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh. \def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}} % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. % So we set up a \sf. \newfam\sffam \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. % We don't need math for this font style. \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} % Default leading. \newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. % \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} % % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. \def\baselinefactor{1} % \def\setleading#1{% \dimen0 = #1\relax \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip \normalbaselines \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip }% } % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. % % do nothing with this by default. \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else \begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) %%Version: 1.000 %%EndComments /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 12 dict begin begincmap /CIDSystemInfo << /Registry (TeX) /Ordering (OT1) /Supplement 0 >> def /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def /CMapType 2 def 1 begincodespacerange <00> <7F> endcodespacerange 8 beginbfrange <00> <01> <0393> <09> <0A> <03A8> <23> <26> <0023> <28> <3B> <0028> <3F> <5B> <003F> <5D> <5E> <005D> <61> <7A> <0061> <7B> <7C> <2013> endbfrange 40 beginbfchar <02> <0398> <03> <039B> <04> <039E> <05> <03A0> <06> <03A3> <07> <03D2> <08> <03A6> <0B> <00660066> <0C> <00660069> <0D> <0066006C> <0E> <006600660069> <0F> <00660066006C> <10> <0131> <11> <0237> <12> <0060> <13> <00B4> <14> <02C7> <15> <02D8> <16> <00AF> <17> <02DA> <18> <00B8> <19> <00DF> <1A> <00E6> <1B> <0153> <1C> <00F8> <1D> <00C6> <1E> <0152> <1F> <00D8> <21> <0021> <22> <201D> <27> <2019> <3C> <00A1> <3D> <003D> <3E> <00BF> <5C> <201C> <5F> <02D9> <60> <2018> <7D> <02DD> <7E> <007E> <7F> <00A8> endbfchar endcmap CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop end end %%EndResource %%EOF }\endgroup \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% }% % % \cmapOT1IT \begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) %%Version: 1.000 %%EndComments /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 12 dict begin begincmap /CIDSystemInfo << /Registry (TeX) /Ordering (OT1IT) /Supplement 0 >> def /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def /CMapType 2 def 1 begincodespacerange <00> <7F> endcodespacerange 8 beginbfrange <00> <01> <0393> <09> <0A> <03A8> <25> <26> <0025> <28> <3B> <0028> <3F> <5B> <003F> <5D> <5E> <005D> <61> <7A> <0061> <7B> <7C> <2013> endbfrange 42 beginbfchar <02> <0398> <03> <039B> <04> <039E> <05> <03A0> <06> <03A3> <07> <03D2> <08> <03A6> <0B> <00660066> <0C> <00660069> <0D> <0066006C> <0E> <006600660069> <0F> <00660066006C> <10> <0131> <11> <0237> <12> <0060> <13> <00B4> <14> <02C7> <15> <02D8> <16> <00AF> <17> <02DA> <18> <00B8> <19> <00DF> <1A> <00E6> <1B> <0153> <1C> <00F8> <1D> <00C6> <1E> <0152> <1F> <00D8> <21> <0021> <22> <201D> <23> <0023> <24> <00A3> <27> <2019> <3C> <00A1> <3D> <003D> <3E> <00BF> <5C> <201C> <5F> <02D9> <60> <2018> <7D> <02DD> <7E> <007E> <7F> <00A8> endbfchar endcmap CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop end end %%EndResource %%EOF }\endgroup \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% }% % % \cmapOT1TT \begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) %%Version: 1.000 %%EndComments /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 12 dict begin begincmap /CIDSystemInfo << /Registry (TeX) /Ordering (OT1TT) /Supplement 0 >> def /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def /CMapType 2 def 1 begincodespacerange <00> <7F> endcodespacerange 5 beginbfrange <00> <01> <0393> <09> <0A> <03A8> <21> <26> <0021> <28> <5F> <0028> <61> <7E> <0061> endbfrange 32 beginbfchar <02> <0398> <03> <039B> <04> <039E> <05> <03A0> <06> <03A3> <07> <03D2> <08> <03A6> <0B> <2191> <0C> <2193> <0D> <0027> <0E> <00A1> <0F> <00BF> <10> <0131> <11> <0237> <12> <0060> <13> <00B4> <14> <02C7> <15> <02D8> <16> <00AF> <17> <02DA> <18> <00B8> <19> <00DF> <1A> <00E6> <1B> <0153> <1C> <00F8> <1D> <00C6> <1E> <0152> <1F> <00D8> <20> <2423> <27> <2019> <60> <2018> <7F> <00A8> endbfchar endcmap CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop end end %%EndResource %%EOF }\endgroup \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% }% \fi\fi % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the % specified font prefix (normally `cm'). % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap % encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass % empty to omit). \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% } % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. \let\cmap\gobble % emacs-page end of cmaps % Use cm as the default font prefix. % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix % before you read in texinfo.tex. \ifx\fontprefix\undefined \def\fontprefix{cm} \fi % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. \def\rmshape{r} \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold \def\bfshape{b} \def\bxshape{bx} \def\ttshape{tt} \def\ttbshape{tt} \def\ttslshape{sltt} \def\itshape{ti} \def\itbshape{bxti} \def\slshape{sl} \def\slbshape{bxsl} \def\sfshape{ss} \def\sfbshape{ss} \def\scshape{csc} \def\scbshape{csc} % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in % Texinfo. % \def\definetextfontsizexi{% % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). \def\textnominalsize{11pt} \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep \def\textecsize{1095} % A few fonts for @defun names and args. \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} \font\smalli=cmmi9 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 \def\smallecsize{0900} % Fonts for small examples (8pt). \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} \font\smalleri=cmmi8 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 \def\smallerecsize{0800} % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} \let\titlebf=\titlerm \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 \def\titleecsize{2074} % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). \def\chapnominalsize{17pt} \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} \let\chapbf=\chaprm \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 \def\chapecsize{1728} % Section fonts (14.4pt). \def\secnominalsize{14pt} \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} \let\secbf\secrm \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 \def\sececsize{1440} % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} \let\ssecbf\ssecrm \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 \def\ssececsize{1200} % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). \def\reducednominalsize{10pt} \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} \font\reducedi=cmmi10 \font\reducedsy=cmsy10 \def\reducedecsize{1000} % reset the current fonts \textfonts \rm } % end of 11pt text font size definitions % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. % \def\definetextfontsizex{% % Text fonts (10pt). \def\textnominalsize{10pt} \edef\mainmagstep{1000} \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep \def\textecsize{1000} % A few fonts for @defun names and args. \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} \font\smalli=cmmi9 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 \def\smallecsize{0900} % Fonts for small examples (8pt). \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} \font\smalleri=cmmi8 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 \def\smallerecsize{0800} % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} \let\titlebf=\titlerm \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 \def\titleecsize{2074} % Chapter fonts (14.4pt). \def\chapnominalsize{14pt} \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} \let\chapbf\chaprm \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 \def\chapecsize{1440} % Section fonts (12pt). \def\secnominalsize{12pt} \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} \let\secbf\secrm \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} \font\seci=cmmi12 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 \def\sececsize{1200} % Subsection fonts (10pt). \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} \let\ssecbf\ssecrm \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} \font\sseci=cmmi10 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 \def\ssececsize{1000} % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). \def\reducednominalsize{9pt} \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} \font\reducedi=cmmi9 \font\reducedsy=cmsy9 \def\reducedecsize{0900} % reduce space between paragraphs \divide\parskip by 2 % reset the current fonts \textfonts \rm } % end of 10pt text font size definitions % We provide the user-level command % @fonttextsize 10 % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. % \def\xword{10} \def\xiword{11} % \parseargdef\fonttextsize{% \def\textsizearg{#1}% \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% % % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. % \begingroup \globaldefs=1 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi \else \errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} \fi\fi \endgroup } % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). % \def\resetmathfonts{% \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf } % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire % \tenSTYLE to set the current font. % % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in % the LaTeX logo and acronyms. % % This all needs generalizing, badly. % \def\textfonts{% \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl \def\curfontsize{text}% \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} \def\titlefonts{% \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl \def\curfontsize{title}% \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}} \def\chapfonts{% \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl \def\curfontsize{chap}% \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} \def\secfonts{% \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl \def\curfontsize{sec}% \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} \def\subsecfonts{% \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl \def\curfontsize{ssec}% \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts \def\reducedfonts{% \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl \def\curfontsize{reduced}% \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} \def\smallfonts{% \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl \def\curfontsize{small}% \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} \def\smallerfonts{% \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl \def\curfontsize{smaller}% \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} % Fonts for short table of contents. \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. \def\angleleft{$\langle$} \def\angleright{$\rangle$} % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample % can fit this many characters: % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. % % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 % --karl, 24jan03. % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. % \definetextfontsizexi \message{markup,} % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have % this property, we can check that font parameter. % \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } % Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will % define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. % \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost % style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles % currently in effect. \newif\ifmarkupvar \newif\ifmarkupsamp \newif\ifmarkupkey %\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp. %\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp. \newif\ifmarkupcode \newif\ifmarkupkbd %\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code. %\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code. \newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now). \newif\ifmarkupexample \newif\ifmarkupverb \newif\ifmarkupverbatim \let\currentmarkupstyle\empty \def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% \csname markup#1true\endcsname \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% \markupstylesetup } \let\markupstylesetup\empty \def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% \def#1% } % Markup style setup for left and right quotes. \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi } \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi } { \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active \gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} \gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} \gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} \gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} \gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft} } \let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft \let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright \let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft \let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright \let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft \let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright \let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft \let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright \let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft \let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft % Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right % quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote % from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it % the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least % evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the % regular 0x27. % \def\codequoteright{% \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax '% \else \char'15 \fi \else \char'15 \fi } % % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like % the code environments to do likewise. % \def\codequoteleft{% \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. \relax`% \else \char'22 \fi \else \char'22 \fi } % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction % unless the following character is such as not to need one. \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} \def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} \def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} % like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. % @var is set to this for defun arguments. \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} % @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want % ttsl for book titles, do we? \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} \let\i=\smartitalic \let\slanted=\smartslanted \def\var#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\smartslanted{#1}}} \let\dfn=\smartslanted \let\emph=\smartitalic % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font % @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} \let\strong=\b % @sansserif, explicit sans. \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. % \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. % \catcode`@=11 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends } \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends } \catcode`@=\other \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default % @t, explicit typewriter. \def\t#1{% {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% \null } % @samp. \def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} % definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} %\font\keysy=cmsy9 %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% % \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% % \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt % \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% % \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% % \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} % definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already % monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But % if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. % \def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}% \nohyphenation \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi #1}\null} % ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command. \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} % @file, @option are the same as @samp. \let\file=\samp \let\option=\samp % @code is a modification of @t, % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. \def\tclose#1{% {% % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font % % Switch to typewriter. \tt % % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% % % Turn off hyphenation. \nohyphenation % \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1% }% \null } % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. % -- rms. { \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions % \global\def\code{\begingroup \setupmarkupstyle{code}% % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active \ifallowcodebreaks \let-\codedash \let_\codeunder \else \let-\realdash \let_\realunder \fi \codex } } \def\realdash{-} \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} \def\codeunder{% % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. \ifusingtt{\ifmmode \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. \else\normalunderscore \fi \discretionary{}{}{}}% {\_}% } \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in % some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in % general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this. % \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue \def\keywordtrue{true} \def\keywordfalse{false} \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% \def\txiarg{#1}% \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue \allowcodebreakstrue \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse \allowcodebreaksfalse \else \errhelp = \EMsimple \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}% \fi\fi } % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, % then @kbd has no effect. \def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}} % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% \def\txiarg{#1}% \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% \else \errhelp = \EMsimple \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}% \fi\fi\fi } \def\worddistinct{distinct} \def\wordexample{example} \def\wordcode{code} % Default is `distinct'. \kbdinputstyle distinct \def\xkey{\key} \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi} % For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. \let\indicateurl=\code \let\env=\code \let\command=\code % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} % @clickstyle @arrow (by default) \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} \def\click{\arrow} % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in % a hypertex \special here. % \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup \unsepspaces \pdfurl{#1}% \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that \else \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \ifpdf \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it \else \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url \fi \else \code{#1}% only url given, so show it \fi \fi \endlink \endgroup} % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. % \let\url=\uref % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. % %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} \ifpdf \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup \unsepspaces \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi \endlink \endgroup} \else \let\email=\uref \fi % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. % \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for % all-uppercase. % \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% \def\temp{#2}% \ifx\temp\empty \else \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% \fi } % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. % \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% \def\temp{#2}% \ifx\temp\empty \else \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% \fi } \message{glyphs,} % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. % % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. % \def\point{$\star$} \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} % The @error{} command. % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. % \newbox\errorbox % {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt} % \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. \vbox{% \hrule height\dimen2 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. \hrule height\dimen2} \hfil} % \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. % \def\pounds{{\it\$}} % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. % % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular % font height. % % feymr - regular % feymo - slanted % feybr - bold % feybo - bold slanted % % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. % Hmm. % % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? % Hope not. % % \def\euro{{\eurofont e}} \def\eurofont{% % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the % font installed. % % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale % that to the current nominal size. % % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. % \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% % \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename % bold: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize \else % regular: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize \fi \thiseurofont } % Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because % sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect % the redefinition. % % Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. \def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth \def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth \def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn \def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn % \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} % % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. % % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in % the same EC font. \def\ogonek#1{{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek \else \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% \fi \fi\fi\fi\fi }% } \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} % % Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs. \def\ecfont{% % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so % hopefully nobody will notice/care. \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename % bold: \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize \else % regular: \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize \fi \thisecfont } % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. % \def\registeredsymbol{% $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% }$% } % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. % \def\textdegree{$^\circ$} % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 % so we'll define it if necessary. % \ifx\Orb\undefined \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} \fi % Quotes. \chardef\quotedblleft="5C \chardef\quotedblright=`\" \chardef\quoteleft=`\` \chardef\quoteright=`\' \message{page headings,} \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. \newif\ifseenauthor \newif\iffinishedtitlepage % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. % \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} \envdef\titlepage{% % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. \begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts % Leave some space at the very top of the page. \vglue\titlepagetopglue % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. \finishedtitlepagetrue % % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. \let\oldpage = \page \def\page{% \iffinishedtitlepage\else \finishtitlepage \fi \let\page = \oldpage \page \null }% } \def\Etitlepage{% \iffinishedtitlepage\else \finishtitlepage \fi % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. \oldpage \endgroup % % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. \HEADINGSon % % If they want short, they certainly want long too. \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage \shortcontents \contents \global\let\shortcontents = \relax \global\let\contents = \relax \fi % \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage \contents \global\let\contents = \relax \global\let\shortcontents = \relax \fi } \def\finishtitlepage{% \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize \vskip\titlepagebottomglue \finishedtitlepagetrue } %%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} \parseargdef\title{% \checkenv\titlepage \leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1} % print a rule at the page bottom also. \finishedtitlepagefalse \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt } \parseargdef\subtitle{% \checkenv\titlepage {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% } % @author should come last, but may come many times. % It can also be used inside @quotation. % \parseargdef\author{% \def\temp{\quotation}% \ifx\thisenv\temp \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. \else \checkenv\titlepage \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}% \fi } %%% Set up page headings and footings. \let\thispage=\folio \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages % Now make TeX use those variables \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} \let\HEADINGShook=\relax % Commands to set those variables. % For example, this is what @headings on does % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle % @evenfooting @thisfile|| % @oddfooting ||@thisfile \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% % % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt \global\advance\vsize by -12pt } \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} % @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page % @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page % % The same set of arguments for: % % @oddheadingmarks % @evenfootingmarks % @oddfootingmarks % @everyheadingmarks % @everyfootingmarks \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} \def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } \def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp } \everyheadingmarks bottom \everyfootingmarks bottom % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. % @headings off turns them off. % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. % By default, they are off at the start of a document, % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} \def\HEADINGSoff{% \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} \HEADINGSoff % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top % edge of all pages. \def\HEADINGSdouble{% \global\pageno=1 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage } \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, % page number on top right. \def\HEADINGSsingle{% \global\pageno=1 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager } \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage } \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager } % Subroutines used in generating headings % This produces Day Month Year style of output. % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). \ifx\today\undefined \def\today{% \number\day\space \ifcase\month \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec \fi \space\number\year} \fi % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. % It generates no output of its own. \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} \message{tables,} % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). % default indentation of table text \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in % margin between end of table item and start of table text. \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin \newdimen\itemmax % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with % these defs. % They also define \itemindex % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % \advance\hsize by -\rightskip \advance\hsize by -\tableindent \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% \itemindex{#1}% \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. % % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax % % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, % but leave it ragged-right. \begingroup \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent \advance\hsize by\tableindent \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil \leavevmode\unhbox0\par \endgroup % % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. \nobreak \vskip-\parskip % % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. % \penalty 10001 \endgroup \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse \else % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. \noindent % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and % eventually be printed. \nobreak\kern-\tableindent \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \unhbox0 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 \endgroup \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue \fi } \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} % @table, @ftable, @vtable. \envdef\table{% \let\itemindex\gobble \tablecheck{table}% } \envdef\ftable{% \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% \tablecheck{ftable}% } \envdef\vtable{% \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% \tablecheck{vtable}% } \def\tablecheck#1{% \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active \endgroup \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% \else \let\next\tablex \fi \next } \def\tablex#1{% \def\itemindicate{#1}% \parsearg\tabley } \def\tabley#1{% {% \makevalueexpandable \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% \expandafter }\temp \endtablez } \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% \aboveenvbreak \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi \itemmax=\tableindent \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin \advance \leftskip by \tableindent \exdentamount=\tableindent \parindent = 0pt \parskip = \smallskipamount \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi \let\item = \internalBitem \let\itemx = \internalBitemx } \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} \let\Eftable\Etable \let\Evtable\Etable \let\Eitemize\Etable \let\Eenumerate\Etable % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize \newcount \itemno \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} \def\doitemize#1{% \aboveenvbreak \itemmax=\itemindent \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin \advance\leftskip by \itemindent \exdentamount=\itemindent \parindent=0pt \parskip=\smallskipamount \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi % % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. \def\itemcontents{#1}% \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% % % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi % \let\item=\itemizeitem } % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. % \def\itemizeitem{% \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break {% % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least % that's the theory. \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi \noindent \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% % \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. \flushcr } % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. % \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No % argument is the same as `1'. % \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. \def\thearg{#1}% \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi % % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark \ifx\rest\empty % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and % not equal to itself. % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. % % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from % continuing to look for a . % \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) \else % It's a letter. \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter \else \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter \fi \fi \else % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. \numericenumerate \fi } % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is % given in \thearg. % \def\numericenumerate{% \itemno = \thearg \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% } % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. \def\lowercaseenumerate{% \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg \startenumeration{% % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. \ifnum\itemno=0 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger alphabet}% \fi \char\lccode\itemno }% } % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. \def\uppercaseenumerate{% \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg \startenumeration{% % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. \ifnum\itemno=0 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger alphabet} \fi \char\uccode\itemno }% } % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. % \def\startenumeration#1{% \advance\itemno by -1 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr } % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg % to @enumerate. % \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} % @multitable macros % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 % % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. % To make preamble: % % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 % @item ... % % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many % columns as desired. % Or use a template: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} % @item ... % using the widest term desired in each column. % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt % if they are. % Sample multitable: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col % @item % first col stuff % @tab % second col stuff % @tab % third col % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. % % They will wrap at the width determined by the template. % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. % @end multitable % Default dimensions may be reset by user. % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline % to baseline. % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. % \newskip\multitableparskip \newskip\multitableparindent \newdimen\multitablecolspace \newskip\multitablelinespace \multitableparskip=0pt \multitableparindent=6pt \multitablecolspace=12pt \multitablelinespace=0pt % Macros used to set up halign preamble: % \let\endsetuptable\relax \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} \let\columnfractions\relax \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} \newif\ifsetpercent % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. % \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% \global\advance\colcount by 1 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% \setuptable } \newcount\colcount \def\setuptable#1{% \def\firstarg{#1}% \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable \let\go = \relax \else \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions \global\setpercenttrue \else \ifsetpercent \let\go\pickupwholefraction \else \global\advance\colcount by 1 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% \fi \fi \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% \else \let\go = \setuptable \fi% \fi \go } % multitable-only commands. % % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group % of an alignment entry. \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to % undo it ourselves. \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable \def\headitem{% \checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs \the\everytab % for the first item }% % % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until % we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve. % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: % \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. % \envdef\multitable{% \vskip\parskip \startsavinginserts % % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. \def\item{\crcr}% % \tolerance=9500 \hbadness=9500 \setmultitablespacing \parskip=\multitableparskip \parindent=\multitableparindent \overfullrule=0pt \global\colcount=0 % \everycr = {% \noalign{% \global\everytab={}% \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. % Check for saved footnotes, etc. \checkinserts % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. %\filbreak % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. }% }% % \parsearg\domultitable } \def\domultitable#1{% % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable % % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will % be used as many times as user calls for columns. % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and % continue for many paragraphs if desired. \halign\bgroup &% \global\advance\colcount by 1 \multistrut \vtop{% % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname % % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after % the first one. % % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace % to the width of each template entry. % % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. % % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. \rightskip=0pt \ifnum\colcount=1 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. \advance\hsize by\leftskip \else \ifsetpercent \else % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace \fi % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: \leftskip=\multitablecolspace \fi % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. % For example: % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 % @item @code{#} % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively % marking characters. \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut }\cr } \def\Emultitable{% \crcr \egroup % end the \halign \global\setpercentfalse } \def\setmultitablespacing{% \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing % % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 \fi %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of %% table. If not, do nothing. %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller %% than skip between lines in the table. \fi% \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller %% than skip between lines in the table. \fi} \message{conditionals,} % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't % attempt to close an environment group. % \def\makecond#1{% \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 } \makecond{iftex} \makecond{ifnotdocbook} \makecond{ifnothtml} \makecond{ifnotinfo} \makecond{ifnotplaintext} \makecond{ifnotxml} % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. % \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} \def\html{\doignore{html}} \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} \def\xml{\doignore{xml}} % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. % % A count to remember the depth of nesting. \newcount\doignorecount \def\doignore#1{\begingroup % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: \obeylines \catcode`\@ = \other \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other % % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. \spaceisspace % % Count number of #1's that we've seen. \doignorecount = 0 % % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. \dodoignore{#1}% } { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. \obeylines % % \gdef\dodoignore#1{% % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. % % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% % % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% % % And now expand that command. \doignoretext ^^M% }% } \def\doignoreyyy#1{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. \let\next\doignoretextzzz \else % Found a nested condition, ... \advance\doignorecount by 1 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). \fi \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. } % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". % \def\doignoretextzzz#1{% \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. \let\next\enddoignore \else % Still inside a nested condition. \advance\doignorecount by -1 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. \fi \next } % Finish off ignored text. { \obeylines% % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional % would result in a blank line in the output. \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% } % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. % % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we % didn't need it. % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. % \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% {% \makevalueexpandable \def\temp{#2}% \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% \ifx\temp\empty \next{}% \else \setzzz#2\endsetzzz \fi }% } % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. % \parseargdef\clear{% {% \makevalueexpandable \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax }% } % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} { \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active % \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% \let\value = \expandablevalue % We don't want these characters active, ... \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. % So \let them to their normal equivalents. \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore } } % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). % \def\expandablevalue#1{% \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax {[No value for ``#1'']}% \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% \else \csname SET#1\endcsname \fi } % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined % with @set. % % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. % \makecond{ifset} \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} \def\doifset#1#2{% {% \makevalueexpandable \let\next=\empty \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax #1% If not set, redefine \next. \fi \expandafter }\next } \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. % % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. % \makecond{ifclear} \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. \let\dircategory=\comment % @defininfoenclose. \let\definfoenclose=\comment \message{indexing,} % Index generation facilities % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. % It automatically defines \fooindex such that % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long % for the sake of vms. % \def\newindex#1{% \iflinks \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file \fi \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index \noexpand\doindex{#1}} } % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} % \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. % \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} % \def\newcodeindex#1{% \iflinks \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 \fi \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% } % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. % % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo % inside @code. % \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), % #3 the target index (bar). \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up % closing the target index. \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 \fi % redefine \fooindfile: \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp % redefine \fooindex: \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% } % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, % and it is "foo", the name of the index. % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. % \def\indexdummies{% \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% % % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. \let\{ = \mylbrace \let\} = \myrbrace % % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is, % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that % is still getting written without apparent harm. % % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to % help-texinfo, 22may06): % @macro funindex {WORD} % @findex xyz % @end macro % ... % @funindex commtest % % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor. % % Sample whatsit resulting: % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}} % % So: \let\endinput = \empty % % Do the redefinitions. \commondummies } % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, % this will be simpler. % \def\atdummies{% \def\@{@@}% \def\ {@ }% \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd \let\} = \rbraceatcmd % % Do the redefinitions. \commondummies \otherbackslash } % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. % \def\commondummies{% % % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words, % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word % from whatever follows. % % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the % space. % % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). % \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter % \commondummiesnofonts % \definedummyletter\_% % % Non-English letters. \definedummyword\AA \definedummyword\AE \definedummyword\DH \definedummyword\L \definedummyword\O \definedummyword\OE \definedummyword\TH \definedummyword\aa \definedummyword\ae \definedummyword\dh \definedummyword\exclamdown \definedummyword\l \definedummyword\o \definedummyword\oe \definedummyword\ordf \definedummyword\ordm \definedummyword\questiondown \definedummyword\ss \definedummyword\th % % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. \definedummyword\bf \definedummyword\gtr \definedummyword\hat \definedummyword\less \definedummyword\sf \definedummyword\sl \definedummyword\tclose \definedummyword\tt % \definedummyword\LaTeX \definedummyword\TeX % % Assorted special characters. \definedummyword\bullet \definedummyword\comma \definedummyword\copyright \definedummyword\registeredsymbol \definedummyword\dots \definedummyword\enddots \definedummyword\equiv \definedummyword\error \definedummyword\euro \definedummyword\guillemetleft \definedummyword\guillemetright \definedummyword\guilsinglleft \definedummyword\guilsinglright \definedummyword\expansion \definedummyword\minus \definedummyword\ogonek \definedummyword\pounds \definedummyword\point \definedummyword\print \definedummyword\quotedblbase \definedummyword\quotedblleft \definedummyword\quotedblright \definedummyword\quoteleft \definedummyword\quoteright \definedummyword\quotesinglbase \definedummyword\result \definedummyword\textdegree % % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. \macrolist % \normalturnoffactive % % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any % (non-fully-expandable) commands. \makevalueexpandable } % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. % \def\commondummiesnofonts{% % Control letters and accents. \definedummyletter\!% \definedummyaccent\"% \definedummyaccent\'% \definedummyletter\*% \definedummyaccent\,% \definedummyletter\.% \definedummyletter\/% \definedummyletter\:% \definedummyaccent\=% \definedummyletter\?% \definedummyaccent\^% \definedummyaccent\`% \definedummyaccent\~% \definedummyword\u \definedummyword\v \definedummyword\H \definedummyword\dotaccent \definedummyword\ogonek \definedummyword\ringaccent \definedummyword\tieaccent \definedummyword\ubaraccent \definedummyword\udotaccent \definedummyword\dotless % % Texinfo font commands. \definedummyword\b \definedummyword\i \definedummyword\r \definedummyword\sc \definedummyword\t % % Commands that take arguments. \definedummyword\acronym \definedummyword\cite \definedummyword\code \definedummyword\command \definedummyword\dfn \definedummyword\email \definedummyword\emph \definedummyword\env \definedummyword\file \definedummyword\kbd \definedummyword\key \definedummyword\math \definedummyword\option \definedummyword\pxref \definedummyword\ref \definedummyword\samp \definedummyword\strong \definedummyword\tie \definedummyword\uref \definedummyword\url \definedummyword\var \definedummyword\verb \definedummyword\w \definedummyword\xref } % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string % would be for a given command (usually its argument). % \def\indexnofonts{% % Accent commands should become @asis. \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% % We can just ignore other control letters. \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent % \commondummiesnofonts % % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. %\let\tt=\asis % \def\ { }% \def\@{@}% % how to handle braces? \def\_{\normalunderscore}% % % Non-English letters. \def\AA{AA}% \def\AE{AE}% \def\DH{DZZ}% \def\L{L}% \def\OE{OE}% \def\O{O}% \def\TH{ZZZ}% \def\aa{aa}% \def\ae{ae}% \def\dh{dzz}% \def\exclamdown{!}% \def\l{l}% \def\oe{oe}% \def\ordf{a}% \def\ordm{o}% \def\o{o}% \def\questiondown{?}% \def\ss{ss}% \def\th{zzz}% % \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% \def\TeX{TeX}% % % Assorted special characters. % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) \def\bullet{bullet}% \def\comma{,}% \def\copyright{copyright}% \def\dots{...}% \def\enddots{...}% \def\equiv{==}% \def\error{error}% \def\euro{euro}% \def\expansion{==>}% \def\guillemetleft{<<}% \def\guillemetright{>>}% \def\guilsinglleft{<}% \def\guilsinglright{>}% \def\minus{-}% \def\point{.}% \def\pounds{pounds}% \def\print{-|}% \def\quotedblbase{"}% \def\quotedblleft{"}% \def\quotedblright{"}% \def\quoteleft{`}% \def\quoteright{'}% \def\quotesinglbase{,}% \def\registeredsymbol{R}% \def\result{=>}% \def\textdegree{o}% % % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry % that starts with \. % % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that % goes to end-of-line is not handled. % \macrolist } \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} % Workhorse for all \fooindexes. % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception % is with most defuns, which call us directly). % \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% \iflinks {% % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). \toks0 = {#2}% % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. \def\thirdarg{#3}% \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% \fi % \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% % \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite }% \fi } % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: % \def\dosubindwrite{% % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% \fi % % Remember, we are within a group. \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. % % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to % get the string to sort by. {\indexnofonts \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% }% % % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and % the original text, including any font commands. We write % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s % sorted result. \edef\temp{% \write\writeto{% \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% }% \temp } % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: % % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that % sequences like this: % @end defun % @tindex whatever % @defun ... % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of % the previous defun. % % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. % % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. % % But wait, there is a catch there: % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual % representation of the skip. % % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). % \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} % \newskip\whatsitskip \newcount\whatsitpenalty % % ..., ready, GO: % \def\safewhatsit#1{% \ifhmode #1% \else % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. \whatsitskip = \lastskip \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty % % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro \else \vskip-\whatsitskip \fi % #1% % \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: % % @deffn deffn-whatever % @vindex index-whatever % Description. % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit % and the "Description." paragraph. \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi \else % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip \fi \fi } % The index entry written in the file actually looks like % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} % or % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files % containing these kinds of lines: % \initial {c} % before the first topic whose initial is c % \entry {topic}{pagelist} % for a topic that is used without subtopics % \primary {topic} % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} % for each subtopic. % Define the user-accessible indexing commands % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. \def\findex {\fnindex} \def\kindex {\kyindex} \def\cindex {\cpindex} \def\vindex {\vrindex} \def\tindex {\tpindex} \def\pindex {\pgindex} \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} {\obeylines % \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). % \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% % \smallfonts \rm \tolerance = 9500 \plainfrenchspacing \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. % % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains % \initial {@} % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). \catcode`\@ = 11 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s \ifeof 1 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure % there is some text. \putwordIndexNonexistent \else % % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so % it can discover if there is anything in it. \read 1 to \temp \ifeof 1 \putwordIndexIsEmpty \else % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change % to make right now. \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% \catcode`\\ = 0 \escapechar = `\\ \begindoublecolumns \input \jobname.#1s \enddoublecolumns \fi \fi \closein 1 \endgroup} % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. % Change them to control the appearance of the index. \def\initial#1{{% % Some minor font changes for the special characters. \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt % % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. \removelastskip % % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. \nobreak \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip \penalty 0 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip % % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch % we need before each entry, but it's better. % % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip \leftline{\secbf #1}% % Do our best not to break after the initial. \nobreak \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip }} % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. % % A straightforward implementation would start like this: % \def\entry#1#2{... % But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. % % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. % --kasal, 21nov03 \def\entry{% \begingroup % % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't % affect previous text. \par % % Do not fill out the last line with white space. \parfillskip = 0in % % No extra space above this paragraph. \parskip = 0in % % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. \finalhyphendemerits = 0 % % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. % % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. \hangindent = 2em % % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line % with blank space. \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil % % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing % columns. \vskip 0pt plus1pt % % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): \afterassignment\doentry \let\temp = } \def\doentry{% \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. \noindent \aftergroup\finishentry % And now comes the text of the entry. } \def\finishentry#1{% % #1 is the page number. % % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be % cursed by a Unix daemon. \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}% \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt \ % \else % % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) \hfil\penalty50 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. % % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull % \hbox ensues. \ifpdf \pdfgettoks#1.% \ \the\toksA \else \ #1% \fi \fi \par \endgroup } % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm \def\secondary#1#2{{% \parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in \hangindent=1in \hangafter=1 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill \ifpdf \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. \else #2 \fi \par }} % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. \catcode`\@=11 \newbox\partialpage \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns % Grab any single-column material above us. \output = {% % % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. \ifvoid\partialpage \else \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% \fi % \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% % Unvbox the main output page. \unvbox\PAGE \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip }% }% \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage % % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. \output = {\doublecolumnout}% % % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. % % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) % as it did when we hard-coded it. % % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) % been clobbered. % \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize % % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) \vsize = 2\vsize } % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except % the last. % \def\doublecolumnout{% \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the % previous page. \dimen@ = \vsize \divide\dimen@ by 2 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage % % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \onepageout\pagesofar \unvbox255 \penalty\outputpenalty } % % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. \def\pagesofar{% \unvbox\partialpage % \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% } % % All done with double columns. \def\enddoublecolumns{% % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the % following situation: % % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. % % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). \penalty0 % \output = {% % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the % current page, no automatic page break. \balancecolumns % % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, % though, there will be another page break right after this \output % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes % the output somewhat more palatable.) \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% }% \eject \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns % % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). \pagegoal = \vsize } % % Called at the end of the double column material. \def\balancecolumns{% \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. \dimen@ = \ht0 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% \splittopskip = \topskip % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. {% \vbadness = 10000 \loop \global\setbox3 = \copy0 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt \repeat }% %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% % \pagesofar } \catcode`\@ = \other \message{sectioning,} % Chapters, sections, etc. % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 \newcount\chapno \newcount\secno \secno=0 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ % % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual % letter in the expansion, not just typeset. % \def\appendixletter{% \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. \else\char\the\appendixno \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number % and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use % these. @section does likewise. \def\thischapter{} \def\thischapternum{} \def\thischaptername{} \def\thissection{} \def\thissectionnum{} \def\thissectionname{} \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name % we only have subsub. \chardef\maxseclevel = 3 % % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. % To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: \chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel % % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. \def\chapheadtype{N} % Choose a heading macro % #1 is heading type % #2 is heading level % #3 is text for heading \def\genhead#1#2#3{% % Compute the abs. sec. level: \absseclevel=#2 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 \absseclevel = 0 \else \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 \absseclevel = 3 \fi \fi % The heading type: \def\headtype{#1}% \if \headtype U% \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel \fi \else % Check for appendix sections: \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% \else \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% \fi\fi \fi % Check for numbered within unnumbered: \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel \def\headtype{U}% \else \chardef\unmlevel = 3 \fi \fi % Now print the heading: \if \headtype U% \ifcase\absseclevel \unnumberedzzz{#3}% \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% \fi \else \if \headtype A% \ifcase\absseclevel \appendixzzz{#3}% \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% \fi \else \ifcase\absseclevel \chapterzzz{#3}% \or \seczzz{#3}% \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% \fi \fi \fi \suppressfirstparagraphindent } % an interface: \def\numhead{\genhead N} \def\apphead{\genhead A} \def\unnmhead{\genhead U} % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. % % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty % \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz \def\chapterzzz#1{% % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such % as an @include file. \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\chapno by 1 % % Used for \float. \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% \resetallfloatnos % % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% % % Write the actual heading. \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% % % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. \global\let\section = \numberedsec \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec } \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz % \def\appendixzzz#1{% \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% \resetallfloatnos % % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% % \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% % \global\let\section = \appendixsec \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec } \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz \def\unnumberedzzz#1{% \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 % % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty \resetallfloatnos % % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant % to be executed, not expanded). % % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use % \the to achieve this: TeX expands \the only once, % simply yielding the contents of . (We also do this for % the toc entries.) \toks0 = {#1}% \message{(\the\toks0)}% % \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% % \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec } % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters \unnmhead0{#1}% \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax } % @top is like @unnumbered. \let\top\unnumbered % Sections. \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz \def\seczzz#1{% \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% } \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% } \let\appendixsec\appendixsection \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% } % Subsections. \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% } \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% } \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% } % Subsubsections. \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% } \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% } \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% } % These macros control what the section commands do, according % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. \let\section = \numberedsec \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit % overlong headings to fold. % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. \def\majorheading{% {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% \parsearg\chapheadingzzz } \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} \def\chapheadingzzz#1{% {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright \rmisbold #1\hfill}}% \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax \suppressfirstparagraphindent } % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} \suppressfirstparagraphindent} \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} \suppressfirstparagraphindent} \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} \suppressfirstparagraphindent} % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) \newskip\chapheadingskip \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. \def\chapoddpage{% \chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \begingroup \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% \hbox to 0pt{}% \chappager \endgroup \fi } \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} \def\CHAPPAGoff{% \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} \def\CHAPPAGon{% \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} \def\CHAPPAGodd{% \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} \CHAPPAGon % Chapter opening. % % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. % % To test against our argument. \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} % \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% \gdef\thissection{}}% % \def\temptype{#2}% \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% \gdef\thischapter{}}% \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword \toks0={#1}% \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible % commands in some of the translations. \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} \noexpand\thischapternum: \noexpand\thischaptername}% }% \else \toks0={#1}% \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible % commands in some of the translations. \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} \noexpand\thischapternum: \noexpand\thischaptername}% }% \fi\fi\fi % % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of % the preceding space. \safewhatsit\domark % % Insert the chapter heading break. \pchapsepmacro % % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points % between here and the heading. \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs \domark % {% \chapfonts \rmisbold % % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. \gdef\lastsection{#1}% % % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword \setbox0 = \hbox{}% \def\toctype{unnchap}% \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry \def\toctype{omit}% \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% \def\toctype{app}% \else \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% \def\toctype{numchap}% \fi\fi\fi % % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% % % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not % being visible, for instance under high magnification. \donoderef{#2}% % % Typeset the actual heading. \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe \unhbox0 #1\par}% }% \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title \nobreak } % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax \def\centerparameters{% \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip \leftskip = \rightskip \parfillskip = 0pt } % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. % \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} % \def\unnchfopen #1{% \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright \rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak } \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% \par\penalty 5000 % } \def\centerchfopen #1{% \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak } \def\CHAPFopen{% \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. % \newskip\secheadingskip \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} % Subsection titles. \newskip\subsecheadingskip \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} % Subsubsection titles. \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} % Print any size, any type, section title. % % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the % section number. % \def\seckeyword{sec} % \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% {% % Switch to the right set of fonts. \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold % \def\sectionlevel{#2}% \def\temptype{#3}% % % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% \fi \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword % Don't redefine \thissection. \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword \toks0={#1}% \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible % commands in some of the translations. \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum: \noexpand\thissectionname}% }% \fi \else \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword \toks0={#1}% \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible % commands in some of the translations. \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum: \noexpand\thissectionname}% }% \fi \fi\fi\fi % % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. \par % % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of % the preceding space. \safewhatsit\domark % % Insert space above the heading. \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname % % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points % between here and the heading. \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs \domark % % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword \setbox0 = \hbox{}% \def\toctype{unn}% \gdef\lastsection{#1}% \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, % and don't redefine \lastsection. \setbox0 = \hbox{}% \def\toctype{omit}% \let\sectionlevel=\empty \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% \def\toctype{app}% \gdef\lastsection{#1}% \else \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% \def\toctype{num}% \gdef\lastsection{#1}% \fi\fi\fi % % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% % % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. \donoderef{#3}% % % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. \nobreak % % Output the actual section heading. \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number \unhbox0 #1}% }% % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. % Don't allow stretch, though. \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname % % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it % was followed by glue. \nobreak % % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a % discardable item.) \vskip-\parskip % % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: % % @section sec-whatever % @deffn def-whatever \penalty 10001 } \message{toc,} % Table of contents. \newwrite\tocfile % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. % Called from @chapter, etc. % % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the % destination to jump to. % % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the % table of contents chapter openings themselves. % \newif\iftocfileopened \def\omitkeyword{omit}% % \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% \edef\writetoctype{#1}% \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else \iftocfileopened\else \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc \global\tocfileopenedtrue \fi % \iflinks {\atdummies \edef\temp{% \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \temp }% \fi \fi % % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named % `1', and two named `2'. \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi } % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. % \def\activecatcodes{% \catcode`\"=\active \catcode`\$=\active \catcode`\<=\active \catcode`\>=\active \catcode`\\=\active \catcode`\^=\active \catcode`\_=\active \catcode`\|=\active \catcode`\~=\active } % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. \def\readtocfile{% \setupdatafile \activecatcodes \input \tocreadfilename } \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in \newcount\savepageno \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. % \def\startcontents#1{% % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. % From: Torbjorn Granlund \contentsalignmacro \immediate\closeout\tocfile % % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. % It is abundantly clear what they are. \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% % \savepageno = \pageno \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. % % Roman numerals for page numbers. \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi } % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. % \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} % Normal (long) toc. % \def\contents{% \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space \ifeof 1 \else \readtocfile \fi \vfill \eject \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect \ifeof 1 \else \pdfmakeoutlines \fi \closein 1 \endgroup \lastnegativepageno = \pageno \global\pageno = \savepageno } % And just the chapters. \def\summarycontents{% \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% % \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry \let\appentry = \shortchapentry \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. \secfonts \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt \rm \hyphenpenalty = 10000 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space \ifeof 1 \else \readtocfile \fi \closein 1 \vfill \eject \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect \endgroup \lastnegativepageno = \pageno \global\pageno = \savepageno } \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. % \def\shortchaplabel#1{% % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. % But use \hss just in case. % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) % % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters % there are before deciding ... \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% } % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. % The first argument is the chapter or section name. % The last argument is the page number. % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... % Chapters, in the main contents. \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} % % Chapters, in the short toc. % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% } % Appendices, in the main contents. % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. % \def\appendixbox#1{% % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} % \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} % Unnumbered chapters. \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} % Sections. \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} % Subsections. \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} % And subsubsections. \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. % Same as \defaultparindent. \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the % page number. % % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. \def\dochapentry#1#2{% \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip \begingroup \chapentryfonts \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% \endgroup \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip } \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% \endgroup} \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% \endgroup} \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% \endgroup} % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. \let\tocentry = \entry % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} \message{environments,} % @foo ... @end foo. % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. \envdef\tex{% \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie \catcode `\%=14 \catcode `\+=\other \catcode `\"=\other \catcode `\|=\other \catcode `\<=\other \catcode `\>=\other \catcode`\`=\other \catcode`\'=\other \escapechar=`\\ % \let\b=\ptexb \let\bullet=\ptexbullet \let\c=\ptexc \let\,=\ptexcomma \let\.=\ptexdot \let\dots=\ptexdots \let\equiv=\ptexequiv \let\!=\ptexexclam \let\i=\ptexi \let\indent=\ptexindent \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent \let\{=\ptexlbrace \let\+=\tabalign \let\}=\ptexrbrace \let\/=\ptexslash \let\*=\ptexstar \let\t=\ptext \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing % \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% \def\@{@}% } % There is no need to define \Etex. % Define @lisp ... @end lisp. % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't % have any width. \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} % This space is always present above and below environments. \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. % \def\aboveenvbreak{{% % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and % \sectionheading, q.v. \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \advance\envskipamount by \parskip \endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount \removelastskip % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak % or better ... \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi \vskip\envskipamount \fi \fi }} \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. \let\nonarrowing=\relax % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around % environment contents. \font\circle=lcircle10 \newdimen\circthick \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle % \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr \hskip\rskip}} \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr \hskip\rskip}} % \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip \envdef\cartouche{% \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. \startsavinginserts \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip \advance\cartinner by-\rskip \cartouter=\hsize \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either % side, and for 6pt waste from % each corner char, and rule thickness \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. \let\nonarrowing = t% \vbox\bgroup \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt \carttop \hbox\bgroup \hskip\lskip \vrule\kern3pt \vbox\bgroup \kern3pt \hsize=\cartinner \baselineskip=\normbskip \lineskip=\normlskip \parskip=\normpskip \vskip -\parskip \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. } \def\Ecartouche{% \ifhmode\par\fi \kern3pt \egroup \kern3pt\vrule \hskip\rskip \egroup \cartbot \egroup \checkinserts } % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, % inside a group. \newdimen\nonfillparindent \def\nonfillstart{% \aboveenvbreak \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output \parskip = 0pt % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate % the normal \indent. \nonfillparindent=\parindent \parindent = 0pt \let\indent\nonfillindent % \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes \ifx\nonarrowing\relax \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing \else \let\nonarrowing = \relax \fi \let\exdent=\nofillexdent } \begingroup \obeyspaces % We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake % @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally % active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after % @indent. \gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% \gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% \ifx\temp % \expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% \else% \leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% \fi% }% \endgroup \def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} \def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. % This affects the following displayed environments: % @example, @display, @format, @lisp % \def\smallword{small} \def\nosmallword{nosmall} \let\SETdispenvsize\relax \def\setnormaldispenv{% \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient % to change the fonts afterward. \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi \smallexamplefonts \rm \fi } \def\setsmalldispenv{% \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword \else \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi \smallexamplefonts \rm \fi } % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. % Let's do it by one command: \def\makedispenv #1#2{ \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak } % Define two synonyms: \def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ \makedispenv{#1}{#3} \makedispenv{#2}{#3} } % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. % % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. % \maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% \nonfillstart \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. \gobble % eat return } % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. % \makedispenv {display}{% \nonfillstart \gobble } % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. % \makedispenv{format}{% \let\nonarrowing = t% \nonfillstart \gobble } % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. \envdef\flushleft{% \let\nonarrowing = t% \nonfillstart \gobble } \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak % @flushright. % \envdef\flushright{% \let\nonarrowing = t% \nonfillstart \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill \gobble } \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right % justification. From plain.tex. \envdef\raggedright{% \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax } \let\Eraggedright\par \envdef\raggedleft{% \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off % badness reporting. } \let\Eraggedleft\par \envdef\raggedcenter{% \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off % badness reporting. } \let\Eraggedcenter\par % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. % \def\quotationstart{% {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip \parindent=0pt % % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. \ifx\nonarrowing\relax \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing \else \let\nonarrowing = \relax \fi \parsearg\quotationlabel } \envdef\quotation{% \setnormaldispenv \quotationstart } \envdef\smallquotation{% \setsmalldispenv \quotationstart } \let\Esmallquotation = \Equotation % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're % doing normal filling. % \def\Equotation{% \par \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else % indent a bit. \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% \fi {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% } % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. \def\quotationlabel#1{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\empty \else {\bf #1: }% \fi } % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{...} % If we want to allow any as delimiter, % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org % % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. % % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a % verbatim line. \def\dospecials{% \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. %\do\`\do\'% } % % [Knuth] p. 380 \def\uncatcodespecials{% \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} % % Setup for the @verb command. % % Eight spaces for a tab \begingroup \catcode`\^^I=\active \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} \endgroup % \def\setupverb{% \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% \tabeightspaces % Respect line breaks, % print special symbols as themselves, and % make each space count % must do in this order: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces } % Setup for the @verbatim environment % % Real tab expansion \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount % \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} % \begingroup \catcode`\^^I=\active \gdef\tabexpand{% \catcode`\^^I=\active \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab \divide\dimen0 by\tabw \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox }% } \endgroup % start the verbatim environment. \def\setupverbatim{% \let\nonarrowing = t% \nonfillstart % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim \tt \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% \tabexpand \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% % Respect line breaks, % print special symbols as themselves, and % make each space count % must do in this order: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces \everypar{\starttabbox}% } % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: % % \def\doverb'{'#1'}'{#1} % % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} \begingroup \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] \endgroup % \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} % % % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: % % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} % % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. % % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] % \begingroup \catcode`\ =\active \obeylines % % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank % line in the output. \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. \endgroup % \envdef\verbatim{% \setupverbatim\doverbatim } \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. % \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} % \def\doverbatiminclude#1{% {% \makevalueexpandable \setupverbatim \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. \input #1 \afterenvbreak }% } % @copying ... @end copying. % Save the text away for @insertcopying later. % % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as % possible is very desirable. % \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} % \def\insertcopying{% \begingroup \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page \scanexp\copyingtext \endgroup } \message{defuns,} % @defun etc. \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt \newcount\defunpenalty % Start the processing of @deffn: \def\startdefun{% \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \medbreak \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the % following @def command, see below. \else % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, % which is there to keep the function description together with its % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow % a break between a section heading and a defun. % % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following % @def command. \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi % % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. % But do insert the glue. \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint \fi % \parindent=0in \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent } \def\dodefunx#1{% % First, check whether we are in the right environment: \checkenv#1% % % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. % It's not a great place, though. \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi % % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% } \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} % \def\printdefunline#1#2{% \begingroup % call \deffnheader: #1#2 \endheader % common ending: \interlinepenalty = 10000 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil \endgraf \nobreak\vskip -\parskip \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. \checkparencounts \endgroup } \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; % the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. % \def\makedefun#1{% \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% \temp } % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader % % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. % \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% \envdef#1{% \startdefun \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% }% \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% \def#3% } %%% Untyped functions: % @deffn category name args \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} % @deffn category class name args \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} % \defopon {category on}class name args \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args % \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% } %%% Typed functions: % @deftypefn category type name args \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} % @deftypeop category class type name args \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args % \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% } %%% Typed variables: % @deftypevr category type var args \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} % @deftypecv category class type var args \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args % \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% } %%% Untyped variables: % @defvr category var args \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } % @defcv category class var args \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} % \defcvof {category of}class var args \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } %%% Type: % @deftp category name args \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% } % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). % #1 is the category, such as "Function". % #2 is the return type, if any. % #3 is the function name. % % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. % \def\defname#1#2#3{% % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent % % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line % just below it. \def\temp{#1}% \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} % % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip % The continuations: \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 % % Put the type name to the right margin. \noindent \hbox to 0pt{% \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize % \hsize has to be shortened this way: \kern\leftskip % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. }% % % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent {% % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no % one has made identifiers using them :). \df \tt \def\temp{#2}% return value type \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi #3% output function name }% {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm % \boldbrax % arguments will be output next, if any. } % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. % \def\defunargs#1{% % use sl by default (not ttsl), % tt for the names. \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 % % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% #1% \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 } % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. % \def\activeparens{% \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active \catcode`\&=\active } % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. { \activeparens \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack \global\let& = \& \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} } \newcount\parencount % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards \newif\ifampseen \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} \def\parenfont{% \ifampseen % At the first level, print parens in roman, % otherwise use the default font. \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi \else % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . \sf \fi } \def\infirstlevel#1{% \ifampseen \ifnum\parencount=1 #1% \fi \fi } \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} \def\opnr{% \global\advance\parencount by 1 {\parenfont(}% \infirstlevel \bfafterword } \def\clnr{% {\parenfont)}% \infirstlevel \sl \global\advance\parencount by -1 } \newcount\brackcount \def\lbrb{% \global\advance\brackcount by 1 {\bf[}% } \def\rbrb{% {\bf]}% \global\advance\brackcount by -1 } \def\checkparencounts{% \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi } % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). \def\badparencount{% \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% \global\parencount=0 } \def\badbrackcount{% \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% \global\brackcount=0 } \message{macros,} % @macro. % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined \newwrite\macscribble \def\scantokens#1{% \toks0={#1}% \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% \immediate\closeout\macscribble \input \jobname.tmp } \fi \def\scanmacro#1{% \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ % ... and \example \spaceisspace % % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX % --kasal, 29nov03 \scantokens{#1\endinput}% \endgroup } \def\scanexp#1{% \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% \temp } \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters \newtoks\macname % Macro name \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? % List of all defined macros in the form % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split % if there is a need. \def\macrolist{} % Add the macro to \macrolist \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% } % Utility routines. % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname % (except of course we have to play expansion games). % \def\cslet#1#2{% \expandafter\let \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname \csname#2\endcsname } % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). {\catcode`\@=11 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} \def\unbrace#1{#1} \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} } % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% } % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate % them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to % confine the change to the current group. % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. \def\scanctxt{% \catcode`\"=\other \catcode`\+=\other \catcode`\<=\other \catcode`\>=\other \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\^=\other \catcode`\_=\other \catcode`\|=\other \catcode`\~=\other \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi } \def\scanargctxt{% \scanctxt \catcode`\\=\other \catcode`\^^M=\other } \def\macrobodyctxt{% \scanctxt \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other \catcode`\^^M=\other \usembodybackslash } \def\macroargctxt{% \scanctxt \catcode`\\=\other } % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N % where N is the macro parameter number. % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} } \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} \def\macroxxx#1{% \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments \paramno=0% \else \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% \fi \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% \else \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% \fi \begingroup \macrobodyctxt \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody \else \expandafter\parsemacbody \fi} \parseargdef\unmacro{% \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: \begingroup \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% \endgroup \else \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% \fi } % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. % \def\unmacrodo#1{% \ifx #1\relax % remove this \else \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% \fi } % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a % is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine % it to # just before using the token list produced. % % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before % the macro is used. \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% \if#1;\let\next=\relax \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx \advance\paramno by 1% \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% \fi\next} % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. % Much magic with \expandafter here. % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. \def\defmacro{% \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars \ifrecursive \ifcase\paramno % 0 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% \or % 1 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt \noexpand\braceorline \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% \else % many \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% \expandafter\expandafter \expandafter\xdef \expandafter\expandafter \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% \fi \else \ifcase\paramno % 0 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% \or % 1 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt \noexpand\braceorline \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% \egroup \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% \else % many \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% \expandafter\expandafter \expandafter\xdef \expandafter\expandafter \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname \paramlist{% \egroup \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% \fi \fi} \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} \def\braceorlinexxx{% \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else \expandafter\parsearg \fi \macnamexxx} % @alias. % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal % sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% {% \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty \addtomacrolist{#1}% \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% }% \next } \message{cross references,} \newwrite\auxfile \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. % @inforef is relatively simple. \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: % @node foo , bar , ... % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. % \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} % % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} \let\nwnode=\node \let\lastnode=\empty % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). % \def\donoderef#1{% \ifx\lastnode\empty\else \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% \global\let\lastnode=\empty \fi } % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. % \newcount\savesfregister % \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an % anchor), which consists of three parts: % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, % or the anchor name. % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or % empty for anchors. % 3) NAME-pg - the page number. % % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. % \def\setref#1#2{% \pdfmkdest{#1}% \iflinks {% \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef }% \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout }% \fi } % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed % manual. All but the node name can be omitted. % \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup \unsepspaces \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt % No printed node name was explicitly given. \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax % Use the node name inside the square brackets. \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% \else % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% \else \ifhavexrefs % We know the real title if we have the xref values. \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% \else % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% \fi% \fi \fi \fi % % Make link in pdf output. \ifpdf {\indexnofonts \turnoffactive % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. \getfilename{#4}% % % See comments at \activebackslashdouble. {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}% % \leavevmode \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% \ifnum\filenamelength>0 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% \else goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% \fi }% \setcolor{\linkcolor}% \fi % % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. {% % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to % include an _ in the xref name, etc. \indexnofonts \turnoffactive \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle \csname XR#1-title\endcsname }% \iffloat\Xthisreftitle % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt \refx{#1-snt}{}% \else \printedrefname \fi % % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append % "in MANUALNAME". \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% \fi \else % node/anchor (non-float) references. % % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% \else % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. {\turnoffactive % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi }% % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname % % But we always want a comma and a space: ,\space % % output the `page 3'. \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% \fi \fi \endlink \endgroup} % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly % one that Bob is working on :). % \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} % Things referred to by \setref. % \def\Ynothing{} \def\Yomitfromtoc{} \def\Ynumbered{% \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno \else \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno \fi\fi\fi } \def\Yappendix{% \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno \else \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno \fi\fi\fi } % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. % \def\refx#1#2{% {% \indexnofonts \otherbackslash \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX \csname XR#1\endcsname }% \ifx\thisrefX\relax % If not defined, say something at least. \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright \iflinks \ifhavexrefs \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% \else \ifwarnedxrefs\else \global\warnedxrefstrue \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% \fi \fi \fi \else % It's defined, so just use it. \thisrefX \fi #2% Output the suffix in any case. } % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. % \def\xrdef#1#2{% {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these % mess up the control sequence name. \indexnofonts \turnoffactive \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% }% % \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref % % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname % % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do \else % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% \fi % % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, % for later use in \listoffloats. \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 {\safexrefname}}% \fi } % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. % \def\tryauxfile{% \openin 1 \jobname.aux \ifeof 1 \else \readdatafile{aux}% \global\havexrefstrue \fi \closein 1 } \def\setupdatafile{% \catcode`\^^@=\other \catcode`\^^A=\other \catcode`\^^B=\other \catcode`\^^C=\other \catcode`\^^D=\other \catcode`\^^E=\other \catcode`\^^F=\other \catcode`\^^G=\other \catcode`\^^H=\other \catcode`\^^K=\other \catcode`\^^L=\other \catcode`\^^N=\other \catcode`\^^P=\other \catcode`\^^Q=\other \catcode`\^^R=\other \catcode`\^^S=\other \catcode`\^^T=\other \catcode`\^^U=\other \catcode`\^^V=\other \catcode`\^^W=\other \catcode`\^^X=\other \catcode`\^^Z=\other \catcode`\^^[=\other \catcode`\^^\=\other \catcode`\^^]=\other \catcode`\^^^=\other \catcode`\^^_=\other % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. % % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. % \catcode`\^=\other % % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... \catcode`\~=\other \catcode`\[=\other \catcode`\]=\other \catcode`\"=\other \catcode`\_=\other \catcode`\|=\other \catcode`\<=\other \catcode`\>=\other \catcode`\$=\other \catcode`\#=\other \catcode`\&=\other \catcode`\%=\other \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off % % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for % now. --karl, 15jan04. \catcode`\\=\other % % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. {% \count1=128 \def\loop{% \catcode\count1=\other \advance\count1 by 1 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi }% }% % % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=0 } \def\readdatafile#1{% \begingroup \setupdatafile \input\jobname.#1 \endgroup} \message{insertions,} % including footnotes. \newcount \footnoteno % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. \let\footnotestyle=\comment {\catcode `\@=11 % % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. \gdef\footnote{% \let\indent=\ptexindent \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% % % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. \let\@sf\empty \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi % % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. \unskip \thisfootno\@sf \dofootnote }% % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. % % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. % \gdef\dofootnote{% \insert\footins\bgroup % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. % So reset some parameters. \hsize=\pagewidth \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip \spaceskip\z@skip \xspaceskip\z@skip \parindent\defaultparindent % \smallfonts \rm % % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). \let\noindent = \relax % % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. \everypar = {\hang}% \textindent{\thisfootno}% % % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. \footstrut \futurelet\next\fo@t } }%end \catcode `\@=11 % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion % would be lost. % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled % out prematurely. % \def\startsavinginserts{% \ifx \insert\ptexinsert \let\insert\saveinsert \else \let\checkinserts\relax \fi } % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. % \def\saveinsert#1{% \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% \afterassignment\next % swallow the left brace \let\temp = } \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} \def\placesaveins#1{% \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname {\box#1}% } % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: { \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} } % initialization: \def\newsaveins #1{% \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% \next } \def\newsaveinsX #1{% \csname newbox\endcsname #1% \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts \checksaveins #1}% } % initialize: \let\checkinserts\empty \newsaveins\footins \newsaveins\margin % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. % % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get % undone and the next image would fail. \openin 1 = epsf.tex \ifeof 1 \else % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% \input epsf.tex \fi \closein 1 % % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. \newif\ifwarnednoepsf \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} % \def\image#1{% \ifx\epsfbox\undefined \ifwarnednoepsf \else \errhelp = \noepsfhelp \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% \global\warnednoepsftrue \fi \else \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish \fi } % % Arguments to @image: % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. % #5 is (ignored optional) extension. % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. \newif\ifimagevmode \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names % If the image is by itself, center it. \ifvmode \imagevmodetrue \nobreak\medskip % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space % above and below. \nobreak\vskip\parskip \nobreak \fi % % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing % environment such as @quotation is respected. On the other hand, if % it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation. \noindent % % Output the image. \ifpdf \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% \else % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi \epsfbox{#1.eps}% \fi % \ifimagevmode \medskip \fi % space after the standalone image \endgroup} % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. % \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. % % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to % be referable. % % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). % % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each % chapter-level command. \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty % \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% \let\thiscaption=\empty \let\thisshortcaption=\empty % % don't lose footnotes inside @float. % % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 % \startsavinginserts % % We can't be used inside a paragraph. \par % \vtop\bgroup \def\floattype{#1}% \def\floatlabel{#2}% \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. % \ifx\floattype\empty \let\safefloattype=\empty \else {% % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. \indexnofonts \turnoffactive \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% }% \fi % % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) % \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname \global\advance\floatno by 1 % {% % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float % labels (which have a completely different output format) from % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the % lists of floats. % \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% }% \fi % % start with \parskip glue, I guess. \vskip\parskip % % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. \restorefirstparagraphindent } % we have these possibilities: % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap % @float Foo & no caption: Foo % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap % @float & no caption: % \def\Efloat{% \let\floatident = \empty % % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi % % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% \fi % the number. \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% \fi % % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. \let\captionline = \floatident % \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else \ifx\floatident\empty \else \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between \fi % % caption text. \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% \fi % % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. \ifx\captionline\empty \else \vskip.5\parskip \captionline % % Space below caption. \vskip\parskip \fi % % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. {% \atdummies % % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. \scanexp{% \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty \thiscaption \else \thisshortcaption \fi }% }% \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% }% \fi \egroup % end of \vtop % % place the captured inserts % % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly % float. --kasal, 26may04 % \checkinserts } % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. % \def\appendtomacro#1#2{% \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% } % @caption, @shortcaption % \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. \def\getfloatno#1{% \ifx#1\relax % Haven't seen this figure type before. \csname newcount\endcsname #1% % % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% \fi \let\floatno#1% } % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we % first read the @float command. % \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can % distinguish floats from other xref types. \def\floatmagic{!!float!!} % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic % \lastsection value which we \setref above. % \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} % % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. % \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% \def\temp{#1}% \def\iffloattype{#2}% \ifx\temp\floatmagic } % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. % \parseargdef\listoffloats{% \def\floattype{#1}% floattype {% % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. \indexnofonts \turnoffactive \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% }% % % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax \ifhavexrefs % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% \fi \else \begingroup \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc \let\do=\listoffloatsdo \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \endgroup \fi } % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which % has the text we're supposed to typeset here. % % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since % they won't appear in the aux file). % \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link % in pdf output. \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% % % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% \writeentry }} \message{localization,} % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very % early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. % { \catcode`\_ = \active \globaldefs=1 \parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. \openin 1 txi-#1.tex \ifeof 1 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}% \else \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist \input txi-#1.tex \fi \closein 1 \endgroup % end raw TeX \endgroup} % % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, % try txi-de.tex. % \gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% \openin 1 txi-#1.tex \ifeof 1 \errhelp = \nolanghelp \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% \else \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist \input txi-#1.tex \fi \closein 1 } }% end of special _ catcode % \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current directory should work if nowhere else does.} % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. % % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. % % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all % available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in % Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the % accented characters problem.) % \catcode`@=11 \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax \message{no patterns for #1}% \else \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname \fi % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax } % Helpers for encodings. % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. % \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% \count255=128 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax \advance\count255 by 1 \repeat } \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% \count255=128 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 \catcode\count255=#1\relax \advance\count255 by 1 \repeat } % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters % according to the specified encoding. % \parseargdef\documentencoding{% % Encoding being declared for the document. \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% % % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able % to compare them with \ifx. \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% % \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii \asciichardefs % \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo \setnonasciicharscatcode\active \lattwochardefs % \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone \setnonasciicharscatcode\active \latonechardefs % \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine \setnonasciicharscatcode\active \latninechardefs % \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight \setnonasciicharscatcode\active \utfeightchardefs % \else \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}% % \fi % utfeight \fi % latnine \fi % latone \fi % lattwo \fi % ascii } % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available % the default font encoding (OT1). % \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}} % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} % First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be % correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of % macros containing the character definitions. \setnonasciicharscatcode\active % % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. \def\latonechardefs{% \gdef^^a0{~} \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown} \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}} \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}} \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}} \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}} \gdef^^a7{\S} \gdef^^a8{\"{}} \gdef^^a9{\copyright} \gdef^^aa{\ordf} \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft} \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$} \gdef^^ad{\-} \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol} \gdef^^af{\={}} % \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} \gdef^^b1{$\pm$} \gdef^^b2{$^2$} \gdef^^b3{$^3$} \gdef^^b4{\'{}} \gdef^^b5{$\mu$} \gdef^^b6{\P} % \gdef^^b7{$^.$} \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } \gdef^^b9{$^1$} \gdef^^ba{\ordm} % \gdef^^bb{\guilletright} \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$} \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$} \gdef^^be{$3\over4$} \gdef^^bf{\questiondown} % \gdef^^c0{\`A} \gdef^^c1{\'A} \gdef^^c2{\^A} \gdef^^c3{\~A} \gdef^^c4{\"A} \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A} \gdef^^c6{\AE} \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} \gdef^^c8{\`E} \gdef^^c9{\'E} \gdef^^ca{\^E} \gdef^^cb{\"E} \gdef^^cc{\`I} \gdef^^cd{\'I} \gdef^^ce{\^I} \gdef^^cf{\"I} % \gdef^^d0{\DH} \gdef^^d1{\~N} \gdef^^d2{\`O} \gdef^^d3{\'O} \gdef^^d4{\^O} \gdef^^d5{\~O} \gdef^^d6{\"O} \gdef^^d7{$\times$} \gdef^^d8{\O} \gdef^^d9{\`U} \gdef^^da{\'U} \gdef^^db{\^U} \gdef^^dc{\"U} \gdef^^dd{\'Y} \gdef^^de{\TH} \gdef^^df{\ss} % \gdef^^e0{\`a} \gdef^^e1{\'a} \gdef^^e2{\^a} \gdef^^e3{\~a} \gdef^^e4{\"a} \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a} \gdef^^e6{\ae} \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} \gdef^^e8{\`e} \gdef^^e9{\'e} \gdef^^ea{\^e} \gdef^^eb{\"e} \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} % \gdef^^f0{\dh} \gdef^^f1{\~n} \gdef^^f2{\`o} \gdef^^f3{\'o} \gdef^^f4{\^o} \gdef^^f5{\~o} \gdef^^f6{\"o} \gdef^^f7{$\div$} \gdef^^f8{\o} \gdef^^f9{\`u} \gdef^^fa{\'u} \gdef^^fb{\^u} \gdef^^fc{\"u} \gdef^^fd{\'y} \gdef^^fe{\th} \gdef^^ff{\"y} } % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. \def\latninechardefs{% % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. \latonechardefs % \gdef^^a4{\euro} \gdef^^a6{\v S} \gdef^^a8{\v s} \gdef^^b4{\v Z} \gdef^^b8{\v z} \gdef^^bc{\OE} \gdef^^bd{\oe} \gdef^^be{\"Y} } % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. \def\lattwochardefs{% \gdef^^a0{~} \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}} \gdef^^a2{\u{}} \gdef^^a3{\L} \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} \gdef^^a5{\v L} \gdef^^a6{\'S} \gdef^^a7{\S} \gdef^^a8{\"{}} \gdef^^a9{\v S} \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S} \gdef^^ab{\v T} \gdef^^ac{\'Z} \gdef^^ad{\-} \gdef^^ae{\v Z} \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z} % \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}} \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }} \gdef^^b3{\l} \gdef^^b4{\'{}} \gdef^^b5{\v l} \gdef^^b6{\'s} \gdef^^b7{\v{}} \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } \gdef^^b9{\v s} \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s} \gdef^^bb{\v t} \gdef^^bc{\'z} \gdef^^bd{\H{}} \gdef^^be{\v z} \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z} % \gdef^^c0{\'R} \gdef^^c1{\'A} \gdef^^c2{\^A} \gdef^^c3{\u A} \gdef^^c4{\"A} \gdef^^c5{\'L} \gdef^^c6{\'C} \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} \gdef^^c8{\v C} \gdef^^c9{\'E} \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}} \gdef^^cb{\"E} \gdef^^cc{\v E} \gdef^^cd{\'I} \gdef^^ce{\^I} \gdef^^cf{\v D} % \gdef^^d0{\DH} \gdef^^d1{\'N} \gdef^^d2{\v N} \gdef^^d3{\'O} \gdef^^d4{\^O} \gdef^^d5{\H O} \gdef^^d6{\"O} \gdef^^d7{$\times$} \gdef^^d8{\v R} \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U} \gdef^^da{\'U} \gdef^^db{\H U} \gdef^^dc{\"U} \gdef^^dd{\'Y} \gdef^^de{\cedilla T} \gdef^^df{\ss} % \gdef^^e0{\'r} \gdef^^e1{\'a} \gdef^^e2{\^a} \gdef^^e3{\u a} \gdef^^e4{\"a} \gdef^^e5{\'l} \gdef^^e6{\'c} \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} \gdef^^e8{\v c} \gdef^^e9{\'e} \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}} \gdef^^eb{\"e} \gdef^^ec{\v e} \gdef^^ed{\'\i} \gdef^^ee{\^\i} \gdef^^ef{\v d} % \gdef^^f0{\dh} \gdef^^f1{\'n} \gdef^^f2{\v n} \gdef^^f3{\'o} \gdef^^f4{\^o} \gdef^^f5{\H o} \gdef^^f6{\"o} \gdef^^f7{$\div$} \gdef^^f8{\v r} \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u} \gdef^^fa{\'u} \gdef^^fb{\H u} \gdef^^fc{\"u} \gdef^^fd{\'y} \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t} \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}} } % UTF-8 character definitions. % % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. % \newcount\countUTFx \newcount\countUTFy \newcount\countUTFz \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} % \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} % \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% \ifx #1\relax \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% \else \expandafter #1% \fi } \begingroup \catcode`\~13 \catcode`\"12 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% \global\catcode\countUTFx\active \uccode`\~\countUTFx \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% \advance\countUTFx by 1 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop \fi} \countUTFx = "C2 \countUTFy = "E0 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}} \UTFviiiLoop \countUTFx = "E0 \countUTFy = "F0 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}} \UTFviiiLoop \countUTFx = "F0 \countUTFy = "F4 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}} \UTFviiiLoop \endgroup \begingroup \catcode`\"=12 \catcode`\<=12 \catcode`\.=12 \catcode`\,=12 \catcode`\;=12 \catcode`\!=12 \catcode`\~=13 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{% \countUTFz = "#1\relax \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}% \begingroup \parseXMLCharref \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{% \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}% \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{% \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}% \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{% \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}% \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}% \endgroup} \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax \errhelp = \EMsimple \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax \parseUTFviiiA,% \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,% \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax \parseUTFviiiA;% \parseUTFviiiA,% \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}% \else \parseUTFviiiA;% \parseUTFviiiA,% \parseUTFviiiA!% \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}% \fi\fi\fi } \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% \countUTFx = \countUTFz \divide\countUTFz by 64 \countUTFy = \countUTFz \multiply\countUTFz by 64 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz \advance\countUTFx by 128 \uccode `#1\countUTFx \countUTFz = \countUTFy} \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax \uccode `#3\countUTFz \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} \endgroup \def\utfeightchardefs{% \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point} \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv} }% end of \utfeightchardefs % US-ASCII character definitions. \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done \relax } % Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with % existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a % document encoding. % \setnonasciicharscatcode \other \message{formatting,} \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. \vbadness = 10000 % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. \hbadness = 2000 % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. \widowpenalty=10000 \clubpenalty=10000 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. % \def\setemergencystretch{% \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% \else \emergencystretch = .15\hsize \fi } % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. % % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. % \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% \voffset = #3\relax \topskip = #6\relax \splittopskip = \topskip % \vsize = #1\relax \advance\vsize by \topskip \outervsize = \vsize \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin \pageheight = \vsize % \hsize = #2\relax \outerhsize = \hsize \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in \pagewidth = \hsize % \normaloffset = #4\relax \bindingoffset = #5\relax % \ifpdf \pdfpageheight #7\relax \pdfpagewidth #8\relax % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. \pdfhorigin = 1 true in \pdfvorigin = 1 true in \fi % \setleading{\textleading} % \parindent = \defaultparindent \setemergencystretch } % @letterpaper (the default). \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt \textleading = 13.2pt % % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines {\voffset}{.25in}% {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% {11in}{8.5in}% }} % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt \textleading = 12pt % \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% {-.2in}{0in}% {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% {9.25in}{7in}% % \lispnarrowing = 0.3in \tolerance = 700 \hfuzz = 1pt \contentsrightmargin = 0pt \defbodyindent = .5cm }} % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt \textleading = 12pt % \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% {-.2in}{-.4in}% {0pt}{14pt}% {9in}{6in}% % \lispnarrowing = 0.25in \tolerance = 700 \hfuzz = 1pt \contentsrightmargin = 0pt \defbodyindent = .4cm }} % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt \textleading = 13.2pt % % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in % your texinfo source file like this: % @tex % \global\normaloffset = -6mm % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm % @end tex \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines {\voffset}{\hoffset}% {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% {297mm}{210mm}% % \tolerance = 700 \hfuzz = 1pt \contentsrightmargin = 0pt \defbodyindent = 5mm }} % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt \textleading = 12.5pt % \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% {\voffset}{\hoffset}% {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% {210mm}{148mm}% % \lispnarrowing = 0.2in \tolerance = 800 \hfuzz = 1.2pt \contentsrightmargin = 0pt \defbodyindent = 2mm \tableindent = 12mm }} % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 \afourpaper \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% {\voffset}{4.6mm}% {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% {297mm}{210mm}% % % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. \globaldefs = 0 }} % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 \afourpaper \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% {297mm}{210mm}% \globaldefs = 0 }} % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. % \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi \globaldefs = 1 % \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt \setleading{\textleading}% % \dimen0 = #1\relax \advance\dimen0 by \voffset % \dimen2 = \hsize \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset % \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% }} % Set default to letter. % \letterpaper \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. \catcode`\^^? = 14 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. \catcode`\"=\other \catcode`\~=\other \catcode`\^=\other \catcode`\_=\other \catcode`\|=\other \catcode`\<=\other \catcode`\>=\other \catcode`\+=\other \catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} \def\normaltilde{~} \def\normalcaret{^} \def\normalunderscore{_} \def\normalverticalbar{|} \def\normalless{<} \def\normalgreater{>} \def\normalplus{+} \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, % where something hairier probably needs to be done. % % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. % \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway % this is not a problem. \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} % Turn off all special characters except @ % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. \catcode`\"=\active \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} \let"=\activedoublequote \catcode`\~=\active \def~{{\tt\char126}} \chardef\hat=`\^ \catcode`\^=\active \def^{{\tt \hat}} \catcode`\_=\active \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} \let\realunder=_ % Subroutine for the previous macro. \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } \catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}} \chardef \less=`\< \catcode`\<=\active \def<{{\tt \less}} \chardef \gtr=`\> \catcode`\>=\active \def>{{\tt \gtr}} \catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} \catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after % parsing them. \def\turnoffactive{% \normalturnoffactive \otherbackslash } \catcode`\@=0 % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, % as in \char`\\. \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash % in fixed width font. \catcode`\\=\active @def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}} % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: % @let \ = @normalbackslash % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with % catcode other. @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of % the literal character `\'. % @def@normalturnoffactive{% @let\=@normalbackslash @let"=@normaldoublequote @let~=@normaltilde @let^=@normalcaret @let_=@normalunderscore @let|=@normalverticalbar @let<=@normalless @let>=@normalgreater @let+=@normalplus @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix @markupsetuplqdefault @markupsetuprqdefault @unsepspaces } % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. @otherifyactive % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing % a backslash. % @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} @global@let\ = @eatinput % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. % @gdef@fixbackslash{% @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active } % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. @escapechar = `@@ % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. @catcode`@& = @other @catcode`@# = @other @catcode`@% = @other @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. @catcode`@'=@active @catcode`@`=@active @markupsetuplqdefault @markupsetuprqdefault @c Local variables: @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" @c time-stamp-end: "}" @c End: @c vim:sw=2: @ignore arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 @end ignore mcron-1.0.6/mcron-core.scm0000644000175000017500000002361011404766201012330 00000000000000;; Copyright (C) 2003 Dale Mellor ;; ;; This file is part of GNU mcron. ;; ;; GNU mcron is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under ;; the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free ;; Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) ;; any later version. ;; ;; GNU mcron is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ;; ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or ;; FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for ;; more details. ;; ;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along ;; with GNU mcron. If not, see . (define-module (mcron core) #:use-module (mcron environment) #:export (add-job remove-user-jobs get-schedule run-job-loop ;; These three are deprecated and not documented. use-system-job-list use-user-job-list clear-system-jobs) #:re-export (clear-environment-mods append-environment-mods)) (use-modules (srfi srfi-1) ;; For remove. (srfi srfi-2)) ;; For and-let*. ;; The list of all jobs known to the system. Each element of the list is ;; ;; (vector user next-time-function action environment displayable next-time) ;; ;; where action must be a procedure, and the environment is an alist of ;; modifications that need making to the UNIX environment before the action is ;; run. The next-time element is the only one that is modified during the ;; running of a cron process (i.e. all the others are set once and for all at ;; configuration time). ;; ;; The reason we maintain two lists is that jobs in /etc/crontab may be placed ;; in one, and all other jobs go in the other. This makes it possible to remove ;; all the jobs in the first list in one go, and separately we can remove all ;; jobs from the second list which belong to a particular user. This behaviour ;; is required for full vixie compatibility. (define system-job-list '()) (define user-job-list '()) (define configuration-source 'user) (define (use-system-job-list) (set! configuration-source 'system)) (define (use-user-job-list) (set! configuration-source 'user)) ;; Convenience functions for getting and setting the elements of a job object. (define (job:user job) (vector-ref job 0)) (define (job:next-time-function job) (vector-ref job 1)) (define (job:action job) (vector-ref job 2)) (define (job:environment job) (vector-ref job 3)) (define (job:displayable job) (vector-ref job 4)) (define (job:next-time job) (vector-ref job 5)) ;; Remove jobs from the user-job-list belonging to this user. (define (remove-user-jobs user) (if (or (string? user) (integer? user)) (set! user (getpw user))) (set! user-job-list (remove (lambda (job) (eqv? (passwd:uid user) (passwd:uid (job:user job)))) user-job-list))) ;; Remove all the jobs on the system job list. (define (clear-system-jobs) (set! system-job-list '())) ;; Add a new job with the given specifications to the head of the appropriate ;; jobs list. (define (add-job time-proc action displayable configuration-time configuration-user) (let ((entry (vector configuration-user time-proc action (get-current-environment-mods-copy) displayable (time-proc configuration-time)))) (if (eq? configuration-source 'user) (set! user-job-list (cons entry user-job-list)) (set! system-job-list (cons entry system-job-list))))) ;; Procedure to locate the jobs in the global job-list with the lowest ;; (soonest) next-times. These are the jobs for which we must schedule the mcron ;; program (under any personality) to next wake up. The return value is a cons ;; cell consisting of the next time (maintained in the next-time variable) and a ;; list of the job entries that are to run at this time (maintained in the ;; next-jobs-list variable). ;; ;; The procedure works by first obtaining the time of the first job on the list, ;; and setting this job in the next-jobs-list. Then for each other entry on the ;; job-list, either the job runs earlier than any other that have been scanned, ;; in which case the next-time and next-jobs-list are re-initialized to ;; accomodate, or the job runs at the same time as the next job, in which case ;; the next-jobs-list is simply augmented with the new job, or else the job runs ;; later than others noted in which case we ignore it for now and continue to ;; recurse the list. (define (find-next-jobs) (let ((job-list (append system-job-list user-job-list))) (if (null? job-list) '(#f . '()) (let ((next-time 2000000000) (next-jobs-list '())) (for-each (lambda (job) (let ((this-time (job:next-time job))) (cond ((< this-time next-time) (set! next-time this-time) (set! next-jobs-list (list job))) ((eqv? this-time next-time) (set! next-jobs-list (cons job next-jobs-list)))))) job-list) (cons next-time next-jobs-list))))) ;; Create a string containing a textual list of the next count jobs to run. ;; ;; Enter a loop of displaying the next set of jobs to run, artificially ;; forwarding the time to the next time point (instead of waiting for it to ;; occur as we would do in a normal run of mcron), and recurse around the loop ;; count times. ;; ;; Note that this has the effect of mutating the job timings. Thus the program ;; must exit after calling this function; the internal data state will be left ;; unusable. (define (get-schedule count) (with-output-to-string (lambda () (do ((count count (- count 1))) ((eqv? count 0)) (and-let* ((next-jobs (find-next-jobs)) (time (car next-jobs)) (date-string (strftime "%c %z\n" (localtime time)))) (for-each (lambda (job) (display date-string) (display (job:displayable job)) (newline)(newline) (vector-set! job 5 ((job:next-time-function job) (job:next-time job)))) (cdr next-jobs))))))) ;; For proper housekeeping, it is necessary to keep a record of the number of ;; child processes we fork off to run the jobs. (define number-children 0) ;; For every job on the list, fork a process to run it (noting the fact by ;; increasing the number-children counter), and in the new process set up the ;; run-time environment exactly as it should be before running the job proper. ;; ;; In the parent, update the job entry by computing the next time the job needs ;; to run. (define (run-jobs jobs-list) (for-each (lambda (job) (if (eqv? (primitive-fork) 0) (begin (setgid (passwd:gid (job:user job))) (setuid (passwd:uid (job:user job))) (chdir (passwd:dir (job:user job))) (modify-environment (job:environment job) (job:user job)) ((job:action job)) (primitive-exit 0)) (begin (set! number-children (+ number-children 1)) (vector-set! job 5 ((job:next-time-function job) (current-time)))))) jobs-list)) ;; Give any zombie children a chance to die, and decrease the number known to ;; exist. (define (child-cleanup) (do () ((or (<= number-children 0) (eqv? (car (waitpid WAIT_ANY WNOHANG)) 0))) (set! number-children (- number-children 1)))) ;; Now the main loop. Loop over all job specifications, get a list of the next ;; ones to run (may be more than one). Set an alarm and go to sleep. When we ;; wake, run the jobs and reap any children (old jobs) that have ;; completed. Repeat ad infinitum. ;; ;; Note that, if we wake ahead of time, it can only mean that a signal has been ;; sent by a crontab job to tell us to re-read a crontab file. In this case we ;; break out of the loop here, and let the main procedure deal with the ;; situation (it will eventually re-call this function, thus maintaining the ;; loop). (define (run-job-loop . fd-list) (call-with-current-continuation (lambda (break) (let ((fd-list (if (null? fd-list) '() (car fd-list)))) (let loop () (let* ((next-jobs (find-next-jobs)) (next-time (car next-jobs)) (next-jobs-list (cdr next-jobs)) (sleep-time (if next-time (- next-time (current-time)) 2000000000))) (and (> sleep-time 0) (if (not (null? (catch 'system-error (lambda () (car (select fd-list '() '() sleep-time))) (lambda (key . args) ;; Exception add by Sergey ;; Poznyakoff. (if (member (car (last args)) (list EINTR EAGAIN)) (begin (child-cleanup) '()) (apply throw key args)))))) (break))) (run-jobs next-jobs-list) (child-cleanup) (loop))))))) mcron-1.0.6/ChangeLog0000644000175000017500000001052011407206151011322 000000000000002010-06-13 Dale Mellor * configure.ac: added --enable-no-vixie-clobber argument to configure so that the root user can avoid overwriting a legacy cron installation. * mcron.1: added simple, minimal man page using help2man (the texinfo file is still the primary documentation source). * makefile.am: replaced use of mkinstalldirs with install; the former is not supplied with the latest automake (1.11). 2008-02-21 Dale Mellor * ALL FILES: Replaced version 2 GPL notices with version 3 ones. * makefile.am: Do not remove COPYING file with make maintainer-clean; if you do it will eventually get replaced with the old version 2 GPL by a subsequent automake. * configure.ac: Bumped version to 1.0.4. 2008-01-25 Dale Mellor * main.scm (command-type): Files which are listed on the command line are assumed to be guile configurations if they do not end in .guile or .vixie (previously they were silently ignored). * main.scm: Argument to --schedule is no longer optional (the options system goes really screwy with optional values, usually pulling the first non-option argument as a value if one was not intended!) * makefile.am: Moved target-specific CFLAGS and LDFLAGS to global AM_* variables, to remove problem with automake requiring AM_PROGS_CC_C_O in configure.ac (!) * Version is currently at 1.0.3. 2005-09-02 Dale Mellor * makefile.am, mcron.c.template (main): Modified install-exec-hook so that a proper installation of a Vixie-compatible cron only takes place if we are root - otherwise only mcron is installed as a user-owned program. The guile modules are now installed under mcron's shared data directory, not guile's global directories. * mcron-core.scm: Removed job:advance-time, put the code inline where it was called, and changed the instance in the main loop to compute the new time based on the current-time, rather than the previous job time (this makes things behave more reasonably when a laptop awakes from suspend mode). * Bumped version to 1.0.2. 2004-05-15 Dale Mellor * Modified all auxiliary files to reflect that the package is now properly homed at www.gnu.org. * Bumped version to 1.0.1. 2003-12-11 Dale Mellor * Modified all auxiliary files to reflect that we are now a GNU package. * Bumped version to 1.0.0. 2003-12-07 Dale Mellor * configure.ac: Added switches for files and directories used by mcron: --spool-dir, --socket-file, --allow-file, --deny-file, --pid-file and --tmp-dir. All the code has been modified to use these configure options (including the source for the texinfo manual). 2003-12-05 Dale Mellor * configure.ac: Added test for guile version >= 1.6.4. * bumped version to 0.99.4. 2003-08-03 Dale Mellor * Third cut, fully functional, modular, production quality, still needs testing... * Pulled all functionality into modules, so it can be incorporated into other programs. * Bumped version to 0.99.3. 2003-07-20 Dale Mellor * Second cut, now _really_ fully functional (100% Vixie compatible), production quality code, still needs lots of testing doing... * Converted from SIGUP-/var/cron/update to select-/var/cron/socket method of communication between crontab and cron. * Added implicit job which checks every minute for updates to /etc/crontab. * Removed --enable-vixie configuration option - the Vixie programs are built and installed by default now. * Bumped version to 0.99.2. 2003-06-28 Dale Mellor * First cut, fully functional, production quality code, just needs testing... * Broken/incomplete Guile prevents vixie compatibility from working - this has been disabled by default in the configuration. * Version set at 0.99.1 ________________________________________________________________________________ Copyright (C) 2003, 2005, 2006 Dale Mellor Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification, are permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright notice and this notice are preserved. mcron-1.0.6/mcron.info0000644000175000017500000017404411407210021011546 00000000000000This is mcron.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.13 from mcron.texinfo. program for running jobs at scheduled times. Copyright (C) 2003, 2005, 2006 Dale Mellor Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License". INFO-DIR-SECTION Individual utilities START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY * mcron: (mcron). Run jobs at scheduled times. END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY  File: mcron.info, Node: Top, Next: Introduction, Prev: (dir), Up: (dir) mcron ***** This file documents the `mcron' command (Mellor's cron) for running jobs at scheduled times. * Menu: * Introduction:: Introducing mcron. * Simple examples:: How to use mcron 99.9% of the time. * Syntax:: All the possibilities for configuring cron jobs. * Invoking:: What happens when you run the mcron command. * Guile modules:: Incorporating mcron into another Guile program. * Index:: The complete index. --- The Detailed Node Listing --- Simple examples * Guile Simple Examples:: * Vixie Simple Examples:: Full available syntax * Guile Syntax:: * Extended Guile examples:: * Vixie Syntax:: Extended Guile examples * AT commands:: * Every second Sunday:: * Two hours every day:: * Missing the first appointment:: * Penultimate day of every month:: Vixie * Paul Vixie's copyright:: * Crontab file:: * Incompatibilities with old Unices:: Detailed invoking * Invoking mcron:: * Invoking cron or crond:: * Invoking crontab:: * Behaviour on laptops:: * Exit codes:: Guile modules * The core module:: The job list and execution loop. * The redirect module:: Sending output of jobs to a mail box. * The vixie-time module:: Parsing vixie-style time specifications. * The job-specifier module:: All commands for scheme configuration files. * The vixie-specification module:: Commands for reading vixie-style crontabs.  File: mcron.info, Node: Introduction, Next: Simple examples, Prev: Top, Up: Top 1 Introducing mcron ******************* The mcron program represents a complete re-think of the cron concept originally found in the Berkeley and AT&T unices, and subsequently rationalized by Paul Vixie. The original idea was to have a daemon that wakes up every minute, scans a set of files under a special directory, and determines from those files if any shell commands should be executed in this minute. The new idea is to read the required command instructions, work out which command needs to be executed next, and then sleep until the inferred time has arrived. On waking the commands are run, and the time of the next command is computed. Furthermore, the specifications are written in scheme, allowing at the same time simple command execution instructions and very much more flexible ones to be composed than the original Vixie format. This has several useful advantages over the original idea. (Changes to user crontabs are signalled directly to mcron by the crontab program; cron must still scan the /etc/crontab file once every minute, although use of this file is highly discouraged and this behaviour can be turned off). * Does not consume CPU resources when not needed. Many cron daemons only run jobs once an hour, or even just once a day. * Can easily allow for finer time-points to be specified, i.e. seconds. In principle this could be extended to microseconds, but this is not implemented. * Times can be more or less regular. For example, a job that runs every 17 hours can be specified, or a job that runs on the first Sunday of every month. * Times can be dynamic. Arbitrary Guile (scheme) code can be provided to compute the next time that a command needs to be run. This could, for example, take the system load into consideration. * Turns out to be easy to provide complete backwards compatibility with Vixie cron. * Each user looks after his own files in his own directory. He can use more than one to break up complicated cron specifications. * Each user can run his own daemon. This removes the need for suid programs to manipulate the crontabs, and eliminates many security concerns that surround all existing cron programs. * The user can obtain an advance schedule of all the jobs that are due to run. * Vixie cron is implemented in 4500 lines of C code; mcron is 2000 lines of scheme, despite the fact that it offers many more features and much more flexibility, and complete compatibility with Vixie cron. A full discussion of the design and philosophy of mcron can be found in the white paper at `http://www.gnu.org/software/mcron/design.html'.  File: mcron.info, Node: Simple examples, Next: Syntax, Prev: Introduction, Up: Top 2 Simple examples ***************** The vast majority of uses of cron are sublimely simple: run a program every hour, or every day. With this in mind the design of mcron has been to allow such simple specifications to be made easily. The examples show how to create the command descriptions, and subsequently how to run mcron to make them happen. * Menu: * Guile Simple Examples:: * Vixie Simple Examples::  File: mcron.info, Node: Guile Simple Examples, Next: Vixie Simple Examples, Prev: Simple examples, Up: Simple examples 2.1 Guile ========= You have an executable `my-program' in your home directory, which you want to run every hour. Create a file `job.guile' in directory `~/.cron' with the following contents (job '(next-hour) "my-program") then run the command `mcron'. Want the program to run fifteen minutes past the hour, every two hours? Edit the file to read (job '(next-minute-from (next-hour (range 0 24 2)) 15) "my-program") and run the command `mcron'. Or, if you are not comfortable with Scheme, you could use (and see also the next section) (job "15 */2 * * *" "my-program") and run the `mcron' command. If you want to run other jobs, you can either add more lines to this file, or you can create other files in your `.cron' directory with the `.guile' extension. Alternatively, you can use any file you want and pass it as an argument to `mcron', or even pipe the commands into the standard input.  File: mcron.info, Node: Vixie Simple Examples, Prev: Guile Simple Examples, Up: Simple examples 2.2 Vixie ========= You have an executable `my-program' in your home directory, which you want to run every hour. Create a file `job.vixie' in directory `~/.cron' with the following contents 0 * * * * my-program then run the command `mcron'. Alternatively (full compatibility with Vixie cron), set your environment variable `EDITOR' to your favorite editor, run `crontab -e', put the above line into the edit buffer, save and exit. For this to work the `cron' daemon must be already running on your system, as root.  File: mcron.info, Node: Syntax, Next: Invoking, Prev: Simple examples, Up: Top 3 Full available syntax *********************** * Menu: * Guile Syntax:: * Extended Guile examples:: * Vixie Syntax::  File: mcron.info, Node: Guile Syntax, Next: Extended Guile examples, Prev: Syntax, Up: Syntax 3.1 Guile Syntax ================ 3.1.1 Job specification ----------------------- In Guile-formatted configuration files each command that needs executing is introduced with the `job' function. This function always takes two arguments, the first a time specification, and the second a command specification. An optional third argument may contain a string to display when this job is listed in a schedule. The first argument can be a procedure, a list, or a string. If a function is supplied, it must take exactly one argument, which will be the "current" time in UNIX format, and the return value of the function must be the time in UNIX format when this action should next be run. The following functions are available to facilitate the computation: `(next-second-from time . args)' without arguments this returns the second after the current one. With the extra arguments, these form a list of seconds in the minute when the action should run, and the function will return the time of the next allowed second (which may be in the next minute of the hour). (1) Similarly to `next-second-from', there are also `next-minute-from', `next-hour-from', `next-day-from', `next-week-from', `next-month-from', `next-year-from'. Furthermore, the optional argument can be fulfilled by the function `(range start end . step)', which will provide a list of values from start to (but not including) end, with the step if given. For example `(range 0 10 2)' will yield the list `'(0 2 4 6 8)'. If the first argument to the `job' function is a list, it is taken to be program code made up of the functions `(next-second . args)', `(next-minute...)', etc, where the optional arguments can be supplied with the `(range)' function above (these functions are analogous to the ones above except that they implicitly assume the current time; it is supplied by the mcron core when the list is eval'd). If the first argument to the `job' function is a string, it is expected to be a Vixie cron-style time specification. See the section on Vixie syntax for this. The second argument to the `(job)' function can be either a string, a list, or a function. In all cases the command is executed in the user's home directory, under the user's own UID. If a string is passed, it is assumed to be shell script and is executed with the user's default shell. If a list is passed it is assumed to be scheme code and is eval'd as such. A supplied function should take exactly zero arguments, and will be called at the pertinent times. 3.1.2 Sending output as e-mail ------------------------------ When jobs are specified in a vixie-style configuration, the command is broken at a percentage sign, and the stuff that comes after this is sent into the command's standard input. Furthermore, any output from the command is mailed to the user. This functionality is provided for compatibility with Vixie cron, but it is also available to scheme configuration files. The command (with-mail-out action . user) can be used to direct output from the action (which may be a procedure, list, or string) into an e-mail to the user. In the case that the action is a string, then percentage signs are processed as per the vixie specifications, and information is piped to the shell command's standard input. 3.1.3 Setting environment variables ----------------------------------- Also for compatibility with Vixie cron, mcron has the ability to set environment variables in configuration files. To access this functionality from a scheme configuration file, use the command (append-environment-mods name value), where name is the name of an environment variable, and value is the value put to it. A value of #f will remove the variable from the environment. Note that environment modifications are accumulated as the configuration file is processed, so when a job actually runs, its environment will be modified according to the modifications specified before the job specification in the configuration file. ---------- Footnotes ---------- (1) Note that while commands can be scheduled to run at any second, it is unlikely that they will be executed then but some time shortly thereafter, depending on the load on the system and the number of jobs that mcron has to start at the same time.  File: mcron.info, Node: Extended Guile examples, Next: Vixie Syntax, Prev: Guile Syntax, Up: Syntax 3.2 Extended Guile examples =========================== While Guile gives you flexibility to do anything, and the power to represent complex requirements succinctly, things are not always as they seem. The following examples illustrate some pitfalls, and demonstrate how to code around them. * Menu: * AT commands:: * Every second Sunday:: * Two hours every day:: * Missing the first appointment:: * Penultimate day of every month::  File: mcron.info, Node: AT commands, Next: Every second Sunday, Prev: Extended Guile examples, Up: Extended Guile examples 3.2.1 Synthesizing "at" commands -------------------------------- The current implementation of mcron does not provide for an at command (a command-line program that allows the user to specify that a job runs exactly once at a certain time). This can, however, be achieved. Suppose the program `my-program' needs to be run at midnight tonight. A Guile script like the following would work (but a printed schedule, obtained with the `--schedule' option, will show superfluous entries). (job '(next-day) (lambda () (system "my-program") (kill (getppid) SIGINT)))  File: mcron.info, Node: Every second Sunday, Next: Two hours every day, Prev: AT commands, Up: Extended Guile examples 3.2.2 Every second Sunday ------------------------- To run `my-program' on the second Sunday of every month, a Guile script like the following should suffice (it is left as an exercise to the student to understand how this works!). (job (lambda (current-time) (let* ((next-month (next-month-from current-time)) (first-day (tm:wday (localtime next-month))) (second-sunday (if (eqv? first-day 0) 8 (- 14 first-day)))) (+ next-month (* 24 60 60 second-sunday)))) "my-program")  File: mcron.info, Node: Two hours every day, Next: Missing the first appointment, Prev: Every second Sunday, Up: Extended Guile examples 3.2.3 Two hours every day ------------------------- Surprisingly perhaps, the following will *not* have the desired effect. (job '(next-hour-from (next-day) '(1 2)) "my-program") Rather than running the my-program program at one o'clock and two o'clock every day, it will only run it at one o'clock. This is because each time mcron has to compute the next time to run the command, it first obtains the next day, and then finds the earliest hour in that day to run at. Thus, after running the command at one o'clock, the program first skips forwards to the next midnight (missing the two o'clock appointment), and then finds the next one o'clock schedule. The following simple command is the correct way to specify this behaviour. (job '(next-hour '(1 2)) "my-program")  File: mcron.info, Node: Missing the first appointment, Next: Penultimate day of every month, Prev: Two hours every day, Up: Extended Guile examples 3.2.4 Missing the first appointment ----------------------------------- The command (job '(next-hour-from (next-day) '(16)) "my-program") will run `my-program' every day at four o'clock in the afternoon. However, if mcron is started with this script at midday, the first time the command will run will be four o'clock tomorrow; today's appointment will be missed (one time only). The correct way to specify this requirement is simply (job '(next-hour '(16)) "my-program")  File: mcron.info, Node: Penultimate day of every month, Prev: Missing the first appointment, Up: Extended Guile examples 3.2.5 Penultimate day of every month ------------------------------------ The following will run the `my-program' program on the second-to-last day of every month. (job '(- (next-month-from (next-month)) (* 48 3600)) "my-program")  File: mcron.info, Node: Vixie Syntax, Prev: Extended Guile examples, Up: Syntax 3.3 Vixie ========= _NOTE_ that this section is definitive. If there is a difference in behaviour between the mcron program and this part of the manual, then there is a bug in the program. This section is also copied verbatim from Paul Vixie's documentation for his cron program, and his copyright notice is duly reproduced below. There are three problems with this specification. 1. It is allowed to specify days of the month in the range 0-31. What does it mean to specify day 0? Looking at the Vixie source code, it seems that if this date appears as part of a list, it has no effect. However, if it appears on its own, the effect is to say "don't run on any particular day of the month, only take the week-day specification into account." Mcron has been coded to mimic this behaviour as a special case (unmodified mcron logic implies that this date specification would cause jobs to run on the last day of the previous month). 2. Similarly to the above (but different), months of the year can be specified in the range 0-12. In the case of mcron (don't know what Vixie cron did) month 12 will cause the program to wait until January of the following year (but don't rely on this). 3. Somewhere it says that cron sets the SHELL environment variable to /bin/sh, and elsewhere it implies that the default behaviour is for the user's default shell to be used to execute commands. Mcron sets the variable and runs the command in the user's default shell, as advertised by the /etc/passwd file. * Menu: * Paul Vixie's copyright:: * Crontab file:: * Incompatibilities with old Unices::  File: mcron.info, Node: Paul Vixie's copyright, Next: Crontab file, Prev: Vixie Syntax, Up: Vixie Syntax 3.3.1 Paul Vixie's copyright ---------------------------- Copyright 1988,1990,1993,1994 by Paul Vixie All rights reserved Distribute freely, except: don't remove my name from the source or documentation (don't take credit for my work), mark your changes (don't get me blamed for your possible bugs), don't alter or remove this notice. May be sold if buildable source is provided to buyer. No warrantee of any kind, express or implied, is included with this software; use at your own risk, responsibility for damages (if any) to anyone resulting from the use of this software rests entirely with the user.  File: mcron.info, Node: Crontab file, Next: Incompatibilities with old Unices, Prev: Paul Vixie's copyright, Up: Vixie Syntax 3.3.2 Crontab files ------------------- A `crontab' file contains instructions to the `cron' daemon of the general form: "run this command at this time on this date". Each user has their own crontab, and commands in any given crontab will be executed as the user who owns the crontab. Uucp and News will usually have their own crontabs, eliminating the need for explicitly running `su' as part of a cron command. Blank lines and leading spaces and tabs are ignored. Lines whose first non-space character is a pound-sign (#) are comments, and are ignored. Note that comments are not allowed on the same line as cron commands, since they will be taken to be part of the command. Similarly, comments are not allowed on the same line as environment variable settings. An active line in a crontab will be either an environment setting or a cron command. An environment setting is of the form, name = value where the spaces around the equal-sign (=) are optional, and any subsequent non-leading spaces in `value' will be part of the value assigned to `name'. The `value' string may be placed in quotes (single or double, but matching) to preserve leading or trailing blanks. Several environment variables are set up automatically by the `cron' daemon. SHELL is set to /bin/sh, and LOGNAME and HOME are set from the /etc/passwd line of the crontab's owner. HOME and SHELL may be overridden by settings in the crontab; LOGNAME may not. (Another note: the LOGNAME variable is sometimes called USER on BSD systems... on these systems, USER will be set also.) (1) In addition to LOGNAME, HOME, and SHELL, `cron' will look at MAILTO if it has any reason to send mail as a result of running commands in "this" crontab. If MAILTO is defined (and non-empty), mail is sent to the user so named. If MAILTO is defined but empty (MAILTO=""), no mail will be sent. Otherwise mail is sent to the owner of the crontab. This option is useful if you decide on /bin/mail instead of /usr/lib/sendmail as your mailer when you install cron - /bin/mail doesn't do aliasing, and UUCP usually doesn't read its mail. The format of a cron command is very much the V7 standard, with a number of upward-compatible extensions. Each line has five time and date fields, followed by a user name if this is the system crontab file, followed by a command. Commands are executed by `cron' when the minute, hour, and month of year fields match the current time, *and* when at least one of the two day fields (day of month, or day of week) match the current time (see "Note" below). `cron' examines cron entries once every minute. The time and date fields are: Field Allowed values ---- ------------- minute 0-59 hour 0-23 day of month 0-31 month 0-12 (or names, see below) day of week 0-7 (0 or 7 is Sun, or use names) A field may be an asterisk (*), which always stands for "first-last". Ranges of numbers are allowed. Ranges are two numbers separated with a hyphen. The specified range is inclusive. For example, 8-11 for an "hours" entry specifies execution at hours 8, 9, 10 and 11. Lists are allowed. A list is a set of numbers (or ranges) separated by commas. Examples: "1,2,5,9", "0-4,8-12". Step values can be used in conjunction with ranges. Following a range with "/" specifies skips of the number's value through the range. For example, "0-23/2" can be used in the hours field to specify command execution every other hour (the alternative in the V7 standard is "0,2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18,20,22"). Steps are also permitted after an asterisk, so if you want to say "every two hours", just use "*/2". Names can also be used for the "month" and "day of week" fields. Use the first three letters of the particular day or month (case doesn't matter). Ranges or lists of names are not allowed. (2) The "sixth" field (the rest of the line) specifies the command to be run. The entire command portion of the line, up to a newline or % character, will be executed by /bin/sh or by the shell specified in the SHELL variable of the cronfile. Percent-signs (%) in the command, unless escaped with backslash (\\), will be changed into newline characters, and all data after the first % will be sent to the command as standard input. Note: The day of a command's execution can be specified by two fields - day of month, and day of week. If both fields are restricted (ie, aren't *), the command will be run when _either_ field matches the current time. For example, "30 4 1,15 * 5" would cause a command to be run at 4:30 am on the 1st and 15th of each month, plus every Friday. EXAMPLE CRON FILE # use /bin/sh to run commands, no matter what /etc/passwd says SHELL=/bin/sh # mail any output to `paul', no matter whose crontab this is MAILTO=paul # # run five minutes after midnight, every day 5 0 * * * $HOME/bin/daily.job >> $HOME/tmp/out 2>&1 # run at 2:15pm on the first of every month -- output mailed to paul 15 14 1 * * $HOME/bin/monthly # run at 10 pm on weekdays, annoy Joe 0 22 * * 1-5 mail -s "It's 10pm" joe%Joe,%%Where are your kids?% 23 0-23/2 * * * echo "run 23 minutes after midn, 2am, 4am ..., everyday" 5 4 * * sun echo "run at 5 after 4 every sunday" ---------- Footnotes ---------- (1) mcron has not been ported to BSD, so these notes are not relevant. (2) Mcron allows any alphabetic characters after a name, so full names of days or months are also valid.  File: mcron.info, Node: Incompatibilities with old Unices, Prev: Crontab file, Up: Vixie Syntax 3.3.3 Extensions and incompatibilities -------------------------------------- This section lists differences between Paul Vixie's cron and the olde-worlde BSD and AT&T programs, for the benefit of system administrators and users who are upgrading all the way. * When specifying day of week, both day 0 and day 7 will be considered Sunday. BSD and AT&T seem to disagree about this. * Lists and ranges are allowed to co-exist in the same field. "1-3,7-9" would be rejected by AT&T or BSD cron - they want to see "1-3" or "7,8,9" ONLY. * Ranges can include "steps", so "1-9/2" is the same as "1,3,5,7,9". * Names of months or days of the week can be specified by name. * Environment variables can be set in the crontab. In BSD or AT&T, the environment handed to child processes is basically the one from /etc/rc. * Command output is mailed to the crontab owner (BSD can't do this), can be mailed to a person other than the crontab owner (SysV can't do this), or the feature can be turned off and no mail will be sent at all (SysV can't do this either).  File: mcron.info, Node: Invoking, Next: Guile modules, Prev: Syntax, Up: Top 4 Detailed invoking ******************* The program adopts one of three different personalities depending on the name used to invoke it. In a standard installation, the program is installed in the system under the names mcron, cron and crontab (installed SUID). The recommended way to invoke the program is via the mcron personality described in the next section. The program can also be run as cron by root, and by the SUID program crontab by individual users to gain backwards compatibility with Vixie cron. However, due to the fact that this daemon process is shared by, and under control of, all the users of the system it is possible (though very unlikely) that it may become unusable, hence the recommendation to use the mcron personality. Furthermore, the Vixie personality is considered deprecated by this author (it offers not a single advantage over the mcron personality, and bloats the code by a factor of three). It is unlikely that this personality will ever actually go away, but the program may in future be split into two distinct parts, and new developments will only take place in the part which implements the mcron personality. * Menu: * Invoking mcron:: * Invoking cron or crond:: * Invoking crontab:: * Behaviour on laptops:: * Exit codes::  File: mcron.info, Node: Invoking mcron, Next: Invoking cron or crond, Prev: Invoking, Up: Invoking 4.1 Invoking mcron ================== Mcron should be run by the user who wants to schedule his jobs. It may be made a background job using the facilities of the shell. The basic command is `mcron [OPTION ...] [file ...]' which has the effect of reading all the configuration files specified (subject to the options) and then waiting until it is time to execute some command. If no files are given on the command line, then mcron will look in the user's ~/.cron directory. In either case, files which end in the extension .vixie or .vix will be assumed to contain Vixie-style crontabs, and files ending .guile or .gle will be assumed to contain scheme code and will be executed as such; ANY OTHER FILES WILL BE IGNORED - specify a file name of "-" and then pipe the files into the standard input if you really want to read them, possibly using the `stdin' option to specify the type of file. The program accepts the following options. `-s [count]' `--schedule[=count]' With this option specified no commands are run. Instead, the program computes the times the commands would be run and prints the information to the screen, and then immediately exits. The count, if supplied, indicates the number of commands to display. The default value is 8. `-d' `--daemon' With this option the program will detach itself from the controlling terminal and run as a daemon process. `-i (vixie|guile)' `--stdin=(vixie|guile)' This option is used to indicate whether the configuration information being passed on the standard input is in Vixie format or Guile format. Guile is the default. `-v' `--version' This option causes a message to be printed on the standard output with information about the version and copyright for the current program. `-h' `--help' This causes a short but complete usage message to be displayed on standard output.  File: mcron.info, Node: Invoking cron or crond, Next: Invoking crontab, Prev: Invoking mcron, Up: Invoking 4.2 Invoking cron or crond ========================== NOTE THAT THIS SECTION ONLY APPLIES IF THE `cron' or `crond', and `crontab' PROGRAMS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED BY THE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR. If the program runs by the name of `cron' or `crond', then it will read all the files in `/var/cron/tabs' (which should only be readable by root) and the file `/etc/crontab', and then detaches itself from the terminal to live forever as a daemon process. Additionally, it creates a UNIX socket at `/var/cron/socket', and listens for messages sent to that socket consisting of a user name whose crontabs have been changed. In this case, the program will re-read that user's crontab. This is for correct functioning with the crontab program. Further, if the `--noetc' option was not used, a job is scheduled to run every minute to check if /etc/crontab has been modified recently. If so, this file will also be re-read. The options which may be used with this program are as follows. `-v' `--version' This option causes a message to be printed on the standard output with information about the version and copyright for the current program. `-h' `--help' This causes a short but complete usage message to be displayed on standard output. `-s [count]' `--schedule[=count]' With this option specified no commands are run. Instead, the program computes the times the commands would be run and prints the information to the screen, and then immediately exits. The count, if supplied, indicates the number of commands to display. The default value is 8. `-n' `--noetc' This tells cron not to add a job to the system which wakes up every minute to check for modifications to `/etc/crontab'. It is recommended that this option be used (and further that the `/etc/crontab' file be taken off the system altogether!)  File: mcron.info, Node: Invoking crontab, Next: Behaviour on laptops, Prev: Invoking cron or crond, Up: Invoking 4.3 Invoking crontab ==================== This program is run by individual users to inspect or modify their crontab files. If a change is made to the file, then the root daemon process will be given a kick, and will immediately read the new configuration. A warning will be issued to standard output if it appears that a cron daemon is not running. The command is used as `crontab [-u user] file' or `crontab [-u user] ( -l | -e | -r )' Only the root user can use the -u option, to specify the manipulation of another user's crontab file. In the first instance, the entire crontab file of the user is replaced with the contents of the specified file, or standard input if the file is "-". In the latter case, the program behaves according to which of the (mutually exclusive) options was given (note that the long options are an mcron extension). `-l' `--list' Print the user's crontab file to the standard output, and exit. `-r' `--remove' Delete the user's crontab file, and exit. `-e' `--edit' Using the editor specified in the user's VISUAL or EDITOR environment variables, allow the user to edit his crontab. Once the user exits the editor, the crontab is checked for parseability, and if it is okay then it is installed as the user's new crontab and the daemon is notified that a change has taken place, so that the new file will become immediately effective.  File: mcron.info, Node: Behaviour on laptops, Next: Exit codes, Prev: Invoking crontab, Up: Invoking 4.4 Behaviour on laptops ======================== While mcron has not been designed to work anachronistically, the behaviour of mcron when a laptop emerges from a suspended state is well defined, and the following description explains what happens in this situation. When a laptop awakes from a suspended state, all jobs which would have run while the laptop was suspended will run exactly once immediately (and simultaneously) when the laptop awakes, and then the next time that those jobs run will be computed based on the time the laptop was awoken. Any jobs which would not have run during the suspense period will be unaffected, and will still run at their proper times.  File: mcron.info, Node: Exit codes, Prev: Behaviour on laptops, Up: Invoking 4.5 Exit codes ============== The following are the status codes returned to the operating system when the program terminates. 0 No problems. 1 An attempt has been made to start cron but there is already a /var/run/cron.pid file. If there really is no other cron daemon running (this does not include invokations of mcron) then you should remove this file before attempting to run cron. 2 In parsing a guile configuration file, a `job' command has been seen but the second argument is neither a procedure, list or string. This argument is the job's action, and needs to be specified in one of these forms. 3 In parsing a guile configuration file, a `job' command has been seen but the first argument is neither a procedure, list or string. This argument is the job's next-time specification, and needs to be specified in one of these forms. 4 An attempt to run cron has been made by a user who does not have permission to access the crontabs in /var/cron/tabs. These files should be readable only by root, and the cron daemon must be run as root. 5 An attempt to run mcron has been made, but there are no jobs to schedule! 6 The system administrator has blocked this user from using crontab with the files /var/cron/allow and /var/cron/deny. 7 Crontab has been run with more than one of the arguments `-l', `-r', `-e'. These are mutually exclusive options. 8 Crontab has been run with the -u option by a user other than root. Only root is allowed to use this option. 9 An invalid vixie-style time specification has been supplied. 10 An invalid vixie-style job specification has been supplied. 11 A bad line has been seen in /etc/crontab. 12 The last component of the name of the program was not one of `mcron', `cron', `crond' or `crontab'. 13 Either the ~/.cron directory does not exist, or there is a problem reading the files there. 15 Crontab has been run without any arguments at all. There is no default behaviour in this case. 16 Cron has been run by a user other than root.  File: mcron.info, Node: Guile modules, Next: Index, Prev: Invoking, Up: Top 5 Guile modules *************** Some of the key parts of mcron are implemented as modules so they can be incorporated into other Guile programs, or even into C-sourced programs if they are linked against libguile. It may be, for example, that a program needs to perform house-keeping functions at certain times of the day, in which case it can spawn (either fork or thread) a sub-process which uses a built-in mcron. Another example may be a program which must sleep until some non-absolute time specified on the Gregorian calendar (the first day of next week, for example). Finally, it may be the wish of the user to provide a program with the functionality of mcron plus a bit extra. The core module maintains mcron's internal job lists, and provides the main wait-run-wait loop that is mcron's main function. It also introduces the facilities for accumulating a set of environment modifiers, which take effect when jobs run. * Menu: * The core module:: The job list and execution loop. * The redirect module:: Sending output of jobs to a mail box. * The vixie-time module:: Parsing vixie-style time specifications. * The job-specifier module:: All commands for scheme configuration files. * The vixie-specification module:: Commands for reading vixie-style crontabs.  File: mcron.info, Node: The core module, Next: The redirect module, Prev: Guile modules, Up: Guile modules 5.1 The core module =================== This module may be used by including `(use-modules (mcron core))' in a program. The main functions are `add-job' and `run-job-loop', which allow a program to create a list of job specifications to run, and then to initiate the wait-run-wait loop firing the jobs off at the requisite times. However, before they are introduced two functions which manipulate the environment that takes effect when a job runs are defined. The environment is a set of name-value pairs which is built up incrementally. Each time the `add-job' function is called, the environment modifiers that have been accumulated up to that point are stored with the new job specification, and when the job actually runs these name-value pairs are used to modify the run-time environment in effect. -- Scheme procedure: append-environment-mods name value When a job is run make sure the environment variable NAME has the value VALUE. -- Scheme procedure: clear-environment-mods This procedure causes all the environment modifiers that have been specified so far to be forgotten. -- Scheme procedure: add-job time-proc action displayable configuration-time configuration-user This procedure adds a job specification to the list of all jobs to run. TIME-PROC should be a procedure taking exactly one argument which will be a UNIX time. This procedure must compute the next time that the job should run, and return the result. ACTION should be a procedure taking no arguments, and contains the instructions that actually get executed whenever the job is scheduled to run. DISPLAYABLE should be a string, and is only for the use of humans; it can be anything which identifies or simply gives a clue as to the purpose or function of this job. CONFIGURATION-TIME is the time from which the first invokation of this job should be computed. Finally, CONFIGURATION-USER should be the passwd entry for the user under whose personality the job is to run. -- Scheme procedure: run-job-loop . fd-list This procedure returns only under exceptional circumstances, but usually loops forever waiting for the next time to arrive when a job needs to run, running that job, recomputing the next run time, and then waiting again. However, the wait can be interrupted by data becoming available for reading on one of the file descriptors in the fd-list, if supplied. Only in this case will the procedure return to the calling program, which may then make modifications to the job list before calling the `run-job-loop' procedure again to resume execution of the mcron core. -- Scheme procedure: remove-user-jobs user The argument USER should be a string naming a user (his login name), or an integer UID, or an object representing the user's passwd entry. All jobs on the current job list that are scheduled to be run under this personality are removed from the job list. -- Scheme procedure: get-schedule count The argument COUNT should be an integer value giving the number of time-points in the future to report that jobs will run as. Note that this procedure is disruptive; if `run-job-loop' is called after this procedure, the first job to run will be the one after the last job that was reported in the schedule report. The report itself is returned to the calling program as a string.  File: mcron.info, Node: The redirect module, Next: The vixie-time module, Prev: The core module, Up: Guile modules 5.2 The redirect module ======================= This module is introduced to a program with the command `(use-modules (mcron redirect))'. This module provides the `with-mail-out' function, described fully in *note Guile Syntax::.  File: mcron.info, Node: The vixie-time module, Next: The job-specifier module, Prev: The redirect module, Up: Guile modules 5.3 The vixie-time module ========================= This module is introduced to a program by `(use-modules (mcron vixie-time))'. This module provides a single method for converting a vixie-style time specification into a procedure which can be used as the `next-time-function' to the core `add-job' procedure, or to the `job-specifier' `job' procedure. See *note Vixie Syntax:: for full details of the allowed format for the time string. -- Scheme procedure: parse-vixie-time time-string The single argument TIME-STRING should be a string containing a vixie-style time specification, and the return value is the required procedure.  File: mcron.info, Node: The job-specifier module, Next: The vixie-specification module, Prev: The vixie-time module, Up: Guile modules 5.4 The job-specifier module ============================ This module is introduced to a program by `(use-modules (mcron job-specifier))'. This module provides all the functions available to user's Guile configuration files, namely `range', `next-year-from', `next-year', `next-month-from', `next-month', `next-day-from', `next-day', `next-hour-from', `next-hour', `next-minute-from', `next-minute', `next-second-from', `next-second', and last but not least, `job'. See *note Guile Syntax:: for full details. Once this module is loaded, a scheme configuration file can be used to put jobs onto the job list simply by `load'ing the file.  File: mcron.info, Node: The vixie-specification module, Prev: The job-specifier module, Up: Guile modules 5.5 The vixie-specification module ================================== To use this module, put the command `(use-modules (mcron vixie-specification))' into your program. This module exports a couple of functions for adding jobs to the internal job list according to a Vixie-style crontab file. -- Scheme procedure: read-vixie-port port . parse-line This procedure reads a crontab from the given port, and adds jobs to the job list accordingly, taking care of environment specifications and comments which may appear in such a file. PARSE-LINE should not normally be used, except that if you are parsing a (deprecated) `/etc/crontab' file with a slightly modified syntax, you may pass the value PARSE-SYSTEM-VIXIE-LINE as the optional argument. -- Scheme procedure: read-vixie-file name . parse-line This procedure attempts to open the named file, and if it fails will return silently. Otherwise, the behaviour is identical to `read-vixie-port' above. Once this module has been declared in a program, a crontab file can be used to augment the current job list with a call to `read-vixie-file'.  File: mcron.info, Node: Index, Prev: Guile modules, Up: Top Index ***** [index] * Menu: * % character on vixie-style commands: Crontab file. (line 85) * -d option: Invoking mcron. (line 31) * -daemon option: Invoking mcron. (line 31) * -e option: Invoking crontab. (line 38) * -h option <1>: Invoking cron or crond. (line 30) * -h option: Invoking mcron. (line 48) * -help option <1>: Invoking cron or crond. (line 30) * -help option: Invoking mcron. (line 48) * -i option: Invoking mcron. (line 36) * -l option: Invoking crontab. (line 29) * -n option: Invoking cron or crond. (line 44) * -noetc option: Invoking cron or crond. (line 44) * -r option: Invoking crontab. (line 33) * -s option <1>: Invoking cron or crond. (line 37) * -s option: Invoking mcron. (line 24) * -schedule option <1>: Invoking cron or crond. (line 37) * -schedule option: Invoking mcron. (line 24) * -stdin option: Invoking mcron. (line 36) * -v option <1>: Invoking cron or crond. (line 24) * -v option: Invoking mcron. (line 42) * -version option <1>: Invoking cron or crond. (line 24) * -version option: Invoking mcron. (line 42) * /etc/passwd <1>: Crontab file. (line 30) * /etc/passwd: Vixie Syntax. (line 29) * /var/cron/socket: Invoking cron or crond. (line 6) * /var/cron/tabs: Invoking cron or crond. (line 6) * 0'th day of month: Vixie Syntax. (line 14) * 13th month of year: Vixie Syntax. (line 24) * add-job: The core module. (line 31) * advantages of mcron: Introduction. (line 25) * append-environment-mods <1>: The core module. (line 22) * append-environment-mods: Guile Syntax. (line 74) * at command: AT commands. (line 6) * BSD: Crontab file. (line 35) * clear-environment-mods: The core module. (line 26) * command execution: Guile Syntax. (line 47) * command line, mcron: Invoking mcron. (line 6) * comments, vixie-style: Crontab file. (line 13) * compatibility: Vixie Simple Examples. (line 14) * compatibility, vixie: Vixie Syntax. (line 6) * configuring from standard input: Invoking mcron. (line 36) * copyright, Paul Vixie's: Paul Vixie's copyright. (line 6) * core module: The core module. (line 6) * creating a crontab: Invoking crontab. (line 38) * cron program: Invoking. (line 6) * cron, invokation: Invoking cron or crond. (line 6) * crond program: Invoking. (line 6) * crond, invokation: Invoking cron or crond. (line 6) * crontab file: Crontab file. (line 6) * crontab program: Invoking. (line 6) * crontab, invoking: Invoking crontab. (line 6) * daemon option: Invoking mcron. (line 31) * day 7: Incompatibilities with old Unices. (line 10) * day specification, vixie-style: Crontab file. (line 93) * deleting a crontab: Invoking crontab. (line 33) * deprecated, vixie personality: Invoking. (line 19) * edit option: Invoking crontab. (line 38) * editing a crontab: Invoking crontab. (line 38) * email from guile script: Guile Syntax. (line 58) * email output: Guile Syntax. (line 58) * environment: The core module. (line 14) * environment setting, vixie-style: Crontab file. (line 23) * environment variables in scheme: Guile Syntax. (line 74) * environment variables, HOME: Crontab file. (line 30) * environment variables, LOGNAME: Crontab file. (line 30) * environment variables, MAILTO: Crontab file. (line 38) * environment variables, SHELL: Crontab file. (line 30) * environment variables, shell: Vixie Syntax. (line 29) * environment variables, USER: Crontab file. (line 35) * error conditions: Exit codes. (line 6) * errors: Exit codes. (line 6) * example, run a program every hour: Guile Simple Examples. (line 6) * examples: Vixie Simple Examples. (line 6) * examples, every second sunday: Every second Sunday. (line 6) * examples, extended guile: Extended Guile examples. (line 6) * examples, guile: Guile Simple Examples. (line 6) * examples, missing the first appointment: Missing the first appointment. (line 6) * examples, penultimate day of every month: Penultimate day of every month. (line 6) * examples, two hours every day: Two hours every day. (line 6) * examples, vixie: Vixie Simple Examples. (line 6) * execution: Guile Syntax. (line 47) * exit codes: Exit codes. (line 6) * extended guile examples: Extended Guile examples. (line 6) * extensions, vixie over old Unices: Incompatibilities with old Unices. (line 6) * fields, vixie time specification: Crontab file. (line 56) * file descriptors: The core module. (line 46) * get-schedule: The core module. (line 63) * guile examples: Guile Simple Examples. (line 6) * guile module: The core module. (line 6) * guile syntax: Guile Syntax. (line 9) * HOME environment variable: Crontab file. (line 30) * incompatibilities with old Unices: Incompatibilities with old Unices. (line 6) * interrupting the mcron loop: The core module. (line 46) * introduction: Introduction. (line 6) * invoking: Invoking. (line 6) * invoking cron: Invoking cron or crond. (line 6) * invoking crond: Invoking cron or crond. (line 6) * invoking crontab: Invoking crontab. (line 6) * invoking mcron: Invoking mcron. (line 6) * job: Guile Syntax. (line 9) * job execution: Guile Syntax. (line 47) * job-specifier module: The job-specifier module. (line 6) * laptops: Behaviour on laptops. (line 6) * list option, crontab: Invoking crontab. (line 29) * list time specification: Guile Syntax. (line 36) * listing a crontab: Invoking crontab. (line 29) * lists in vixie time specifications: Crontab file. (line 70) * LOGNAME environment variable: Crontab file. (line 30) * MAILTO environment variable: Crontab file. (line 38) * mcron: Introduction. (line 6) * mcron arguments: Invoking mcron. (line 6) * mcron command line: Invoking mcron. (line 6) * mcron options: Invoking mcron. (line 6) * mcron program: Invoking. (line 6) * modules, core: The core module. (line 6) * modules, job-specifier: The job-specifier module. (line 6) * modules, redirect: The redirect module. (line 6) * modules, vixie-specification: The vixie-specification module. (line 6) * modules, vixie-time: The vixie-time module. (line 6) * names in vixie-style time specifications: Crontab file. (line 81) * next-day: Guile Syntax. (line 36) * next-day-from: Guile Syntax. (line 27) * next-hour: Guile Syntax. (line 36) * next-hour-from: Guile Syntax. (line 27) * next-minute: Guile Syntax. (line 36) * next-minute-from: Guile Syntax. (line 27) * next-month: Guile Syntax. (line 36) * next-month-from: Guile Syntax. (line 27) * next-second: Guile Syntax. (line 36) * next-second-from: Guile Syntax. (line 21) * next-week: Guile Syntax. (line 36) * next-week-from: Guile Syntax. (line 27) * next-year: Guile Syntax. (line 36) * next-year-from: Guile Syntax. (line 27) * options, -d: Invoking mcron. (line 31) * options, -e: Invoking crontab. (line 38) * options, -edit: Invoking crontab. (line 38) * options, -h <1>: Invoking cron or crond. (line 30) * options, -h: Invoking mcron. (line 48) * options, -help <1>: Invoking cron or crond. (line 30) * options, -help: Invoking mcron. (line 48) * options, -i: Invoking mcron. (line 36) * options, -l: Invoking crontab. (line 29) * options, -list: Invoking crontab. (line 29) * options, -n: Invoking cron or crond. (line 44) * options, -noetc: Invoking cron or crond. (line 44) * options, -r: Invoking crontab. (line 33) * options, -remove: Invoking crontab. (line 33) * options, -s <1>: Invoking cron or crond. (line 37) * options, -s: Invoking mcron. (line 24) * options, -v <1>: Invoking cron or crond. (line 24) * options, -v: Invoking mcron. (line 42) * options, daemon: Invoking mcron. (line 31) * options, schedule <1>: Invoking cron or crond. (line 37) * options, schedule: Invoking mcron. (line 24) * options, stdin: Invoking mcron. (line 36) * options, version <1>: Invoking cron or crond. (line 24) * options, version: Invoking mcron. (line 42) * parse-vixie-time: The vixie-time module. (line 16) * Paul Vixie's copyright: Paul Vixie's copyright. (line 6) * personality: Invoking. (line 6) * pitfalls, missing the first appointment: Missing the first appointment. (line 6) * pitfalls, two hours every day: Two hours every day. (line 6) * power suspend: Behaviour on laptops. (line 6) * printout of jobs schedule <1>: Invoking cron or crond. (line 37) * printout of jobs schedule: Invoking mcron. (line 24) * procedure time specification: Guile Syntax. (line 15) * range: Guile Syntax. (line 31) * ranges in vixie time specifications: Crontab file. (line 66) * read-vixie-file: The vixie-specification module. (line 24) * read-vixie-port: The vixie-specification module. (line 13) * redirect module: The redirect module. (line 6) * remove option: Invoking crontab. (line 33) * remove-user-jobs: The core module. (line 57) * removing a crontab: Invoking crontab. (line 33) * run-job-loop: The core module. (line 46) * schedule of jobs: The core module. (line 63) * schedule of jobs, listing <1>: Invoking cron or crond. (line 37) * schedule of jobs, listing: Invoking mcron. (line 24) * setting environment variables: Guile Syntax. (line 74) * shell: Vixie Syntax. (line 29) * SHELL environment variable: Crontab file. (line 30) * standard input to commands: Guile Syntax. (line 58) * standard input, configuring from: Invoking mcron. (line 36) * standard input, vixie-style: Crontab file. (line 85) * stdin option: Invoking mcron. (line 36) * steps in vixie time specifications: Crontab file. (line 73) * string time specification: Guile Syntax. (line 43) * syntax, guile: Guile Syntax. (line 9) * syntax, vixie: Vixie Syntax. (line 6) * thirteenth month of year: Vixie Syntax. (line 24) * time specification: Guile Syntax. (line 43) * time specification, list: Guile Syntax. (line 36) * time specification, procedure: Guile Syntax. (line 15) * time specification, string: Guile Syntax. (line 43) * time specification, vixie-style: Guile Syntax. (line 43) * USER environment variable: Crontab file. (line 35) * viewing a crontab: Invoking crontab. (line 29) * vixie compatibility <1>: Vixie Syntax. (line 6) * vixie compatibility: Vixie Simple Examples. (line 14) * vixie crontab file: Crontab file. (line 6) * vixie definition: Vixie Syntax. (line 6) * vixie examples: Vixie Simple Examples. (line 6) * vixie syntax: Vixie Syntax. (line 6) * vixie time specification fields: Crontab file. (line 56) * vixie-specification module: The vixie-specification module. (line 6) * vixie-style day specification: Crontab file. (line 93) * vixie-style time specification: Guile Syntax. (line 43) * vixie-time module: The vixie-time module. (line 6) * with-mail-out: Guile Syntax. (line 58) * zero'th day of month: Vixie Syntax. (line 14)  Tag Table: Node: Top699 Node: Introduction2252 Node: Simple examples5052 Node: Guile Simple Examples5555 Node: Vixie Simple Examples6658 Node: Syntax7294 Node: Guile Syntax7501 Ref: Guile Syntax-Footnote-111659 Node: Extended Guile examples11913 Node: AT commands12458 Node: Every second Sunday13194 Node: Two hours every day13952 Node: Missing the first appointment14899 Node: Penultimate day of every month15568 Node: Vixie Syntax15944 Node: Paul Vixie's copyright17640 Node: Crontab file18407 Ref: Crontab file-Footnote-123945 Ref: Crontab file-Footnote-224020 Node: Incompatibilities with old Unices24129 Node: Invoking25350 Node: Invoking mcron26714 Node: Invoking cron or crond28744 Node: Invoking crontab30746 Node: Behaviour on laptops32309 Node: Exit codes33100 Node: Guile modules35365 Node: The core module36762 Node: The redirect module40372 Node: The vixie-time module40730 Node: The job-specifier module41518 Node: The vixie-specification module42310 Node: Index43582  End Tag Table mcron-1.0.6/COPYING0000644000175000017500000010451311404766201010615 00000000000000 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3, 29 June 2007 Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0. Definitions. "This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and "recipients" may be individuals or organizations. To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work. A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program. To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices" to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. 1. Source Code. The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. "Object code" means any non-source form of a work. A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A "Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work. 2. Basic Permissions. All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. 3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. 4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. 5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date. b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to "keep intact all notices". c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so. A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate. 6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. 7. Additional Terms. "Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further restrictions" within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. 8. Termination. You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. 9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. 10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. 11. Patents. A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version". A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To "grant" such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. "Knowingly relying" means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. 12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. 13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. 14. Revised Versions of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. 15. Disclaimer of Warranty. THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. Limitation of Liability. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. Copyright (C) This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see . Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Copyright (C) This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box". You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see . The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read .